Ir4570 Service Manual

Service Manual
iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series
Jan 31 2005
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and
repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be
information in this manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information
as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will
issue a new edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied,
reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol
Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.
Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical
and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams,
the arrow
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol ,
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the
delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to
indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in
"DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the
operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from
sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other
purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant
Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1Introduction
1.1 System Construction.......................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.1Overview of the System with a Delivery Accessory................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.2Overview of System Construction (output accessories).............................................................................. 1- 1
1.1.3Delivery Accessory System Configuration 1 .............................................................................................. 1- 1
1.1.4Output Accessories System Configuration 1............................................................................................... 1- 3
1.1.6Output Accessories System Configuration 2............................................................................................... 1- 7
1.1.8Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration ................................................................... 1- 9
1.1.9Input/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration .................................................................... 1- 11
1.1.10Reader Heater System Configuration...................................................................................................... 1- 13
1.1.11Cassette Heater System Configuration 1................................................................................................. 1- 13
1.1.12Cassette Heater System Configuration 2................................................................................................. 1- 14
1.1.13Side Deck Heater System Configuration................................................................................................. 1- 15
1.1.14Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration ...................................................................... 1- 17
1.1.15List of Print Transmission Optional Functions ...................................................................................... 1- 18
1.1.16Printing/Transmission Accessories System Configuration ..................................................................... 1- 19
1.1.17Functions of the Printing/Transmission Functions.................................................................................. 1- 20
1.2 Product Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.2.1 Names of Parts .......................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.2.1.1 Names of Parts................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.2.1.2 External View.................................................................................................................................... 1- 23
1.2.1.3 Cross-Section..................................................................................................................................... 1- 25
1.2.2 Using the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 1- 28
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch ........................................................................................................... 1- 28
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ...................................................................................... 1- 30
1.2.2.3 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch .............................................................. 1- 31
1.2.2.4 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 1- 33
1.2.2.5 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 1- 34
1.2.3 User Mode Items....................................................................................................................................... 1- 35
1.2.3.1 Common Settings .............................................................................................................................. 1- 35
1.2.3.2 Common Settings .............................................................................................................................. 1- 39
1.2.3.3 Setting the Time ................................................................................................................................ 1- 43
1.2.3.4 Setting the Timer ............................................................................................................................... 1- 44
1.2.3.5 Adjustments and Cleaning................................................................................................................. 1- 44
1.2.3.6 Adjustment and Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 1- 45
1.2.3.7 Report Output .................................................................................................................................... 1- 45
1.2.3.8 Printing Out a Report......................................................................................................................... 1- 46
1.2.3.9 System Control Settings .................................................................................................................... 1- 47
1.2.3.10 System Control Settings .................................................................................................................. 1- 50
1.2.3.11 Copy Settings ............................................................................................................................... 1- 51
1.2.3.12 Transmission/Reception Settings ............................................................................................... 1- 52
Contents
1.2.3.13 Transmission/Reception Settings..................................................................................................... 1- 54

1.2.3.14 Box Settings..................................................................................................................................... 1- 56
1.2.3.15 Box Settings..................................................................................................................................... 1- 57
1.2.3.16 Printer Settings................................................................................................................................. 1- 57
1.2.3.17 Address Book Settings..................................................................................................................... 1- 58
1.2.4 Maintenance by the User........................................................................................................................... 1- 61
1.2.4.1 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................. 1- 61
1.2.4.2 Inspection........................................................................................................................................... 1- 61
1.2.5 Safety......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 63
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light ................................................................................................................... 1- 63
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations ............................................................................................................................ 1- 63
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit..................................................................................................................... 1- 64
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner .................................................................................................................................. 1- 65
1.2.6 Product Specifications............................................................................................................................... 1- 65
1.2.6.1 Product Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 1- 65
1.2.7 Function List ............................................................................................................................................. 1- 68
1.2.7.1 Printing Speed.................................................................................................................................... 1- 68
1.2.7.2 Printing Speed.................................................................................................................................... 1- 69
1.2.7.3 Types of Paper ................................................................................................................................... 1- 71
1.2.7.4 Types of Paper ................................................................................................................................... 1- 72
Chapter 2Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.1Selecting the Site of Installation ................................................................................................................. 2- 1
2.1.2Before Starting the Work (230V) ................................................................................................................ 2- 3
2.2 Unpacking and Installation ................................................................................................................................ 2- 8
2.2.1Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials.................................................................................... 2- 8
2.2.2Installing the Toner Bottle ........................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.2.3Installing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................ 2- 10
2.2.4Securing the Copier Main Unit.................................................................................................................. 2- 14
2.2.5Connecting the Cable................................................................................................................................. 2- 15
2.2.6Stirring Toner............................................................................................................................................. 2- 15
2.2.7Setting the Cassettes .................................................................................................................................. 2- 15
2.2.8APVC Correction of the Drum .................................................................................................................. 2- 16
2.2.9Adjusting the Image Position..................................................................................................................... 2- 17
2.2.10Attaching Other Parts .............................................................................................................................. 2- 20
2.2.11If Not Connected to a Network................................................................................................................ 2- 21
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network........................................................................................................ 2- 23
2.3.1Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 2- 23
2.3.2Using the PING Function .......................................................................................................................... 2- 23
2.3.3Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address ....................................................................................... 2- 23
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network .......................................................................................................................... 2- 25
2.4.1Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 2- 25
2.4.2Making a Check Using a Loopback Address ............................................................................................ 2- 25
2.4.3Making a Check Using a Local Host Address........................................................................................... 2- 25
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations..................................................................................................................... 2- 26
2.5.1Checking the Image Quality and Operation .............................................................................................. 2- 26
2.6 Installing the Card Reader ............................................................................................................................... 2- 27
Contents
2.6.1Points to Note ............................................................................................................................................ 2- 27

2.6.2Checking the Contents............................................................................................................................... 2- 27
2.6.3Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................ 2- 28
2.6.4Installation in a NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Environment ....................................................................... 2- 32
2.7 Installing the NE Controller ............................................................................................................................ 2- 33
2.7.1Installing the NE Controller-A1 ................................................................................................................ 2- 33
Chapter 3Basic Operation

3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.1Functional Construction .............................................................................................................................. 3- 1
3.1.2Major PCB Wiring diagram ........................................................................................................................ 3- 2
3.2 Basic Sequence.................................................................................................................................................. 3- 5
3.2.1Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On ................................................................................................. 3- 5
Chapter 4Main Controller

4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.1Construction and Mechanisms .................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.2Construction and Functions......................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry ............................................................................................................ 4- 4
4.2.1Main Controller PCB................................................................................................................................... 4- 4
4.2.2Main Controller PCB................................................................................................................................... 4- 5
4.2.3HDD ............................................................................................................................................................ 4- 7
4.2.4HDD (optional)............................................................................................................................................ 4- 9
4.3 Start-Up Sequence........................................................................................................................................... 4- 12
4.3.1Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 4- 12
4.3.2Start-Up Sequence ..................................................................................................................................... 4- 12
4.4 Shut-Down Sequence ...................................................................................................................................... 4- 15
4.4.1Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 4- 15
4.4.2Overview (w/ HDD) .................................................................................................................................. 4- 15
4.4.3Flow of Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 4- 15
4.4.4Flow of Operation (w/ HDD) .................................................................................................................... 4- 15
4.5 Image Processing............................................................................................................................................. 4- 17
4.5.1Overview of the Image Flow..................................................................................................................... 4- 17
4.5.2Construction of the Image Processing Module ......................................................................................... 4- 17
4.5.3Construction of the Image Processing Module ......................................................................................... 4- 18
4.5.4Reader Unit Input Image Processing......................................................................................................... 4- 19
4.5.5Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block ...................................................................................................... 4- 20
4.5.6Compression/Expansion/Edit Block.......................................................................................................... 4- 21
4.5.7Printer unit Output Image Processing ....................................................................................................... 4- 21
4.6 Flow of Image Data ......................................................................................................................................... 4- 23
4.6.1Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions .................................................................................. 4- 23
4.6.2Flow of Image Data for the Copy Function .............................................................................................. 4- 23
4.6.3Flow of Image Data for the Box Function ................................................................................................ 4- 24
4.6.4Flow of Image Data for the Box Function ................................................................................................ 4- 25
4.6.5Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function............................................................................................. 4- 25
4.6.6Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function............................................................................................. 4- 26
4.6.7Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission.......................................................................................... 4- 27
Contents
4.6.8Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission Function ........................................................................... 4- 28

4.6.9Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function ................................................................................ 4- 29
4.6.10Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function .............................................................................. 4- 30
4.6.11Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function .............................................................................................. 4- 31
4.6.12Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function .............................................................................................. 4- 32
4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4- 33
4.7.1 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................ 4- 33
4.7.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover.................................................................................................................. 4- 33
4.7.1.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................. 4- 33
4.7.2 SDRAM..................................................................................................................................................... 4- 34
4.7.2.1 Removing the Face Cover.................................................................................................................. 4- 34
4.7.2.2 Removing the SDRAM...................................................................................................................... 4- 34
4.7.3 Boot ROM ................................................................................................................................................. 4- 35
4.7.3.2 Removing the Boot ROM .................................................................................................................. 4- 35
4.7.4 HDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 35
4.7.4.2 Removing the Face Cover (optional)................................................................................................. 4- 36
4.7.4.3 Removing the Counter PCB .............................................................................................................. 4- 36
4.7.4.4 Removing the Counter PCB (optional).............................................................................................. 4- 37
4.7.4.5 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 4- 37
4.7.4.6 Removing the HDD (optional) .......................................................................................................... 4- 37
Chapter 5Original Exposure System

5.1 Construction....................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.1Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.2Major Components ...................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.3Construction of the Control System ............................................................................................................ 5- 4
5.1.4Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................ 5- 5
5.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 7
5.2.1Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On ................................................................................................. 5- 7
5.2.2Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode; 1 original)................ 5- 7
5.2.3Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode; 1 original )............... 5- 8
5.3 Various Control ............................................................................................................................................... 5- 10
5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System...................................................................................................... 5- 10
5.3.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 5- 10
5.3.1.2 Controlling the Reader Motor............................................................................................................ 5- 10
5.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS)...................................................................................................................... 5- 12
5.3.2.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 5- 12
5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor ............................................................................. 5- 13
5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction ............................................................................................................................. 5- 14
5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction................................................................. 5- 14
5.3.3.2 Varying the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction ..................................................................... 5- 14
5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals ................................................................................................................. 5- 16
5.3.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 5- 16
5.3.4.2 Outline of Size Identification............................................................................................................. 5- 17
5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control ................................................................................................................................... 5- 19
5.3.5.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 5- 19
Contents
5.3.6 Image Processing ...................................................................................................................................... 5- 22

5.3.6.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 5- 22
5.3.6.2 CCD Drive......................................................................................................................................... 5- 23
5.3.6.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output.............................................................. 5- 23
5.3.6.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output ................................................................................................. 5- 24
5.3.6.5 Shading Correction (outline) ............................................................................................................. 5- 24
5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 5- 24
5.3.6.7 Shading Correction............................................................................................................................ 5- 24
5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................... 5- 26
5.4.1 Copyboard glass........................................................................................................................................ 5- 26
5.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass........................................................................................................ 5- 26
5.4.1.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass ................................................................................................... 5- 26
5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................. 5- 27
5.4.2.1 Before Replacing the Reader Controller PCB................................................................................... 5- 27
5.4.2.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover..................................................................................................... 5- 27
5.4.2.3 Removing the rear cover of the machine........................................................................................... 5- 27
5.4.2.4 Removing the flexible cable cover .................................................................................................... 5- 28
5.4.2.6 Removing the Reader Controller PCB .............................................................................................. 5- 29
5.4.2.7 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or After Initializing the RAM..................................... 5- 31
5.4.3 Scanner Motor........................................................................................................................................... 5- 32
5.4.3.2 Removing the Scanner Motor............................................................................................................ 5- 32
5.4.4 Contact sensor ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 33
5.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover.................................................................................................... 5- 33
5.4.4.4 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ...................................................................................... 5- 35
5.4.4.5 After Replacement of the CIS ........................................................................................................... 5- 36
5.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor ...................................................................................................... 5- 36
5.4.5.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (front/rear) .................................................. 5- 37
5.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 5- 37
5.4.6.3 Removing the Contract Sensor Home Position Sensor ..................................................................... 5- 39
5.4.7 Original Size Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 5- 39
5.4.7.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor .................................................................................................. 5- 41
5.4.8 Reader Heater (option).............................................................................................................................. 5- 42
5.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (right) ................................................................................................. 5- 43
5.4.8.4 Removing the Reader Heater (left).................................................................................................... 5- 44
Chapter 6Laser Exposure

6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
Contents
6.1.1Specifications, Control Mechanism, and Functions .................................................................................... 6- 1

6.1.3Construction of the Control System ............................................................................................................ 6- 2
6.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 6- 6
6.2.1Basic Sequence ........................................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.3 Various Controls................................................................................................................................................ 6- 7
6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing .................................................................................................... 6- 7
6.3.1.1 Turning On and off the Laser Light..................................................................................................... 6- 7
6.3.1.2 Main Scanning Synchronous Control .................................................................................................. 6- 8
6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light...................................................................................................... 6- 9
6.3.2.1 APC Control ........................................................................................................................................ 6- 9
6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor........................................................................................................ 6- 10
6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ................................................................................................ 6- 10
6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter .................................................................................................................... 6- 10
6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter............................................................................................................. 6- 10
6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit .................................................................................................................................... 6- 12
6.4.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ........................................................................................................ 6- 12
6.4.1.2 Removing the Left Cover .................................................................................................................. 6- 12
6.4.1.3 Removing the Laser Unit................................................................................................................... 6- 12
Chapter 7Image Formation

7.1 Construction....................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.1Specifications of the Image Formation System ........................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.2Major Components of the Image Formation System................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2 Image Formation Process .................................................................................................................................. 7- 4
7.2.1Image Formation Process (outline).............................................................................................................. 7- 4
7.2.2Image Formation Process (image formation) .............................................................................................. 7- 5
7.3 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 7- 6
7.3.1Sequence of Operation (initial rotation) ...................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.3.2Sequence of Operation (initial rotation) ...................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.3.3Sequence of Operation (copying) ................................................................................................................ 7- 7
7.3.4Sequence of Operation (copying) ................................................................................................................ 7- 8
7.3.5Sequence of Operation (last rotation) .......................................................................................................... 7- 8
7.3.6Sequence of Operation (last rotation) .......................................................................................................... 7- 9
7.4 Image Stabilization Control............................................................................................................................. 7- 10
7.4.1Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.4.2APVC Control ........................................................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.4.3ATVC Control ........................................................................................................................................... 7- 11
7.5 Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 7- 12
7.5.1 Charging Mechanism ................................................................................................................................ 7- 12
7.5.1.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias ............................................................................................. 7- 12
7.5.1.2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism................................................................................. 7- 12
7.6 Drum Cleaner Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 7- 14
7.6.1Photosensitive Drum Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 7- 14
7.7 Developing Unit............................................................................................................................................... 7- 15
7.7.1Controlling the Developing Bias ............................................................................................................... 7- 15
7.8 Toner Container ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 16
Contents
7.8.1Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 7- 16
7.8.2Route of Toner Supply .............................................................................................................................. 7- 17
7.8.3Controlling the Drive of the Toner Cartridge............................................................................................ 7- 18
7.8.4Toner Supply Control ................................................................................................................................ 7- 19
7.8.5Recovery Sequence ................................................................................................................................... 7- 19
7.8.6Toner Level Detection............................................................................................................................... 7- 20
7.9 Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................................................... 7- 21
7.9.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit...................................................................................................................... 7- 21
7.9.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 21
7.9.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias.................................................................................................................... 7- 21
7.9.2.1 Transfer Roller Bias Control ............................................................................................................. 7- 21
7.9.3 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 22
7.9.3.1 Transfer Roller Cleaning Mechanism ............................................................................................... 7- 22
7.9.4 Separation Mechanism.............................................................................................................................. 7- 22
7.9.4.1 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias .............................................................................................. 7- 22
7.10 Transfer Mechanism...................................................................................................................................... 7- 23
7.10.1 Transfer Guide Bias ................................................................................................................................ 7- 23
7.10.1.1 Transfer Guide Bias Control ........................................................................................................... 7- 23
7.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning ...................................................................................................................... 7- 24
7.11.1Outline ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 24
7.11.2Collection of Waste Toner ...................................................................................................................... 7- 24
7.11.3Checking the Waste Toner Box............................................................................................................... 7- 24
7.12 Parts Replacement Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 7- 26
7.12.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp ................................................................................................................................ 7- 26
7.12.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ...................................................................................................... 7- 26
7.12.1.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case .................................................................................................... 7- 26
7.12.1.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge........................................................................................................ 7- 26
7.12.1.4 Removing the Drum Unit ................................................................................................................ 7- 27
7.12.1.5 Removing the Developing Assembly.............................................................................................. 7- 28
7.12.1.6 Removing the Upper Tray ............................................................................................................... 7- 30
7.12.1.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover ............................................................................................. 7- 30
7.12.1.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp ................................................................................................. 7- 30
7.12.2 Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 31
7.12.3 Hopper Assembly.................................................................................................................................... 7- 33
7.12.3.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge........................................................................................................ 7- 34
7.12.3.5 Removing the Developing Assembly.............................................................................................. 7- 35
7.12.3.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp ................................................................................................. 7- 37
7.12.3.9 Removing the Left Cover ................................................................................................................ 7- 38
7.12.3.10 Removing the Laser Unit............................................................................................................... 7- 38
7.12.3.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly................................................................................................... 7- 39
7.12.4 Sub Hopper ............................................................................................................................................. 7- 40
Contents

7.12.4.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case..................................................................................................... 7- 40
7.12.4.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ........................................................................................................ 7- 41
7.12.4.5 Removing the Developing Assembly .............................................................................................. 7- 43
7.12.4.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp.................................................................................................. 7- 45
7.12.4.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor ......................................................................................... 7- 47
7.12.4.13 Removing the Sub Hopper............................................................................................................. 7- 48
7.12.5 Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 7- 49
7.12.6 Developing Cylinder ............................................................................................................................... 7- 52
7.12.6.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder ................................................................................................ 7- 52
7.12.7 Transfer Charging Roller ........................................................................................................................ 7- 54
7.12.7.1 Removing the Transfer Roller ......................................................................................................... 7- 54
7.12.8 Waste Toner Box..................................................................................................................................... 7- 55
7.12.9 Toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 7- 56
7.12.9.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ........................................................................................................ 7- 57
7.12.9.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp.................................................................................................. 7- 60
7.12.9.12 Removing the Toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................ 7- 63
7.12.10 Toner Feedscrew Motor ....................................................................................................................... 7- 63
7.12.10.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit .................................................................................................... 7- 63
7.12.10.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case................................................................................................... 7- 64
7.12.10.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ...................................................................................................... 7- 64
7.12.10.4 Removing the Drum Unit .............................................................................................................. 7- 65
7.12.10.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ............................................................................................ 7- 66
7.12.10.6 Removing the Upper Tray ............................................................................................................. 7- 67
7.12.10.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover ........................................................................................... 7- 68
7.12.10.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp................................................................................................ 7- 68
7.12.10.9 Removing the Left Cover .............................................................................................................. 7- 68
7.12.10.10 Removing the Laser Unit............................................................................................................. 7- 69
7.12.10.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly................................................................................................. 7- 70
Contents
7.12.10.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor....................................................................................... 7- 71

7.12.11 Static Charge Eliminator....................................................................................................................... 7- 71
7.12.11.1 Removing the Static Eliminator .................................................................................................... 7- 71
Chapter 8Pickup/Feeding System

8.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 8- 1
8.1.1Specifications, Controls, and Functions ...................................................................................................... 8- 1
8.1.2Specifications, Controls, and Functions ...................................................................................................... 8- 2
8.1.3Division into Blocks .................................................................................................................................... 8- 3
8.1.4Division into Blocks .................................................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.1.5Arrangement of Rollers ............................................................................................................................... 8- 5
8.1.6Arrangement of Rollers ............................................................................................................................... 8- 7
8.1.7Diagram of Paper Paths (printer on its own) ............................................................................................... 8- 8
8.1.8Paper Path (printer unit on its own)............................................................................................................. 8- 9
8.1.9Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ copy tray ) .................................................................................................... 8- 10
8.1.10Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ 3 Way Unit-A1 /copy tray) ........................................................................ 8- 11
8.1.11Paper path (w/ expansion output kit, output tray) ................................................................................... 8- 12
8.1.12Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-S1/copy tray) ............................................................................... 8- 13
8.1.13Paper Path (w/ Finer-S1, output tray)...................................................................................................... 8- 14
8.1.14Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4)............................................................... 8- 15
8.1.15Arrangement of Sensors .......................................................................................................................... 8- 16
8.1.16Arrangement of Sensors .......................................................................................................................... 8- 17
8.1.17Route of Drive ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 19
8.1.18Route of Drive ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 19
8.2 Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................................ 8- 22
8.2.1Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 22
8.2.2Increase in Speed....................................................................................................................................... 8- 22
8.2.3Acceleration Intervals................................................................................................................................ 8- 25
8.2.4Increase in Speed....................................................................................................................................... 8- 27
8.3 Detecting Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 8- 30
8.3.1 Delay Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 8- 30
8.3.1.1 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly ........................................................................... 8- 30
8.3.1.2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly..................................................................................... 8- 30
8.3.2 Stationary Jams ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 31
8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam ................................................................................................................... 8- 31
8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On.............................................................................................................. 8- 32
8.3.3 Other Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 8- 32
8.3.3.1 Door Open Jam.................................................................................................................................. 8- 32
8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 8- 33
8.4.1Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 8- 33
8.4.2Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 34
8.4.3Identifying the Paper Size ......................................................................................................................... 8- 34
8.4.4Setting Up the Universal Cassette ............................................................................................................. 8- 36
8.4.5Paper Level Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 8- 37
8.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit................................................................................................................................ 8- 41
8.5.1Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 8- 41
8.5.2Basic Sequence of Operation .................................................................................................................... 8- 42
8.5.3Identifying the Paper Size ......................................................................................................................... 8- 42
Contents
8.5.4Paper Retaining Mechanism ...................................................................................................................... 8- 43

8.6 Registration Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 8- 45
8.6.1Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 45
8.6.2Checking Horizontal Registration ............................................................................................................. 8- 45
8.7 Duplex Feeding Unit........................................................................................................................................ 8- 47
8.7.1Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 47
8.7.2Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.7.3Sequence of Image Formation ................................................................................................................... 8- 49
8.7.4Sequence of Image Formation ................................................................................................................... 8- 51
8.7.5Flow of Paper (w/o/ delivery option)......................................................................................................... 8- 52
8.7.6Flow of Paper (w/ delivery option)............................................................................................................ 8- 58
8.7.7Flow of Paper ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 64
8.8.1 Pick-up Unit 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 71
8.8.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ...................................................................................................... 8- 71
8.8.1.2 Removing the Right Door.................................................................................................................. 8- 71
8.8.1.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)........................................................................................... 8- 73
8.8.1.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1..................................................................................................... 8- 73
8.8.2 Pick-up Unit 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 74
8.8.3 Pickup Roller............................................................................................................................................. 8- 75
8.8.3.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller............................................................. 8- 75
8.8.4 Sensor Mount ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 75
8.8.4.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate ............................................................................................... 8- 78
8.8.4.8 Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate ................................................................................................ 8- 79
8.8.5 Cassette Pick-up Motor 1 .......................................................................................................................... 8- 80
8.8.5.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base ..................................................................................................... 8- 81
8.8.5.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 1 ............................................................................................ 8- 81
8.8.6 Cassette Pick-up Motor 2 .......................................................................................................................... 8- 81
8.8.6.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base ..................................................................................................... 8- 82
8.8.6.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 2 ............................................................................................ 8- 83
8.8.7 Cassette Size Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 8- 83
Contents
8.8.7.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 .................................................................................................... 8- 86

8.8.7.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor .................................................................................................. 8- 86
8.8.8 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 8- 87
8.8.8.2 Removing the Right Door ................................................................................................................. 8- 88
8.8.8.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) .......................................................................................... 8- 90
8.8.8.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate............................................................................................... 8- 91
8.8.8.8 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ...................................................................................... 8- 92
8.8.9 Cassette Paper Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 8- 92
8.8.9.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) .......................................................................................... 8- 94
8.8.9.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate............................................................................................... 8- 95
8.8.9.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor ................................................................................................ 8- 96
8.8.10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B)......................................................................................................... 8- 96
8.8.10.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) .................................................................................................... 8- 96
8.8.10.2 Removing the Right Door ............................................................................................................... 8- 97
8.8.10.3 Removing the Right Door ............................................................................................................... 8- 98
8.8.10.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ........................................................................................ 8- 99
8.8.10.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 .................................................................................................. 8- 99
8.8.10.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 ................................................................................................ 8- 100
8.8.10.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate........................................................................................... 8- 100
8.8.10.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B)........................................................................ 8- 101
8.8.11 Slide Resistor ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 101
8.8.11.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) .................................................................................................. 8- 101
8.8.11.2 Removing the Right Door ............................................................................................................. 8- 101
8.8.11.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit .................................................................................................. 8- 103
8.8.11.5 Removing the Manual Tray Unit................................................................................................... 8- 104
8.8.11.6 Removing the Slide Resistor ......................................................................................................... 8- 105
8.8.12 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ...................................................................................................................... 8- 105
8.8.12.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ...................................................................................... 8- 107
8.8.12.7 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid....................................................................................... 8- 108
8.8.13 Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB........................................................................................................... 8- 109
Contents
8.8.13.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)....................................................................................... 8- 111

8.8.13.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1................................................................................................. 8- 111
8.8.13.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB............................................................................ 8- 112
8.8.14 Manual Tray Assembly ......................................................................................................................... 8- 112
8.8.14.2 Removing the Right Door.............................................................................................................. 8- 113
8.8.14.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit................................................................................................... 8- 115
8.8.14.5 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Assembly ................................................................................. 8- 116
8.8.15 Manual Feed Unit.................................................................................................................................. 8- 116
8.8.16 Manual Pickup Roller............................................................................................................................ 8- 119
8.8.16.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller.................................................................................... 8- 123
8.8.17 Manual Pick-up Clutch.......................................................................................................................... 8- 123
8.8.17.4 Removing the Rear Cover.............................................................................................................. 8- 125
8.8.17.5 Removing the Main Power Switch ................................................................................................ 8- 126
8.8.17.6 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch ................................................................................... 8- 126
8.8.18 Manual Separation Pad.......................................................................................................................... 8- 127
8.8.18.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller.................................................................................... 8- 130
8.8.18.6 Removing the Manual Feed Separation pad .................................................................................. 8- 131
8.8.19 Registration Clutch................................................................................................................................ 8- 131
8.8.19.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly ............................................................................................ 8- 131
8.8.19.4 Removing the Registration Clutch................................................................................................. 8- 133
8.8.20 Feeding Roller ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 133
8.8.20.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller......................................................... 8- 133
8.8.21 Vertical Path Roller ............................................................................................................................... 8- 133
8.8.21.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)....................................................................................... 8- 136
Contents
8.8.21.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate........................................................................................... 8- 137

8.8.21.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller................................................................................................ 8- 138
8.8.22 Duplex Feed Roller 2 ............................................................................................................................ 8- 138
8.8.22.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Roller 2 ............................................................................................. 8- 140
8.8.23 Duplex Feed Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 8- 141
8.8.23.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor ............................................................................................... 8- 143
8.8.24 Duplex Feed Clutch .............................................................................................................................. 8- 144
8.8.24.1 Removing the Rear Cover ............................................................................................................. 8- 144
8.8.24.2 Removing the Duplex Feed Clutch ............................................................................................... 8- 144
8.8.25 Delivery Assembly 1............................................................................................................................. 8- 145
8.8.25.3 Removing the Delivery Tray ......................................................................................................... 8- 145
8.8.25.6 Removing the Extension Delivery Kit .......................................................................................... 8- 147
8.8.25.7 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1.............................................................................................. 8- 148
8.8.26 Fixing/ Delivery Drive Assembly ......................................................................................................... 8- 149
8.8.26.3 Removing the Delivery Tray ......................................................................................................... 8- 149
8.8.26.6 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1.............................................................................................. 8- 151
8.8.26.7 Removing the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................. 8- 152
8.8.26.8 Removing the Fixing/Delivery Drive Assembly........................................................................... 8- 153
8.8.27 Separation Roller .................................................................................................................................. 8- 154
8.8.27.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller ........................................................ 8- 154
Chapter 9Fixing System

9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.1Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................................................................................. 9- 1
9.2 Basic Sequence.................................................................................................................................................. 9- 3
9.2.1Power-On Sequence .................................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.2.2Down Sequence ........................................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.3 Various Control Mechanisms............................................................................................................................ 9- 4
9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film .................................................................................................. 9- 4
9.3.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed in Response to Low Temperature................................................ 9- 4
9.3.1.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed ...................................................................................................... 9- 4
9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature................................................................................................... 9- 5
9.3.2.1 Controlling the Power Supply in Response to Low Temperature....................................................... 9- 5
Contents
9.3.2.2 Controlling the Feeding in Response to Low Temperature................................................................. 9- 5

9.3.2.3 Controlling the Power Supply at Start-Up........................................................................................... 9- 5
9.3.2.4 Copying Temperature Control ............................................................................................................. 9- 6
9.3.2.5 Changing the Fixing Film Control Temperature ................................................................................. 9- 6
9.3.2.6 Temperature Control in Response to Automatic Double-Sided Copy ................................................ 9- 6
9.3.2.7 Temperature Control in Response to Change of Paper Size................................................................ 9- 7
9.3.3 Cleaning ...................................................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.3.3.1 Fixing Film Cleaning ........................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.3.4 Detecting the Passage of Paper ................................................................................................................... 9- 8
9.3.4.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper............................................................................................................ 9- 8
9.4 Protective Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 9- 9
9.4.1Protective Functions .................................................................................................................................... 9- 9
9.4.2Detecting an Error...................................................................................................................................... 9- 10
9.5.1 Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 12
9.5.1.4 Removing the Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................. 9- 14
9.5.2 Pressure Roller .......................................................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.5.2.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit ........................................................................................ 9- 15
9.5.2.2 Removing the Grounding Plate.......................................................................................................... 9- 17
9.5.2.3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover ...................................................................................................... 9- 18
9.5.2.4 Removing the Left Side Plate ............................................................................................................ 9- 18
9.5.2.5 Releasing the Locking Plate .............................................................................................................. 9- 19
9.5.2.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit......................................................................................................... 9- 20
9.5.2.7 Removing the Inlet Guide.................................................................................................................. 9- 21
9.5.2.8 Removing the Pressure Roller ........................................................................................................... 9- 21
9.5.3 Cleaning Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 9- 23
9.5.3.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit ........................................................................................... 9- 23
9.5.3.2 Removing the Cleaning Roller .......................................................................................................... 9- 25
9.5.4 Fixing Film ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 25
9.5.5 Internal Delivery Sensor............................................................................................................................ 9- 32
9.5.5.7 Removing the Inside Delivery Sensor ............................................................................................... 9- 38
9.5.6 Fixing Film Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 9- 38
Contents
9.5.6.3 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor..................................................................................................... 9- 41
Chapter 10External and Controls

10.1 Control Panel................................................................................................................................................. 10- 1
10.1.1Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 1
10.1.2Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 1
10.1.3LCD Indication Processing ..................................................................................................................... 10- 2
10.1.4LCD Indication Processing ..................................................................................................................... 10- 2
10.1.5Adjustment of the LCD Contact.............................................................................................................. 10- 2
10.1.6Adjustment of the LCD Contact.............................................................................................................. 10- 2
10.1.7Functions of the Control Panel CPU ....................................................................................................... 10- 3
10.1.8Functions of the Control Panel CPU ....................................................................................................... 10- 3
10.2 Counters......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 4
10.2.1Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 4
10.2.2Timing of Increasing the Count............................................................................................................... 10- 5
10.3 Fans ............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 7
10.3.1Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 7
10.3.22-Speed Control....................................................................................................................................... 10- 7
10.3.3Sequence of Operation ............................................................................................................................ 10- 8
10.4 Power Supply System.................................................................................................................................... 10- 9
10.4.1 Power Supply .......................................................................................................................................... 10- 9
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit ......................................................................................... 10- 9
10.4.1.2 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit ......................................................................................... 10- 10
10.4.1.3 Power Supply Route in the Reader Unit........................................................................................ 10- 12
10.4.1.4 Timing of Supply to the Reader Unit ............................................................................................ 10- 12
10.4.1.5 Connections to Various Accessories ............................................................................................. 10- 13
10.4.1.6 Connections to Various Accessories ............................................................................................. 10- 14
10.4.2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB ........................................................................................ 10- 15
10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB ................................................................... 10- 15
10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB...................................................................... 10- 15
10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Accessories Power Supply PCB ................................................................... 10- 16
10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the All-Night Power Supply PCB....................................................................... 10- 16
10.4.3 Protection Function ............................................................................................................................... 10- 16
10.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms.................................................................................................................. 10- 16
10.4.4 Backup Battery...................................................................................................................................... 10- 17
10.4.4.1 Backup Battery .............................................................................................................................. 10- 17
10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function ....................................................................................................................... 10- 17
10.4.5.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 10- 17
10.4.5.2 Machine as Supplied with Power .................................................................................................. 10- 18
10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 10- 20
10.5.1 Main Drive Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 10- 20
10.5.2 Power Supply Unit ................................................................................................................................ 10- 21
10.5.2.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower) ................................................................................................. 10- 22
10.5.2.3 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB ............................................................................ 10- 22
Contents
10.5.2.4 Removing the Main Power Supply................................................................................................ 10- 23

10.5.3 Control Panel......................................................................................................................................... 10- 24
10.5.3.1 Removing the Control Panel.......................................................................................................... 10- 24
10.5.4 Control Panel LCD Unit........................................................................................................................ 10- 26
10.5.4.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover ...................................................................................... 10- 27
10.5.4.3 Removing the Control Panel Inside Frame.................................................................................... 10- 27
10.5.4.4 Removing the Control Panel LCD................................................................................................. 10- 27
10.5.4.7 Removing the Control Panel Frame............................................................................................... 10- 29
10.5.4.8 Removing the Control Panel LCD PCB ........................................................................................ 10- 30
10.5.5 DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 10- 30
10.5.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................ 10- 30
10.5.6 Control Panel Inverter PCB................................................................................................................... 10- 31
10.5.6.3 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB.................................................................................... 10- 32
10.5.6.7 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB.................................................................................... 10- 35
10.5.7 Control Panel Key Switch PCB ............................................................................................................ 10- 35
10.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB ............................................................................. 10- 36
10.5.7.8 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB ............................................................................. 10- 39
10.5.8 Control Panel CPU PCB ....................................................................................................................... 10- 39
10.5.8.3 Removing the Controller Panel CPU PCB .................................................................................... 10- 41
10.5.8.6 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB ........................................................................................ 10- 42
10.5.9 All Night Power Supply PCB................................................................................................................ 10- 42
10.5.9.2 Removing the All-Night Power Supply PCB ................................................................................ 10- 43
10.5.10 Controller Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................................ 10- 43
10.5.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover............................................................................................................ 10- 43
10.5.10.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower)................................................................................................ 10- 44
10.5.10.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) ................................................................................................. 10- 44
10.5.10.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB........................................................................... 10- 44
10.5.10.5 Removing the Controller Power Supply PCB ............................................................................. 10- 45
Contents
10.5.11 Option Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................. 10- 45

10.5.11.1 Removing the Rear Cover ........................................................................................................... 10- 45
10.5.11.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower) ............................................................................................... 10- 46
10.5.11.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear)................................................................................................. 10- 46
10.5.11.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB .......................................................................... 10- 46
10.5.12 High-Voltage PCB .............................................................................................................................. 10- 47
10.5.12.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit .................................................................................................. 10- 47
10.5.12.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ................................................................................................ 10- 47
10.5.12.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge.................................................................................................... 10- 48
10.5.12.4 Removing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................ 10- 49
10.5.12.5 Removing the Developing Assembly.......................................................................................... 10- 50
10.5.12.6 Removing the Upper Tray ........................................................................................................... 10- 51
10.5.12.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover ......................................................................................... 10- 51
10.5.12.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp ............................................................................................. 10- 52
10.5.12.9 Removing the Left Cover ............................................................................................................ 10- 52
10.5.12.10 Removing the Laser Unit........................................................................................................... 10- 52
10.5.12.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly............................................................................................... 10- 53
10.5.12.12 Removing the Right Cover (rear) .............................................................................................. 10- 54
10.5.12.13 Removing the Right Door ......................................................................................................... 10- 55
10.5.12.16 Removing the Fixing Unit ......................................................................................................... 10- 58
10.5.12.17 Removing the Gear.................................................................................................................... 10- 59
10.5.12.18 Removing the High-Voltage PCB ............................................................................................. 10- 60
10.5.13 Exhaust Fan......................................................................................................................................... 10- 60
10.5.13.1 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan.............................................................................................. 10- 60
10.5.13.2 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan.............................................................................................. 10- 61
10.5.14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly.......................................................................................................... 10- 62
10.5.14.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly .......................................................................................... 10- 62
10.5.14.3 Removing the Main Drive Motor ................................................................................................ 10- 63
10.5.14.4 Removing the Main Drive Motor ................................................................................................ 10- 64
10.5.15 Fixing Driver Motor............................................................................................................................ 10- 64
10.5.15.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB .............................................................................................. 10- 65
10.5.15.3 Removing the Fixing Drive Motor .............................................................................................. 10- 66
10.5.16 Right Door .......................................................................................................................................... 10- 66
10.5.16.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ................................................................................................ 10- 66
10.5.16.2 Removing the Right Door ........................................................................................................... 10- 66
10.5.16.3 Removing the Right Door ........................................................................................................... 10- 67
10.5.17 Circuit Braker...................................................................................................................................... 10- 68
10.5.17.2 Removing the Circuit Breaker..................................................................................................... 10- 69
Chapter 11MEAP
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 MEAP Counter .............................................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform ............................................................................................................. 11-4
Contents
Chapter 12Maintenance and Inspection

12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ........................................................................................................................... 12- 1
12.1.1Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 12- 1
12.1.2Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 12- 1
12.1.3Printer Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 12- 1
12.2 Durables and Consumables............................................................................................................................ 12- 2
12.2.1Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 12- 2
12.2.2Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 12- 2
12.2.3Printer Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 12- 2
12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ........................................................................................................... 12- 5
12.3.1Scheduled Servicing for the Reader Unit ................................................................................................ 12- 5
12.3.2Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit................................................................................................. 12- 5
12.3.3Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures.................................................................................................... 12- 8
12.3.4Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing...................................................................................... 12- 10
12.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................................................................... 12- 12
12.4.1Cleaning the Transfer/Feed Guide......................................................................................................... 12- 12
12.4.2Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-Blocking Glass, and Fixing Inlet Guide . 1212
12.4.3Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator .............................................................................................. 12- 21
12.4.4Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator .............................................................................................. 12- 29
Chapter 13Standards and Adjustments

13.1 Image Adjustments ........................................................................................................................................ 13- 1
13.1.1Standards for Image Position................................................................................................................... 13- 1
13.1.2Adjusting the Image Position................................................................................................................... 13- 1
13.1.3Cassette .................................................................................................................................................... 13- 3
13.1.4Manual Feed Tray.................................................................................................................................... 13- 5
13.1.5Side Paper Deck....................................................................................................................................... 13- 5
13.2 Scanning System............................................................................................................................................ 13- 7
13.2.1After Replacement of the CIS.................................................................................................................. 13- 7
13.2.2After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the RAM..................................................... 13- 7
13.3 Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................................. 13- 9
13.3.1After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit .................................................................................................. 13- 9
13.4 Image Formation System ............................................................................................................................. 13- 10
13.4.1After Replacing the Developing Unit .................................................................................................... 13- 10
13.4.2After Replacing the Drum Unit (APVC correction).............................................................................. 13- 10
13.5 Electrical Components................................................................................................................................. 13- 11
13.5.1After Replacing the HDD ...................................................................................................................... 13- 11
13.5.2After Replacing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................... 13- 11
13.5.3After Replacing the Main Controller PCB ............................................................................................ 13- 11
13.5.4After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ......................................................................................... 13- 12
13.6 Pickup/Feeding System ............................................................................................................................... 13- 14
13.6.1Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Cassette ................................................... 13- 14
13.6.2Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit ............................................ 13- 16
13.6.3Adjusting the Manual Feed Pickup Horizontal Registration .................................................................13- 16
13.6.4Registering the Paper Width Basic Value ............................................................................................. 13- 17
Contents
Chapter 14Correcting Faulty Images

14.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.1Site Environment ..................................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.2Checking the Paper.................................................................................................................................. 14- 1
14.1.3Checking the Placement of Paper............................................................................................................ 14- 1
14.1.4Checking the Durables ............................................................................................................................ 14- 1
14.1.5Checking the Periodically Serviced Items............................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.6Checking the Units and Functional Systems ........................................................................................... 14- 2
14.1.7Others ...................................................................................................................................................... 14- 3
14.2 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................. 14- 4
14.2.1 Image Faults............................................................................................................................................ 14- 4
14.2.1.1 Uneven Density ............................................................................................................................... 14- 4
14.2.1.2 Partially Blank/Streaked.................................................................................................................. 14- 6
14.2.1.3 Smudged/Streaked......................................................................................................................... 14- 11
14.2.1.4 Ghost/Memory............................................................................................................................... 14- 15
14.2.2 Malfunction........................................................................................................................................... 14- 16
14.2.2.1 No Power ....................................................................................................................................... 14- 16
14.2.2.2 Noise.............................................................................................................................................. 14- 17
14.2.3 Transmission/fax-related....................................................................................................................... 14- 17
14.2.3.1 Transmission Problem ................................................................................................................... 14- 17
14.2.4 Specifications-related FAQ................................................................................................................... 14- 18
14.2.4.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications................................................................................................. 14- 18
14.2.4.2 FAQ on Send Specifications ......................................................................................................... 14- 21
14.2.4.3 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications..................................................................................................... 14- 21
14.3 Outline of Electrical Components ............................................................................................................... 14- 23
14.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid..................................................................................................................................... 14- 23
14.3.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids.................................................................................................................. 14- 23
14.3.2 Motor..................................................................................................................................................... 14- 24
14.3.2.1 Motors............................................................................................................................................ 14- 24
14.3.3 Fan......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 27
14.3.3.1 Fans................................................................................................................................................ 14- 27
14.3.4 Sensor.................................................................................................................................................... 14- 28
14.3.4.1 Sensors........................................................................................................................................... 14- 28
14.3.5 Switch ................................................................................................................................................... 14- 33
14.3.5.1 Switches......................................................................................................................................... 14- 33
14.3.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others .................................................................................................................. 14- 34
14.3.6.1 Lamps, Heaters, and Others........................................................................................................... 14- 34
14.3.6.2 Lamps, Heaters, and Others........................................................................................................... 14- 37
14.3.7 PCBs ..................................................................................................................................................... 14- 40
14.3.7.1 PCBs .............................................................................................................................................. 14- 40
14.3.7.2 PCBs .............................................................................................................................................. 14- 43
14.3.8 Variable Resistors(VR), Light-Emitting Diodes(LED),and Check Pins by PCB................................. 14- 46
14.3.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB.................................. 14- 46
14.3.8.2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker ................................................................................... 14- 47
14.3.8.3 All-Night Power Supply PCB ....................................................................................................... 14- 47
Chapter 15Self Diagnosis
Contents
15.1 Error Code Table ........................................................................................................................................... 15- 1

15.1.1Error Code ............................................................................................................................................... 15- 1
15.2 Error Code Details ......................................................................................................................................... 15- 4
15.2.1Error Code Details ................................................................................................................................... 15- 4
15.2.2E602 in Detaill ....................................................................................................................................... 15- 15
15.3 Error Code (SEND) ..................................................................................................................................... 15- 30
15.3.1Results of Self-Diagnosis ...................................................................................................................... 15- 30
15.3.2Error Codes ............................................................................................................................................ 15- 32
15.4 Jam Code ..................................................................................................................................................... 15- 41
15.4.1Jam Cover (printer unit)......................................................................................................................... 15- 41
15.4.2Jam Code (finisher-related) ................................................................................................................... 15- 42
15.4.3Jam Code (ADF-related)........................................................................................................................ 15- 43
15.5 Alarm Code.................................................................................................................................................. 15- 46
15.5.1Alarm Code............................................................................................................................................ 15- 46
15.5.2Alarm Code............................................................................................................................................ 15- 46
15.6 Finisher/Saddle Finisher Error Codes.......................................................................................................... 15- 47
15.6.1Error Code in Detail (finisher, puncher)................................................................................................ 15- 47
15.6.2Error Code Detail (finisher, puncher) .................................................................................................... 15- 72
15.7 DADF Error Codes ...................................................................................................................................... 15- 82
15.7.1Error Code in Detail (DF)...................................................................................................................... 15- 82
Chapter 16Service Mode

16.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 16- 1
16.1.1Construction of Service Mode ................................................................................................................. 16- 1
16.1.2Starting Service Mode and Making Selections........................................................................................ 16- 2
16.1.3Ending Service Mode .............................................................................................................................. 16- 3
16.1.4Back-Up ................................................................................................................................................... 16- 3
16.1.5Initial Screen ............................................................................................................................................ 16- 3
16.1.62nd/3rd Item Screen................................................................................................................................. 16- 4
16.1.74th Item Screen ........................................................................................................................................ 16- 4
16.2 DISPLAYStatus Display Mode............................................................................................................... 16- 6
16.2.1 COPIER................................................................................................................................................... 16- 6
16.2.1.1 Copier List ....................................................................................................................................... 16- 6
16.2.2 FEEDER................................................................................................................................................ 16- 13
16.2.2.1 Feeder List ..................................................................................................................................... 16- 13
16.3 I/O I/O Display Mode............................................................................................................................ 16- 14
16.3.1Outline ................................................................................................................................................... 16- 14
16.3.2<DC-CON>............................................................................................................................................ 16- 15
16.3.3<R-CON> .............................................................................................................................................. 16- 19
16.3.4<FEEDER>............................................................................................................................................ 16- 21
16.3.5<SORTER>............................................................................................................................................ 16- 22
16.4 ADJUSTAdjustment Mode................................................................................................................... 16- 34
16.4.1 COPIER................................................................................................................................................. 16- 34
16.4.1.1 Copier List ..................................................................................................................................... 16- 34
16.4.2 FEEDER................................................................................................................................................ 16- 44
16.4.2.1 FEEDER List ................................................................................................................................. 16- 44
16.4.3 SORTER................................................................................................................................................ 16- 45
16.4.3.1 Sorter List ...................................................................................................................................... 16- 45
Contents
16.5 FUNCTION Operation/Inspection Mode.............................................................................................. 16- 46

16.5.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 16- 46
16.5.1.1 Copier List ..................................................................................................................................... 16- 46
16.5.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 16- 59
16.5.2.1 Feeder List ..................................................................................................................................... 16- 59
16.6 OPTION Machine Settings Mode......................................................................................................... 16- 63
16.6.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 16- 63
16.6.1.1 Copier List ..................................................................................................................................... 16- 63
16.6.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 16- 97
16.6.2.1 Feeder List ..................................................................................................................................... 16- 97
16.6.3 SORTER ............................................................................................................................................... 16- 97
16.6.3.1 Sorter List ...................................................................................................................................... 16- 97
16.6.4 BOARD................................................................................................................................................. 16- 98
16.6.4.1 Board List ...................................................................................................................................... 16- 98
16.7 TEST Test Print Mode.......................................................................................................................... 16- 99
16.7.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 16- 99
16.7.1.1 Copier List ..................................................................................................................................... 16- 99
16.8 COUNTER Counter Mode.................................................................................................................. 16- 102
16.8.1 COPIER .............................................................................................................................................. 16- 102
16.8.1.1 Copier List ................................................................................................................................... 16- 102
Chapter 17Upgrading
17.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 17- 1
17.1.1Outline of Upgrading the Machine.......................................................................................................... 17- 1
17.1.2Outline of the Service Support Tool........................................................................................................ 17- 2
17.2 Making Preparations...................................................................................................................................... 17- 7
17.2.1Registering the System Software ............................................................................................................ 17- 7
17.2.2Making Connections................................................................................................................................ 17- 9
17.3 Formatting the HDD.................................................................................................................................... 17- 13
17.3.1Formatting All Partitions....................................................................................................................... 17- 13
17.3.2Formatting Selected Partitions .............................................................................................................. 17- 13
17.3.3Formatting Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 17- 14
17.4 Downloading System Software ................................................................................................................... 17- 17
17.4.1 Downloading System ............................................................................................................................ 17- 17
17.4.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 17
17.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................ 17- 17
17.4.2 Downloading RUI, and Language ........................................................................................................ 17- 20
17.4.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 20
17.4.3 Downloading SDICT ............................................................................................................................ 17- 23
17.4.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 23
17.4.4 Downloading MEAPCONT.................................................................................................................. 17- 25
17.4.4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 25
17.4.5 Downloading KEY................................................................................................................................ 17- 27
17.4.5.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 27
Contents
17.4.6 Downloading BOOT ............................................................................................................................. 17- 30

17.4.6.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 30
17.4.7 Downloading Dcon and Rcon ............................................................................................................... 17- 32
17.4.7.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 32
17.4.8 Downloading G3 FAX .......................................................................................................................... 17- 35
17.4.8.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 35
17.4.9 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data........................................................................................... 17- 38
17.4.9.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 17- 38
17.4.9.2 Uploading Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 17- 39
17.4.9.3 Downloading Procedur .................................................................................................................. 17- 41
Chapter 18Service Tools

18.1 Special Tools ................................................................................................................................................. 18-1
18.2 Oils and Solvents ........................................................................................................................................... 18-2
Chapter 1Introduction
Contents
Contents
1.1 System Construction........................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Overview of the System with a Delivery Accessory................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Overview of System Construction (output accessories).............................................................................. 1-1
1.1.3 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 1 .............................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.4 Output Accessories System Configuration 1............................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.6 Output Accessories System Configuration 2............................................................................................... 1-7
1.1.8 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration ................................................................... 1-9
1.1.9 Input/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration .................................................................... 1-11
1.1.10 Reader Heater System Configuration...................................................................................................... 1-13
1.1.11 Cassette Heater System Configuration 1................................................................................................. 1-13
1.1.12 Cassette Heater System Configuration 2................................................................................................. 1-14
1.1.13 Side Deck Heater System Configuration................................................................................................. 1-15
1.1.14 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration ...................................................................... 1-17
1.1.15 List of Print Transmission Optional Functions ...................................................................................... 1-18
1.1.16 Printing/Transmission Accessories System Configuration ..................................................................... 1-19
1.1.17 Functions of the Printing/Transmission Functions.................................................................................. 1-20
1.2 Product Specifications...................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.2.1 Names of Parts........................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.2.1.1 Names of Parts.................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.2.1.2 External View..................................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.2.1.3 Cross-Section...................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.2.2 Using the Machine..................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch ............................................................................................................ 1-28
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ....................................................................................... 1-30
1.2.2.3 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch ............................................................... 1-31
1.2.2.4 Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 1-33
1.2.2.5 Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 1-34
1.2.3 User Mode Items ....................................................................................................................................... 1-35
1.2.3.1 Common Settings ............................................................................................................................... 1-35
1.2.3.2 Common Settings ............................................................................................................................... 1-39
1.2.3.3 Setting the Time ................................................................................................................................. 1-43
1.2.3.4 Setting the Timer ................................................................................................................................ 1-44
1.2.3.5 Adjustments and Cleaning.................................................................................................................. 1-44
1.2.3.6 Adjustment and Cleaning ................................................................................................................... 1-45
1.2.3.7 Report Output ..................................................................................................................................... 1-45
1.2.3.8 Printing Out a Report.......................................................................................................................... 1-46
1.2.3.9 System Control Settings ..................................................................................................................... 1-47
1.2.3.10 System Control Settings ................................................................................................................... 1-50
1.2.3.11 Copy Settings ................................................................................................................................ 1-51
1.2.3.12 Transmission/Reception Settings ..................................................................................................... 1-52
1.2.3.13 Transmission/Reception Settings ..................................................................................................... 1-54
1.2.3.14 Box Settings...................................................................................................................................... 1-56
Contents
1.2.3.15 Box Settings...................................................................................................................................... 1-57

1.2.3.16 Printer Settings.................................................................................................................................. 1-57
1.2.3.17 Address Book Settings...................................................................................................................... 1-58
1.2.4 Maintenance by the User ........................................................................................................................... 1-61
1.2.4.1 Cleaning .............................................................................................................................................. 1-61
1.2.4.2 Inspection............................................................................................................................................ 1-61
1.2.5 Safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-63
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light .................................................................................................................... 1-63
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations ............................................................................................................................. 1-63
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit...................................................................................................................... 1-64
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner ................................................................................................................................... 1-65
1.2.6 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 1-65
1.2.6.1 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 1-65
1.2.7 Function List .............................................................................................................................................. 1-68
1.2.7.1 Printing Speed..................................................................................................................................... 1-68
1.2.7.2 Printing Speed..................................................................................................................................... 1-69
1.2.7.3 Types of Paper .................................................................................................................................... 1-71
1.2.7.4 Types of Paper .................................................................................................................................... 1-72
Chapter 1
1.1 System Construction

1.1.1 Overview of the System with a Delivery Accessory
0006-6215
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The system may include a delivery accessory that may enable any of the following three:
- if a large volume of delivery processing or multiple types of delivery processing (e.g., stapling, punching) is needed:
delivery accessory system configuration 1
- if delivery processing is limited to stapling/punching: delivery accessory system configuration 2
- if delivery processing is limited to 3-way delivery: delivery accessory system configuration 3
1.1.2 Overview of System Construction (output accessories)
0008-6919
/ iR3530
The output accessories designed for the machine can broadly be divided into 2 groups:
- if the work is limited to stapling and the like, output accessories configuration 1
- if the work calls for 3-way sorting, output accessories system construction 2
1.1.3 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 1
0006-6221
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following shows a typical system configuration of this type:
Remarks:
The 3 Way Unit-A1 comes as standard with the following:
120V: all model
230V: iR4570, iR3570
1-1
[6a]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[3a]
[1a]
[5a]
[4a]
[4]
[3]
[2a]
[2]
F-1-1
T-1-1
[1]Finisher-Q3
[1a]Installation Procedure
- Installation of the Finisher-Q3
- Installation of the Buffer Path Unit [4]
[2]Saddle Finisher-Q4
- Installation of the Finisher-Q4
- Installation of the Buffer Path Unit [4]
[3]Punch Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1
- Installation of the Punch Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1
[4]Buffer Path Unit-E1
[4a]Instruction Sheet (indicating references)
[5]3 Way Unit-A1
- Installation of the 3 Way Unit-A1
Chapter 1
[6]Accessories Power Supply-P2

(needed when installing [1]
through [4]; standard with 120/
230V model)
- Installation of the Accessories Power
Supply-P2
The following shows the functions that the system will provide and the accessories that will be needed:
T-1-2
Function provided
Accessory needed
- 3-way delivery
- stapling
Finisher-Q3 or Saddle Finisher-Q4

Accessories Power Supply-P2
Buffer Path Unit-E1
3 Way Unit-A1
T-1-3
Function provided
Accessory needed
- saddle binding
Saddle Finisher-Q4
Buffer Path Unit-E1
3 Way Unit-A1
T-1-4
Function provided
Accessory needed
- punching
Finisher-Q3 or Saddle Finisher -Q4

Buffer Path Unit-E1
3 Way Unit-A1
Punch Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1
1.1.4 Output Accessories System Configuration 1
0008-6920
/ iR3530
The configuration is as shown in the following figure:
1-3
Chapter 1
[3]
[4a]
[3a]
[4]
[2]
[6a]
[2a]
[5a]
[6]
[1a]
[5]
[1]
F-1-2
T-1-5
[1]Finisher-S1
- installation of the Finisher-S1
[2]3Way Unit-A1
- installation of the 3Way Unit-A1
[3]Output Tray-J1
- installation of the Output Tray-J1

[standard with 120 or 230 V model]
(It is necessary when installing
[1].)
[5]Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/R1/S1/T1
- installation of the Accessories

Power Supply-P2
- installation of the Inner Puncher

Kit-Q1/R1/S1/T1
[6]Finisher Additional Tray-B1
- installation of the Finisher
Additional Tray-B1
The following table shows individual functions and the accessories needed:
1-4
Chapter 1
T-1-6
Function
Accessories needed
- 2-way delivery
- Stapling
Finisher-S1
3Way Unit-A1
Output Tray-J1
T-1-7
Function
Accessories needed
- 3-way delivery
- Stapling
Finisher-S1
3Way Unit-A1
Finisher Additional Tray-B1
Output Tray-J1
T-1-8
Function
Accessories needed
- Punching
Finisher-S1
3Way Unit-A1
Inner Puncher Kit-Q1
0006-6233
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

Remarks:
The 3 Way Unit-A1 comes as standard with the following models:
120V: all model
230V: iR4570, iR3570
1-5
Chapter 1
[3]
[4a]
[3a]
[4]
[2]
[6a]
[2a]
[5a]
[6]
[1a]
[5]
[1]
F-1-3
T-1-9
[1]Finisher-S1
- Installation of the Finisher-S1
[2]3 Way Unit-A1
[3]Copy Tray-J1
- Installation of the Copy Tray-J1

(needed when installing [1];
standard with 120/230V model)
Supply-P2
[5]Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/R1/S1/T1
- Installation of the Inner Puncher KitQ1/R1/S1/T1
[6]Finisher Additional Tray-B1
- Installation of the Finisher
Additional Tray-B1
The following shows the functions that the system will provide and the accessories that will be needed:
1-6
Chapter 1
T-1-10
Function provided
Accessory needed
- 2-way delivery
- stapling
Finisher-S1
3 Way Unit-A1
Copy Tray-J1
T-1-11
Function provided
Accessory needed
- 3-way delivery
- stapling
Finisher-S1
3 Way Unit-A1
Finisher Additional Tray-B1
Copy Tray-J1
T-1-12
Function provided
Accessory needed
- punching
Finisher-S1
3 Way Unit-A1
Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/R1/S1/T1
1.1.6 Output Accessories System Configuration 2
0008-6922
/ iR3530
1-7
Chapter 1
[3]
[3a]
[2]
[2a]
[1a]
[1]
F-1-4
T-1-13
[1]Inner 2-Way Tray-D1
- installation of the Inner 2-Way Tray-D1
[2]3Way Unit-A1
(powered by host; no need for
Accessories Power Supply-P2)
[3]Output Tray-J1
- installation of the 3Way Unit-A1
- installation of the Output Tray-J1

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
Remarks:
The 3 Way Unit-A1 comes as standard with the following models:
120V: all model
230V: iR4570, iR3570
1-8
0006-6234
Chapter 1
[3]
[3a]
[2]
[2a]
[1a]
[1]
F-1-5
T-1-14
[1]Inner 2-Way Tray-D1
- Installation of the Inner 2-Way Tray-D1
[2]3 Way Unit-A1 (powered by

the printer unit, not requiring
the Accessories Power SupplyP2)
[3]Copy Tray-J1
Installation of the Copy Tray-J1
1.1.8 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration
0006-6254
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following shows a typical system configuration:
1-9
[10]
[2]
[1]
[10a]
[1a]
[5]
[3]
[9a]
[9]
[4]
[4a]
[8]
[6a]
[8a]
[7]
[6]
F-1-6
T-1-15
[1]DADF-N1
- Installation of the DADF-N1
[2]Platen Cover Type-H

[3]Original Holder-J1
- Installation of the Original Holder-J1
[4]Side Paper Deck-Q1
- Installation of the Side Paper Deck-Q1
[5]Card Reader-C1, Card Reader

Mounting Kit-B1
Chapter 1
[6]2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2
- Installation of the 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2
[7]Envelope Cassette-C1 (100V)

[8]Envelope Cassette Attachment-C1
(115/200V)
- Installation of the Envelope Cassette

Attachment-C1

(required when installing the Side
Paper Deck Q1 [4]; standard with
120/230V model)
Supply-P2
[10]DADF Handle-A1
- Installation of the DADF Handle-A1
1.1.9 Input/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration
0008-6923
/ iR3530
1-11
[2]
[1]
[1a]
[4]
[3]
[7]
[7a]
[5a]
[6]
[5]
F-1-7
T-1-16
[1]DADF-N1
- installation of the DADF-N1
[2]Platen Cover Type-H

[3]Document Tray-J1
- installation of the Document Tray-J1
[4]Card Reader-C1/Card Reader

Mounting Kit-B1
[5]Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2
- installation of the Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y2
[6]Envelope Cassette-C1 (100 V)
Chapter 1
[7]Envelope Cassette Attachment-C1
(115/200 V)
- installation of the Envelope Cassettes

Attachment-C1
1.1.10 Reader Heater System Configuration
0006-6260
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

[1]
[2] [2a]
F-1-8
T-1-17
[1]Reader Heater Unit-B1
(A Heater PCB-C1 is needed for operation)
[2]Heater PCB-C1
- Installation of the Heater PCB-C1
- Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit-29
(installation to the printer unit)
- Installation of the Reader Heater Unit-B1
1.1.11 Cassette Heater System Configuration 1
0006-6261
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
1-13
Chapter 1
[2] [2a]
[1]
F-1-9
T-1-18
[1]Cassette Heater Unit-29
(A Heater PCB-C1 is needed for operation.)
[2]Heater PCB-C1
- Installation to the Reader Heater Unit-B1
1.1.12 Cassette Heater System Configuration 2

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
1-14
0006-6262
Chapter 1
[1]
[2]
[1a]
[3] [3a]
F-1-10
T-1-19
[1]Heater PCB-C1

(installation to the cassette pedestal)
(Its operation requires the installation of the Heater PCB-C1 and the Cassette
Heater Mounting Kit-B1.)
[3]Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1
- Installation of the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1
- Installation of the Cassette Heater-29
1.1.13 Side Deck Heater System Configuration
0006-6264
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following shows a typical System configuration:
1-15
[1]
[1a]
[3] [3a]
[2]
[2a]
F-1-11
T-1-20
[1]Heater PCB-C1

(Its operation requires the installation of the Heater PCB-C1 and the Cassette
Heater Mounting Kit-B1.)
*Not used for mounting this unit to this model.
[3]Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1
- Installation of the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1
Chapter 1
1.1.14 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration
0006-6265
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following is a diagram of the system configuration:
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[9]
F-1-12
[1] UFR II Printer Kit-E3 (P BootROM)
[2] Printer Kit-E2 (H BootROM: for 230 V model)
[3] Multi-PDL Printer Kit-E1 (N BootROM)
[4] Expansion Bus-B1
[5] USB Application Interface Board-D1
[6] iR256MB Expansion RAM-B1 (standard with 120V model)
[7] iR Security Kit-A2 (License)
[8] Super G3 Fax Board-Q1
[9] Multi FAX Board-D1 (for 120 V model)
[10] Univrsal Send Kit -B1 (License)
[11] Universal Send PDF Enhancement Kit-B1 (License: for 120 V model)
[12] Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit-B1 (License: for 230 V model)
[13] Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit-A1 (License: for 230 V model)
1-17
Chapter 1
1.1.15 List of Print Transmission Optional Functions
0006-6266
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

- List of Print Transmission Optional Functions (120-V model)
The following is a brief explanation of the functions expected of the accessories; for details, see the chapters that
follow:
T-1-21
UFR II print function
==>
UFR II Printer Kit-E3 (P BootROM)
UFR II/PCL/PS print
==>
Multi-PDL Printer Kit-E1 (N BootROM)
Send function
==>
Univrsal Send Kit -B1
Fax function (1-line)
==>
Super G3 Fax Board-Q1
==>
Multi FAX Board-D1
MEAP application USB
==>
USB Application Interface Board-D1
function
connection function
Security function
Expansion Bus-B1
==>
(HDD initialization+
Expansion Bus-B1
encryption)
iR Security Kit-A2
Encryption PDF function
==>

Universal Send PDF Enhancement Kit-B1
+
searchable PDF function
- List of Print Transmission Optional Functions (230-V model)

follow:
T-1-22
==>
UFR II/PCL print
==>
function
UFR II/PCL/PS print
Printer Kit-E2 (H BootROM)

iR256MB Expansion RAM-B1
==>
function
1-18

Send function
==>
==>
Chapter 1
MEAP function (C boot)
==>
no need for memory expansion

MEAP authentication, MEAP application operation
are both possible
MEAP function (P boot)
==>
-When you want to enable only use of

MEAP authentication
no need for memory expansion
If MEAP application is installed, the device
will not operate (E604-0001 is displayed)
-When you want to enable use of MEAP
authentication and MEAP application
operation
need for iR256 MB Expansion RAM-B1
installed
MEAP function (H boot/
==>
N boot)
memory expansion needed

without memory expansion, the device will not
operate (E744 is displayed)
MEAP application USB
==>
connection function
Security function

Expansion Bus-B1
==>
Expansion Bus-B1
encryption)
iR Security Kit-A2
==>

Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit-B1
Searchable PDF function
==>

Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit-A1
==>
Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit-B1
Searchable PDF function
Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit-A1

1.1.16 Printing/Transmission Accessories System Configuration
0008-6929
/ iR3530
1-19
Chapter 1
[4]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[8]
F-1-13
[1] UFR II Printer Kit-E3 (P Boot ROM)
[2] Printer Kit-E2 (H Boot ROM)
[3] Multi PDL Printer Kit-E1 (N Boot ROM)
[4] iR System Expansion Kit-A1
[5] Super G3 Fax Board-Q1
[6] PCI Bus Expansion Kit-B1
[7] Security Expansion Board (USB)-D1
[8] iR Security Kit-A2 (license certificate)
1.1.17 Functions of the Printing/Transmission Functions
0008-6933
/ iR3530
- List of Print Transmission Optional Functions

follow:
1-20
T-1-23
==>

iR System Expansion Kit-A1
UFR II/PCL print
==>
Printer Kit-E2 (H BootROM)

==>

==>

Security function
==>

Expansion Bus-B1
iR Security Kit-A2
function
UFR II/PCL/PS print
function
encryption)
Chapter 1
1.2 Product Specifications

1.2.1 Names of Parts
1.2.1.1 Names of Parts
0007-2860
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[18]
[6]
[17]
[7]
[16]
[8]
[15]
[9]
[10]
[14]
[11]
[13]
[12]
F-1-14
[1] ADF reading glass retainer
[2] DADF
[3] Reader cover (front)
[4] Control panel
[5] Support cover (right)
[6] Support cover
[7] Delivery tray right cover
[8] Delivery tray
[9] Inside right cover
[10] Front cover unit
[11] Cassette 1
[12] Cassette 2
[13] Left cover (lower)
[14] Left cover
[15] Inside base cover
[16] Left cover (rear)
[17] Delivery tray rear cover (lower)
[18] Delivery tray rear cover
1-22
Chapter 1
[19]
[20]
[21]
[29]
[28]
[22]
[27]
[23]
[26]
[25]
[24]
F-1-15
[19] Reader over (right)
[20] Copyboard glass
[21] Reader cover (rear)
[22] Face over (iR3570,4570)
[23] Rear cover
[24] Right cover (rear)
[25] Manual feed pickup tray
[26] Right cover (lower front)
[27] Right door unit
[28] Delivery cover
[29] Right cover (upper)
1.2.1.2 External View
0008-8229
/ iR3530
1-23
Chapter 1
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[18]
[17]
[6]
[7]
[16]
[8]
[15]
[9]
[10]
[14]
[11]
[13]
[12]
F-1-16
[2] DADF (optional)
[4] Control panel
[6] Support cover
[8] Delivery tray
[11] Cassette 1
[12] Cassette 2
[14] Left cover
[17] Output tray rear cover (lower)
[18] Output tray rear cover
1-24
Chapter 1
[19]
[20]
[21]
[28]
[22]
[27]
[23]
[26]
[25]
[24]
F-1-17
[19] Reader cover (right)
[20] Platen glass
[22] Face cover
[23] Rear cover
[28] Delivery cover
1.2.1.3 Cross-Section
0007-9223
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

iR2270/iR2270F/iR2870/iR2870F Model
iR2230/iR2830/iR3530/iR2280F Model
1-25
Chapter 1
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[29]
[12]
[13]
[28]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[27]
[26]
F-1-18
iR3570/iR3570F/iR4570/iR4570F Model
1-26
[25]
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[29]
[12]
[13]
[28]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[27]
[26]
[25]
F-1-19
T-1-24
[1]
CIS unit
[16]
Manual feed pickup roller
[2]
ADF reading glass
[17]
Pickup roller (cassette 1)
[3]
Platen glass
[18]
Vertical path roller 1
[4]
Toner bottle
[19]
Feed roller (cassette 1)
[5]
Drum unit
[20]
Separation roller (cassette 1)
[6]
Drum cleaning unit
[21]
Vertical path roller 2
[7]
Delivery roller
[22]
Feed roller (cassette 2)
[8]
Fixing outlet roller
[23]
Separation roller (cassette 2)
[9]
Fixing film unit
[24]
Pickup roller (cassette 2)
[10]
Pressure roller
[25]
Primary charging roller
Chapter 1
[11]
Duplex feed roller
[26]
Developing unit
[12]
Photosensitive drum
[27]
Laser scanner unit
[13]
Duplex feed roller 2
[28]
Dust-blocking sheet
[14]
Transfer roller
[29]
Sub hopper
[15]
Registration roller
1.2.2 Using the Machine

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch
0007-3138
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine possesses 2 power switches: main power switch and control power switch. Normally (i.e., unless the
machine is in a sleep state), the machine will be supplied with power when you turn on its main power switch.
ON/OFF
[1]
123
[2]
[3]
F-1-20
iR4570/3570, 2870/2270
1-28
Chapter 1
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-1-21
iR3530/2830/2230
[1]Control panel power switch
[2]Main power lamp
[3]Main power switch
Never turn off the main power while the display shows the progress bar, indicating that the HDD is being
accessed. Otherwise, the HDD may suffer a fault (E602). This caution does not apply to models not equipped
with a HDD.
Starting up. Please wait.
F-1-22
1-29
Chapter 1
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch
0007-3160
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Be sure always to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch
When Using the Print Function/When Receiving or Transmitting a Fax
Before using the main power switch, check to be sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off.
(Turning off the main power switch while an operation is under way can cause loss of data.)
9
0
C
Start/Memory
Error
Main Power
F-1-23
At Time of Downloading
Do not turn off the main power switch while downloading is under way. Otherwise, the machine may not be able to
operate normally.
1-30
Chapter 1
ON
/O
FF
F-1-24
1.2.2.3 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch
0009-1736
/ iR3530
Before turning off the main power switch, you must first press the control panel power switch.
When the Printer Unit Is in Operation or a Fax Is Being Received
Check to be sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off.
(Otherwise, the data being processed may be lost.)
1-31
Chapter 1
F-1-25
While Downloading Is Taking Place
Do not turn off the main power switch or the control panel power switch.
(Otherwise, the machine may fail to operate.)
1-32
Chapter 1
O
/O
N
F
F
F-1-26
1.2.2.4 Control Panel
0007-3163
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
[2]
[1]
[3]
ON/OFF
[4]
123
Additional Function
[5]
0
Display Contrast
Clear
Start/Memory
[15]
[14] [13]
[12] [11] [10] [9]
[6]
Error
Main Power
[8] [7]
F-1-27
1-33
Chapter 1
T-1-25
[1] Reset key
[9] Execute/Memory lamp
[2] Keypad
[10] Clear key
[3] Control panel power switch
[11] ID key
[4] Counter Check key
[12] Image contrast adjustment dial
[5] Stop key
[13] User Mode key
[6] Start key
[14] Help key
[7] Main power lamp
[15] Touch panel
[8] Error lamp
1.2.2.5 Control Panel
0008-8219
/ iR3530
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
1
[6]
[7]
[8]
[20]
[19]
[18] [17] [16]
[15][14] [13][12] [11] [10] [9]
F-1-28
T-1-26
1-34
[1] Copy key
[11] Execute/Memory key
[2] Fax key
[12] Clear key
[3] Box key
[13] Keypad
[4] Extension key
[14] ID key
[5] Control panel power switch
[15] Image contrast adjustment dial
[6] Check Counter key
[16] Interrupt key
Chapter 1
[7] Stop key
[17] User mode key
[8] Start key
[18] Help key
[9] Main power lamp
[19] Reset key
[10] Error lamp
[20] Touch panel
1.2.3 User Mode Items

1.2.3.1 Common Settings
0007-3164
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

*Factory settings.
**Indicated in the presence of a specific accessory.
***If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the presence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard).
T-1-27
Mode
Description
initial setup
select initial function: *copy/transmit/Box/MEAP

use 'system status screen' as initial screen: ON/*OFF
give priority to 'device' of system status screen: *ON/OFF
select post-auto reset
*use/do not use
function
set order of functions
copy/transmit/Box/remote scan (or functions appearing on tab);

change order by Up/Down key
set order of function groups: group A, MEAP, group B

enable/disable buzzer
input sound: *ON/OFF

invalid input sound: ON/*OFF
supply alert sound: ON/*OFF
warning sound: *ON/OFF
job end sound: *ON/OFF
indicate paper level message
*ON/OFF
inch input
ON/*OFF (if US, *on)
enable/disable auto cassette
copy/printer/Box, other (manual feed: ON/*OFF + cassette: *ON/
select
OFF; manual feed not applicable to printer)

consider copy/paper type: ON/*OFF (toggle)
1-35
Mode
Description
register envelope cassette
ENV.1/ENV.2
default: env1/COM10/env2 COM10
register paper type
cassette 1/cassette 2/cassette 3/cassette 4/cassette 5 (paper deck);

plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper, punched paper
power consumption at sleep
*low/high
select special tray** (w/
- w/ No. 3 tray
finisher)
tray A: host middle tray

tray B: No. 3 tray
trayA: copy/box/printer/receive/fax/other
trayB: copy/box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other
fine setup for receive/fax

tray A: receive/fax 1/fax 2
tray B: receive/fax 1/fax 2
- w/ inner tray
tray A: host middle tray (lower)
tray B: host middle tray (upper)
tray A:*copy/box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copy/box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other

tray A: receive, fax1, fax 2
tray B: receive/fax 1/*fax 2
- w/ inner tray + No. 3 tray
tray A: host middle tray (lower)
tray B: host middle tray (upper)
tray C: No. 3 tray
tray A: *copy*Box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copy/Box/*printer/receive/fax/other
tray C: copy/Box/printer/receive/*fax/*other

tray C: *receive/*fax 1/*fax 2
Mode
Description
- Finisher-S1 + option tray
tray A: finisher option tray
tray B: finisher output tray
tray A: *copy/*Box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copy/Box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other

tray B: *receive/*fax 1/fax 2
- Finisher-S1 + No. 3 tray
tray A: finisher output tray
tray B: No. 3 tray
tray A: *copy/*Box/*printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copy/Box/printer/receive/*fax/*other

tray B: *receive/*fax 1/*fax 2
- Finisher-S1 + option tray + No. 3 tray
tray A: finisher optional tray
tray B: finisher output tray
tray C: No. 3 tray
fine tune for fax/fax

tray A: fax/fax 1/fax 2
Mode
Description
- w/ Fisher-Q3/Q4
tray A: finisher output tray (upper)
tray B: finisher output tray (lower)
tray C: host middle tray
fine tune for receive/fax

tray A: fax/fax 1/fax 2
- if w/o fax,
'receive/fax'>'receive'
- if fax only
'receive/fax'>'fax
- fine setup for receive/fax
only if w/ fax
- if fax is 1-line
'fax 1/fax 2'>'fax'
*Finisher-S1 (w/o output option), special tray items not indicated

- w/o output option tray
tray A: host middle tray
tray A: *copy/*Box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other
(1 output target; therefore, special tray items not indicated)

assign print priority
copy: *1/2/3
printer: 1/*2/3
Box: 1/2/*3
receive/fax: 1/2/*3
other: 1/2/*3
register form for image
register: original size; full merge; see-through merge (20, *50,
merge
90%); form name (up to 24 characters); form read delete

delete
check copy: select source of paper: print start
detail info: indicate detailed information, change form name
register page/stamp
characters
register/edit: character string (up to 16)

delete
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
set manual feed envelope
ON/*OFF (if outside Japan, fixed to on)
type
register manual feed paper
ON (select paper size/select paper type)/*OFF
standard mode
switch pickup method
indicate manual feed, cassettes 1 through 5 icons and paper type

priority on speed/priority on print
set standard mode for local
select paper:*auto/cassette 1 through 5
print
number of prints: *1 through 2000

sorter: sort/group/staple sort/*shift sort/shift group/rotation sort/
rotation group/punch/Z-fold
duplex: on (open to right/open to top/bottom)/*off
delete file after print: ON/*OFF
merge file: ON/*OFF
switch display language
ON/*OFF
reverse screen color
ON/*OFF
between-job shift**
*ON/OFF
put sheet between jobs**
On (select source of paper)/*OFF
put sheet between sets
On (No. of sets between 10 and 9999; select source of paper)/OFF
indicate print wait time
copy/Box/other (for all, ON/*OFF)
mix papers in output tray
*ON/OFF
indicate cleaning message
*ON/OFF
for read area***

limit function
ON/*OFF
shutdown mode
Execute key
reset common settings
Do you want to reset?: yes/no
1.2.3.2 Common Settings
0009-2469
/ iR3530
*Factory default.
**Indicated in the presence of appropriate accessories.
T-1-28
Mode
Description
set initial function
select initial function: *copier/transmit/box

use Initial screen for 'system status screen': ON/*OFF
1-39
Mode
Description
give priority to 'device' of 'system status screen': *ON/OFF
function after auto clear
*use previous/do not use previous
enable/disable buzzer
input sound: *ON/OFF

Input invalid sound
supply pre-alert: ON/*OFF
alert: *ON/OFF
job end: *ON/OFF
inch input
ON/*OFF (if US, *ON)
enable/disable cassette auto
copier/printer/box/other (manual feed: ON/*OFF + individual
selection
cassettes: ON/OFF) (if printer, no manual feed), consider copy/

paper type: (toggle) ON/*OFF
register envelop cassette
ENV.1/ENV.2
COM10/Monarch/DL/ISO-B5/ISO-C5/No. 4
default: Env.1 No. 4 (Japan), COM10 (outside Japan), Env.2
COM10 (both Japan and outside Japan)
register paper type
cassette 1/cassette 2/cassette 3/cassette 4/cassette 5 (paper deck):

plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper, punched paper
power consumption in sleep
*low/high
select special tray**
w/ tray 3
(w/ finisher)
tray A: machine middle tray

tray B: tray 3
tray A: *copier/box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copier/box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other
detail setup (receive/fax)

tray B: *receive/fax 1/fax 2
w/ Inner Tray
tray A: machine middle tray (lower)
tray B: machine cent tray (upper)
tray A: *copier/*box/printer/receive/fax/other

tray B: *receive/fax 1/*fax 2
Mode
Description
w/ inner tray + tray 3
tray A: machine middle tray (lower)
tray B: machine middle tray (upper)
tray C: tray 3
tray A: *copier/box/printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copier/box/*printer/receive/fax/other
tray C: copier/box/printer/receive/fax*/other*

*Fin-S1 + optional tray
tray A= Fin optional tray
tray B= Fin output tray

Fin-S1 + tray 3
tray A= Fin output tray
tray B= tray 3
tray A: *copier/*box/*printer/receive/fax/other
tray B: copier/box/printer/*fax/*other

Mode
Description
Fin-S1 + optional tray + tray 3
tray A= Fin optional tray
tray B= Fin output tray
tray C= tray 3
tray C: copier/box/printer/receive/*fax/*other

w/ Fin-Q3/Q4
tray A= Fin output tray (upper)
tray B= Fin output tray (lower)
tray C= machine middle tray
tray C: copier/box/printer/receive/*fax/*other

- if w/o fax
'receive fax' -> 'receive'
- if fax only
'receive/fax' -> 'fax'
- detail setup (review/fax)
applies if w/ fax
- if single-line fax,
'fax 1/fax 2' -> 'fax'
*If Fin-S1 (not equipped with an output accessory), the special tray
is not indicated.
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
w/ output optional tray
tray A: machine middle tray
tray A: *copier/*box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other
(There is only one output target and, therefore, the special tray is
not indicated.)
print priority
copier: *1/2/3
printer: 1/*2/3
box: 1/2/*3
fax/fax: 1/2/*3
other: 1/2/*3
manual feed paper standard
ON (paper size select/paper type select)/*OFF
register mode
pickup method switchover
manual feed; cassette 1 through 5 icons and paper type

priority on speed/priority on print side
local print standard mode
paper select: *auto/cassette 1 through 5

number of prints: *1 to 9999
sorter: sort/group/staple sort/*shift sort/shift group/rotation sort/
rotation group/punch hole/z-fold
w/o finisher, w/ inner 2-way tray: non-sort/sort*/rotation sort/
group/rotation group
duplex print: ON (open like book/open like calendar) *OFF
delete file after printing: ON/*OFF
merge file: ON/*OFF
switch display language:
ON/*OFF
reverse screen color:
ON/*OFF
indicate print wait time:
copier/box/other (for each, ON/*OFF)
mix paper in output tray**:
*ON/OFF
prompt for cleaning of
*ON/OFF
reader unit***:
function limit mode:
ON/*OFF
shut-down mode:
execute key
reset common settings
Do you really want to reset?: yes/no
1.2.3.3 Setting the Time
0007-3165
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
1-43
Chapter 1
*Factory settings.
T-1-29
Mode
Description
set time (fine)
in 1-min increments (using +/-)
set auto sleep time
10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min; *1 hr; 90 min, 2, 3, 4 hr
auto reset time
0: disable; 1, *2, ..., 9 min (in 1-min increments)
set weekly timer
00:00 to 23:59 (in 1-min increments); everyday from Sun to Sat
1.2.3.4 Setting the Timer
0009-2474
/ iR3530
*Factory default.
T-1-30
Mode
Description
fine-tune time
set date/time (12 numerals)

time zone: GMT - 12:00 ~ GMT + 12:00 - GMT + 9:00*
daylight saving: ON/OFF*
auto sleep time:
10 sec; 1.2*, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min; 1 hr; 90 min; 2, 3, 4 hr
auto clear time:
0= none; 1, *2, ..., 9 min (in 1-min increments)
set weekly timer:
between 00:00 and 23:59 from Sun to Sat (in 1-min increments)
1.2.3.5 Adjustments and Cleaning
0007-3166
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

*Factory settings.
T-1-31
Mode
Description
zoom fine adjust
XY, individually: -1.0T to +1.0% (in 0.1% increments)/*0%
center bind staple edging**
Start key
(w/ saddle finisher)
1-44
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
center bind position
size: A3,11x17/B4/LGL/A4R,LTRR
change** (w/ saddle finisher)
position: -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm (in 0.35-mm increments)/*0 mm
density correction
copy/Box, transmit; 9 sets each (at time of shipment, set to '5')
page print/number of set
X: -8 mm to +8 mm (in 1-mm increments)/*0 mm
prints adjust stamp position
Y: -8 mm to +8 mm (in 1-mm increment)/*0 mm
clean feeder***
Start key
1.2.3.6 Adjustment and Cleaning
0009-2479
/ iR3530
*Factory default.
***Indicated when appropriate accessories are installed.
T-1-32
Mode
Description
zoom fine-adjust
XY independent: -1.0% to +1.0% (in 0.1% increments), *0%
density correction
copier/box, transmit (each in 9 steps; at time of shipment, set to '5')
feeder cleaning***
Start key
1.2.3.7 Report Output
0007-3167
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

*Factory settings.
T-1-33
Mode
Description
transmit (setup)***
transmission results report: *only if error/ON/OFF

show transmission original: *ON/OFF
show transmission original for coded PDF: ON/*OFF
communication control report
print automatically at 100 communications:
print at specified time: ON/*OFF
set time: *00:00 to 23:59
separate transmission and reception: ON/*OFF (toggle)
1-45
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
fax (settings)***
fax transmission result report: *only if error/ON/OFF

show transmission report:*ON/OFF
fax communication control report
print automatically every 40 communications:
set time: *00:00 to 23:59
separate transmission and reception: ON/*OFF (toggle)
fax reception result report: only if error/ON/*OFF
fax Box reception report:
list print
(transmission)***
address book list: list print

user data list: Do you want to print the user data list? yes/no
list print (fax)***
user data list: Do you want to print the user data list? yes/no
list print (network)
user list: Do you want to print the user data list? yes/no
configuration page, font list
PS: status print, font list
LIPS/emulation: status print, font list, LIPS utility (status print, overlay
list, overlay print, font list, micro list, form list, color sample), N201
utility (status print, overlay print), ESCP utility (status print, overlay
print), i5577 utility (status print, overlay print), HP-GL utility (status
print, sample print)
1.2.3.8 Printing Out a Report
0009-2485
/ iR3530
*Factory default.
T-1-34
Mode
Description
transmit (specifications
transmission result report: *only when error/ON/OFF
settings)***
transmission original display: *ON/OFF
transmission original display for encryption PDF: ON/*OFF
communication control report
print automatically every 100 communications: *ON/OFF
1-46
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
set time: *00:00~23:59
separate transmit and receive: (toggle) ON/*OFF
fax
(specifications
fax transmission result report: *only if error/ON/OFF

transmission original display: *ON/OFF
settings)***
fax communication control report
print automatically every 40 communications: *ON/OFF
set time: *00:00~23:59
separate transmit and receive: (toggle) ON/*OFF
fax receive result report: only if error/ON/*OFF
fax box review report: *ON/OFF
list print
(transmit)***
print list
address book list: print list

user data list: Do you want to print the user data list?: yes/no
(fax)***
List print
(network)
PCL: Configuration Page,Font List
PS: status print, font list
LIPS/emulation: status print, font list, LIPS utility (status print, overlay
list, overlay print, font list, macro list, form list, color sample), N201
utility (status print, overlay print), ESC/P utility (status print, overlay
print), i5577 utility (status print, overlay print), HP-GL utility (status
print, sample print)
1.2.3.9 System Control Settings
0007-3168
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

*Factory settings.
1-47
T-1-35
Mode
Description
set system
system administrator group ID: 7 characters max
administrator info
system administration ID: set (7 characters)

system administrator name: 32 bytes
mail address: 64 bytes
contact: 32 bytes
comment: 32 bytes
group ID control
group ID control: ON/*OFF

register ID No.: register, edit, delete, limit function
count control: reset, count print, all clear
print without known ID: *ON/OFF
scan without known ID: *ON/OFF
set
communications
e-mail/**i-fax setup
transmission data size upper limit: 0: none; 1 through 99 MB, *3 MB
control
abbreviation name: 40 characters; *attached image
full mode transmissions time-out: 1 to 99 hr; *24 hr
MDN/DSN reception print: ON/*OFF
notify always if error: *ON/OFF
user server route: ON/*OFF
fax setup***
transmission start speed: *33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
reception start speed: 33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
reception password: 20 characters max.
FIS switch: ON/*OFF
system Box setup
system box ID No.***: 7 characters
use fax memory reception: ON/*OFF
use i-fax memory reception: ON/*OFF
memory reception start time***: everyday/day of week/*none
memory reception end time***: everyday/day of week/*none
Mode
Description
enable/disable
*ON/OFF
remote UI
use SSL: ON/OFF
limit addresses***
address book ID No.: 7 characters max.

address book access No. control: ON/*OFF
limit new addresses: ON/*OFF
set device info
device name: 32 characters

installation site: 32 characters
transfer setup***
reception method, conditions ON/OFF, register, register transfer without

condition, e-mail priority, detail/edit, delete, list print
delete bulletin
delete
auto online/offline
auto on-line shift: ON/*OFF
shift***
auto on-line shift: ON/*OFF

date/time setup: set (12 numeric characters)
time zone: GMT - 12:00 to GMT + 12:00.GMT + *9:00
daylight saving time: ON/*OFF
register LDAP
register, detail/edit, delete, print list
server***
register license
24 characters
set print
ON/*OFF
group ID: ON/*OFF
date: ON/*OFF
character: ON/*OFF
MEAP setup
use HTTP: *ON/OFF

use SSL: ON/OFF
print system info: print
set device info

distribution
register recipient: auto search/register, register, detail info, delete

auto distribution setup: everyday, day of week, *none
user mode setting: ON/*OFF
network setting: include, do not include
group ID: ON/*OFF
address book : ON/*OFF
manual distribution setup: user mode setting: ON/*OFF
network setup: include, do not include
group ID: ON/*OFF
address book: ON/*OFF
user mode sync level: ON/*OFF
recover data: user mode settings, group ID, address book
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
limit reception by function: user mode setting: ON/*OFF
group ID: ON/*OFF
address book: ON/*OFF
distribution/reception history: detail info
1.2.3.10 System Control Settings
0009-2488
/ iR3530
*Factory default.
T-1-36
Mode
Description
set system
system administrator ID: 7 characters max.
administrator
system administration ID: set (7 characters)
information
system administrator name: 32 characters
mail address: 64 characters
contact: 32 characters
comment: 32 characters
group ID control
group ID control: ON/*OFF

register ID No.: register, edit, delete, limit function
count control: clear, count print, all clear
print job w/ unknown ID: *ON/OFF
scan job w/ unknown ID: *ON/OFF
set
fax setup*
communicatio
n control
transmission start speed: *33600bps,14400bps,9600bps,
7200bps,4800bps,2400bps
reception start speed: 33600bps*,14400bps,9600bps,
7200bps,4800bps,2400bps
reception password: 20 characters max.
FIS switch: ON/*OFF
system box setup
system box ID No.***: 7 characters
1-50
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
use fax memory reception***: ON/*OFF
use i-fax memory reception**: ON/*OFF
Memory reception start time***: every day, day of week, *no specification
memory reception time***: every day, day of work, *no specification
enable/disable
*ON/OFF
remote UI
use SSL: ON/OFF
limit target***
address book ID No.: 7 characters max.

address book access No. control: ON/*OFF
limit new target: ON/*OFF
set device
information
device name: 32 characters

installation site: 32 characters
transfer
reception method, enable/disable condition, register, register for unconditional
settings***
transfer, importance of e-mail, detail/edit, delete, list print
delete bulletin
delete
auto shift to on-
shift to auto on-line: ON/*OFF
line/off-line
shift to auto off-line: ON/*OFF

date/time setting: set (12 numerals)
time zone: GMT - 12:00 to GMT + 12:00 - GMT + *9:00
daylight saving: ON/*OFF
register license
24 characters
set print
ON/*OFF
increase:
group ID: ON/*OFF

date: ON/*OFF
text: ON/*OFF
1.2.3.11 Copy Settings
0007-3169
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

*Factory settings.
**Items indicated in the presence of a specific accessory.
T-1-37
Mode
Description
preference key 1
none, individual modes
preference key 2
none, individual modes
1-51
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
auto sort**
*ON/OFF
auto vertical/horizontal
*ON/OFF
rotation
print photo mode
ON/*OFF
change standard mode
register/reset (at time of shipment: 1 set, auto paper, auto density,

auto image quality, local printer)
reset copy settings
Do you really want to reset? yes/no

(auto sort: on; face-down delivery: on; preference key: none)
1.2.3.12 Transmission/Reception Settings
0007-3170
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

*Factory settings.
**Items indicated in the presence of a specific category.
***If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the pence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard).
T-1-38
Mode
Description
set common
register source name***: 01 to 99; register/edit (24 characters max.), delete
communicatio
register user abbreviation***: 24 characters max.
ns settings
permit non-ASCII code for FTP**:
delete error file***: (*ON/OFF)
transfer error processing (always print/save/print/*off)
film photo mode***: OFF (ON/*OFF)
number of retries***: *3 times (0 to 5 times)
change standard mode for transmission function***:
read mode: black-and-white machine default :
*black 200 dpi/black 300 dpi/black 600 dpi/black 400 dpi

(if fax only, black 200x100*/black 200x; 200/black 200x400/black 400x400)
file format: *TIFF/PDF/PDF(OCR)
divide by page: ON/*OFF (toggle)
DONE stamp: ON/*OFF (toggle)
register routine task button***: (register/edit, delete M1 through M9)
register: Do you want to register? yes/no
name: 10 characters x 2 lines (max.)
confirm transmission of coded PDF file: (ON/*OFF)
1-52
Mode
Description
PDF (OCR setup)***
original orientation auto detection: (*ON/OFF)
number of OCR characters for file name: (1 through *24)
initial transmission screen***: routine task button/one-touch button/*new
address
source record***: *add/do not add
display location: inside image/*outside image display target abbreviation:
(*ON/OFF)
telephone No. mark: *FAX/TEL
communication mode: G3-G4/*G3 only
switch character code for e-mail/i-fax transmission: *GB2312/GB18030
reset transmission function settings: Do you want to reset? yes/no
set common
reception
settings***
duplex record (ON/*OFF)

cassette selection
switch A: (*ON/OFF)
switch B: (*ON/OFF)
switch C: (*ON/OFF)
switch D: (*ON/OFF)
image reduction
image reduction: (*ON/OFF)
reduction mode: *auto mode/fixed mode
rate of reduction in fixed mode: E210to: 75% to 97% (in 1% increments)/*90%
direction of reduction: vertical and horizontal, *vertical only
2-on-1 record: (ON/*OFF)
reception info record: add/*do not add
set fax basic
register user telephone No.***:
settings
telephone No.: 20 characters max.

sub address: 19 characters max.
sub address incoming: ON/*OFF
source No. notice: ON-OFF/*abbreviate
select line type***:
120V, 230V: *push tone, dial pulse, 10 PPS
100 V: *20 pps/10 pps/push tone
100V: *20pps/10pps/push tone
volume control
alarm sound level: 0 to 8 (*4)
0 to 8(*4)
off-hook alarm: (*ON*/OFF)
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
set fax
ECM transmission (*ON/OFF)
transmission
set pause length: (*1 to 15 sec/4 to 11 sec/3 to 6 sec)
function
auto re-dial: (*ON/OFF)
number of redials: 100V: 1-15 (*2), 120V: 1-10 (*2), 230V: 1-10 (*2)
intervals for redials (min): 2-99 (*2)
redial at communication error: 1st page and error page/all pages/off
communication mode: *G4-G3/G3 only
check dial tone before transmission: (*ON/OFF)
set fax
reception
settings***
ECM reception: (*ON/OFF)

select reception mode
fax/tel switchover: call start time: 0 to 30 sec (*8)
call length: 15 to 300 sec (*17)
operation after call: end/*receive
audio response: ON/*OFF
auto reception
modem dial-in fax/tel switchover
incoming ring: on (number of rings: 0 to N times)/*OFF
remote reception: on (remote reception ID: 00 to 99, 25)/*OFF
auto reception switch-over: on (length of ring: 1 to n sec)/*OFF

source record (G4): *add/do not add
source record position: inside image/*outside image
set fax
expansion line
register user telephone No.: 20 characters max.

register user abbreviation: 24 characters max.
select line type: *20 pps/10pps push tone
select transmission line:
line 1: *priority on transmission/prohibit transmission
line 2: priority on transmission/prohibit transmission
1.2.3.13 Transmission/Reception Settings

/ iR3530
*Factory default.
1-54
0009-2501
T-1-39
Mode
Description
set common
register sender***: 01 to 99: register/edit (24 characters max), delete
settings
register user abbreviation***: 24 characters max.

permit non-ASCII code for FTP transmission***: (ON/*OFF)
delete error file***: (*ON/OFF)
handle transfer error file***: print always/save/print/*OFF
print photo mode***: (ON/*OFF)
number of retries***: (*3 (0 to 5 times))
change transmission function standard mode***
read mode, file format, separate for page, SENT stamp
register routine task button***: register/edit, delete (18 items)
PDF (OCR setting)***
original rotation auto detection: (*ON/OFF)
number of characters for file OCR: (1 to *24)
initial display of transmission scan***: routine task button/one-touch button/
*new address
source record***: *keep/do not keep
transmission function setting reset***: Do you really want to reset? yes/no
set common
reception
function
settings***
duplex recording (ON/*OFF)

cassette selection
switch A: (*ON/OFF)
switch B: (*ON/OFF)
switch C: (*ON/OFF)
switch D: (*ON/OFF)
image reduction
image reduction: (*ON/OFF)
reduce mode: *auto mode/fixed mode
fixed mode reduction rate: E210 and up: 75% to 97% (in 1% increments),
*90%
reduction direction: vertical and horizontal, *vertical only
2-on-1 record: (ON/*OFF)
reception information record: keep/*do not keep
set fax basic
register user telephone No.
settings***
telephone No.: 20 characters max.

line type selection:
*push (tone)/dial (pulse) 10 PPS
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
volume control
alarm volume: 0 to 8(*4)
communication volume: 0 to 8(*4)
fax
transmission
ECM transmissions (*ON/OFF)

pause length setting: (1 to 15 sec; 2 sec*)
function
setup***
auto redial: (*ON/OFF)
pre-transmission dial tone check: (*ON/OFF)
fax reception
function
setting***
ECM reception: (*ON/OFF)

reception mode section
fax/tel switch, auto reception*
incoming ring: ON/*OFF
remote reception: ON/*OFF
auto reception switchover: ON/OFF
1.2.3.14 Box Settings
0007-3171
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

*Factory settings.
*If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the presence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard).
T-1-40
Mode
Description
set up/register user box
select box: 0 to 99
register box name: 24 characters max.
ID NO.: 0 to 99999999
file auto delete: 0: no, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hr; 1, 2, *3, 7, 30 days
URL transmissions setup: select e-mail address
reset
print photo mode
(ON/*OFF)
standard mode for read
register/reset
setup
set/register fax box***
select box: 0-49

ID No.: 0 to 9999999
URL transmission setup: select e-mail address
reset
1-56
Chapter 1
1.2.3.15 Box Settings
0009-2504
/ iR3530
*Factory default.
T-1-41
Mode
Description
set/register user box
select box: 0-99

ID No.: 0-9999999
file auto delete: 0: no; 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hr; 1, 2, *3, 7, 30 days
URL transmission setting: e-mail address selection
reset
print photo mode
(ON/*OFF)
read setting standard mode
register/reset
set/register fax box***
register box: 0-49

ID No.: 0-9999999
URL transmission setting: e-mail address selection
reset
1.2.3.16 Printer Settings
0007-3172
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

*Factory settings.
T-1-42
Mode
settings
Description
number of copies: 1 to 9999 (*1)
duplex: duplex/*simplex
pickup
default paper size: *A4 (additional 12 possible)
default paper type: plain (additional 8 possible)
paper size replacement: replace/*do not replace
1-57
Chapter 1
Mode
Description
adjust print
super smooth: *use/do not use
**toner density: 1 to 9 (*5)
toner save: enable/*disable
layout
bind position: *long side/short side
bind margin: -50to+50mm (*0.0)
horizontal correction/vertical correction: -50to+50mm (*0.0)
auto error skip** skip/*do not skip
secure print delete time length: *1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 24 hr
timeout: 5 to 300 (*15 sec)/disable
RIP: yes/*no
sorter**: *do not use/sort/rotation sort/rotation group/shift sort/shift
group/staple sort
punch**: *disable/top/bottom/left/right
booklet print**: *disable/open to left/open to right
middle bind**: enable/*disable
transparency interleaf: *disable/white sheet/printed sheet
print in sets
print in sets: enable/*disable
print position: *5 locations/upper left/lower left/upper right/lower right
print start character: 1 to 9999 (*1)
print size: small at 12-point/medium at 24-point/large at 36-point
density: 1 to 5 (*3)
printer operating mode: *auto (additional 6 settings possible)
priority emulation** (*none/4 additional settings possible)
auto switchover**
LIPS: *enable/disable
ESC-P: *enable/disable
15577: *enable/disable
HP-GL: *enable/disable
connection recognition: *enable/disable
printer settings rest: yes/no
1.2.3.17 Address Book Settings

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
*Factory settings.
1-58
0007-3173
Chapter 1
*If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the presence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard).
T-1-43
Mode
Description
fax (register
register name: 24 characters
target)
register name: 24 superscript characters

telephone No.: 120 characters max. (+, pause, tone, <, >, backspace, space,
ISDN sub address, F-Net, DT, R, PIN, sub settings)
Sub Settings
F code: 20 characters max.
password: 20 characters max.
ECM transmission: *ON/OFF
transmission speed: 33600 bps*/14400bps/9600 bps/4800 bps
international transmission: *domestic/international transmission (1)/
international transmission (2)/international transmission (3)
communication mode: G4 to G3*/G3 only
e-mail (target
registration)

e-mail address: 128 characters
i-fax (target
registration)

select mode: *Simple/Full
i-fax address: 128 characters
server route: ON/*OFF
fixed sentence 1: 40 characters
fixed sentence 2: 16 characters
fine settings
paper size: A4/LTR+ B4,A3/11x17
compression method: MH+ MR/MMR
resolution: 200x100dpi,200x200dpi+200x400dpi/300x300dpi/400x400dpi/
600x600dpi
1-59
Mode
Description
file (register
address)

protocol: *FTP/Windows(SMB)/Netware(IPX)
host name: 128 characters
path to folder: 128 characters
user name: FTP,Netware(IPX) : 24 characters
Windows(SMB): 15 characters
password: FTP,Netware(IPX): 24 characters
Windows(SMB): 14 characters
group (register
target)

address book: existing in Address Book: select fax, e-mail, i-fax, remove file
system, Jet Send, Box, local printer
stored in Box: select Box: 00- to 99
delete
register target
(server)
simplified search
server to search: select from pull-down menu (LDAP server already registered)
(register target)
(search condition): name: 128 characters
e-mail: 128 characters
fax: 128 characters
fine search
server to search: select from pull-down menu (LDAP server already registered)
search conditions): *name/email/fax/organization/organization-based
*including next/not including next/identical to next/not identical to next/starts
with next/ends with next
name, organization, organization-based: 128 characters
e-mail, fax: 128 characters
(combinations of conditions): *OR/AND
search results
address type: all e-mail/fax
register e-mail as i-fax: ON/*OFF (toggle)
register address
book
register onetouch button
register address/edit: register/edit, delete

one-touch name: 12 characters long
Chapter 1
1.2.4 Maintenance by the User

1.2.4.1 Cleaning
0007-4601
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

- Copyboard Glass, Copyboard Cover (back; copyboard cover type H)
Advise the user to clean the surface of the copyboard glass and the back of the copyboard cover at least once a month.
Cleaning Procedure
Using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent, wipe the surface of the copyboard glass [1] and the
back of the copyboard cover [2]; thereafter, dry wipe the surfaces with a dry, soft cloth.
F-1-29
F-1-30
1.2.4.2 Inspection
0007-4603
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
1-61
Chapter 1
- Checking the Operation of the Leakage Breaker

Advise the user to check the leakage breaker once or twice a month on a regular basis. Be sure also to ask the user
to keep a record of checks.
Inspection Procedure
1) Turn on the main power switch.
2) Push he test button [1] of the leakage breaker with the tip of a ball-point pen [2].
3) Check to make sure that the breaker switch shifts to the OFF side and the power is cut.
F-1-31
4) Turn off the main power switch.
5) Shift the breaker switch [1] back to the ON position.
F-1-32
If the breaker switch has stopped between ON and OFF, be sure to shift it to OFF first and then back to ON.
1-62
Chapter 1
F-1-33
F-1-34
1.2.5 Safety
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light
0007-3174
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

Laser light can prove to be hazardous to the human body. The machine's laser unit is fully enclosed in a protective
housing and external covers so that its light will not escape outside as long as the machine is used normally.
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations
0007-3175
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put into force regulations
concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured on and after
August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied States.
The label shown here indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser
products that are sold in the United States.
1-63
Chapter 1
F-1-35
A different description may be used for a different product.
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit
0007-3176
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

If you must service the area around the machine's laser unit, be sure to take full care to avoid exposure to laser light:
do not insert a tool (e.g., screwdriver or those with a high reflectance) into the laser path; also, remove watches, rings,
and the like before starting the work, as they reflect laser light.
The machine's laser light is red in color, and an appropriate label ([1], [2]) is attached to all covers that can reflect
laser light. Keep also in mind that the machine's laser unit cannot be adjusted in the field.
1-64
Chapter 1
[1]
[2]
F-1-36
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner
0007-3177
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Toner on Clothing or Skin
1. If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water.
2. Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth.
3. Do not bring toner into contact with plastic material. It tends to react easily.
1.2.6 Product Specifications

1.2.6.1 Product Specifications
0007-2862
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
1-65
Copyboard
stream reading, fixed reading
Body
desktop
Light source type
LED array (CIS)
Photosensitive medium
OPC drum (30-mm dia.)
Image reading method
CCD (CIS)
Reproduction method
indirect electrostatic
Exposure method
by laser light
Charging method
by AC charging roller
Development method
1-component toner projection
Transfer method
by transfer roller
Separation method
by curvature + static eliminator
Cassette pickup method
retard
Multifeeder pickup
dual processing
method
Drum cleaning method
by cleaning blade
Fixing method
on-demand
Delivery method
face-down
Reproduction ratio
25% to 400%
Warm-up time
iR 2270, iR2870, iR2230, iR2830: 30 sec or less; iR

3870, iR4570, iR3530: 40 sec or less
Image margin (leading
2.5 +/-1.5 mm (single-sided); 2.5 +/-2.0 mm (doubles-
edge)
sided)
Image margin (trailing
B4 or smaller: 2.5 +1.1, -1.7 mm; B4 or larger: 3.5
edge)
+0.6, -2.8 mm; free-side: 5.5 +1.5, -45. mm (singlesided), 0.5 mm or more (double-sided)
Image margin (left/
left edge: 2.5 +1.5 mm (single-sided), 2.5 mm +2.0
right)
(double-sided); right edge: 0.5 mm or more (singlesided), 0.5 mm or more (double-sided)
Non-image width
2.5 +/-1.5 mm or less
(leading edge)
Non-image width
B4 or smaller: 2.5 +1.1, -1.7 mm; B4 or larger: 3.5
(trailing edge)
+0.6, -2.8 mm; free-size: 5.5 +1.5, -4.5 mm
Non-image width (left/
2.5 +/-1.5 mm or less
right)
Number of gradations
256 gradations
Reading resolution
600 x 600 dpi
Copying resolution
1200 dpi (equivalent) x 600 dpi
Printing resolution
2400 dpi (equivalent) x 600 dpi
First print time
iR 2270, iR2870, iR2230, iR2830: 4.9 sec or less; iR

3870, iR4570, iR3530: 3.9 sec or less
Cassette capacity
550 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multifeeder tray
50 sheets (80 g/m2)
capacity
Continuous
1 to 999
reproduction
Toner level detection
keys
function
Toner type
magnetic negative toner
Original type
sheet, book
Maximum original size
297 x 431.8 mm
Original size detection
by reflection type sensor
function
Duplex method
without tray
Sleep mode
yes
Option
See the system configuration chart.
Operating environment
15 to 27.5 deg C
(temperature range)
25% to 75%
(humidity range)
0.6 to 1.0 atm
(atmospheric pressure)
Noise
iR 2270, iR2870, iR2230, iR2830: standby, 40 dB; in

operation, 66 dB
iR 3870, iR4570, iR3530: standby,
50 dB; in operation, 71 dB
Power supply rating
100/120/230 V
Power consumption
1350 W or less
(maximum)
Chapter 1
Power consumption
iR 2270, iR2870, iR2230, iR2830: standby, 36 Wh

(reference only) / continuous printing: 543 Wh
(reference only)
iR 3570, iR4570, iR3530: standby,
37 Wh (reference only) / continuous printing: 823 Wh

(reference only)
Ozone
max.: 0.02 ppm or less; avr: 0.01 ppm or less
Dimensions
565 mm x 700 mm x 761.4 mm (WxDxH)
Weight
body: 61.6 kg; reader unit: 8.7 kg; ADF: 8.5 kg
1.2.7 Function List

1.2.7.1 Printing Speed
0007-7885
iR2270 / iR2870
Max/Min (max when the machine has fully cooled)
A value in brackets [ ] represents the iR2270/2230.
T-1-44
Single-sided
Auto duplexing
Paper size
Plain
paper
1-68
cassette feed
manual feed
cassette feed
manual feed
A4
28[22]
25[22]
A5R
17/14
17/14
B5
27[22]
25[22]
B5R
17/14
17/14
A4R
17/14
17/14
B4
24/13
13
A3
14
14
STMTR
17/14
17/14
LTR
28[22]
25[22]
LTRR
17/14
17/14
LGL
13
13
LDR
14
14
free
13
Chapter 1
Single-sided
Auto duplexing
Paper size
Heavy
paper
OHP
Envelope
cassette feed
manual feed
cassette feed
manual feed
A4
25
A5R
13
B5
23[22]
B5R
13
A4R
13
B4
11
A3
12
STMTR
13
LTR
25[22]
LTRR
13
LGL
11
LDR
12
Postcard
12/8
free
11
A4
25[22]
LTR
25[22]
Monarch
10/6
COM10
10/6
ISO-B5
10/6
ISO-C5
10/6
DL
10/6
10/6
YOGATA
No.4
1.2.7.2 Printing Speed
0007-7696
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Max/Min (max when the machine has fully cooled)
A value in brackets [ ] represents the iR3570/3530.
1-69
T-1-45
Single-sided
Paper
size
Plain
paper
Auto duplexing
cassette feed
manual feed
cassette feed
manual feed
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
45[35
A4
15
25
22
12
A5R
20/16
15
17/14
10/8
8/7
B5
35
15
25
17
12
B5R
20/16
17/14
10/8
8/7
A4R
20/16
17/14
10/8
8/7
B4
24/16
13
12/8
A3
22
14
11
STMTR
20/16
15
17/14
10/8
8/7
45[35
Heavy
paper
LTR
15
25
22
12
LTRR
20/16
17/14
10/8
8/7
LGL
16/14
13
8/7
LDR
22
14
11
free
13
A4
25
A5R
14
B5
25
B5R
14
A4R
14
B4
12
A3
12
STMTR
14
LTR
25
LTRR
14
LGL
12
LDR
12
card
18/10
free
12
Post-
Chapter 1
Single-sided
Paper
cassette feed
manual feed
cassette feed
manual feed
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
dlvry
A4
25
LTR
25
12/8
COM10
12/8
ISO-B5
12/8
ISO-C5
12/8
DL
12/9
12/8
size
OHP
Envelop
Auto duplexing
Monarc
yogata
NO.4
1.2.7.3 Types of Paper
0007-7893
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
T-1-46
Source
Type
Size
Manual
feed tray
Plain paper, eco
A3, B4, A4R, LDR, LGL,
paper, recycled paper
LTRR, B5, EXE, A5R,
Cassette
Side Paper
Deck-Q1
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
STMTR, B5R
A4, LTR
1-71
Chapter 1
Source
Type
Size
Manual
feed tray
Special
Heavy
paper
paper
LTRR, B5, EXE, A5R,
Cassette
Side Paper
Deck-Q1
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
no
STMTR, B5R, A4, LTR

OHP
A4, LTR
Postcard
postcard A6R modified;

double-postcard A5R
modified
4-plane
A4 modified
postcard
Label
A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
paper
3-hole
same as plain
paper
Tracing
A3, B4, A4
paper
Envelope
Com10, Monarch, DL, ISOC5ISO-B5
1.2.7.4 Types of Paper
0009-4747
/ iR3530
T-1-47
Source
Type
Size
Manual
feed tray
Plain paper, eco
paper, recycled paper
LTRR, B5, EXE, A5R,
Cassette
yes
yes
yes
yes
STMTR, B5R
A4, LTR
1-72
Source
Type
Size
Manual
feed tray
Special
Heavy
paper
paper
LTRR, B5, EXE, A5R,
Cassette
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
STMTR, B5R, A4, LTR

OHP
A4, LTR
Postcard
postcard A6R modified;

double-postcard A5R
modified
4-plane
A4 modified
postcard
Label
A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
paper
3-hole
same as plain
paper
Tracing
A3, B4, A4
paper
Envelope
Com10, Monarch, DL, ISOC5ISO-B5
Chapter 2Installation
Contents
Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ............................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation ................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Before Starting the Work (230V) ................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 Unpacking and Installation................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials ................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.2 Installing the Toner Bottle......................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.3 Installing the Drum Unit............................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.2.4 Securing the Copier Main Unit ................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.2.5 Connecting the Cable ................................................................................................................................ 2-20
2.2.6 Stirring Toner ............................................................................................................................................ 2-21
2.2.7 Setting the Cassettes .................................................................................................................................. 2-21
2.2.8 APVC Correction of the Drum.................................................................................................................. 2-23
2.2.9 Adjusting the Image Position .................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.2.10 Attaching Other Parts .............................................................................................................................. 2-28
2.2.11 If Not Connected to a Network ............................................................................................................... 2-32
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ........................................................................................................ 2-33
2.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 2-33
2.3.2 Using the PING Function .......................................................................................................................... 2-33
2.3.3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address ....................................................................................... 2-33
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network........................................................................................................................... 2-35
2.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 2-35
2.4.2 Making a Check Using a Loopback Address ............................................................................................ 2-35
2.4.3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address .......................................................................................... 2-35
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations...................................................................................................................... 2-36
2.5.1 Checking the Image Quality and Operation .............................................................................................. 2-36
2.6 Installing the Card Reader ................................................................................................................................ 2-37
2.6.1 Points to Note ............................................................................................................................................ 2-37
2.6.2 Checking the Contents............................................................................................................................... 2-37
2.6.3 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................ 2-38
2.6.4 Installation in a NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Environment ....................................................................... 2-42
2.7 Installing the NE Controller ............................................................................................................................. 2-43
2.7.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ................................................................................................................ 2-43
Chapter 2
2.1 Making Pre-Checks

2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation
0007-4754
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

Select the site of installation against the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before delivery of the
machine:
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for exclusive use by the machine.
2) The environment of the room must be as indicated in the following diagram, and the machine must not be installed
near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator:
Humidity (%RH)
80
75
60
40
25
20
10
0
(32)
10
(50)
15
(59)
20
(68)
27.5 30
(81.5)(86)
Temperature
F-2-1
3) The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas.
If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the window.
4) The room must be well ventilated. (The level of ozone generated by the machine in use will not affect the
individuals around it. However, some may find its odor to be unpleasant, as when working in a poorly ventilated
room.)
5) The floor of the machine must be level so that the feet of the machine will remain in contact and the machine will
remain level.
6) The machine must be at least 10 cm away from any wall, permitting unobstructed use.
- Without a Finisher or Side Paper Deck-P1 Installed
2-1
Chapter 2
1,158 mm
100 mm min.
1,035 mm
F-2-2
- Without a DADF-N1, Finisher S1, and Side Paper Deck-Q1 Installed
1,087 mm
1,015 mm
100 mm min.
1,228 mm
1,371 mm
182 mm
1,553 mm
F-2-3
- With a DADF-N1, Side Paper Deck-Q1, Saddle Finisher-Q4, Buffer Path Unit-E1, and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/
P1 Installed
1,169 mm
100 mm min.
1,983 mm
107 mm
2,091 mm
F-2-4
7) The machine must be placed in a well ventilated area. It is important to make sure, however, that the machine is
not near the air vent (for suction) of the room.
2-2
Chapter 2
2.1.2 Before Starting the Work (230V)
0008-3400
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1-1 Points to Make Before Installation
Be sure to go through the following before starting the work:
1) If you are installing the machine after moving it from a cold to warm location, be sure to leave the machine
unpacked for at least 2 hours so that the machine is fully used to the site temperature, thus avoiding image faults
caused by condensation. (The term "condensation" refers to the formation of droplets of water on the surface of a
metal object brought in from a cold to warm place, i.e., as the result of the rapid cooling of the moisture (vapor)
around the object.)
2) The machine weighs a maximum of about 80 kg(including a DADF). Be sure to work in a group of 4 persons when
lifting it.
1-2 Checking the Contents
Check to be sure that none of the following contents is missing:
2-3
F-2-5
T-2-1
[1]
Drum unit
1p
[9]
Dial label
1pc
[10]
Size label(small)
1pc
c
[2]
Toner bottle (230V CA model only)
1p
c
(ADF standard model

only)
[3]
Lower right cover
1p
[11]
c
[4]
Adjusting screw
2p
covering rubber
1p
c
2pc*
Label
[12]
c
[5]
Shut-Down Warning
Toner Bottle Warning
1pc
Label
[13]
Stamp (DADF standard

model only)
1pc
Chapter 2
[6]
Service book case
1p
[14]
Power Cable
1pc
[15]
Ferrite core
1pc
c
[7]
Reversing Guide(iR3570 / 4570
1p
model only)
[8]
Cassette size label
1p
c
*230V CA mode --- 1pc

Check the documentation and CD against the following table:
T-2-2
- 230V EUR model
Operators manual: Users Guide
Operators manual CD-ROM
MEAP Admin.CD-ROM
T-2-3
- 230V model, 230V CA model
Operators manual: Reference Guide
Operators manual: Copying/Mail Box Function Guide
Operators manual: Easy Operation Guide
Operators manual CD-ROM: NW/RUI Guide
MEAP Admin.CD-ROM
1-3 Names of Parts
2-5
Chapter 2
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[18]
[6]
[17]
[7]
[16]
[8]
[15]
[9]
[10]
[14]
[11]
[13]
[12]
F-2-6
[2] DADF (Option)
[4] Control panel
[6] Support cover
[8] Delivery tray
[11] Cassette 1
[12] Cassette 2
[14] Left cover
[17] Delivery tray rear cover (lower)
[18] Delivery tray rear cover
2-6
Chapter 2
[19]
[20]
[21]
[29]
[28]
[22]
[27]
[23]
[26]
[25]
[24]
F-2-7
[19] Reader over (right)
[20] Copyboard glass
[22] Face over
[23] Rear cover
[28] Delivery cover
2-7
Chapter 2
2.2
Unpacking
Installation
2.2.1
Unpacking
and
and
Removing the Packaging

Materials
0006-6724
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

F-2-9
1) Unpack and remove the plastic bags.
- When installing a pedestal to the copier at the same
time, unpack it in the same way.
2) When installing the copier on the 2-cassette
Pedestal-Y2, open the right door [1] of the pedestal.
3) Hold the recesses [2] of the copier with 4 or more
people, and place it on the pedestal.
4) Close the right door of the pedestal (in the case of

the 2-cassette Pedestal-Y2).
5) Remove the packaging tapes and materials from
each unit.
- Front door
- Right door
- Manual feeder unit
- Cassettes 1 and 2
- Inside the cassettes 1 and 2
- DADF (In the case of the model with a DADF)
- Platen glass
6) When installing the copier to the 2-cassette
Pedestal-Y2, follow the installation procedure for
the 2-cassette Pedestal-Y2.
F-2-8
7) Remove the optical system fixing screw [1] at the

outside of the right cover in the reader unit. (Keep
the optical system fixing screw for future relocation
of the copier.)
The maximum weight of the copier is approx. 80kg

(including the DADF), so be sure to lift it with 4 or
more people.
Memo: When placing the copier on the cassette

pedestal, be sure to align the two positioning pins [1]
to the holes on the base plate of the copier.
F-2-10
8) Open the right door [1].
2-8
Chapter 2
1) Open the front cover [1].
F-2-11
F-2-13
9) Remove the fixing assembly release cover [1].
Reference
2) Lift the lock lever [1].
To facilitate the work, try detaching it from the front

top [2] of the fixing assembly release cover [1] in the
direction of the arrow.
F-2-14
3) Unpack the toner bottle and remove the cap [1].
F-2-12
If you turn on the machine without detaching the
fixing assembly release cover, the fixing heater can
suffer damage.
F-2-15
10) Close the right door.
4) Mount the toner bottle [1] on the copier.
2.2.2 Installing the Toner

Bottle
0007-4955
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
2-9
Chapter 2
F-2-18
F-2-16
5) Push down the lock lever [1] so that the toner bottle
2) Remove the waste toner box [1].
is secured.
F-2-19
F-2-17
Be sure to shift down the locking lever until it is
fully horizontal; otherwise, no supply of toner will
be made.
2.2.3 Installing the Drum

Unit
0006-6766
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1) Remove the two screws [1] and detach the front
cover unit [2] as sliding it to the left.
2-10
F-2-20
4) Remove the lock screw[1] of the developing
assembly pressure lever.
Chapter 2
F-2-21
F-2-24
5) Turn the developing assembly pressure lever [1] to
7) Remove the package of the drum unit, which is
the left and release the pressure.
provided with the product, and remove the two

drum pressure release blocks [1].
F-2-22
F-2-25
6) Remove the one screw [1] and take out the dummy
drum [2].
- Do not touch the photosensitive drum surface.
- Do not expose the photosensitive drum surface to
light for a long period of time.
- Do not touch the rowel of the drum.
8) Mount the drum unit [1], which is provided with the
product, to the copier.
F-2-23
2-11
Chapter 2
10) Push down the developing assembly pressure

lever [1] and apply pressure.
F-2-26
F-2-29
Be careful where you hold the drum unit.
11) Secure the developing assembly pressure lever

with the one screw [1].
F-2-30
F-2-27
13) Mount the waste toner box [1].
9) Secure the drum unit with the one screw [1] with
which the dummy drum has been secured.
F-2-31
Point to note after attaching the waste toner
F-2-28
2-12
receptacle
Chapter 2
After attaching the waste toner receptacle, move the

waste toner full detection lever [1] up and down to
make sure that the lever is moved smoothly. Faulty
detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in
something and is not moved smoothly.
F-2-34
2) While matching the top [4] of the front cover unit
against the machine, fit the lower left claw [2] of the
front cover unit [1] in the claw hole [3] of the
F-2-32
machine.
14) Mount the front cover unit [3] with the two screws
[2] and mount the covering rubber [1], which is
provided with the product.
F-2-33
F-2-35
3) While matching the 2 claws [2] of the front cover
Reference
unit [1], slide the front cover unit [1] to the right.
Mounting the Front Cover

1) Fit the 2 claws [2] of the front cover unit [1] into the
claw holes [3] of the machine.
2-13
Chapter 2
until the screw legs touch the bottom slightly.
F-2-38
F-2-36
2) Check if the machine wobbles while it is lying on

the desk or the floor, and tighten the adjusting
15) Close the front cover [1].
screws if necessary.
- When it wobbles in the direction shown by the arrow
A, tighten the screw at the right side in the above
picture.
- When it wobbles in the direction shown by the arrow
B, tighten the screw at the left side in the above
picture.
[B]
F-2-37
[A]
[A]
2.2.4 Securing the Copier

Main Unit
[B]
0006-6767
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

- With a pedestal installed
1) Move the copier to the location where it will be
installed, and then secure it with the 4 adjuster
wheels of the pedestal.
- Without a pedestal installed
1) Remove the cassettes 1 and 2 and tighten the
adjusting screws [1] at the base plate temporarily
2-14
F-2-39
3) Mount the cassettes 1 and 2.
Chapter 2
2.2.5 Connecting the Cable
0007-5059
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
2.2.6 Stirring Toner
1) If you are installing a cassette pedestal, remove the
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
0007-5062
lattice connector cover, and fit the lattice connector

[1] of the cassette pedestal to the machine.
1) Enter the Service Mode. (Press "*" first, and "2"

and "8" at the same time, and then "*.")
2) Select COPIER >FUNCTION > INSTALL>
[1]
TONER-S.
3) Press the OK key.
- Toner stirring time is approx. 6 minutes. After
counting up, it stops automatically.
- Make the cassette settings before toner stirring is
completed. (See Setting the Cassettes.)
F-2-40
2.2.7 Setting the Cassettes

2) Connect the power plug to the power outlet.
0007-5065
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
1. Power supply voltage shall be +/-10% of the rating.

2. The amperage of the power supply must be as rated.
3. Before connecting the power plug, check to be sure
that the main power switch is off.
1) Press the cassette release button, and draw out the

cassette to the front.
2) Check the paper series that the user is going to use,
and verify whether or not the paper series selection
switch [1] in the cassette matches that of the user's
selection. If not, change the paper size series to the

- The machine issues a message to indicate that it is
loading programs.
appropriate one.
3) Set the paper size selection dial [2] to the paper size
of the paper to be placed.
- The machine issues a message to indicate that its

printer is getting ready for a job.
Turning Off the Main Power

Whenever you have to turn off the main power, be
sure to go through the following to avoid damage to
the hard disk:
1. Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec
or more.
2. Go through the instructions for the shut-down
sequence shown on the display so that the main power
switch may be turned off.
3. Turn off the main power switch.
2-15
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-43
7) Place sheets in the cassette, and then push the
F-2-41
cassette into the machine.

8) Do the same operation to the other cassette.
4) Hold the lever [1] of the side guide plate, and set the
side guide plate to the appropriate size.
5) Turn the end guide plate [2] to the right and detach
9) If a cassette pedestal is installed, make the cassette

settings in reference to the installation procedure of
the cassette pedestal.
it. Following the instructions given on the base

plate of the cassette, set the end guide plate to the
appropriate size.
2.2.8 APVC Correction of

the Drum
0007-5071
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1) Enter the Service Mode. (Press "*" first, and "2"
and "8" at the same time, and then "*.")
2) Select COPIER >FUNCTION > DPC> DGAMMA.
- Paper is fed from the cassette 1 (regardless of size of
paper in the cassette).
- If there is no paper in the cassette 1, paper is fed from
the lower cassette.
- That paper is delivered as it remains blank, and
F-2-42
APVC correction is automatically completed.

4) Press the Reset key twice to exit the Service Mode.
6) Affix the appropriate cassette size label [1] to the

front side of the cassette.
There are cases where a small amount of toner, which
is spilled inside the machine due to toner stirring, is
attached to test copies (at the rear surface). It is solved
after making about three test copies.
2-16
Chapter 2
4) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2.

5) Check the position of the index [1] on the adjusting
plate.
2.2.9 Adjusting the Image

Position
0008-2475
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

- Adjusting the Margin (1st side; mechanical)
1) Using the cassettes 1 and 2 and the manual feeder
as the source of paper, make copies, and check to be
sure that the left margin L1 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
[1]
L1
image
F-2-46
*Adjusting the Cassette 1
F-2-44
6) Remove the 2 claws [2], and detach the grip (right

front) [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]Paper feed direction

*If the margin is not as indicated when the cassette 1
or 2 is used as the source of paper, make the
following adjustments:
2) In the case of a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2, open its
right door [1].
3) Open the lower right cover [2], and remove the 2
screws to detach the cover (lower right front).
F-2-47
7) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the adjusting plate
[1].
8) While referring to the index you checked in step 5),
[2]
move the adjusting plate back and forth. Moving

the adjusting plate toward the rear of the machine
[3]
F-2-45
[1]
will increase the left margin L1 of the image.
2-17
Chapter 2
F-2-50
F-2-48
[1]
[1]
image
L1
L1
image
F-2-51
F-2-49
9) Tighten the fixing screw.
10) Fit the cassette 1 back in.
9) Fit the cassette 2 back in.
11) Make a copy, and check to be sure that the left
10) Make a copy, and check to see that the left margin
margin of the image on paper picked up from the
of the image on paper picked up from the cassette 2
cassette 1 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
12) Fit the grip (right front) back in.
11) Attach the right front cover of the machine.
13) Attach the right cover of the machine.
*If the left margin on paper picked up from the
*Adjusting the Cassette 2
manual feeder is not as indicated, make the
following adjustments:
[1].
move the adjusting plate back and forth. Moving
the adjusting plate toward the rear of the machine
will increase the left margin L1 of the image.
2) Remove the paper from the manual feed tray.

3) Loosen the fixing screw [1] of the manual feed tray
upper cover.
move the manual feed tray upper cover back and
forth. Moving the manual feed tray upper cover
toward the rear of the machine will increase the left
margin of the image L1.
2-18
Chapter 2
[1]
L1
image
F-2-54
3) If not as indicated, change the small paper 2nd side
horizontal registration setting.
F-2-52
small
paper:
service
mode
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REF
An increase of '1' will increase the left margin of the
image by 0.1 mm.
4) Enter the new value (obtained as the result of the
[1]
L1
image
foregoing adjustment) as the large paper 2nd side

horizontal registration setting.
Large
F-2-53
5) Tighten the fixing screw of the manual feed tray
paper:
service
mode
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-RE-L.
5) Make a double-sided copy using the cassette 2, and
check to make sure that the left margin of the image
on the 2nd side is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.
upper cover.
6) Put paper in the manual feed tray.
[1]
7) Make a copy, and check to make user that the left
L1
margin of the image on paper picked up from the
image
manual feed tray is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

F-2-55
- Adjusting the Margin (2nd side)

Make adjustments separately for both small paper and
[1]Paper feed detection
large paper:
small paper: A4, B5, and the like whose length in feed
direction is shorter than LTR.
6) If not as indicated, change the large paper 2nd side

horizontal registration adjustment setting.
large paper: A3, A4R, B5R, and the like whose length
large
in feed direction is longer than LTR.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-RE-L
1) Put small paper in the cassette 1 and large paper in
An increase of '1' will increase the left margin of the
the cassette 2.
paper:
service
mode
image by 0.1 mm.
2) Make a double-sided copy using the cassette 1, and

check to be sure that the left margin L1 of the image
- Leading edge margin
on the 2nd side is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.
Make a copy using the cassette 1, and check to be sure

that the leading edge margin L1 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm. If
2-19
Chapter 2
not, be sure to make the following adjustments
attached.
1) Make the following in service mode: COPIER
- Inside the machine (Inner side of the front cover)

- Locations where the louver is blocked.
>ADJUST >FEED-ADJ >REGIST.

2) Change the setting to make adjustments. (A change
- Locations where the grips are blocked.
of '1' made to the setting will cause a move of 0.1
Memo:
mm. A lower setting will move the image toward
Attach the service book holder to the left cover of the
the leading edge.)
machine if the pedestal is not installed.

L1
- Lower right cover

1) Attach the lower right cover [1]. (Perform this step
when attaching the machine to the 2-level cassette
pedestal Y2 or more.)
F-2-56
2.2.10
Attaching
Other
Parts
0007-5087
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

- Service Book Holder
1) Remove release paper of the double-sided tape on
the rib of the service book folder [1], and attach the
holder to the bottom plate of the pedestal.
F-2-58
- Shut-Down Warning Label

1) Attach the Shut-Down warning label [1] of the
appropriate language to the right cover (rear) of the
machine (i.e.,. on the left inside [2] of the main
power supply.).
[2]
F-2-57
[1]
F-2-59
Locations where the service book folder cannot be
2-20
Chapter 2
- Toner Bottle Warning Label
[1]
[2]
F-2-62
F-2-60
2) Attach the Toner Bottle warning label [1] of the
appropriate language behind [2] the front cover.
[2]
When installing the machine newly or when

replacing the harness, be sure not to leave behind
the ferrite core.
- Reversing Guide (iR3570/4570 model only)

1) Fit the reversing guide [1].
[1]
F-2-61
- Ferrite Core (230V model only)

1) Fit the ferrite core [1] to the network cable [2].
F-2-63
Be sure to fit the ferrite core as follows to protect

against noise:
- Be sure to fit it as close to the joint between the
machine and the network cable as possible.
2.2.11 If Not Connected to

a Network
- The harness must be wound around the ferrite core

once before the core is fixed in place.
0007-6496
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
- The harness is not trapped by the ferrite core.

Reference
If the machine is not connected to a network, its
control panel will indicate the message "Check the
Connection to the Network." To disable the message,
turn off the following user mode item:
2-21
system setup>network>Ethernet driver setup>auto detect
Chapter 2
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network

2.3.1 Overview
0007-5605
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The instructions that follow apply only when the machine is connected to a network.
If the user's network environment is based on TCP/IP, use the PING function to make sure that the network settings
are correct.
If the user's network environment is based on IPX/SPX or AppleTalk, on the other hand, such a check need not be
made.
2.3.2 Using the PING Function
0007-5600
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING.
2) Enter the correct IP address using the control panel keypad, and press the OK key.
3) Press the Start key.
- If successful, the indication will be 'OK'. If the attempt fails, however, 'NG' will be indicated.
<NETWORK>
< 1/1 >
<READY >
0. 0. 0. 0
PING
[2]
[1]
+/-
OK
F-2-64
[1] Result (OK/NG)
[2] IP address input
2.3.3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address
0007-5603
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

You can use a remote host address in combination with the PING function to check the connection to the network.
The term "remote host address" refers to the IP address of a PC that is connected to the TCP/IP network to which the
machine is connected.
1) Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the network connection using the PING function.
2-23
2) Ask the system administrator for the appropriate remote host address.
3) Enter the remote host address for PING.
4) If the result is 'OK', the connection to the network is correct.
5) If the result is 'NG', the connection to the network is not correct; start the following troubleshooting work:
Chapter 2
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network

2.4.1 Overview
0007-5609
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The instructions that follow apply only when the machine is connected to a network.
If an attempt to connect to the network fails, the following may be suspected:
a.the connection between the machine and the network is faulty.
b.the machine's TCP/IP setting is faulty.
c.the user's network is faulty.
d.the main controller PCB is faulty.
Make checks by referring to the following detailed instructions:
2.4.2 Making a Check Using a Loopback Address
0007-5612
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

A loopback address will return before it reaches the network controller. When you execute PING using a loopback
address, you can find out whether the machine's TCP/IP setting is correct.
1) Enter the appropriate loopback address (127.0.0.1) for PING.
- If 'NG', check the machine's TCP/IP setting once again, and execute PING once again.
- If 'OK', go to the next check.
2.4.3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address
0007-5614
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

A local host address is the IP address of the machine. When you execute PING using the address, it will return after
it has reached the network controller so that you will be able to find out whether the network controller (main
controller PCB) is free of a fault or not.
1) Enter the IP address of the machine for PING.
If 'NG' is indicated, perform the following, and execute PING once again:
- if the IP address of the machine is faulty, check to be sure that the IP address setting is correct or, as necessary,
report to the system administrator to see if the IP address is valid.
- if the main controller PCB is faulty, replace the PCB.
If 'OK' is indicated, suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report to the system administrator for
appropriate remedial action.
2-25
Chapter 2
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations

2.5.1 Checking the Image Quality and Operation
0007-5619
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1) Place the Test Chart on the copyboard glass, and make copies using the individual cassettes as the source of paper;
then, check the output images.
- be sure that there is no abnormal sound.
- be sure that the images are correct at all reproduction ratios.
- be sure that as many copies as specified are made normally.
2) Make settings (e.g., date, time) to suit the needs of the user.
3) Start service mode.
- press the User Mode key, press the 2 and 8 keys at the same time, press the User Mode key once again
4) Make specifications-related settings to suit the needs of the user: COPIER>OPTION>USER.
5) Make test prints by making the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT.
6) Put the output [1] in the Service Book case for storage.
F-2-65
7) Press the Reset key twice to stop service mode.
8) Clean up the area around the machine, and fill out the form in the Service Book.
2-26
Chapter 2
2.6 Installing the Card Reader

2.6.1 Points to Note
0007-2705
iR2270 / iR2870
The card reader must be used in combination with the Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1.
2.6.2 Checking the Contents
0007-2707
iR2270 / iR2870
<Card Reader-C1>
T-2-4
[1]
Card Reader-C1
1 pc.
[2]
RS tightening screw (M4x10)
1 pc.
[3]
Toothed washer
1 pc.
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-2-66
<Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1>
2-27
Chapter 2
T-2-5
[1]
Card reader base
1 pc.
[2]
Relay harness
1 pc.
[3]
TP screw (M4x25)
1 pc.
[4]
TP screw (M4x8)
1 pc.
[5]
Toothed washer
2 pc.
F-2-67
2.6.3 Installation Procedure
0007-2709
iR2270 / iR2870
When you have installed the Card Reader-C1, make the following selections, COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL>
CARD, and enter the card number you will be using; otherwise, the card will not be recognized upon insertion.
Be sure to go through the following steps on the host machine before starting the work:
1. Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
2. Go through the shutdown sequence as instructed on the screen so that you may turn off the main power switch.
3. Turn off the main power switch.
4. Disconnect the power cable (from the wall outlet).
2-28
Chapter 2
[1]
ON
/OF
F
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-2-68
1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right cover [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].
[3]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-2-69
4) Remove the face plate [2] from the right cover (rear) [1] using nippers.
2-29
Chapter 2
[2]
[1]
F-2-70
5) Connect the relay cable [1] to the connector of the host machine.
F-2-71
6) Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws.
7) Mount the card reader [1] and the card reader base [2] using the included TP screw (M4x8) [4]. Be sure to use the
washer [3] when doing so.
F-2-72
8) Route the relay cable [2] through the wire saddle [1].
2-30
Chapter 2
F-2-73
9) Connect the cable [1] of the machine and the relay cable [2] of the card reader.
[1]
[2]
F-2-74
10) While making sure that the harness will not be trapped, mount the card reader [1] using a TP screw (4x25) [3]
fitted with a washer [2].
F-2-75
11) Connect the power cable to the wall outlet, and turn on the main power switch. See that the machine is in a
standby state, and start service mode.
12) Make the following selections in the machine's service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD); then,
2-31
Chapter 2
enter the appropriate card number (1 to 2001).

-Use the number that is the lowest of all the numbers that the user will be using.
-As many as 1000 cards may be used starting with the number entered.
13) Turn off the control panel power switch.
14) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
2.6.4 Installation in a NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Environment
0007-2764
iR2270 / iR2870
1) Make the following selections in user mode: system control setup>group ID control>count control; then, see that
the following numbers are available: ID00000001 to ID00001000. (If you entered '1' in service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD.)
2) Make the following selections in user mode: system setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address. Set the
following: 'IP address', 'gateway address', 'subnet mask'.
Unless you have set 'system control group ID' and 'system control ID No.', you will not be able to execute 'register
card to device' as part of NSA setup work.
3) In user mode, enter numbers of your choice for 'system control ID' and 'system control ID No.' as part of system
administrator information.
4) Turn off the control panel power switch.
5) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
2-32
Chapter 2
2.7 Installing the NE Controller

2.7.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1
0007-5625
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

When installing the NE Controller-A1 to its host machine, take note of the following:
1. be sure to perform the work in compliance with the laws and regulations of the country in question.
2. be sure that the host machine has properly been installed before starting the work.
3. be sure to disconnect the power plug of the host machine before starting the work.
4. be sure to identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
5. be sure the settings data are ready on the PC at the service station.
1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the top cover [1], and detach the cover.
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-2-76
2) Connect the connector [1] of the power supply unit to the connector [2] as shown.
[2]
[1]
F-2-77
3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the face plate [2] of the host machine's rear cover.
2-33
Chapter 2
F-2-78
4) Connect the cable [1] to the connector [2] of the host machine (intended for an NE controller).
F-2-79
5) Secure the controller [1] to the host machine's rear cover using 4 screws [2].
F-2-80
6) Take up the slack from the cable connecting the host machine and the controller; bundle the excess length on the
controller side, and fix it in place using a harness guide [1].
2-34
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-81
7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch [1] (SW2-4) found on the PCB of the controller to ON (so that the communication
mode between the host machine and the controller will be IPC).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[1]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
BAT1
1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-82
8) If IC6 [1] is found on the PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP swish [2] (SW2-7) to ON; otherwise, shift bit 7 of the DIP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
switch [2] (SW2-7) to OFF.
[2]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
[1]
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-83
2-35
Chapter 2
If IC6 [1] is not found, you need not mount any.

If you are mounting a ROM (IC6) [1] or replacing it for upgrading the connector, be sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP
switch [2] (SW2-7) to ON.
9) Set the bits of the DIP switch [1] (SW3) on the PCB as indicated in the table.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[1]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
BAT1
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW3
SW2
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-84
T-2-6
Switch
Setting
SW3-1
SW3-2
function
OFF
sets the modem signal transmission

level to -16 dBm.
ON
OFF

level to -14 dBm.
OFF
ON

level to -12 dBm.
ON
ON

level to -10 dBm.
notation
OFF
SW3-1
see
right
SW3-2
SW3-3
OFF
keep at OFF at all times.
SW3-4
ON
selects push pulse for controller line setting.
OFF
selects dial pulse for controller line setting.
ON
selects 20PPS for dial pulse speed.
OFF
selects 10PPS for dial pulse speed.
not
used
SW3-5
SW3-6
2-36
Chapter 2
10) Connect the power supply unit to the power outlet, and check to see that LED1 [1] (green) on the PCB goes on.
[1]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
1
SW3
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-85
11) Execute RAM initialization.
Set the bits of the DIP switch [1] (SW-2) on the PC as indicated in the table; then, press the push switch [2]. A
press on the push switch [2] (SW4) will causes LED5 [3] (red) to go on.
T-2-7
bits of SW2
Setting
SW2-1
OFF
SW2-2
OFF
SW2-3
ON
SW2-4
ON
SW2-5
OFF
SW2-6
OFF
SW2-7
See step 9).
SW2-8
OFF
2-37
Chapter 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[1]
[3]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
BAT1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
[2]
IC6
2
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-86
12) After making sure that LED5 [3] (red) has gone on, set the bits of the DIP switch [1] (SW2) on the PCB as
indicated in the table; then, press the push switch [2] (SW4).
A press on the push switch [2] (SW4) will cause LED5 [3] (red) to go off, indicating that the RAM has been
initialized.
T-2-8
bits of SW2
Setting
SW2-1
OFF
SW2-2
OFF
SW2-3
OFF
SW2-4
ON
SW2-5
2-38
OFF
SW2-6
ON
SW2-7
See step 9).
SW-8
OFF
Chapter 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[1]
[3]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
BAT1
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW3
SW2
SW4
[2]
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-87
13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch [1] (SW2-6) on the PCB to OFF.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[1]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
BAT1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-88
14) Connect the telephone line to the controller.
If you are using the controller on its own, connect the modular jack cable to the connector [1] (LINE) of the
controller.
If you are using the extension function, connect the existing telephone or fax to the connector [2] (TEL), and
connect the telephone line to the connector [1] (LINE) of the controller.
2-39
Chapter 2
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW3
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
[2]
CN2
[1]
F-2-89
15) Call the service station, and ask for initial settings for the controller. (When a call comes in, LED 4 [1] (red) will
start to flash.)
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
1
SW3
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
[1]
CN3
CN2
F-2-90
16) Call the service station, and check to make sure that the initial settings have correctly been made.
If failed, execute RAM initialization (steps 1) through 12)), and make initial settings once again.
Be sure to check with the service station to see that the settings are correct once again.
17) Check to find out if the controller is capable of placing a telephone call to the PC in the service station.
Press the push switch [1] (SW4) on the PCB.
A press on the push switch [1] (SW4) will cause LED6 [2] (red) to go on; when the transmission is done, LED6
[2] (red) will go off. If it has failed, LED6 [2] (red) will start to flash.
A press on the push switch [1] (SW4) while LED6 [2] is flashing will start transmission once again.
A press on the push switch [3] (SW1) while LED6 [2] is flashing will cancel the request for transmission.
2-40
Chapter 2
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
[2]
SW3
SW4
[1]
IC6
SW1
CN4
[3]
CN3
CN2
F-2-91
18) Check to make sure that the communication between the host machine and the controller is correct.
Connect the power plug of the host machine, and turn on its power switch to see that LED2 [1] (orange) flashes.
[1]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW3
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-92
19) Press the Start key on the host machine, and see that LED3 [1] (pink) flashes each time paper is delivered.
[25]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2
6
BAT1
1
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
1
SW3
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
F-2-93
20) Attach the switch settings label [1] on the top cover of the controller, and record the settings of the switches.
21) Secure the top cover [2] of the controller in place using 2 screws [3]. When doing so, check to be sure that the
cable of the power supply unit is held in place by the cable guide inside the controller and is not trapped by the top
cover [2].
2-41
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-2-94
Chapter 3Basic
Operation
Contents
Contents
3.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Functional Construction .............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Major PCB Wiring diagram ........................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2 Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On ................................................................................................. 3-5
Chapter 3
3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional Construction
0008-0985
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional blocks: general control system, original exposure
system, reader control system, printer control system, laser exposure system, image formation system, pickup/feed
system, fixing/delivery system. For detailed discussions of the individual blocks, see the chapters that follow.
[B]
[C] R-CON
[G]
[1]
[A]
MN-CON
[2]
[8]
[F]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[E]
[D]
DC-CON
[6]
[5]
[9]
[H]
[10]
[11]
F-3-1
T-3-1
[
General Control System
[1]
HDD
main controller PCB
[2]
accessories PCB
Original Exposure System
[3]
photosensitive drum
reader Control System
[4]
charging
reader controller PCB
[5]
developing
A
]
[B
]
[C
]
3-1
Chapter 3
Printer Control System
[6]
transfer
DC controller PCB
[7]
fixing
Laser Exposure System
[8]
delivery/reversal/duplex assembly
Image Formation System
[9]
pickup control
Fixing/Delivery System
[10
cassette 1
D
]
[E
]
[F
]
[
G
]
[
Pickup/Feed System
[11
cassette 2
3.1.2 Major PCB Wiring diagram

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
The following is a wiring diagram showing the relationship among major PCBs:
3-2
0008-0984
[1]
J501
J502
J6801
J6802
J1110
J1111
[13]
[2]
[12]
J1113
J1
[4]
[3]
J603
J601
J511
J1016
J316
J318
J301
J1018A
J1018B
J1029
J307A
[5]
[6]
J311
J310
J321
J1021
J1020
J1027
J315
J404
[7]
J211
J219
J640
J218
J647
[9]
J216
J217
[11]
J203
J210
[8]
J1302
J1303
J1301
J831
J3128
J832
J3129
[10]
[15]
J3130
[14]
J212
J250
J254
[16]
F-3-2
T-3-2
[1]
Reamer controller PCB
[9]
Accessories power supply PCB
[2]
Control panel CPU PCB
[10]
Printer power supply PCB
[3]
Control panel inverter PCB
[11]
Controller power supply PCB
[4]
Keypad PCB
[12]
BD PCB
[5]
Main controller PCB
[13]
Laser drive PCB
[6]
DC controller PCB
[14]
Cassette size relay PCB
[7]
High-voltage PCB
[15]
Upper cassette size PCB
Chapter 3
[8]
AC drive PCB
[16]
Lower cassette size PCB
Memo:The arrows in the diagram indicate the wring between PCBs, and do not indicate the direction of individual
signals.
3-4
Chapter 3
3.2 Basic Sequence

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On
0008-1235
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1. Reader Unit
Shading
correction
Main power
switch ON
CIS output
offset correction
SREADY
STBY
Reader motor
(M501)
LED
CIS HP sensor
(PS503)
Shading
position
Shading
position
CIS output
offset correction
- LED intensity adjustment

(when lit in each color)
- CIS output gain adjustment
(when lit in all colors)
Shading
position
: forward
: reverse
F-3-3
2. Printer Unit
If any of the cassettes (1 through 4) is in low position, the lifter is moved up until the top of the stack of sheets is
detected.
3-5
Chapter 4Main
Controller
Contents
Contents
4.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms .................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Construction and Functions......................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry ............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.1 Main Controller PCB................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Main Controller PCB................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 HDD ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-7
4.2.4 HDD (optional)............................................................................................................................................ 4-9
4.3 Start-Up Sequence............................................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence ..................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.4 Shut-Down Sequence ....................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.2 Overview (w/ HDD) .................................................................................................................................. 4-15
4.4.3 Flow of Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.4 Flow of Operation (w/ HDD) .................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.5 Image Processing.............................................................................................................................................. 4-17
4.5.1 Overview of the Image Flow..................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ......................................................................................... 4-17
4.5.3 Construction of the Image Processing Module ......................................................................................... 4-18
4.5.4 Reader Unit Input Image Processing......................................................................................................... 4-19
4.5.5 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block ...................................................................................................... 4-20
4.5.6 Compression/Expansion/Edit Block.......................................................................................................... 4-21
4.5.7 Printer unit Output Image Processing ....................................................................................................... 4-21
4.6 Flow of Image Data .......................................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.6.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions .................................................................................. 4-23
4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for the Copy Function .............................................................................................. 4-23
4.6.3 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function ................................................................................................ 4-24
4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function ................................................................................................ 4-25
4.6.5 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function............................................................................................. 4-25
4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function............................................................................................. 4-26
4.6.7 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission.......................................................................................... 4-27
4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission Function........................................................................... 4-28
4.6.9 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function ................................................................................ 4-29
4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function .............................................................................. 4-30
4.6.11 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function.............................................................................................. 4-31
4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function.............................................................................................. 4-32
4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure........................................................................................................................... 4-33
4.7.1 Main Controller PCB................................................................................................................................. 4-33
4.7.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover .................................................................................................................. 4-33
4.7.1.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB .................................................................................................. 4-33
4.7.2 SDRAM..................................................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.7.2.1 Removing the Face Cover .................................................................................................................. 4-35
4.7.2.2 Removing the SDRAM ...................................................................................................................... 4-36
Contents
4.7.3 Boot ROM ................................................................................................................................................. 4-36

4.7.3.1 Removing the Face Cover................................................................................................................... 4-36
4.7.3.2 Removing the Boot ROM ................................................................................................................... 4-37
4.7.4 HDD........................................................................................................................................................... 4-38
4.7.4.1 Removing the Face Cover................................................................................................................... 4-38
4.7.4.2 Removing the Face Cover (optional).................................................................................................. 4-38
4.7.4.3 Removing the Counter PCB ............................................................................................................... 4-39
4.7.4.4 Removing the Counter PCB (optional)............................................................................................... 4-40
4.7.4.5 Removing the HDD ............................................................................................................................ 4-40
4.7.4.6 Removing the HDD (optional) ........................................................................................................... 4-41
Chapter 4
4.1 Construction
4.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms
0006-6582
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The machine's main controller block consists of the following and has the following functions:
T-4-1
Item
Main controller PCB
Description
Controls system operation, memory,
printer unit output, image processing,
printer unit image input processing,
rendering, color LCD
controller, card printer unit interface, fax
image
processing, etc.
SRAM
Retains service mode settings (by

SRAM), HDD management information
Image memory
Temporarily retains image data (256 MB;
(SDRAM)
512 MB max.)
BOOTROM
Stores boot program
HDD
Stores system software, retains image

data for
Box/Fax function (20 GB)
USB port
USB2.0 interface
Ethernet port (10/
Ethernet interface
100Bsae-T)
4-1
Chapter 4
Reader unit
DC controller PCB
Main controller PCB
Image memory (SDRAM)
Riser board
USB port
Ethernet
10/100BASE-T
SRAM
Boot ROM
Hard disk drive
F-4-1
4.1.2 Construction and Functions
0008-8054
/ iR3530
The machine's main controller block consists of the following components arranged as shown:
T-4-2
Item
Main controller PCB
Description
controls system; controls memory; controls
printer output image
processing control, reader image input
processing, rendering processing; controls
color LCD controller, card reader interface;
controls fax image processing
SRAM
retains service mode settings and HDD

management information (SRAM)
temporarily retains image data

128 MB (256 MB max.)
BOOTROM
4-2
stores boot program
Item
Description
HDD (optional)
stores system software

stores image data for Box/Fax functions
20 GB
USB port
USB2.0 interface
Ethernet port
Ethernet interface
(10/100 Base-T)
Reader Unit
DC controller PCB
Main controller PCB
USB port
Ethernet
10/100BASE-T
SRAM
F-4-2
Boot ROM
Hard disk drive

(optional)
Chapter 4
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB
0006-6592
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following is a diagram showing the major control mechanisms of the main controller according to connectors:
J1014
J1004
J1016
J1028
J1003
J1029
IC1005
IC1010
J1018
J1017
J1024
IC1084
J1006
IC1008
J1013
IC1009
IC1004
IC1100
J1061
J1062
IC1003
BATTERY
IC1001
J1010
IC1006
J1026
J1023
IC1002
J1060
J1022
J1030
J1020
J1005
J1059
J1021
J1027
F-4-3
T-4-3
4-4
Connector
Description
J1003
SDRAM connection slot
J1004
J1005
Fax connector (2-port)
J1010
Boot ROM connector slot
Chapter 4
Connector
Description
J1013
Riser board connection slot
J1014
Scanner DDI
J1017
USB port
J1018
Control panel connector
J1020
Power supply connector
J1026
Hard disk connector
J1029
Printer DDI
J1030
Fax connector (1-port)
J1061
Ethernet port (10/100BaseT)
0009-0473
/ iR3530
The machine's main controller PCB has the following functions (shown according to connectors):
4-5
J1014
J1004
J1016
J1028
J1003
J1029
IC1005
IC1010
J1018
J1017
J1024
IC1084
J1006
IC1008
J1013
IC1009
IC1004
IC1100
J1061
J1062
IC1003
BATTERY
IC1001
J1010
IC1006
J1026
J1023
IC1002
J1060
J1022
J1030
J1020
J1005
J1059
J1021
J1027
F-4-4
T-4-4
Connector
Description
J1003
J1004
J1005
fax connector (2-line; not used)
J1010
Boot ROM connection slot
J1013
Riser board connection slot
J1014
scanner DDI
J1017
USB port
J1018
control panel connector
J1020
power supply connector
J1026
hard disk connector
Chapter 4
Connector
Description
J1029
printer DDI
J1030
fax connector (1-line)
J1061
Ethernet pot (10/100Base-T)
4.2.3 HDD
0008-4957
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The HDD is divided into 11 partitions (blocks), each assigned with specific functions.
T-4-5
Partition
Description
FSTDEV
Collects compressed image data.
TMP_GEN
Stores temporary files, log data.
TMP_PSS
PDL spool
TMP_FAX
Ensures fax reception.
APL_SEND
Stores user data (address book, transfer settings).
APL_MEAP
Stores MEAP applications.
APL_GEN
Mode memory data, standard mode data

History (e.g., print job history)
iFax image data
Fax image data
Other
IMG_MNG
Stores file management table, profile.
PDL_DEV
Stores PDL font, etc.
BOOTDEV
Stores execution module, message data file, RUI content, etc.
FSTCDEV
Chasing (not used)
4-7
Chapter 4
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
HDD
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
BOOTDEV
FSTCDEV
F-4-5
The following shows the construction of the machine's system software:
T-4-6
System software
Description
Location
System
System module (controls
HDD (BOOTDEV)
Remarks
mechanism as a whole)
Language
Language module
HDD (BOOTDEV)
(controls LCD
indications)
RUI
Remote user interface
HDD (BOOTDEV)
module
Boot
Starts up the machine
BootROM
DIMM
(FAX
board)
G3FAX
Controls G3 Fax
HDD (BOOTDEV)
1-line
Dcon
Controls the DC
DC controller PCB
Mask
controller
ROM
(soldered)
Rcon
Controls the printer unit
Printer unit controller
Flash
controller
PCB
ROM
(soldered)
Meapcont
Controls MEAP
applications
4-8
HDD (BOOTDEV)
Chapter 4
RCON
Reader unit
DCON
Main controller PCB
DC controller PCB
BOOT
HDD
SYSTEM
Language
RUI
MEAP
G3FAX
BOOTDEV
F-4-6
4.2.4 HDD (optional)
0008-8061
/ iR3530
The HDD is divided into 11 partitions (blocks), each assigned with specific functions.
T-4-7
Partition
Description
FSTDEV
Collects compressed image data.
TMP_GEN
Stores temporary files, log data.
TMP_PSS
PDL spool
TMP_FAX
Ensures fax reception.
APL_SEND
Stores user data (address book, transfer settings).
4-9
Chapter 4
Partition
Description
APL_MEAP
Stores MEAP applications.
APL_GEN
Mode memory data, standard mode data

History (e.g., print job history)
iFax image data
Fax image data
Other
IMG_MNG
Stores file management table, profile.
PDL_DEV
Stores PDL font, etc.
BOOTDEV
Stores execution module, message data file, RUI content, etc.
FSTCDEV
Chasing (not used)
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
HDD
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
BOOTDEV
FSTCDEV
F-4-7
The following shows the construction of the machine's system software:
T-4-8
System software
Description
Location
System
System module (controls
HDD (BOOTDEV)
mechanism as a whole)
Language
Language module
HDD (BOOTDEV)
(controls LCD
indications)
RUI
Remote user interface

module
4-10
HDD (BOOTDEV)
Remarks
System software
Description
Location
Remarks
Boot
Starts up the machine
BootROM
DIMM
(FAX
board)
G3FAX
Controls G3 Fax
HDD (BOOTDEV)
Dcon
Controls the DC
DC controller PCB
controller
1-line
Mask
ROM
(soldered)
Rcon
Controls the printer unit
Printer unit controller
Flash
controller
PCB
ROM
(soldered)
Meapcont
Controls MEAP
HDD (BOOTDEV)
applications
RCON
Reader unit
DCON
Main controller PCB
DC controller PCB
BOOT
HDD
SYSTEM
Language
RUI
MEAP
G3FAX
F-4-8
BOOTDEV
Chapter 4
4.3 Start-Up Sequence

4.3.1 Overview
0006-6702
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The system software used to control the machine is stored on the HDD.
When the machine is started, the CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system software from the HDD according
to the instructions of the boot ROM boot program, and writes it to the image memory (SDRAM) of the controller
PCB.
While the CPU reads the system software from the HDD to the image memory (DRAM), the control panel shows
the following screen, using a progress bar to indicate the progress of the start-up sequence.
Progress bar
F-4-9
Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated, as access is being made to the HDD. Turning off
the power can cause a fault on the HDD (identified by E602).
4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence
0006-6703
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

<Boot ROM Area>
- Self Diagnosis Program (interval 1)
The self-diagnosis program is run by the CPU on the main controller PCB when the main power switch is turned
on.
The program is used to check the condition of the image memory (SDRAM) and the HDD.
4-12
The machine will indicate an error code if it finds a fault while running the program.
- Boot Program (interval 2)
When the self-diagnosis program ends normally, the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the boot program.
The program is used to read the system software from the HDD to write it into the image memory (SDRAM).
<Image Memory (SDRAM) Area> (interval 3)
The system software written by the boot program initializes the various functional blocks (e.g., I/F settings of the
main controller).
When all the foregoing ends normally, the machine becomes ready to accept a job
(i.e., the control panel shows the Operation screen, and the LED on the Start key changes from red to green).
Progress bar
F-4-10
- While the Self-Diagnosis Program Is Being Executed

System
area
Image data
area
CPU
HDD
Boot
program
Self diagnosis
program
BootROM
Main controller PCB
: access to the program during execution
: access for checking
F-4-11
- While the Boot Program Is Being Run

System area
Image data
area
System
software
CPU
Self-diagnosis
program
Boot
program
BootROM
Main controller PCB
: access to the program during execution.
: flow of the system program.
F-4-12
HDD
Chapter 4
4.4 Shut-Down Sequence

4.4.1 Overview
0006-8356
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

If the main power switch is turned off while the machine is accessing its HDD, damage can well occur on the HDD.
To avoid such damage, the machine is provided with a shut-down sequence.
4.4.2 Overview (w/ HDD)
0008-8064
/ iR3530
If the main power switch is turned off while the machine is accessing its HDD, damage can well occur on the HDD.
To avoid such damage, the machine is provided with a shut-down sequence.
4.4.3 Flow of Operation
0006-8379
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following diagram shows the flow of shut-down operation:
Press on the control panel
power switch (3 sec or more)
Moves to the shut-down sequence.
HDD
protection check mode
Indicates the job being executed, and informs the

user that it will start the shut-down sequence.
HDD
protection execution mode
Cancels any job on wait in print mode.

Cancels any job being executed in fax mode.
Main power switch off
F-4-13
4.4.4 Flow of Operation (w/ HDD)
0008-8065
/ iR3530
The following diagram shows the flow of shut-down operation:
4-15
Press on the control panel

power switch (3 sec or more)
Moves to the shut-down sequence.
HDD
protection check mode
Indicates the job being executed, and informs the

user that it will start the shut-down sequence.
HDD
protection execution mode

Cancels any job being executed in fax mode.
Main power switch off
F-4-14
Chapter 4
4.5 Image Processing

4.5.1 Overview of the Image Flow
0006-6704
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following shows the flow of images in relation to the machine's functions:
Other iR machine
Original
A
Copy
Scan
A
Print output
Image data
-SEND
-FAX
-PullScan
-E-Mail
-PDL Print
-BOX
PC
F-4-15
4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module
0006-6706
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The machine's major image processing is executed by the main controller PCB.
The following shows the construction of the modules associated with image processing:
4-17
Chapter 4
Reader unit
Reader unit controller PCB
Reader unit input image processing block

Processes the image data
read by the reader unit.
Printer unit output image

processing block
Processes image data for
output to the printer unit.
Main controller PCB
DC controller PCB
SDRAM
HDD
- image memory
- program (temporary storage)
F-4-16
4.5.3 Construction of the Image Processing Module

/ iR3530
Principal image processing is executed by the machine's main controller PCB.
The following shows the construction of modules associated with image processing:
4-18
0009-1739
Chapter 4
Reader unit
Reader unit controller PCB
Reader unit input image processing block

Processes the image data
read by the reader unit.
Printer unit output image

processing block
Main controller PCB
DC controller PCB
SDRAM
HDD
- image memory
- program (temporary storage)
(optional)
F-4-17
4.5.4 Reader Unit Input Image Processing
0006-6712
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The image data colleted by the contact image sensor is processed by the main controller PCB.
4-19
Chapter 4
Reader unit
Main controller PCB
Enlargement/reduction
Edge emphasis
-intensify-to-density conversion
-density adjustment (F adjustment)
-gamma correction
Text mode
Text/photo/film photo mode
Binary processing (error diffusion)
Film photo mode
Binary processing (screen processing)
To compression/expansion/editing block
F-4-18
4.5.5 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
Here, image data is processed for compression, extension, and editing.
4-20
0006-6714
Chapter 4
Main controller PCB

Printer unit image
processing block
PDPDL image
processing block
SDRAM
Enlargement/
reduction
Compression
Rotation
Expansion
HDD
Integration
to printer unit output image processing block
F-4-19
4.5.6 Compression/Expansion/Edit Block
0009-1741
/ iR3530
In this block, machine executes compression, expansion, and editing tasks.
Main controller PCB

Reader image
processing block
PDL image
processing block
SDRAM
Enlargement/
reduction
Compression
Rotation
Expansion
HDD
(optional)
Integration
to printer unit output image processing block
F-4-20
4.5.7 Printer unit Output Image Processing
0006-6715
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
4-21
Chapter 4
The main controller processes the image data coming from the printer unit for output to the printer unit.
Main controller PCB

Compression/expansion/editing block
Binary density conversion
Enlargement/reduction
Smoothing
Thickening
To DC controller PCB
F-4-21
4-22
For PDL data,

when fine line
processing is ON
Chapter 4
4.6 Flow of Image Data

4.6.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions
0006-6746
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following is the flow of image data when the Copy Function is in use:
Printer unit
Main control PCB
Image processing block for printer unit
SDRAM
Data rotation
Data compression
HDD
Data expansion
DC controller PCB
F-4-22
4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for the Copy Function
0009-1743
/ iR3530
The following shows the flow of image data when the copy function is in use:
4-23
Chapter 4
Reader unit
Main control PCB
Reader image processing block
SDRAM
Data rotation
Data compression
HDD
(option)
Data expansion
Printer image processing block
(raw data)
DC controller PCB
F-4-23
4.6.3 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
The following is the flow of image data when the Box function is in use:
Printer unit
Main controller PCB
SDRAM
Data rotation
HDD
Data compression
F-4-24
4-24
0006-6747
Chapter 4
4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function
0009-1744
/ iR3530
The following shows the flow of image data when the BOX function is in use:
Reader unit
Main controller PCB

SDRAM
Data rotation
HDD
(optional)
Data compression
F-4-25
4.6.5 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function
0006-6749
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following is the flow of image data when the SEND function is in use.
4-25
Chapter 4
Printer unit
Main controller PCB
SDRAM
Data expansion
Data rotation
HDD
Resolution conversion
Ethernet port
(compression data)
To network
F-4-26
4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function

/ iR3530
The following is the flow of image data when the SEND function is in use:
4-26
0009-1745
Chapter 4
Reader unit
Main controller PCB
SDRAM
Data expansion
Data rotation
HDD
(optional)
Ethernet port
(compression data)
To network
F-4-27
4.6.7 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission
0006-6750
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following is the flow of image data when the fax transmission function is in use:
4-27
Chapter 4
Reader unit
Main controller PCB
Image processing block for reader unit
SDRAM
Compression
Compression
HDD
Expansion
Image processing block for fax

Super G3 Fax Board
F-4-28
4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission Function

/ iR3530
The following shows the flow of image data when the fax transmission function is in use:
4-28
0009-1746
Chapter 4
Reader unit
Main control PCB
SDRAM
Compression
Rotation
HDD
(optional)
Expansion
Fax image processing block
Super G3 fax board
F-4-29
4.6.9 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function
0006-6751
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following is the flow of image data when the fax reception function is in use:
4-29
Chapter 4
Super G3 Fax Board
Main controller PCB
Image processing block for fax
SDRAM
Data rotation
Data compression
HDD
Data expansion
DC controller PCB
F-4-30
4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function

/ iR3530
The following shows the flow of image data when the fax reception function is in use:
4-30
0009-1747
Chapter 4
Sure G3 fax board
Fax image processing block
SDRAM
HDD
(optional)
DC controller PCB
F-4-31
4.6.11 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function
0006-6752
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following is the flow of image data when the PDL function is in use:
4-31
Chapter 4
Ethernet
Main controller PCB
PDL
Rendering processing block
SDRAM
Compression/expansion
/editing block
HDD
Processing block for printer unit
DC controller PCB
F-4-32
4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function

/ iR3530
The following shows the flow of image data when the PDL function is in use:
Ethernet
Main controller PCB
PDL
Rendering processing block

SDRAM
Compression/expansion/
edit block
Printer image processing block
DC controller PCB
F-4-33
4-32
HDD
(optional)
0009-1748
Chapter 4
4.7
Parts
Procedure
Replacement
1) Disconnect the connector [1].

4.7.1.1 Removing the Rear
Cover
0007-6401
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-4-35
1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw
[2]; then, detach the rear cover [3].
Freeing the Flexible Cable
To free the flexible cable [1], shift up the lock first as
If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the
shown.
screw [3] should also have been removed.
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-36
[1]
[1]
[1]
2) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the main

controller PCB [2].
[2]
F-4-34
4.7.1.2 Removing the Main

Controller PCB
0007-6417
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
4-33
Chapter 4
4.7.2 SDRAM
4.7.2.1 Removing the Face
Cover
0007-6411
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 4 screws [1].
2) Loosen the 2 screws [2].
F-4-37
[1]
Points to Note When Replacing the Main Controller

PCB
Remove the following components of the detached
main controller PCB. Thereafter, be sure to mount
them to the new main controller PCB.
[1]
[2]
[1] Boot ROM
F-4-39
[2] Hard disk

[3] SDRAM
3) Pull off the face cover [1] in upward direction.
[4] FRAM
[1]
F-4-38
F-4-40
4.7.2.2 Removing the SDRAM
0007-6412
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Release the 2 locking levers [1], and detach the
SDRAM [2].
4-34
Chapter 4
[1]
F-4-41
4.7.3 Boot ROM

F-4-43

Cover
0007-6413
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
4.7.3.2 Removing the Boot

ROM
0007-6414
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Push the locking lever [1], and detach the boot

ROM [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-44
F-4-42
4.7.4 HDD

Cover
0007-6409
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

4-35
Chapter 4
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-47
F-4-45
[1]
[1]
F-4-48
F-4-46

Cover (optional)
0009-2005
4.7.4.3 Removing the Counter

PCB
0008-2478
/ iR3530
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the counter PCB
4-36
[2].
Chapter 4
F-4-51
F-4-49
4.7.4.4 Removing the Counter

PCB (optional)
4.7.4.6 Removing the HDD

(optional)
0009-2006
0009-2007
/ iR3530
/ iR3530
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the HDD [2]
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the counter PCB
in the direction of the arrow.
[2].
F-4-52
F-4-50
4.7.4.5 Removing the HDD
0007-6410
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the HDD [2]
in the direction of the arrow.
4-37
Chapter 5Original
Exposure System
Contents
Contents
5.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Major Components ...................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 Construction of the Control System ............................................................................................................ 5-4
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB................................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.2 Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On ................................................................................................. 5-7
5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start ............................................................. 5-7
5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start ............................................................. 5-8
5.3 Various Control ................................................................................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ...................................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.1.2 Controlling the Reader Motor ............................................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS)...................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.3.2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 5-12
5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor .............................................................................. 5-13
5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction ............................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction ................................................................. 5-14
5.3.3.2 Varying the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction ...................................................................... 5-14
5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals ................................................................................................................. 5-16
5.3.4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 5-16
5.3.4.2 Outline of Size Identification ............................................................................................................. 5-17
5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control ................................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.3.5.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 5-19
5.3.6 Image Processing....................................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.3.6.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 5-22
5.3.6.2 CCD Drive.......................................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.3.6.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output............................................................... 5-23
5.3.6.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output .................................................................................................. 5-24
5.3.6.5 Shading Correction (outline) .............................................................................................................. 5-24
5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment ........................................................................................................................... 5-24
5.3.6.7 Shading Correction............................................................................................................................. 5-24
5.4.1 Copyboard glass ........................................................................................................................................ 5-26
5.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass......................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.1.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass .................................................................................................... 5-27
5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB.............................................................................................................................. 5-28
5.4.2.1 Before Replacing the Reader Controller PCB.................................................................................... 5-28
5.4.2.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover...................................................................................................... 5-28
5.4.2.3 Removing the rear cover of the machine............................................................................................ 5-29
5.4.2.4 Removing the flexible cable cover ..................................................................................................... 5-29
5.4.2.5 Removing the Copyboard Glass......................................................................................................... 5-30
5.4.2.6 Removing the Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................... 5-31
5.4.2.7 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or After Initializing the RAM...................................... 5-35
Contents
5.4.3 Scanner Motor ........................................................................................................................................... 5-37

5.4.3.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ...................................................................................................... 5-37
5.4.3.2 Removing the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................. 5-37
5.4.4 Contact sensor............................................................................................................................................ 5-38
5.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover ..................................................................................................... 5-38
5.4.4.3 Removing the Copyboard Glass ......................................................................................................... 5-40
5.4.4.4 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS)........................................................................................ 5-42
5.4.4.5 After Replacement of the CIS............................................................................................................. 5-44
5.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor ....................................................................................................... 5-45
5.4.5.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (front/rear).................................................... 5-46
5.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 5-47
5.4.6.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass..................................................................................................... 5-48
5.4.6.3 Removing the Contract Sensor Home Position Sensor ...................................................................... 5-49
5.4.7 Original Size Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 5-50
5.4.7.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor.................................................................................................... 5-53
5.4.8 Reader Heater (option) .............................................................................................................................. 5-55
5.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (right)................................................................................................... 5-57
5.4.8.3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass..................................................................................................... 5-58
5.4.8.4 Removing the Reader Heater (left)..................................................................................................... 5-58
Chapter 5
5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0006-5712
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the machine's original exposure system are as
follows:
T-5-1
Item
Description
Original exposure
by LED array, indirect (LED + photoconducting body)
Original scan
in book mode: scan by moving contact image sensor (CIS)

in ADF mode: by original stream reading with contact image
sensor (CIS) fixed in position
Read resolution
600 (main scanning) x 600 (sub scanning) dpi
Gradation
256
Scanning speed
45 ipm (single-sided, A4/LTR)
(in ADF mode)

Carriage position
by contact image sensor (CIS), HP sensor (PS503)
detection
Magnification
25% to 400%
Main Scanning
Direction
by main controller PCB (image

processing)
Sub Scanning
Direction
in book mode:
by changing carriage travel speed; by

processing images on reader controller
PCB; by processing images on main
controller PCB*1
in ADF mode:
by changing original feed speed; by

image processing on reader controller
PCB; by image processing on main
controller PCB*1
Lens
rod lens array
5-1
Chapter 5
Item
Description
CCD
number of lines: 1
Number of pixels: Total 7488 (Number of effective pixels:
7180)
maximum original read width: 304 mm
CIS drive control
by reader motor (M501)
Original size
[1]Book Mode
identification
in main scanning
by reflection type sensor (AB/Inch)
direction:
in sub scanning
by reflection type sensor (AB/Inch)
direction:
[2]ADF Mode
width:
by original width value in ADF
length:
by photo sensor in ADF
The particulars of control differ depending on the selected magnification. For

details, see "Changing the Magnification."
5.1.2 Major Components

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
The machine's original exposure system consists of the following major components:
5-2
0006-5714
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[7]
[1]
[8]
[12]
[9]
[7]
[11]
[10]
F-5-1
T-5-2
[1]
Item
Notation
Original cover open/
PS501
closed sensor (rear)
Description
photo interrupter: detects the state (open/
closed) of the copyboard cover; starts
original size indication when the original
cover is at 25 deg.
[2]
Reader controller
PCB
[3]
Original sensor 3
controls the drive of the reader unit, and

controls image processing
PS506
helps identify original size (for all

destinations)
[4]
Original sensor 4
PS507
helps identify original size (AB, Inch/

AB)
[5]
Original sensor 5
PS508
[6]
Reader motor
M501
helps identify original size (Inch/A)

pulse motor: controls the drive of the
carriage
[7]
Reader heater*
prevents condensation on the copyboard

glass
[8]
Original sensor 1
PS504
helps identify original size (AB, Inch/A,

Inch/AB)
[9]
Original sensor 2
PS505
helps identify original size (AB, A, Inch/

AB)
Chapter 5
[10]
Item
Notation
Description
Contact image sensor
uses LEDs for indirect exposure (LED +
(CIS)
[11]
photoconducting body)
CIS HP sensor
PS503
photo interrupter: detects CIS home

position
[12]
Cupboard cover
PS502
open/closed sensor
ends original size identification with the

copyboard cover at 5 deg.
*Optional. (100/230-V model only).
5.1.3 Construction of the Control System

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
The machine's control system is constructed as follows:
J5
/5 03
04
[4]
05 J5
0
01
J5
J5
J5
00
10
J5
08
J5
[1]
06
J5
07
J5
[10]
[8]
F-5-2
[1] Connection to ADF
[2] Connection to printer body
[3] Printer body (connected to main controller PCB)
[4] Connection to ADF
[5] Reader controller PCB
[6] Reader motor drive control
5-4
0006-5715
Chapter 5
[7] Reader motor (M501)

[8] Contact image sensor
[9] Image signal
[10] CIS HP sensor (PS503)
[11] Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (front: PS502)
[12] Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (rear: PS503)
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB
0006-5718
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine's reader controller PCB has the following functional construction:
DC24V
DC13V
J500
J501
J502
J504
J505
IC505
J503
J513
IC513
IC518
IC519
IC501
IC520
IC529
J506
IC530
IC522
J510
CPU
IC520
IC531
J507
J508
J512
F-5-3
T-5-3
Jack No.
Description
J500
supplies power to the ADF.
J501
receives power from the machine body (printer unit).
J502
communication with the machine body (printer unit).
J503
communication with the ADF.
5-5
Jack No.
Description
J504
communication with the ADF.
J505
connects to the main motor.
J506
copyboard cover open/closed sensor; connects to the CIS HP

sensor
J507
connects to original sensor 1, original sensor 2.
J508
connects to original sensor 3, original sensor 4.
J510
connects to the contact image sensor (CIS).
J512
for use at factory
J513
for use at factory
Chapter 5
5.2 Basic Sequence

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On
0006-5719
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
Shading
correction
Main power
switch ON
CIS output
offset correction
SREADY
STBY
Reader motor
(M501)
LED
CIS HP sensor
(PS503)
Shading
position
Shading
position
CIS output
offset correction
- LED intensity adjustment

(when lit in each color)
- CIS output gain adjustment
(when lit in all colors)
Shading
position
: forward
: reverse
F-5-4
CIS HP
sensor
HP
Shading
position
Original
leading edge
1.CIS position check
2.Shading adjustment
3.Move to standby point
F-5-5
5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start

Key (book mode; 1 original)
0006-5720
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
5-7
Chapter 5
Only if 1 sec or more

has passed since previous
rotation
Shading correction
start key
ON
STBY
SCFW
SCRW
STBY
Reader motor
(M501)
LED
CIS HP sensor
(PS503)
Shading position
Original trailing edge
Copy board read

start position
Shading position
Shading position
forward
reverse
F-5-6
CIS HP
sensor
Copyboard glass read

start position
Shading
position
HP
Original
leading edge
Original
trailing edge
*1
*1
2.After shading correction,

move to start position
3.Original scan
4.Move to standby point
*1:Only if 1 min or more has passed since previous rotation
F-5-7
5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start

Key (ADF mode; 1 original )
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
5-8
0006-5721
Only if 1 min or more

passed since previous
rotation
Shading correction
Start key
ON
STBY
SREADY
SCRW
SCFW
STBY
Reader motor
(M501)
LED
CIS HP sensor
(PS503)
Shading
position
Shading
position
Stream reading
start position
Original
trailing edge
Shading
position
Shading
position
forward
reverse
F-5-8
CIS HP
sensor
Stream reading
start position
Original glass
read start position
Shading
position
HP
*1
*1
2.Original scan
*1:Only if 1 min or more has passed since previous rotation
F-5-9
Chapter 5
5.3 Various Control

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System
5.3.1.1 Outline
0006-5722
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine's scanner system consists of the following components:
Reader motor
Reader controller PCB

Carriage drive belt
[1]
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(PS501)
Sensor
light-blocking
plate
forward
[3]
[2]
reverse
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(PS502)
Cartridge
Contact image
sensor CIS
CIS HP sensor (PS503)
Guide shaft
F-5-10
[1] Reader Motor (M501) Drive Signal
turns on/off the motor, and controls its direction/speed of rotation.
[2] Contact Image Sensor (CIS) HP Sensor (PS503) Detection Signal
checks if the contact image sensor (CIS) is at home position.
[3] Copyboard Cover Sensor (front, PS502; rear, PS501) Detection Signal
detects the state (open/close) of the copyboard cover.
5.3.1.2 Controlling the Reader Motor

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
5-10
0006-5723
Chapter 5
The reader motor driver turns on/off the reader motor and controls the direction/speed of its rotation according to the
signals from the CPU.
3.3V
+5V +24V
OPT_MCK
J505
1
2
3
4
CCW
MD_POW
CPU
M_ENABLE
Motor
driver
RETURN
M_VREF
B*
B
A
A*
M501
F-5-11
<Memo>
The scanning speed of this machine is as follows:
During copying (100%): 236 mm/sec
In SEND mode (600 dpi x 600 dpi):236 mm/sec
a.Forward Movement When Scanning an Image
To scan an image, the machine moves the contact image sensor (CIS) as follows by controlling the following motors:
Start position
Original
trailing edge
Original leading edge
Acceleration
Normal speed
Stop
Deceleration
Shift
speed
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Shift distance
[1] used until the sensor reaches a speed suited to the selected mode.
[2] used as a margin to ensure a stable speed.
[3] used for reading the image at a specific speed.
[4] used for prompt deceleration and suspension once the image end is reached.
F-5-12
b.Reverse Movement After Scanning an Image
After scanning an image, the machine moves the contact image sensor (CIS) to shading position at a specific speed
(147 mm/sec).
5-11
Chapter 5
5.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS)

5.3.2.1 Outline
0006-5927
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine uses a contact image sensor (CIS) to expose and read an image, and the image is read on a line-by-line
basis.
T-5-4
Item
Description
LED
serves as the source of light used to expose the original.
Light guide
directs the light from LEDs to the entire length of a single

image line of the original.
Rod lens array

CCD array
collects light reflected by the original.

collects the reflected light coming through the rod lens
array.
5-12
Chapter 5
Image read line
Light guide
LED (R/G/B)
Copyboard glass
Rod lens array

scanning direction
CCD array
LED (R/G/B)
Light guide
Rod lens array
Light guide
LED
CCD
LED
F-5-13
5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor
0006-5928
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The contact image sensor (CIS) is used to control analog image processing in the following flow of work:
The light reflected by the original is collected by the rod lens array;
the light is then collected by the CCD array;
the light is converted into an electric signal by the CCD array (photo-conversion) for output.
The CCD array consists of a total of 8 channels (units). Each channel possesses its own output correction table used
to process an input intensity signal for gain correction for output of an image signal.
5-13
Chapter 5
Ideal output characteristics
Output
CCD channel x 8
Actual output characteristics

1
Input
4
it
5
ircu
rc
ive
Dr
6
ls
93
e
pix
7
8
F-5-14
Be sure to correct the output among the channels using the following service mode items:
-if you have replaced the contact image sensor (CIS) and, as a result, a discrepancy occurs in the output of image
density among channels; or
-if the setting of CCD-LUT is other than '0' and you have replaced the reader controller PCB.
<Service Mode>
for CIS unit gain correction data
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CCD-LUT
for CCD gain correction
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ2
(using the D-10 Chart)
5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction
5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction
0006-5724
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

In Book Mode/ADF Mode
The image is read at 100% in main scanning direction, and the magnification is varied by processing the data on the
main controller PCB.
5.3.3.2 Varying the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
5-14
0006-5725
Chapter 5
To vary the magnification in sub scanning direction, the machine operates as follows depending on the selected
method of reading the original and the selected rate of magnification:
1. In Book Mode
To suit the selected rate of magnification, the speed at which the original is read is varied and the data is processed
by the reader controller PCB/main controller PCB.
EX: for reduction to 25%, the original is read at 236 mm/sec and the data is varied for 50% reduction by the reader
controller PCB (skipping data for 1/2) and for 50% reduction by the main controller PCB (skipping data for 1/2).
EX: at 100%, the original is read at a speed of 236 mm/sec.
T-5-5
Magnification
Operation
25% to
50% to 99%
100% to 400%
236 to 120
236 to 119
236 to 59
50
50
100
50
100
100
49%
Varying the speed of reading the
original (mm/sec)
Processing the data (digital; %) by
the reader controller PCB
the main controller PCB
2. In ADF Mode
To suit the selected rate of magnification, the speed at which the original is read is varied and the data is processed
by the reader controller PCB/main controller PCB.
EX: for reduction to 25%, the original is read at 236 mm/sec, and the data is processed for 50% reduction (skipping
for 1/2) by the reader controller PCB and for 50% (skipping for 1/2) by the main controller PCB.
EX: for enlargement to 400%, the original is read at a speed of 118 mm/sec, and the data is processed for 200%
enlargement (doubling) by the main control PCB.
T-5-6
Magnification
Operation
Varying the speed at which the

original is read (mm/sec)
the reader controller PCB
the main controller PCB
25% to
43% to
85% to
171% to
42%
84%
170%
400%
274 to
277 to
140
139
50
50
100
100
50
100
100
200
236 to 168
276 to 118
5-15
Chapter 5
5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals

5.3.4.1 Outline
0006-5731
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine identifies the size of the original with reference to the presence/absence of output levels of the reflecting
type sensors; specifically,
-the machine identifies the absence of paper if it finds a change in the output of the reflection type sensors when the
copyboard cover is closed/opened.
-the machine identifies the presence of paper if it does not find a change in the output of the reflection type sensors
when the copyboard cover is closed/opened.
The machine uses the following sensors; and the sensors are arranged as shown in the following figure:
-for main scanning direction, reflection type photosensors (AB-configuration, 2 locations; Inch-configuration, 1
location).
-for sub scanning direction, reflection type photosensors (AB-configuration, 2 locations; Inch-configuration, 2
locations)
5-16
Chapter 5
AB-Configuration
Sub scanning direction
Butting position
Index plate
Main scanning direction
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
B5R
A4R
Original sensor 1
B5
B4
Original sensor 2 A4
A3
Inch-Configuration
Sub scanning direction
Index plate
Butting position
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 5
STMT-R
LTR-R
LGL
Original sensor 1
LTR
11"
17"
F-5-15
5.3.4.2 Outline of Size Identification
0006-6792
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

-In Bk Mode
1 original (A4R), copyboard cover (copyboard cover/ADF) is closed
1. Standby State
original sensor: off
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Copyboard over
Reader unit
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2 Copyboard glass
F-5-16
5-17
Chapter 5
2. The copyboard cover is opened (with cover angle at 25 deg or more).

Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
F-5-17
3. The copyboard cover is closed (with cover angle at 25 deg).
original sensor: on (original size identification processing 1)
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
25
Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Original sensor 3/4
Original sensor 1/2
F-5-18
4. Copyboard cover is closed (with cover angle at 5 deg or more but less than 25 deg).
Original sensor: on (original size identification 2)
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Original sensor 3/4
Original sensor 1/2
F-5-19
5. The copyboard cover is closed (5 deg or less).
size identified
In identifying the size of an original, the data from original size identification processing 1 and data from original
size identification processing 2 are compared, and the difference between these 2 sets of data is checked.
If any of the following is true, the output of the sensors may not show any change, preventing the machine from
correctly identifying the size:
-the original is an A3 black original
-the original is a book (its thickness may not allow the copyboard cover to close fully, thus preventing the detection
of a change in the sensor level).
-the copyboard cover is not closed fully (when a time-out condition occurs, there will be no detection of a change in
5-18
Chapter 5
the sensor level).
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Change absent
Change present
F-5-20
The machine uses the following in reference to changes occurring in the sensor output as found in original size
identification processing 1 and original size identification processing 2:
AB-Configuration
Original Original
size sensor 1
Original Original Original

sensor 2 sensor 3 sensor 4
Inch-Configuration
Original Original Original Original
size
sensor 1 sensor 3 sensor 5
A3
11"X17"
A4
LTR
B4
LGL
B5
LTR-R
A4R
No original
B5R
No original
:No original
:change absent
F-5-21
5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control

5.3.5.1 Outline
0006-5929
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine changes the original read point depending on the presence/absence of dust on the stream reading glass
or the platen roller of the ADF, or it may execute image correction to prevent the dust from showing up in the output.
These operations are carried out only when the ADF is in use and, in addition, is closed:
<Timing of Control>
-at the end of a job
-between sheets (for each reading of a sheet)
-at the start of a job (only when any of the following conditions is true)
1st job after power-on
dust detected at all points of detection at the end of the previous job
dust detection failed to end normally at the end of the previous job (e.g., ADF opened)
5-19
Chapter 5
Start key
ON
Main power switch

ON
WMUPR
STBY
1st
SCAN
2nd
SCAN
Dust detection control

F-5-22
<Particulars of Control>
-At the End of a Job (dust detection)
The contact image sensor (CIS) checks the light reflected by the surface of the platen roller of the ADF at the read
point for the presence/absence of dust. Presence of dust is detected at points A, B, and C in this order. The point where
least dust is detected will be used as the read position for the next job.
The point selected here will be used as the read position for the next job.
- For control at the end of a job, if an original is placed in the ADF with dust detected at all points (A, B, C), the
machine will indicate a message on its control panel to prompt cleaning of the glass surface. The Start key will
remain invalid until this message is cleared.
-At the Start of a Job (dust bypass)
Presence of dust is detected at points A, B, and C in this order in the same manner as at the end of the job. Read will
take place at the point where least dust is detected.
F-5-23
5-20
Chapter 5
-Between Sheets
The machine does not move the contact image sensor (CIS) for dust detection between sheets. It reads the original
using the position determined at the end or start of a job; if the presence of dust is detected, however, the machine
will execute image correction.
T-5-7
Point
Discription
read reference position
about 0.5 mm from the reference position

to the inner side of the roller
about 1.0 mm from the reference position

to the inner side of the roller
Platen roller
0.5mm
0.5mm
A B C
ADF
reading
glass
LED
Lens
F-5-24
<Service Mode>
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L1 (level 1)
(used to adjust the dust detection level between sheets)
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L2 (level 1)
(used to adjust the dust detection level at the end of a job)
5-21
Chapter 5
5.3.6 Image Processing

5.3.6.1 Outline
0006-5930
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The following shows the major specifications and functions of the machine's image processing system:
T-5-8
CCD
number of lines: 1
Number of pixels: Total 7488 (Number of
effective pixels: 7180)
size of pixel: 32 x 46.9 ym
Shading correction
shading correction: executed for each job

shading adjustment: executed at power-on
Contact image
sensor (CIS)
CCD

Analog image
Digital image
processing block
processing block
Analog
image
processing
A/D
conversion
Shading
processing
Controller block
F-5-25
The following shows the functions of the PCBs used by the machine's image processing system:
T-5-9
CCD drive, analog image processing, A/D

conversion, shading correction
The machine uses the reader controller PCB to process images for every single image line; specific functions are as
follows:
1) Analog Image Processing
-CCD drive
-CCD output gain correction, offset correction
-CCD output A/D conversion
2) Digital Image Processing
-shading correction
5-22
Chapter 5
CIS)
CCD(1 line)

Analog
image
signal
CCD
drive control
Analog image
processing
-gain correction
-offset correction
CCD
control signal
Gain
correction
data
EEP-ROM
CPU
Target value
SRAM
A/D
conversion
Digital
image signal
10
Shading
correction
Digital
image signal
J502
CCD/AP circuit
F-5-26
5.3.6.2 CCD Drive
0006-5931
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine's CCD sensor is a 1-line linear image sensor consisting of 7488 photocells. After completion of
photoelectric conversion in the light-receiving block, the signals are output to the AP circuit in the reader controller
circuit board in parallel for each channel (total eight channels) of the CCD array.
CCD8
CCD7
CCD6
CCD5
CCD2
CCD1
Light-receiving block
output
L
L H H L H L
H H H L
F-5-27
5.3.6.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output
0006-5932
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The analog video signal generated by the CCD is corrected so that it will have a specific level (gain correction);
moreover, the output voltage occurring in the absence of incident light is also corrected so that it will have a specific
5-23
Chapter 5
level (offset correction).
5.3.6.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output
0006-5933
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The analog video signal is further converted into a digital signal that is suited to the voltage level of individual pixels
by the A/D converter.
5.3.6.5 Shading Correction (outline)
0006-5936
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The output of the CCD is not necessarily even for the following factors even when the density of the original is
uniform:
1) Variation in the Sensitivity Among Pixels of the CCD
2) Variation in the Intensity of the Rod Lens Array
The machine executes shading correction to even out the output of the CCD. Shading correction may be shading
adjustment executed at power-on or shading correction executed for each job.
5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment
0006-5937
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

In this adjustment, the machine measures the density of the standard while plate, and stores the results in memory as
density data. It then performs computations on the shading data, and uses the result as the target value for shading
correction.
5.3.6.7 Shading Correction
0006-5938
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine executes this correction for every scan made in main shading unit. It measures the density of the
standard white plate, and compares the result against the target value stored in the shading correction circuit; the
difference between the two will be held as the shading correction value for use in correcting variation among CCD
pixels when scanning the original, thus evening out the density levels of the image.
5-24
CCD output
Target value
Characteristics after correction

Characteristics before correction
Measurement
White
Original density
Standard white plate
F-5-28
Chapter 5
5.4
Parts
Procedure
Replacement
5.4.1 Copyboard glass

5.4.1.1
Removing
Copyboard Glass
the
0006-9714
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass
retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3].
F-5-29
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to

touch the following:
- glass surface
- standard white plate
F-5-30
5.4.1.2 Removing the ADF

Reading Glass
0006-9730
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the
images. If dirt is found, clean it with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
1) Open the copyboard glass (or ADF).

retainer [2].
3) Remove the ADF reading glass [3].
5-26
Chapter 5
[1]
F-5-32
F-5-31
2) Open the copyboard cover (or the ADF).
3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the reader rear
When removing the ADF reading glass, take care not
cover [2].
to touch the glass surface.The presence of dirt can

[1]
cause white/black lines in the images. If dirt is found,

be sure to clean it using lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB

5.4.2.1 Before Replacing the
Reader Controller PCB
0007-0740
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[1]
[2]
F-5-33
If an ADF is used, be sure to execute P-PRINT of
service mode to obtain its printout:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT
5.4.2.2 Removing the Reader

Rear Cover
5.4.2.3 Removing the rear

cover of the machine
0007-3565
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-0742
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
1) Remove the 14 screws [1], and detach the rear

cover [2] of the machine.
1) Disconnect the ADF communications cable [1] (if

equipped with an ADF)
5-27
Chapter 5
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-5-36
F-5-34
5.4.2.4 Removing the flexible

cable cover

0007-3566
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the flexible
2) Disconnect the flexible cable [3] on the reader
controller PCB.
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-5-35
the
0007-3420
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

5-28

cable cover [2].
5.4.2.5
Removing
Copyboard Glass
- glass surface
Chapter 5
[1]
F-5-38
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the
flexible cable [2].
[2]
F-5-37
[1]
F-5-39

Controller PCB
0007-0745
3) Remove the 8 screws [2], and detach the cover [3].
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
[1]
[2]
[1]
1) Remove the cover [1].
F-5-40
4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and detach the 3
5-29
Chapter 5
wire saddles [2]; then, remove the 2 screws [3].

[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-5-44
8) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and free the cable
[3]
from the wire saddle [2].
F-5-41
5) Go to the back of the machine, and free the cable
from the 5 wire saddles [1]; then, disconnect the
connector [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-45
F-5-42
9) Remove the 2 screws [1], and pull out the reader

controller PCB base [2].
6) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

[2]
[1]
[1]
F-5-46
10) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the reader
controller PCB [2].
F-5-43
5-30
Chapter 5
(fixed reading)
[1]
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
a-3. shading position adjustment (fixed reading)
[2]
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
a-4. main/sub scanning direction MTF value
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG
If the value of the following was not 0 before the

replacement
of
the
reader
controller
PCB:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CCD-LUT.
F-5-47
Set a value other than '0' once again, and make the
5.4.2.7 After Replacing the

Reader Controller PCB or
After Initializing the RAM
following adjustments using the D-10 Chart.

0007-0746
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
2. ADF-Related Adjustment
The machine keeps ADF-related service mode data in
the RAM of the reader controller; as such, you will
have to make the appropriate adjustments if you
- Before replacing the reader controller PCB, be sure
have replaced the reader controller or initialized the

RAM.
to generate the latest P-PRINT printout.

<if you are initializing the RAM of the reader
controller without replacing the PCB>
- Using the SST, upload the reader controller backup
1) Enter the values indicated in the P-PRINT printout
data; after initializing the RAM, download the data,
you have previously generated for the following:
thus eliminating the need for the following
a. main scanning direction position adjustment
adjustment.
(stream reading)
1. Reader Unit-Related Adjustment
COPIER>ADJSUT>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF
1) Using the SST, download the latest system
b. original stop position adjustment
software (R-CON).
FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST
2) Make the following selections in service mode:

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>R-CON;
then,
press the OK key to initialize the RAM. Thereafter,
c. original feed speed (magnification) adjustment

FEEDER>ADUST>LA-SPEED
turn off and then on the main power.

3) Enter the appropriate values using the following
service mode items:
a. service label (behind reader unit left cover)
values
a-1. CIS read position adjustment (fixed reading)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
a-2. main scanning direction position adjustment
2) Make adjustments using the following items:

a. tray width adjustment
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A4
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A5R
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTR
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTRR
b. CIS read position adjustment (stream reading)
5-31
Chapter 5
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>STRD-
cover [2].
POS
c. white level adjustment
[1]
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1
When you have finished the foregoing adjustments,
put the P-PRINT printout [1] you have previously
generated in the service book cassette to replace the
old P-PRINT printout.
[1]
[2]
F-5-50
5.4.3.2 Removing the Scanner

Motor
0006-9746
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
F-5-48
1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, disconnect the
5.4.3 Scanner Motor

Rear Cover
connector [2], and detach the 2 wire saddles [3].
0007-3432
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-5-51
2) Remove the spring [1], and detach the scanner
motor [2].
[1]
F-5-49
5-32
Chapter 5
F-5-52
F-5-54
5.4.4 Contact sensor
4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader

Front Cover
front cover [2].

0006-9758
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the copyboard
glass retainer (right) [2].
F-5-55

Rear Cover
0007-3433
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
F-5-53

3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the copyboard

glass retainer (left) [2].
5-33
Chapter 5
[1]
F-5-56
F-5-58

cover [2].

- glass surface
[1]

[1]
[2]
F-5-57
5.4.4.3
Removing
Copyboard Glass
the
0007-3421
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

5-34
Chapter 5
F-5-60
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the plate [2].
F-5-61
3) Remove the flexible cable [1], and detach the
contact image sensor (CIS) [2].
F-5-59
5.4.4.4 Removing the Contact

Image Sensor (CIS)
[1]
[2]
0006-9762
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the
arrow so that the contact image sensor (CIS) [2]
will move where it is shown in the figure.
F-5-62
When detaching the contact sensor unit, take care not

to touch the light guide assembly and the lens
5-35
Chapter 5
assembly.
Light guide
Rod lens array
XX
F-5-63
MTF-MG
When mounting it, be sure to connect the flexible
F-5-65
cable [1] before fitting the contact image sensor (CIS)

[2] to the machine.
Be sure also to update the value indicated on the

service label found behind the left cover of the reader
[1]
[2]
unit so that it is identical to the value indicated on the

CIS label.
Reference:
At time of shipment from the factory, no CIS label is
attached.
5.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close

F-5-64
5.4.4.5 After Replacement of

the CIS
Sensor
0006-9764
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Be sure to enter the value indicated on the CIS label
attached to the contact image sensor (CIS) using the
following service mode item:
(main scanning direction MTR correction value)
5-36

Rear Cover
0007-3437
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Chapter 5
[1]
F-5-66
cover [2].
F-5-68
2) Detach the 2 sensors [1] from the sensor base.
[1]
F-5-69
[1]
5.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor
[2]
F-5-67
5.4.5.2
Removing
the
Copyboard Cover Open/
Closed Sensor (front/rear)
5.4.6.1
Removing
Copyboard Glass
0007-0753
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the
screw [2]; then, detach the sensor base [3].
the
0007-3439
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

5-37
Chapter 5
F-5-70

- glass surface
F-5-71

Reading Glass
0007-3426
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

retainer [2].
5-38
Chapter 5
under the claw [2] found at the rear.
F-5-72

F-5-74

alcohol.
After replacing the sensor, pull the drive belt (rear) [1]
in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image
5.4.6.3 Removing the Contract

Sensor Home Position Sensor
sensor (CIS) [2] is returned to the farthest left.

0007-0751
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Pull the drive belt [1] in the direction of the arrow
so that the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] is where
indicated in the figure.
F-5-75
5.4.7 Original Size Sensor
F-5-73

Rear Cover
0007-3440
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the CIS
home position sensor [3].
When detaching the sensor, do so as if to push it

5-39
Chapter 5
[1]
F-5-76
F-5-78

cover [2].

- glass surface
[1]

[1]
[2]
F-5-77
5.4.7.2
Removing
Copyboard Glass
the
0007-3425
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

5-40
Chapter 5
[1]
F-5-80
flexible cable [2].
[2]
F-5-79
[1]
F-5-81
5.4.7.3 Removing the Original

Size Sensor
0006-9774
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
[1]
[2]
[1]
1) Remove the cover [1].
F-5-82
4) Free the hook [1], and detach the original sensor
5-41
Chapter 5
[2].

[1]
[2]
F-5-85
F-5-83
7) Free the hook [4], and detach the original size

- glass surface
sensor [5].

[1]
[5]

[4]
[3]
[2]
F-5-84
5.4.8 Reader Heater (option)

5.4.8.1
Removing
Copyboard Glass
the
0007-3423
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

5-42
Chapter 5
F-5-87

Reading Glass
0007-3427
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

retainer [2].
F-5-86

Heater (right)
0007-0757
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable
F-5-88
from the wire saddle [2].

2) Remove the screw [3], and detach the reader heater
(right) [4].

alcohol.
5-43
Chapter 5

Heater (left)
0007-0760
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the
arrow so that the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] is
where it is indicated in the figure.
F-5-91
F-5-89
2) Peel the protective sheet [1], and disconnect the
connector [2].
3) Free the cable from the wire saddle [3], and remove
the screw [4]; then, detach the reader heater (left)
[5].
F-5-90
After replacing the reader heater, pull the drive belt

(rear) [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the
contact image sensor is returned to the farthest left.
5-44
Chapter 6Laser Exposure
Contents
Contents
6.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanism, and Functions .................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 Construction of the Control System ............................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.1 Basic Sequence ........................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3 Various Controls................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing .................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1.1 Turning On and off the Laser Light ..................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1.2 Main Scanning Synchronous Control................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light...................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.1 APC Control ......................................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ........................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter .................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ............................................................................................................. 6-10
6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit .................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.4.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ......................................................................................................... 6-12
6.4.1.2 Removing the Left Cover ................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.4.1.3 Removing the Laser Unit.................................................................................................................... 6-13
Chapter 6
6.1 Construction
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanism, and Functions
0006-9404
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Laser Light
T-6-1
Number of laser beams
Output
5mW (iR2270/2870/2230/2830)
10mW (iR3570/4570/3530)
Wave length
785 nm - 800 nm (infrared light)
Scanner Motor
T-6-2
Type of motor
DC brushless motor
Number of revolutions
16000 rpm (approx.; single control)

(iR2270/2870/2230/2830)
27000 rpm/16000 rpm (approx.; double control)
(iR3570/4570/3530)
Type of bearing
Oil
Polygon Mirror
T-6-3
Number of facets
6 (40-mm dia.)
Control Mechanism
T-6-4
Synchronous control
Light intensity control
APC
Others
Laser activation/deactivation
6-1
Chapter 6
Laser scanner motor control

Laser shutter control
0006-5970
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
F-6-1
T-6-5
Name
Description
[1] Laser unit
Generates laser light
[2] Polygon mirror
Scans laser light in main scanning direction.
[3] BD mirror
Reflects laser light in the direction of the BD PCB.
[4] BD PCB
Generates the BD signal.
6.1.3 Construction of the Control System

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
The laser exposure system is primarily controlled by the DC controller PCB.
iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F/2230/2230F/2830
6-2
0006-5971
Chapter 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
J601
GND
+5V
PWCHG
POLYGON FG
+24V
P ACC
P DEC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J604
[3]
1 2 3
VDO1
GND
/VDO1
CNT0
CNT1
CNT2
/VDO2
GND
VDO2
J603
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J318
iR2270/iR2270F/iR2870/iR2870F
[4]
[2]
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
321
J316
J317
[1]
+3.3V
BD
GND
F-6-2
iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F/3530
6-3
Chapter 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
J601
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J602
GND
+5V
PWCHG
[3]
1 2 3
VDO1
GND
/VDO1
CNT0
CNT1
CNT2
/VDO2
GND
VDO2
J603
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J318
iR3570/iR3570F/iR4570/iR4570F
[4]
[2]
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
321
J316
J317
[1]
STAND BY
FG PULSE DETECT
POLYGON FG
+24V
P ACC
P DEC
GND
+3.3V
BD
GND
F-6-3
[1]DC controller PCB
[2]Laser driver PCB
[3]Scanner motor PCB
[4]BD PCB
T-6-6
6-4
Single
Description
VDO1
Image data single input
CNT0
Laser driver control signal
CNT1
CNT2
VDO2
Image data signal input
PWCHG
Light intensify switchover signal
FG PULSE DETECT
FG PULSE detecting signal
POLYGON FG
FG output signal
Single
Description
P ACC
Motor acceleration signal
P DEC
Motor deceleration signal
BD
BD output level single
Chapter 6
6.2 Basic Sequence

6.2.1 Basic Sequence
0006-5972
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

When the control panel power switch is turned on, the laser scanner starts to rotate; when the motor rotation reaches
its target revolution, the machine turns on the laser unit. Thereafter, when the Start key is turned on, the machine
generates the image request signal (PVREQ) on the printer side, and turns on the laser beam with reference to the
generated signal.
A4, 1 Copy
STBY
INTR
PRINT
Laser A
BD detention/APC control ON
BD
STBY
PVREQ
BD detection/APC control ON
APC control ON
F-6-4
6-6
Chapter 6
6.3 Various Controls

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
6.3.1.1 Turning On and off the Laser Light
0006-5973
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The laser light is turned on and off according to the combination of laser control signals (CNT0/1/2) from the DC
controller PCB.
T-6-7
Laser control signal
Laser status
CNT2
CNT1
CNT0
Laser A
Laser B
ON (for APC control)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Video signal input
Video signal input
enabled
enabled
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
6-7
J318
CNT0
CNT1
CNT2
Chapter 6
DC-CON
F-6-5
6.3.1.2 Main Scanning Synchronous Control
0006-5974
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The synchronous control in the main scanning direction is performed in the synch circuit based on the BD synch
signal.
Using the BD signal generated based on the light from laser A, the DC controller PCB generates the BD synch signal
for laser A and the BD synch signal for laser B.
The image data written to line memory is read out by the readout enable signal (RE_A, RE_B) generated based on
the BD synch signal (BD_A, BD_B) for output to the laser driver PCB.
6-8
Chapter 6
BD
[6]
J318
J316
BD_A
RE_A
[3]
J301
[1]
BD_B
[2]
RE_B
[3]
MN-CON
[4]
[5]
DC-CON
F-6-6
[1] Sync circuit
[2] Delay circuit
[3] Line memory
[4] VDO
[5] VDO signal processing block
[6] Laser driver PCB
BD_A/B : BD synch signal
RE_A/B : readout enable signal
Memo:
The BD sensor of the BD PCB receives light from laser A only, and is free of light from laser B, i.e., the BD signal
is generated based on the light from laser A.
6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light

6.3.2.1 APC Control
0006-5976
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The laser light hitting the photodiode included in the laserdiode is monitored and is controlled so that it remains a
6-9
Chapter 6
specific level at all times.
6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor

6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor
0006-5978
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The laser scanner motor is controlled with reference to the laser scanner motor revolution signal (FG signal).
The revolution of the laser scanner motor is controlled by means of the acceleration signal (ACC signal) and the
BD
ACC
DEC
FG
deceleration signal (DEC signal).
J316
J317
DC-CON
F-6-7
6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter

6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter
0006-5979
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

When the right door is opened, the laser shutter link operating in conjunction with the cover causes the laser shutter
to move down, thus blocking the path of the laser light. If the machine identifies the front cover or the right door as
having been opened, it will turn off the laser scanner motor and the laser output.
6-10
Chapter 6
[1]
[2]
DOOR CLOSED
[3]
DOOR OPEN
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-6-8
[1] Laser shutter
[2] Laser shutter link (operates in conjunction with front cover)
[3] Laser unit
6-11
Chapter 6
6.4
Parts
Procedure
Replacement
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the left cover

[2].
6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit

[2]
6.4.1.1 Removing the Front

Cover Unit
0007-8348
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-6-11
6.4.1.3 Removing the Laser

Unit
0007-8350
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
F-6-9
1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2
2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].
connectors [2].
3) Remove the binding screw [2].

4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3].
5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the
F-6-12
F-6-10
6.4.1.2 Removing the Left

Cover
When you have disconnected the connector [1], be

sure to take care so that it will not come into contact
0007-8349
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
6-12
with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit.

(The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity
Chapter 6
adjustment variable resistor. Contact with the PCB

can change the adjustment setting.)
2) Open the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the
connector [2].
When sliding out the laser scanner unit, be sure to take

care not to touch the PCB mounted to the laser scanner
unit. (The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner
intensity adjustment variable resistor, and contact
with the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)
F-6-13
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing [2].
F-6-14
4) Lift the front of the laser unit [1], and slide it to the
front.
F-6-15
6-13
Chapter 7Image
Formation
Contents
Contents
7.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System........................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System .................................................................................. 7-2
7.2 Image Formation Process ................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.1 Image Formation Process (outline) ............................................................................................................. 7-4
7.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) .............................................................................................. 7-5
7.3 Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.1 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation) ...................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.2 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation) ...................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.3 Sequence of Operation (copying)................................................................................................................ 7-7
7.3.4 Sequence of Operation (copying)................................................................................................................ 7-8
7.3.5 Sequence of Operation (last rotation).......................................................................................................... 7-8
7.3.6 Sequence of Operation (last rotation).......................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4 Image Stabilization Control.............................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.4.2 APVC Control ........................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.4.3 ATVC Control ........................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.5 Drum Unit......................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.5.1 Charging Mechanism ................................................................................................................................ 7-12
7.5.1.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias.............................................................................................. 7-12
7.5.1.2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism ................................................................................. 7-12
7.6 Drum Cleaner Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.6.1 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.7 Developing Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.7.1 Controlling the Developing Bias ............................................................................................................... 7-15
7.8 Toner Container................................................................................................................................................ 7-16
7.8.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.8.2 Route of Toner Supply .............................................................................................................................. 7-17
7.8.3 Controlling the Drive of the Toner Cartridge............................................................................................ 7-18
7.8.4 Toner Supply Control ................................................................................................................................ 7-19
7.8.5 Recovery Sequence ................................................................................................................................... 7-19
7.8.6 Toner Level Detection............................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.9 Transfer Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.9.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit ...................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.9.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 7-21
7.9.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias .................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.9.2.1 Transfer Roller Bias Control .............................................................................................................. 7-21
7.9.3 Cleaning..................................................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.9.3.1 Transfer Roller Cleaning Mechanism ................................................................................................ 7-22
7.9.4 Separation Mechanism .............................................................................................................................. 7-22
7.9.4.1 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias ............................................................................................... 7-22
7.10 Transfer Mechanism....................................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.10.1 Transfer Guide Bias................................................................................................................................. 7-23
7.10.1.1 Transfer Guide Bias Control ............................................................................................................ 7-23
Contents
7.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning ....................................................................................................................... 7-24

7.11.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-24
7.11.2 Collection of Waste Toner....................................................................................................................... 7-24
7.11.3 Checking the Waste Toner Box ............................................................................................................... 7-24
7.12 Parts Replacement Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.12.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp ................................................................................................................................. 7-26
7.12.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ....................................................................................................... 7-26
7.12.1.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case...................................................................................................... 7-26
7.12.1.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................... 7-27
7.12.1.4 Removing the Drum Unit ................................................................................................................. 7-28
7.12.1.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ............................................................................................... 7-30
7.12.1.6 Removing the Upper Tray ................................................................................................................ 7-33
7.12.1.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover .............................................................................................. 7-34
7.12.1.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp................................................................................................... 7-34
7.12.2 Drum Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 7-35
7.12.3 Hopper Assembly .................................................................................................................................... 7-38
7.12.3.9 Removing the Left Cover ................................................................................................................. 7-47
7.12.3.10 Removing the Laser Unit................................................................................................................ 7-48
7.12.3.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly.................................................................................................... 7-50
7.12.4 Sub Hopper .............................................................................................................................................. 7-51
7.12.4.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor .......................................................................................... 7-64
7.12.4.13 Removing the Sub Hopper.............................................................................................................. 7-65
7.12.5 Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 7-68
7.12.6 Developing Cylinder................................................................................................................................ 7-72
Contents
7.12.6.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder................................................................................................. 7-72

7.12.7 Transfer Charging Roller......................................................................................................................... 7-76
7.12.7.1 Removing the Transfer Roller .......................................................................................................... 7-76
7.12.8 Waste Toner Box..................................................................................................................................... 7-78
7.12.8.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ..................................................................................................... 7-79
7.12.9 Toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 7-80
7.12.9.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ..................................................................................................... 7-81
7.12.9.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge......................................................................................................... 7-82
7.12.9.5 Removing the Developing Assembly............................................................................................... 7-85
7.12.9.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp .................................................................................................. 7-88
7.12.9.12 Removing the Toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................. 7-93
7.12.10 Toner Feedscrew Motor ....................................................................................................................... 7-94
7.12.10.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ..................................................................................................... 7-94
7.12.10.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ................................................................................................... 7-94
7.12.10.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge....................................................................................................... 7-95
7.12.10.4 Removing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................... 7-96
7.12.10.5 Removing the Developing Assembly............................................................................................. 7-98
7.12.10.6 Removing the Upper Tray ............................................................................................................ 7-101
7.12.10.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover .......................................................................................... 7-102
7.12.10.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp .............................................................................................. 7-102
7.12.10.9 Removing the Left Cover ............................................................................................................. 7-103
7.12.10.10 Removing the Laser Unit............................................................................................................ 7-103
7.12.10.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly................................................................................................ 7-105
7.12.10.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor...................................................................................... 7-107
7.12.11 Static Charge Eliminator ..................................................................................................................... 7-108
7.12.11.1 Removing the Static Eliminator ................................................................................................... 7-108
Chapter 7
7.1 Construction
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System
0006-6168
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
T-7-1
Drum Unit Specifications
Photosensitive drum
Drum type
OPC
Drum diameter
30 mm
Cleaning mechanism
by cleaning blade
Process speed
230 mm/sec (iR3570/4570/3530)

137 mm/sec (iR2270/2870/2230/2830)
Primary charging
Charging method
by roller (AC + DC)
Charging roller diameter
16 mm
Cleaning mechanism
by brush roller (reciprocating mechanism)
Transfer charging
Charging method
by roller (DC)
Charging roller diameter
16 mm
T-7-2
Pre-Exposure Unit Specifications
LED
12 pc.
Timing of light
in response to drum rotation
emission
T-7-3
Developing Unit Specifications
Developing cylinder
20 mm
diameter
7-1
Chapter 7
Development method
by dry, single-component toner projection method

(application of AC + DC)
Toner
single-component insulating magnetic toner
by toner level sensor (inside sub hopper and developing

assembly)
T-7-4
Toner Cartridge Specifications
none
Toner variable resistor
1220 g (iR3570/4570/3530)
1060 g (iR2270/2870/2230/2830)
T-7-5
Others
separation method
by static eliminator + curvature
Waste toner
collection to waste toner case
7.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
7-2
0006-5981
Chapter 7
[7]
[8]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[6]
F-7-1
[1] Toner cartridge
[2] Sub hopper
[3] Developing unit
[4] Photosensitive drum
[5] Transfer roller
[6] Primary charging roller
[7] Drum unit
[8] Drum cleaning unit
7-3
Chapter 7
7.2 Image Formation Process

7.2.1 Image Formation Process (outline)
0006-5983
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
[D]
[C]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[B]
[4]
[A]
F-7-2
T-7-6
Item
Description
[1]Pre-exposure
removes residual charges from the drum.
[2]Primary charging
charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to a

uniform negative potential.
[A]Pickup
[B]Registration
[C]Fixing
[D]Delivery
7-4
[3]Laser exposure
forms a latent static image on the drum.
[4]Development
forms a visible image on the drum.
[5]Transfer
transfers images from the drum to paper.
[6]Separation
separates paper from the drum.
[7]Drum cleaning
removes toner from the drum.
Chapter 7
7.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation)
0006-6411
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
F-7-3
[1] The difference in potential between the drum surface and the developing sleeve causes toner to adhere to the latent
static image on the drum, turning the image into a visible image.
[2] The bias voltage applied to the transfer roller causes the toner to move from the drum to paper.
[3] The cleaning blade in contact with the drum scrapes off the residual toner from the drum.
7-5
Chapter 7
7.3 Basic Sequence

7.3.1 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation)
0006-6865
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

The sequence of operation of initial rotation is as follows:
Pickup from the Cassette
Registration
ON
Pickup motor
Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)
[1]
F-7-4
Pickup from the Manual Feeder
Multifeeder
ON
Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)
Registration
ON
[1]
F-7-5
In [1] above, a cleaning bias (-2600 V) is applied.
7.3.2 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation)

iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
7-6
0006-6867
Chapter 7
The following is the sequence of operation of initial rotation:

Pickup from the Cassette
Registration
ON
Pickup motor
Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)
[1]
F-7-6
Pickup from the Manual Feeder
Multifeeder
ON
Registration
ON
Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)
[1]
F-7-7
7.3.3 Sequence of Operation (copying)
0006-6868
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

The sequence of operation during copying is as follows:
7-7
Chapter 7
Registration
ON
Image write
end
Registration
ON
Sheet-to-sheet sequence
Image formation sequence

(1st sheet)
Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)

(2nd sheet and later)
[1]
F-7-8
7.3.4 Sequence of Operation (copying)
0006-6869
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The sequence of operation during copying is as follows:
Registration
ON
Image write
end
Registration
ON
Sheet-to-sheet sequence
Image sequence
(1st sheet)
Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)

(2nd sheet and later)
[1]
F-7-9
7.3.5 Sequence of Operation (last rotation)

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
The sequence of operation of last rotation is as follows:
7-8
0006-6870
Chapter 7
Image write
end
Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)
[1]
F-7-10
7.3.6 Sequence of Operation (last rotation)
0006-6871
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The sequence of operation of last rotation is as follows:
Image write
end
Main motor
(M-motor)
Primary charging
(PRI)
Laser
(LD)
Developing AC
(DEV_AC)
Developing DC
(DEV_DC)
Developing clutch
(DEV_CL)
Transfer
(TR)
Static removal
(SEP)
[1]
F-7-11
7-9
Chapter 7
7.4 Image Stabilization Control

7.4.1 Overview
0006-5986
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

At times, changes in the environment or wear on the machine can cause its image output to become unstable. To
make sure that its output will remain stable at all times, the machine uses the following control mechanisms:
T-7-7
[1] Drum film thickness detection
corrects the development contrast.
control
[2] Developing contrast control
determines the appropriate primary

charging DC bias and developing DC bias.
[3] ATVC control
corrects the transfer bias.
BK
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-12
7.4.2 APVC Control
0006-5987
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The term APVC stands for "auto primary voltage control," and it is a mechanism used to control the primary charging
application voltage (DC component) to suit the film thickness of the machine's photosensitive drum. APVC is
performed every 500 sheets while the machine is in operation. It is forcibly performed when the drum unit is
replaced.
7-10
Chapter 7
7.4.3 ATVC Control
0006-5989
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine is provided with a constant current control mechanism that can be enabled or disabled in service mode:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TRANS-SW.
7-11
Chapter 7
7.5 Drum Unit

7.5.1 Charging Mechanism
7.5.1.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias
0006-5991
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
T-7-8
Primary Charging Bias
AC bias
2700 Vp-p (max.)
DC bias
-450 V to -850 V
These AC and DC biases are applied between sheets while an image is being formed (until the end of the ongoing
job).
7.5.1.2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism
0006-5992
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine uses a brush [3] to clean the primary charging roller [2], which remains in contact with the
photosensitive drum [1]. The brush has a reciprocating mechanism and is driven by a cam [4], operating while the
photosensitive drum is being driven.
7-12
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-7-13
Chapter 7
7.6 Drum Cleaner Unit

7.6.1 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning
0007-5224
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The cleaning blade is kept in contact with the surface of the photosensitive drum. It serves to scrape off the residual
toner left behind from transfer to paper for collection in the waste toner box.
7-14
Chapter 7
7.7 Developing Unit

7.7.1 Controlling the Developing Bias
0006-6032
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
T-7-9
Developing Bias
AC bias
800 Vp-p
DC bias
-450 V to -650 V
Both these AC and DC biases are applied while an image is being formed, but are not applied between sheets.
7-15
Chapter 7
7.8 Toner Container

7.8.1 Overview
0006-6323
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The toner cartridge is constructed as shown in the following figure. The cartridge is filled with 1-component
insulating magnetic toner (if iR3570/4570, 1220 g; if iR2270/2870, 1060 g). When the sub hopper requests a supply
of toner, the cartridge itself rotates to feed toner. The machine's toner cartridge serves as a hopper (as it is found in
past models).
iR3570 / iR4570
F-7-14
iR2270 / iR2870
F-7-15
Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge
7-16
Chapter 7
1. Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop [1] against the covers or the like when and after removing the
toner cartridge. Since the toner stop comes off easily, toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident.
2. Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing. Since the toner stop [1] comes off easily as mentioned above,
toner scattering may be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down.
[1]
F-7-16
7.8.2 Route of Toner Supply
0006-6363
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

When the user fits the toner cartridge [1] in place, toner is temporarily stored in the sub hopper [2], inside which is
a sensor that makes sure that the amount of toner remains at a specific level at all times. When the developing
assembly [4] requests a supply of toner, the machine rotates the feedscrew [3] to move toner from the sub hopper to
the developing assembly.
The machine's toner cartridge serves as a hopper (as found in past models).
7-17
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
F-7-17
7.8.3 Controlling the Drive of the Toner Cartridge
0006-5996
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

When a request is made for a supply of toner, the toner cartridge drive motor rotates in the direction shown in the
following figure; its drive is transmitted from the drive motor to the toner cartridge, thus rotating the toner cartridge.
F-7-18
7-18
Chapter 7
7.8.4 Toner Supply Control
0006-5995
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Supply of Toner from the Toner Bottle to the Sub Hopper
If the "absence of toner inside the sub hopper" is detected while the main motor is rotating, the bottle motor is rotated
intermittently (on for 3 sec, off for 2 sec), and the length of time during which the absence is detected is checked
using a counter that increases its count for each on-off cycle. When the count reaches 20 (about 100 sec), the machine
will assume that the sub hopper has become empty, and will indicate the Add Toner message on its control panel.
The counter is reset when the presence of toner inside the sub hopper is detected during any on-off cycle.
If the "absence of toner inside the developing assembly" is detected while the main motor is rotating and the
developing clutch is on, the machine rotates the sub hopper feedscrew motor intermittently (on for 1 sec, off for 1
sec). The rotation is monitored by a counter that increases its count when the developing sensor state is off during a
single on-off cycle; when its reading reaches 20 (about 40 sec), the machine will assume that its developing assembly
is more or less empty (i.e., there is a possibility of the ongoing generating black prints if printing continues), and will
issue a No Toner error, suspending image formation operation. The counter is reset when the presence of toner is
detected inside the developing assembly.
E020-0000
If the absence of toner is detected by the developing assembly toner level sensor and the presence of toner is detected
by the hopper toner level sensor, the route of supply from the sub hopper to the developing assembly may be clogged
or the output of these toner sensors may be faulty.
This error code will be indicated when the soft counter reaches 194 (about 388 sec). The counter is designed to
increase its count when the hopper sensor level is on during a single on-off cycle while toner is being supplied from
the sub hopper to the developing assembly.
7.8.5 Recovery Sequence
0007-5234
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine is not equipped with a mechanism to detect the replacement of its toner cartridge, but is designed to
execute toner recovery sequence in response to the following, assuming that the cartridge has been replaced:
1. the front cover has been opened and closed after the machine has detected the absence of toner inside the toner
cartridge and the developing assembly.
2. the machine has been turned off and then on after it has detected the absence of toner inside the toner cartridge and
the developing assembly.
The machine's recovery sequence is as follows:
1. the machine rotates the toner cartridge motor. (intermittently by rotating it for 3 sec and stopping it for 2 sec)
2. if the toner level sensor inside the sub hopper detects the "presence of toner," the machine stops the recovery
sequence.
3. after repeating the foregoing intermittent operation 20 times and if the toner level sensor inside the sub hopper still
7-19
Chapter 7
does not detect the "presence of toner," the machine will assumes that the toner cartridge has not been replaced
and cause the toner cartridge motor to stop.
7.8.6 Toner Level Detection
0006-6350
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Detecting the Level of Toner Inside the Sub Hopper
The machine checks the level of the toner sensor located inside the sub hopper every 100 msec, and will assume the
presence of toner inside the sub hopper if the sensor goes on twice or more continuously (200 msec or more).
If the machine detects the absence of toner 100 times or more (10 sc or more) as the result of its check on the sensor
level made every 100 msec, the machine will assume that there is no toner inside the sub hopper.
The machine executes the foregoing detection at all times regardless of the state (on or off) of the main motor and
the developing clutch.
Detecting the Level of Toner Inside the Developing Assembly
1. The machine samples the output of the toner level sensor located inside the developing assembly every 100 msec
(only if the developing clutch is on).
2. The machine uses a period of 1.5 sec (15 times; cumulative sampling of periods when the clutch is on) as the unit
of measurement: if the presence of toner is detected 3 times or more, it will assume that there is toner inside the
developing assembly; if the presence of toner is detected less than 3 times, on the other hand, it will assume that
there is no toner inside the developing assembly.
However, in the case of the iR3570/iR4570 Series machines, the drive of the main motor is controlled to 2 different
speeds, and the toner inside the developing assembly is driven by the main motor (using a clutch), requiring a
switchover of methods of detection as follows:
Normal Speed Mode
The machine uses a period of 1.5 sec (25 times; cumulative sampling of periods when the clutch is on) as the unit of
measurement: if the presence of toner is detected 3 times or more, it will assume that there is toner inside the
developing assembly.
Low-Speed Mode
The machine uses a period of 2.5 sec (42 times; cumulative sampling of periods when the clutch is on) as the unit of
measurement: if it detects the presence of toner 5 times or more, it will assume that there is toner inside the
The machine converts the number of samplings and the number of times toner detection has been executed when
switching over methods of detection. (The conversion is based on the speed-to-amount relationship.)
7-20
Chapter 7
7.9 Transfer Unit

7.9.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit
7.9.1.1 Outline
0006-5997
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The transfer unit [1] consists of the transfer roller and the static eliminator.
The transfer roller rotates in connection with the photosensitive drum.
Bias is applied to the static eliminator so that sheets can be separated from the drum.
F-7-19
7.9.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias

7.9.2.1 Transfer Roller Bias Control
0006-5998
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine changes the output depending on the site environment (absolute moisture content), paper type, paper
width, and source of paper.
Environment: 5 settings according to absolute moisture content
Paper type: plain paper, envelope, heavy paper, tracing paper, transparency, bond paper, label sheet
Paper width: size boundaries as defined by 2 points
Source of paper: if from cassette (including pedestal); if from multi-feeder, i.e., 1st side (half-speed), 2nd side (halfspeed)
Transfer bias
Transfer bias: 1000 to 6000 V
Transfer bias for cleaning: -2600 V
The transfer bias is used at time of image formation, while a voltage of a specific level is applied between sheets for
cleaning of the transfer roller.
7-21
Chapter 7
7.9.3 Cleaning
7.9.3.1 Transfer Roller Cleaning Mechanism
0006-6318
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine uses the transfer roller cleaning mechanism to return the toner sticking to the transfer roller back to the
photosensitive drum by applying a cleaning bias to the roller.
Once the toner reaches the drum, it is scraped by the photosensitive drum cleaning blade for collection in the waste
toner box.
7.9.4 Separation Mechanism

7.9.4.1 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias
0006-6001
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Static Eliminator Bias
1st side: -2300 V
2nd side: -3000 V
A DC bias is applied between sheets while an image is being formed. (It is applied until the ongoing job is over.)
7-22
Chapter 7
7.10 Transfer Mechanism

7.10.1 Transfer Guide Bias
7.10.1.1 Transfer Guide Bias Control
0007-5295
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

To prevent soiling of the transfer guide with toner or the photosensitive drum with toner images, the following
transfer guide bias is applied to the transfer guide. The surface of the transfer guide is covered with an insulating
sheet.
Transfer guide bias
1st side: -570 V
2nd side: -740 V
7-23
Chapter 7
7.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning

7.11.1 Outline
0006-6033
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The photosensitive drum cleaning mechanism uses the photosensitive drum cleaning blade to scrape off the residual
toner left behind from transfer; the toner thus collected is moved to the waste toner box.
7.11.2 Collection of Waste Toner
0006-6034
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The waste toner scraped off by the cleaning blade is moved by the waste toner feedscrew to the waste toner box found
at the front of the machine. The waste toner feedscrew is operated by the drive from the drum flange.
7.11.3 Checking the Waste Toner Box
0006-6036
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

To prevent leakage of waste toner from the waste toner box or to prevent overloading the waste toner feedscrew, the
machine is equipped with a waste toner detection mechanism. The waste toner box can hold about 2043 cc of toner,
and the machine identifies the waste toner box as being full when there is about 1766 cc of toner or when the toner
comes to weigh about 1050 g.
When the weight of waste toner increases, the waste toner case itself lowers on its own, thus causing the machine to
assume that the case has become full.
7-24
Chapter 7
F-7-20
E190-0000
When the machine identifies the waste toner full sensor as being continuously on for 2000 sheets, it will indicate a
warning; if it then detects the activation of the sensor for 100 sheets continuously, it will indicate 'E190-000'. (The
count is increased coinciding with delivery.)
7-25
Chapter 7
7.12 Parts
Procedure
Replacement
1) Remove the waste toner case [1].
7.12.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp

Cover Unit
0007-8024
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-23
receptacle
F-7-21
F-7-24
7.12.1.3 Removing the Toner

Cartridge
0007-8342
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Shift up the lever [1].
F-7-22
7.12.1.2 Removing the Waste

Toner Case
0007-8031
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
7-26
Chapter 7
[1]
F-7-25
F-7-27
2) Remove the toner cartridge [1].
7.12.1.4 Removing the Drum

Unit
0007-8343
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-26

1. Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop [1]
against the covers or the like when and after
removing the toner cartridge. Since the toner stop
F-7-28
comes off easily, toner scattering may be resulted if

it comes off by accident.
2) Remove the screw [1].
2. Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing.

Since the toner stop [1] comes off easily as
mentioned above, toner scattering may be resulted
if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop
side down.
F-7-29
3) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the
7-27
Chapter 7
F-7-30
F-7-33
7.12.1.5
Removing
Developing Assembly
F-7-31
5) Remove the drum unit [1].
F-7-32
the
0007-8344
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-34
Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown.
7-28
Chapter 7
Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown.
F-7-35
3) Slide the developing assembly [1] slightly to the
front; then, disconnect the connector [2].
F-7-38
When fitting the developing assembly, be sure to fit

the lower right segment [2] of the developing
assembly [1] in the rail [3] of the machine. Thereafter,
slide the developing assembly so that [A] of the
developing assembly matches [B] of the rail.
F-7-36
4) Remove the developing assembly [1].
F-7-39
F-7-37
7-29
Chapter 7
7.12.1.6 Removing the Upper

Tray
0007-8345
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper tray
[2].
F-7-42
7.12.1.8 Removing the PreExposure Lamp
0007-8347
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-40
relay connectors [2].

Reference:
Lift the front of the upper tray [1], and detach it as if
to slide it toward the front.
F-7-43
2) While freeing the lock [1] toward the right, detach
F-7-41

Cartridge Cover
the pre-exposure lamp [2].
0007-8346
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the toner
bottle cover [2].
F-7-44
7-30
Chapter 7
F-7-47
F-7-45

Toner Case
7.12.2 Drum Unit

Cover Unit
0007-8030
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-8023
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
F-7-48
F-7-46

receptacle
7-31
Chapter 7
F-7-52
F-7-49

Unit
0007-8341
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-53
F-7-50
F-7-54

F-7-51
7-32
Chapter 7
F-7-57

Toner Case
0007-8017
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-55
7.12.3 Hopper Assembly

Cover Unit
0007-8006
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-58
receptacle
F-7-56
7-33
Chapter 7

side down.
F-7-59

Cartridge
0007-8351
[1]
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-62

Unit
0007-8352
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-60
F-7-63
F-7-61

7-34
Chapter 7
F-7-64
F-7-67

F-7-65
F-7-68
F-7-66
7.12.3.5
Removing
Developing Assembly
the
0007-8353
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

7-35
Chapter 7
F-7-69
F-7-72
F-7-70
F-7-73

F-7-71
7-36
Chapter 7
F-7-76

Cartridge Cover
F-7-74

Tray
0007-8355
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
0007-8354

bottle cover [2].
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2].
F-7-77
F-7-75
Reference:
0007-8357
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

7-37
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
F-7-78
[1]
[1]
F-7-81

Unit
0007-8359
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-79
connectors [2].
F-7-80

Cover
F-7-82
0007-8358
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


[2].

7-38
Chapter 7
connector [2].

7.12.3.11
Removing
Hopper Assembly
the
0007-8360
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-83
1) Remove the inside base cover [1] and the inside

right color [2].
F-7-86
F-7-84
2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] found at the front
and the connector [2] found at the rear.
front.
F-7-87
3) Open the 11 wire saddles [1], and pull out the
F-7-85
harness [3] through the hole [2] in the plate.
7-39
Chapter 7
7.12.4 Sub Hopper

Cover Unit
0007-8020
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-88
4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the hopper
assembly [2].
F-7-91
F-7-89
When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine, be

sure that the connectors [1] are securely connected. If
the connectors [1] are not connected, the environment
heater will not be supplied with power, leading to
image faults.
F-7-92

Toner Case
0007-8027
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
F-7-90
7-40
Chapter 7
F-7-95
F-7-93
receptacle
F-7-96

F-7-94


Cartridge

0007-8386
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

side down.
7-41
Chapter 7
[1]
F-7-100
F-7-97

Unit
0007-8387
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-101
F-7-98
F-7-102
F-7-99
7-42
Chapter 7
F-7-105
F-7-103
7.12.4.5
Removing
Developing Assembly
the
0007-8388
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-106
F-7-104

F-7-107
7-43
Chapter 7

Tray
0007-8389
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2].
F-7-110
F-7-108
Reference:

F-7-111

Cartridge Cover
0007-8390
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

bottle cover [2].
F-7-109
7-44
Chapter 7
F-7-115
F-7-112

Cover
0007-8391
0007-8392
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2].
[2]
[1]
F-7-113
[1]
[1]
F-7-116

Unit
0007-8393
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-114
connectors [2].
7-45
Chapter 7
F-7-119
F-7-117
front.
connector [2].
F-7-120

F-7-118

7.12.4.11
Removing
Hopper Assembly
the
0007-8394
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

right color [2].
7-46
Chapter 7
F-7-121
F-7-124


image faults.
F-7-122
F-7-125

Feedscrew Motor
0007-8395
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-123
assembly [2].
7-47
Chapter 7
F-7-126
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the toner
feedscrew motor assembly [2].
F-7-129
2) Check the phase of the gear [1] shown in the figure.
F-7-127
feedscrew motor [3] from the base.
F-7-130
F-7-128
7.12.4.13 Removing the Sub

Hopper
0007-8396
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 2 screws [2] from the back of the sub
hopper [1].
7-48
Chapter 7
F-7-134
F-7-131
4) Free the cable from the edge saddle [1].
F-7-135
8) Detach the sub hopper [1] from the bottom.
F-7-132
5) Remove the screw [1], and release the arm [2].
F-7-136
7.12.5 Developing Assembly

F-7-133
6) Remove the bushing unit [2] from the sub hopper
[1].

Cover Unit
0007-8022
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

7-49
Chapter 7

receptacle
F-7-137
F-7-140
7.12.5.3
Removing
Developing Assembly
the
0007-8034
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-138

Toner Case
0007-8029
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-141
F-7-139
7-50
Chapter 7
F-7-142
F-7-145

F-7-143
F-7-146
F-7-144
7-51
Chapter 7
7.12.6 Developing Cylinder

7.12.6.1
Removing
Developing Cylinder
the
0008-0013
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the top cover
[2].
F-7-149
4) Remove the E-ring [1]; then, remove the washer
[2], bearing [3], gear [4], and parallel pin [5].
F-7-147
2) While freeing the claw [1], detach the sleeve front
guide [2] in the direction of the arrow.
F-7-150
5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the gear unit [2].
F-7-148
F-7-151
3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the angle
adjusting plate [2].
6) Remove the sleeve bushing [1], gear [2], and

parallel pin [3].
7-52
Chapter 7
F-7-154
9) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, remove the 2
bearings [2] and the sleeve holder (rear) [3].
F-7-152
When fitting the sleeve bushing, be sure to take note

of the following:
The protrusion [4] of the sleeve bushing must fit the
recess in the gear unit side plate. (Otherwise, the
protrusion can come into contact with the surface of
F-7-155
the photosensitive drum.)

Pay attention to the orientation of the sleeve bushing.
10) Remove the grip ring [1] and the screw [2]; then,
(Be sure that the longer protrusion [5] is on the
remove the washer [3], bearings [4] [5], and sleeve
developing cylinder side. Otherwise, you will not be
holder (front) [6].
able to fit the gear unit.)

7) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the washer
[2]; then, detach the transfer upper guide [3].
F-7-156
F-7-153
11) Remove the developing cylinder [1].
8) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the blade unit

[2].
7-53
Chapter 7
F-7-157
F-7-159
When detaching/attaching the developing cylinder
from/to the developing unit, be sure of the following:
3) Remove the holder [1] from the front of the transfer

roller.
1. A good number of self-taping screws are used

inside the developing unit. Be sure not to tighten
these screws too tightly and damage the screw
holes.
2. When removing the developing cylinder, be sure to
remove the blade unit first.
3. When attaching the developing cylinder, be sure to
fit it first to the developing unit.
4. Do not touch the developing cylinder or subject it to
F-7-160
impact.
7.12.7 Transfer Charging Roller

7.12.7.1 Removing the Transfer
Roller
4) Remove the transfer roller [1] toward the front.
0007-8431
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-161
Points to Note When Attaching the Transfer Roller

Be sure that the top of the holder [1] is on the inside of
the static eliminator [2].
F-7-158
2) Pull off the pin [1] toward the front.
7-54
Chapter 7

F-7-162
Be sure that the spring [1] of the holder is against the
butting point [2].
F-7-165

Toner Case
0007-8015
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-163
7.12.8 Waste Toner Box

Cover Unit
0007-8008
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-166

receptacle
F-7-164
7-55
Chapter 7
F-7-169
F-7-167

Toner Case
7.12.9 Toner Level Sensor
0007-8025
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Cover Unit
0007-8018
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-170
F-7-168
receptacle
7-56
Chapter 7

side down.
F-7-171

Cartridge
0007-8364
[1]
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-174

Unit
0007-8365
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-172
F-7-175
F-7-173

7-57
Chapter 7
F-7-176
F-7-179

F-7-177
F-7-180
F-7-178
7.12.9.5
Removing
Developing Assembly
the
0007-8366
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

7-58
Chapter 7
F-7-181
F-7-184
F-7-182
F-7-185

F-7-183
7-59
Chapter 7
F-7-188

Cartridge Cover
F-7-186

Tray
0007-8368
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
0007-8367

bottle cover [2].
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2].
F-7-189
F-7-187
Reference:
7-60
0007-8369
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
F-7-190
[1]
[1]
F-7-193

Unit
0007-8371
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-191
connectors [2].
F-7-192

Cover
F-7-194
0007-8370
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


[2].

7-61
Chapter 7
connector [2].

7.12.9.11
Removing
Hopper Assembly
the
0007-8372
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-195

right color [2].
F-7-198
F-7-196
front.
F-7-199
F-7-197
7-62
Chapter 7

Level Sensor
0007-8373
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the
connector [2]; then, detach the toner sensor [3].
F-7-200
assembly [2].
F-7-203
7.12.10 Toner Feedscrew Motor

Cover Unit
F-7-201
0007-8019
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


image faults.
F-7-204
F-7-202

7-63
Chapter 7
F-7-205
F-7-207

Toner Case
0007-8026
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Cartridge
0007-8375
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-206
F-7-208
receptacle
F-7-209

7-64
Chapter 7

side down.
F-7-212
[1]
F-7-210
F-7-213

Unit
0007-8376
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-214
F-7-211
7-65
Chapter 7
F-7-215
F-7-217
F-7-218
F-7-216
7.12.10.5
Removing
Developing Assembly
the
0007-8377
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-219
7-66
Chapter 7
F-7-220
F-7-222

Tray
0007-8378
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2].
F-7-221
F-7-223
Reference:

7-67
Chapter 7
F-7-224

Cartridge Cover
F-7-226
0007-8379
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

bottle cover [2].
F-7-227
F-7-225
0007-8381
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-228

Cover
0007-8382
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2].
7-68
Chapter 7
connector [2].
[2]
[1]
F-7-231
[1]
[1]
F-7-229

Unit
0007-8383
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

connectors [2].
F-7-232
front.
F-7-230

F-7-233

7-69
Chapter 7

7.12.10.11
Removing
Hopper Assembly
the
0007-8384
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-236
right color [2].

assembly [2].
F-7-234
F-7-237


image faults.
F-7-235
F-7-238
7-70
Chapter 7
7.12.10.12
Removing
Toner Feedscrew Motor
7.12.11 Static Charge Eliminator
the
0007-8385
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

7.12.11.1 Removing the Static

Eliminator
0007-8428
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-7-239
F-7-242
feedscrew motor assembly [2].
F-7-240
F-7-243
3) Detach the static eliminator [1] to the front.
feedscrew motor [3] from the base.
F-7-244
F-7-241
7-71
Chapter 8Pickup/
Feeding System
Contents
Contents
8.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions ...................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Specifications, Controls, and Functions ...................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.3 Division into Blocks .................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.4 Division into Blocks .................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.5 Arrangement of Rollers ............................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.6 Arrangement of Rollers ............................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.1.7 Diagram of Paper Paths (printer on its own) ............................................................................................... 8-8
8.1.8 Paper Path (printer unit on its own)............................................................................................................. 8-9
8.1.9 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ copy tray ) .................................................................................................... 8-10
8.1.10 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ 3 Way Unit-A1 /copy tray) ........................................................................ 8-11
8.1.11 Paper path (w/ expansion output kit, output tray) ................................................................................... 8-12
8.1.12 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-S1/copy tray) ............................................................................... 8-13
8.1.13 Paper Path (w/ Finer-S1, output tray)...................................................................................................... 8-14
8.1.14 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4)............................................................... 8-15
8.1.15 Arrangement of Sensors .......................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.1.16 Arrangement of Sensors .......................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.1.17 Route of Drive ......................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.1.18 Route of Drive ......................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.2 Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................................. 8-22
8.2.1 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.2.2 Increase in Speed....................................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.2.3 Acceleration Intervals................................................................................................................................ 8-25
8.2.4 Increase in Speed....................................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.3 Detecting Jams ................................................................................................................................................. 8-30
8.3.1 Delay Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 8-30
8.3.1.1 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly ............................................................................ 8-30
8.3.1.2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly...................................................................................... 8-30
8.3.2 Stationary Jams.......................................................................................................................................... 8-31
8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam .................................................................................................................... 8-31
8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On............................................................................................................... 8-32
8.3.3 Other Jams ................................................................................................................................................. 8-32
8.3.3.1 Door Open Jam................................................................................................................................... 8-32
8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.4.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 8-34
8.4.3 Identifying the Paper Size ......................................................................................................................... 8-34
8.4.4 Setting Up the Universal Cassette ............................................................................................................. 8-36
8.4.5 Paper Level Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 8-37
8.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit................................................................................................................................. 8-41
8.5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 8-41
8.5.2 Basic Sequence of Operation .................................................................................................................... 8-42
8.5.3 Identifying the Paper Size ......................................................................................................................... 8-42
8.5.4 Paper Retaining Mechanism...................................................................................................................... 8-43
Contents
8.6 Registration Unit............................................................................................................................................... 8-45

8.6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 8-45
8.6.2 Checking Horizontal Registration ............................................................................................................. 8-45
8.7 Duplex Feeding Unit......................................................................................................................................... 8-47
8.7.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 8-47
8.7.2 Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 8-48
8.7.3 Sequence of Image Formation ................................................................................................................... 8-49
8.7.4 Sequence of Image Formation ................................................................................................................... 8-51
8.7.5 Flow of Paper (w/o/ delivery option)......................................................................................................... 8-52
8.7.6 Flow of Paper (w/ delivery option)............................................................................................................ 8-58
8.7.7 Flow of Paper ............................................................................................................................................ 8-64
8.8 Parts Replacement Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 8-71
8.8.1 Pick-up Unit 1............................................................................................................................................ 8-71
8.8.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ....................................................................................................... 8-71
8.8.1.2 Removing the Right Door................................................................................................................... 8-71
8.8.1.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)............................................................................................ 8-75
8.8.1.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1...................................................................................................... 8-76
8.8.2 Pick-up Unit 2............................................................................................................................................ 8-76
8.8.3 Pickup Roller ............................................................................................................................................. 8-78
8.8.3.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller.............................................................. 8-78
8.8.4 Sensor Mount............................................................................................................................................. 8-78
8.8.4.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate ................................................................................................ 8-84
8.8.4.8 Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate ................................................................................................. 8-86
8.8.5 Cassette Pick-up Motor 1........................................................................................................................... 8-87
8.8.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover................................................................................................................... 8-87
8.8.5.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base ...................................................................................................... 8-88
8.8.5.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 1 ............................................................................................. 8-90
8.8.6 Cassette Pick-up Motor 2........................................................................................................................... 8-90
8.8.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover................................................................................................................... 8-90
8.8.6.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base ...................................................................................................... 8-91
8.8.6.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 2 ............................................................................................. 8-93
8.8.7 Cassette Size Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 8-93
Contents
8.8.7.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ..................................................................................................... 8-98

8.8.7.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor ................................................................................................... 8-99
8.8.8 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor.................................................................................................................... 8-101
8.8.8.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ..................................................................................................... 8-101
8.8.8.2 Removing the Right Door ................................................................................................................ 8-101
8.8.8.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ......................................................................................... 8-105
8.8.8.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ................................................................................................... 8-106
8.8.8.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate.............................................................................................. 8-107
8.8.8.8 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ..................................................................................... 8-108
8.8.9 Cassette Paper Sensor.............................................................................................................................. 8-108
8.8.9.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ..................................................................................................... 8-108
8.8.9.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ......................................................................................... 8-112
8.8.9.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate.............................................................................................. 8-114
8.8.9.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor ............................................................................................... 8-116
8.8.10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ....................................................................................................... 8-116
8.8.10.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ................................................................................................... 8-116
8.8.10.2 Removing the Right Door .............................................................................................................. 8-116
8.8.10.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ....................................................................................... 8-120
8.8.10.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ................................................................................................. 8-121
8.8.10.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate............................................................................................ 8-122
8.8.10.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B)......................................................................... 8-123
8.8.11 Slide Resistor......................................................................................................................................... 8-123
8.8.11.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ................................................................................................... 8-127
8.8.11.5 Removing the Manual Tray Unit.................................................................................................... 8-129
8.8.11.6 Removing the Slide Resistor .......................................................................................................... 8-130
8.8.12 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ...................................................................................................................... 8-131
8.8.12.7 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid........................................................................................ 8-136
8.8.13 Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB ........................................................................................................... 8-137
Contents
8.8.13.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1..................................................................................................8-142

8.8.13.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB.............................................................................8-143
8.8.14 Manual Tray Assembly..........................................................................................................................8-144
8.8.14.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ...................................................................................................8-144
8.8.14.2 Removing the Right Door............................................................................................................... 8-144
8.8.14.4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit....................................................................................................8-147
8.8.14.5 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Assembly ..................................................................................8-149
8.8.15 Manual Feed Unit ..................................................................................................................................8-150
8.8.16 Manual Pickup Roller ............................................................................................................................8-156
8.8.16.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller.....................................................................................8-162
8.8.17 Manual Pick-up Clutch ..........................................................................................................................8-163
8.8.17.4 Removing the Rear Cover............................................................................................................... 8-166
8.8.17.5 Removing the Main Power Switch .................................................................................................8-167
8.8.17.6 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch ....................................................................................8-168
8.8.18 Manual Separation Pad ..........................................................................................................................8-169
8.8.18.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller.....................................................................................8-174
8.8.18.6 Removing the Manual Feed Separation pad ...................................................................................8-175
8.8.19 Registration Clutch ................................................................................................................................ 8-175
8.8.19.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly .............................................................................................8-176
8.8.19.3 Removing the Main Drive Assembly .............................................................................................8-177
8.8.19.4 Removing the Registration Clutch..................................................................................................8-178
8.8.20 Feeding Roller .......................................................................................................................................8-179
8.8.20.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller..........................................................8-179
8.8.21 Vertical Path Roller ...............................................................................................................................8-179
8.8.21.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)........................................................................................8-183
8.8.21.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate ............................................................................................8-185
Contents
8.8.21.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller................................................................................................. 8-187

8.8.22 Duplex Feed Roller 2 ............................................................................................................................ 8-187
8.8.22.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Roller 2 .............................................................................................. 8-191
8.8.23 Duplex Feed Sensor............................................................................................................................... 8-192
8.8.23.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor ................................................................................................ 8-196
8.8.24 Duplex Feed Clutch............................................................................................................................... 8-197
8.8.24.1 Removing the Rear Cover .............................................................................................................. 8-197
8.8.24.2 Removing the Duplex Feed Clutch ................................................................................................ 8-198
8.8.25 Delivery Assembly 1 ............................................................................................................................. 8-199
8.8.25.3 Removing the Delivery Tray .......................................................................................................... 8-200
8.8.25.6 Removing the Extension Delivery Kit ........................................................................................... 8-204
8.8.25.7 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1............................................................................................... 8-205
8.8.26 Fixing/ Delivery Drive Assembly ......................................................................................................... 8-206
8.8.26.3 Removing the Delivery Tray .......................................................................................................... 8-207
8.8.26.6 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1............................................................................................... 8-211
8.8.26.7 Removing the Fixing Unit .............................................................................................................. 8-211
8.8.26.8 Removing the Fixing/Delivery Drive Assembly............................................................................ 8-214
8.8.27 Separation Roller ................................................................................................................................... 8-215
8.8.27.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller ......................................................... 8-215
Chapter 8
8.1 Construction
8.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions
0006-7400
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The major specifications, controls, and functions of the pickup/feeding system are as follows:
T-8-1
Item
Description
Paper
front loading
compartment
Pickup method
cassette
separation retard
manual feeder
separation pad
Paper reference
center
Paper volume
cassette 1/2
550 sheets (80 g/m2 )
manual feed tray
50 sheets (80 g/m2)
cassette 1
B4, A4, B5, LGL, LTR, EXE, A4R, B5R, LTRR,
Paper size
A5R. STMTR,
cassette 2
A3, B4, A4, B5, LGL, LTR, EXE, LDR, A4R,

B5R, LTRR, A5R, STMTR
manual feed tray
A3, B4, A4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, A4R, B5R,

LTRR, A5R, STMTR, EXE, postcard, envelope,
free size
Paper weight
cassette 1/2
64 to 80 g/m2 (single-sided)
64 to 80 g/m2 (auto double-sided)
manual feed tray
64 to 128 g/m2 (if double-sided, manual feeding

only; no auto duplexing)
Paper size
switch-over
Duplexing
cassette 1/2
by the user
manual feed tray
by the user
through path
method
envelopes:
Com10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5
postcard: A6R non-default, A5R non-default, A4 non-default
Speed of process
iR2270/2870
137 mm/sec
8-1
Chapter 8
Item
Description
iR3570/4570
230mm /sec (nomal mode)

137mm /sec (low speed mode: manual feeding)
Delivery
3 Way Unit-A1 (standard with iR4570/3570 model)
accessory
Inner 2-Way Tray-D1

Copy Tray-J1
Finisher-S1
Buffer Path Unit-E1
Finisher-Q3
Saddle Finisher-Q4
Punch Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1
Pickup
Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2
accessory
Side Paper Deck-Q1

Envelope Cassette Attachment-C1
8.1.2 Specifications, Controls, and Functions

/ iR3530
The major specifications, controls, and functions of the pickup/feeding system are as follows:
T-8-2
Item
Description
Paper
front loading
compartment
Pickup method
cassette
separation retard
manual feeder
separation pad
Paper reference
center
Paper volume
cassette 1/2
550 sheets (80 g/m2 )
manual feed tray
50 sheets (80 g/m2)
cassette 1
B4, A4, B5, LGL, LTR, EXE, A4R, B5R, LTRR,
Paper size
A5R. STMTR,
cassette 2
A3, B4, A4, B5, LGL, LTR, EXE, LDR, A4R,

B5R, LTRR, A5R, STMTR
manual feed tray
A3, B4, A4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, A4R, B5R,

LTRR, A5R, STMTR, EXE, postcard, envelope,
free size
8-2
0009-2977
Chapter 8
Item
Description
Paper weight
cassette 1/2
64 to 80 g/m2 (single-sided)
64 to 80 g/m2 (auto double-sided)
manual feed tray
64 to 128 g/m2 (if double-sided, manual feeding

only; no auto duplexing)
Paper size
switch-over
Duplexing
cassette 1/2
by the user
manual feed tray
by the user
through path
method
envelopes:
Com10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5
postcard: A6R non-default, A5R non-default, A4 non-default
Speed of process
iR2230/2830
137 mm/sec
iR3530
230mm /sec (nomal mode)

137mm /sec (low speed mode: manual feeding)
Delivery
3 Way Unit-A1 (standard with iR4570/3570 model)
accessory
Inner 2-Way Tray-D1

Copy Tray-J1
Finisher-S1
Buffer Path Unit-E1
Pickup
Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2
accessory
Envelope Cassette Attachment-C1
8.1.3 Division into Blocks
0006-7401
iR2270 / iR2870
8-3
Chapter 8
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-8-1
[1] Pickup assembly (cassette 2)
[3] Manual feed pickup assembly
[4] Registration roller assembly
[5] Transfer assembly
[6] Duplexing/feeding assembly
[7] Fixing assembly
[8] No.1 delivery assembly
8.1.4 Division into Blocks

iR3570 / iR4570
8-4
0007-1444
Chapter 8
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-8-2
[3] Manual feed pickup assembly
[4] Registration roller assembly
[5] Transfer assembly
[6] Duplexing/feeding assembly
[7] Fixing assembly
[8] No.1 delivery assembly
[9] No.2/No.3 delivery assembly
8.1.5 Arrangement of Rollers
0006-7402
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-5
Chapter 8
[25] [24] [23] [22]
[21]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2] [3]
F-8-3
[1] Pickup roller (cassette 1)
[2] Feeding roller (cassette 1)
[3] Separation roller (cassette 1)
[5] Feeding roller (cassette 2)
[7] Vertical path roller 2
[8] Vertical path slave roller 2
[11] Manual feed pickup roller
[12] Registration roller (inside)
[13] Registration roller (outside)
[14] Duplexing/feed roller 2
[15] Duplexing/feeding member 2
[16] Transfer roller
[17] Drum
8-6
[4] [5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Chapter 8
[20] Pressure roller

[21] Fixing outlet roller
[22] Fixing outlet member
[23] Fixing film
[24] Delivery roller
[25] Delivery member
8.1.6 Arrangement of Rollers
0007-1461
iR3570 / iR4570
[33] [32]
[31] [30] [29] [28] [27] [26]
[25]
[24]
[34]
[23]
[35]
[22]
[21]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5] [6]
[7]
[8]
F-8-4
[2] Feed roller (cassette 1)
[5] Feed roller (cassette 2)
8-7
Chapter 8

[12] Registration roller (inside)
[13] Registration roller (outside)
[14] Duplexing/feeding roller 2
[16] Transfer roller
[17] Drum
[20] Presser roller
[21] Fixing film
[22] Fixing outlet roller
[23] Fixing outlet roll
[24] Delivery roll (No.3 delivery assembly)
[25] Delivery roller (No.3 delivery assembly)
[26] Duplexing inlet roller
[27] Duplexing inlet member
[31] Delivery member (No.2 delivery assembly)
[32] Reversing roller
[33] Reversing member
[35] Delivery member (No.1 delivery assembly)
8.1.7 Diagram of Paper Paths (printer on its own)

iR2270 / iR2870
8-8
0006-7403
Chapter 8
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-5
[1] Pickup from cassette 1
[3] Pickup from cassette pedestal
[4] Pickup from side paper deck
[5] Pickup from manual feeder
[6] Delivery from copy tray 1
8.1.8 Paper Path (printer unit on its own)
0009-2978
/ iR3530
8-9
Chapter 8
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-6
[3] Pickup from cassette pedestal (optional)
[5] Delivery to output tray 1
8.1.9 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ copy tray )

iR3570 / iR4570
8-10
0007-1484
Chapter 8
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-7
[3] Pickup from cassette pedestal (option)
[4] Pickup from side paper deck (option)
[6] Delivery to copy tray 1
[7] Delivery to copy tray 2 (option)
8.1.10 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ 3 Way Unit-A1 /copy tray)
0006-7404
iR2270 / iR2870
8-11
Chapter 8
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-8
[4] Pickup from side paper deck (option)
[6] Delivery to copy tray 1
8.1.11 Paper path (w/ expansion output kit, output tray)

/ iR3530
8-12
0009-2980
Chapter 8
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-9
[5] Delivery to output tray 1
[6] Delivery to output tray 2 (optional)
8.1.12 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-S1/copy tray)
0006-7405
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
8-13
Chapter 8
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-10
[4] Pickup from paper deck (option)
[6] Delivery to Finisher-S1 (option)
8.1.13 Paper Path (w/ Finer-S1, output tray)

/ iR3530
8-14
0009-2982
Chapter 8
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-11
[3] Pickup from cassette pedestal (optional)
[5] Delivery to Finisher-S1 (optional)
8.1.14 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4)
0006-7406
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
8-15
Chapter 8
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-12
[4] Pickup from paper deck (option)
[6] Delivery to Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4 (option)
[7] No.2 delivery assembly (option)
8.1.15 Arrangement of Sensors

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-16
0006-7408
Chapter 8
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-8-13
[1] Cassette 1 paper level sensor B (PS4)
[2] Cassette 1 paper level sensor A (PS3)
[5] Cassette 2 paper sensor (PS2)
[6] Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11)
[9] Manual feeder paper sensor (PS7)
[10] Registration sensor (PS9)
[11] Duplexing/feed sensor (PS17)
[12] Fixing/delivery paper sensor (PS13)
[14] Delivery sensor 1 (PS14)
[15] Delivery paper full sensor 1 (PS15)
8.1.16 Arrangement of Sensors
0007-1487
iR3570 / iR4570
8-17
Chapter 8
[19] [18] [17] [16] [15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-14
[9] Manual feed paper sensor (PS7)
[10] Registration sensor (PS9)
[11] Duplexing/feed sensor (PS17)
[12] Fixing/delivery sensor (PS13)
[13] Duplexing inlet sensor (PS3A)
[14] Delivery sensor 3 (PS5A)
[16] Delivery sensor 2 (PS1A)
[17] Reversal sensor (PS4A)
[18] Delivery full sensor 2 (PS2A)
8-18
[4]
[5]
Chapter 8
[19] Delivery full sensor 1 (PS15)
8.1.17 Route of Drive
0006-7411
iR2270 / iR2870
M4
CL6
M3
M2
CL2
CL1
M6
SL1
M7
SL2
F-8-15
M2 Main motor
M3 Fixing motor
M4 No.1 delivery motor
M6 Cassette 1 pickup motor
SL1 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid
CL1 Manual pickup clutch
CL2 Registration clutch
CL6 Duplexing clutch
8.1.18 Route of Drive
0007-9020
iR3570 / iR4570
8-19
Chapter 8
- Main Body
M4
M10
M3
CL2
CL1
M2
M6
SL1
M7
SL2
F-8-16
M2 Main motor
M3 Fixing motor
M10 Duplexing motor
CL1 Manual pickup clutch
CL2 Registration clutch
- Expancion Delivery Unit
8-20
Chapter 8
M2
SL2
SL3
M1
SL1
F-8-17
SL1 No.1 delivery solenoid
8-21
Chapter 8
8.2 Basic Sequence

0007-2658
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

- Basic Sequence of Operation for Making 3 Prints
Print Start
PRINT
*1
*3
*2
Cassette 1 pickup motor

(M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL1)
Cassette 1 retry sensor
(PS10)
Main motor (M2)
Registration sensor
(PS9)
Registration clutch
(CL2)
Fixing motor
(M11)
Fixing/delivery paper
sensor (PS13)
No.1 delivery motor
(M4)
Delivery sensor 1
(PS14)
*1
*2
*3
cassette 1 pickup motor rotation

increased
pickup
pre-registration
registration
cassette 1: 3 sheets of paper
F-8-18
8.2.2 Increase in Speed
0007-2660
iR2270 / iR2870
The machine increases the speed of moving paper over specific intervals. An overview and the associated accessories
for the increase in speed are as follows:
- No Delivery Accessory
8-22
Chapter 8
[1]
F-8-19
1. Increase in Speed for Pickup Operation
The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for manual feed pickup/in the case of the 1st sheet
from cassette 1, accelerates to about twice as fast).
- Finisher-S1 in Use
8-23
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
F-8-20
2. Increase in Speed for Reversal
The speed is 3.4 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for delivery to tray 3).
- Finisher-Q3/Q4 in Use
8-24
Chapter 8
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-21
2. Increase in Speed After Fixing
The speed is 2.5 times as high as the process speed.
3. Increase in Speed for the Buffer Path
The speed is 2.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for delivery to saddle).
The speed is 3.4 times as high as the process speed.
8.2.3 Acceleration Intervals
0009-2984
/ iR3530
The machine accelerates the speed of paper movement over specific intervals.
These intervals are as shown and differ according to the presence of specific accessories:
In the Absence of an Output Accessory
8-25
Chapter 8
[1]
F-8-22
[1]Pickup acceleration interval
The machine accelerates the speed to about 1.5 times as high as its process speed.
(No acceleration occurs if the pickup is from the manual feeder. In the case of the 1s side of a sheet picked up from
cassette 1, the movement will be about twice as fast.)
In the Presence of the Finisher-S1
8-26
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
F-8-23
[1]Pickup acceleration interval
The machine accelerates the speed to about 1.5 times as high as its process speed.
(No acceleration occurs if the pickup is from the manual feeder. In the case of the 1st side of a sheet picked up from
cassette 1, the movement will be about twice as fast.)
[2]Reversal acceleration interval
The machine accelerates the speed to about 3.4 times as high as its process speed. (No acceleration will occur if
the delivery is to tray 3.)
8.2.4 Increase in Speed
0007-8663
iR3570 / iR4570
The machine increases the speed of moving paper over specific intervals. An overview and the associated accessories
for the increase in speed are as follows:
- Finisher-S1 in Use
8-27
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
F-8-24
1. Increase in Speed for Pickup
The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (in the case of manual feed, decelerates to about 0.6).
The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for delivery to tray 3).
- Finisher-Q3/Q4 in Use
8-28
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
F-8-25
1. Increase in Speed for Pickup
The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (in the cassette of manual feed, decelerates to about 0.6).
The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed.
8-29
Chapter 8
8.3 Detecting Jams

8.3.1 Delay Jams
8.3.1.1 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly
0007-2663
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

A delay jam outside the cassette pickup assembly is identified as follows:
The length of time it takes for paper to move from the sensor N-1 to the delay jam sensor N is kept under control; a
delay jam is identified if the delay jam sensor does not go on within a specific length of time after the sensor N has
gone on.
Start key ON
or PRINT set
INTR
[1]
PRINT
[1]
Sensor N-1
Jam check
Sensor N
Normal
Error
[1]:specific length of feed in time
F-8-26
T-8-3
Sensor
Registration sensor (PS9)

Fixing delivery sensor (PS13)
No. 1 delivery sensor (PS14)
Duplex feed sensor (PS17)
8.3.1.2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly
0007-2664
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor after the cassette 1/2 pickup motor has started to rotate.
8-30
Chapter 8
Start key ON
or PRINT set
INTR
[1]
PRINT
[1]
Pickup motor
Jam check
Normal
Sensor N
Error
[1]:specific length of feed in time
F-8-27
T-8-4
Source of paper
Motor
Sensor
Cassette 1
cassette 1 pickup motor
cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)
Cassette 2
cassette 2 pickup motor
cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11)
8.3.2 Stationary Jams

8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam
0007-2665
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The sensor N does not go off within a specific length of time after the sensor has gone on.
Start key ON
or PRINT set
INTR
L+A
PRINT
L+A
Jam Check
Normal
Sensor N
Error
(L =paper length feed distance A = specific feed length)
F-8-28
T-8-5
Sensor
Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)

8-31
Chapter 8
Sensor
Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)

8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On
0007-2666
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The machine makes a check to see that there is no paper over the following sensors before it starts initial multiple
rotation at power-on:
T-8-6
Sensor
Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)
8.3.3 Other Jams

8.3.3.1 Door Open Jam
0007-2668
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

A door open jam is identified when the machine detects the opening of the door while it is making copies/prints.
T-8-7
Sensor
Front cover open sensor (PS22)
Right cover open sensor (PS18)
8-32
Chapter 8
8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit

8.4.1 Overview
0007-2121
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate. When pickup takes place, the pickup roller moves down
to come into contact with the surface of paper. The pickup roller is moved down when the pickup solenoid goes on.
The feed roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved to the feed path, and
the paper is moved as far as the registration roller by the work of the vertical path roller.
The pickup vertical path roller, pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller are driven by the cassette pickup
motor.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[9]
F-8-29
[1] Cassette paper sensor
[2] Pickup roller (roller A)
[3] Feed roller (roller B)
[4] Separation roller (roller C)
[5] Pickup vertical path roller
[6] Cassette retry paper sensor
[7] Vertical path guide
[8] Lower right cover
[9] Holding plate
[10] Lifter plate
8-33
Chapter 8
0007-7947
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

- Basic Sequence of Operation for Making 3 Prints
Print Start
PRINT
*1
*3
*2
Cassette 1 pickup motor

(M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL1)
(PS10)
Main motor (M2)
Registration sensor
(PS9)
Registration clutch
(CL2)
Fixing motor
(M11)
Fixing/delivery paper
sensor (PS13)
No.1 delivery motor
(M4)
Delivery sensor 1
(PS14)
*1
*2
*3
cassette 1 pickup motor rotation

increased
pickup
pre-registration
registration
cassette 1: 3 sheets of paper
F-8-30
8.4.3 Identifying the Paper Size
0007-8700
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The size of paper inside the cassette is detected by the cassette size dial, and is communicated to the cassette size
detection PCB.
As may as 15 positions may be detected with reference to the combinations of on and off states of the array of 4
actuators mounted to the cassette size detection PCB on the printer side and operating in conjunction with the cassette
size dial.
In the absence of a cassette, all 4 actuators are off, causing the machine to assume there is no cassette.
AB/Inch Switch
The cassette size dial is equipped with a switch operated to change between AB and Inch configurations; the cassette
size detecting switch will detect the configuration as soon as a cassette is fitted in the machine.
8-34
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
INCH
SW3
SW2
SW1
SW0
SW4
SW4-ON=INCH
F-8-31
[1] AB/Inch switch
[2] Cassette size dial
[3] Cassette size detection PCB
T-8-8
AB-configuration
Size
SW0
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
(no cassette)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
A5R
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
A4
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
A4R
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
A3
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
B5
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
B5R
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
B4
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
U1
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
U2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Envelope
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON/OFF
8-35
Chapter 8
AB-configuration
SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB/Inch-configuration switch.

The machine will assume the absence of a cassette if it detects a combination
not found in the table. At this time, it does not move up the cassette lifter.
Since the paper size is not identified, there will be no indication of a paper size
on the control panel; when the cassette in question is selected, the machine will
indicate a message prompting the supply of paper.
If an envelope size is detected, an envelope cassette must be fitted.
T-8-9
Inch-configuration
Size
SW0
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
(no cassette)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
STMTR
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
LTR
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
LTRR
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
LGL
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
11X17
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
EXEC
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
U3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
U4
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Envelope
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON/OFF
SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB/Inch-configuration switch.

The machine will assume the absence of a cassette if it detects a combination
not found in the table. At this time, it does not move up the cassette lifter.
Since the paper size is not identified, there will be no indication of a paper size
on the control panel; when the cassette in question is selected, the machine will
indicate a message prompting the supply of paper.
If an envelope size is detected, an envelope cassette must be fitted.
8.4.4 Setting Up the Universal Cassette

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
The following are default sizes the machine will assume when U1 through U4 are detected:
8-36
0007-8701
Chapter 8
T-8-10
U1
G-LTR
U2
FLSC
U3
G-LGL
U4
A-LTR
The following is a list of sizes that may be assigned in addition to default sizes in service mode:
T-8-11
Universal U1 Through U4
Size
FLSC
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-OFI
M-OFI
FOLI
A-FLS
G-LTR
G-LGL
A-LTR (LTR)
A-LTRR (LTRR)
8.4.5 Paper Level Sensor
0007-8702
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The level of paper inside the cassette is checked using the following sensors:
T-8-12
Paper level sensor A
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
PS3
PS5
8-37
Chapter 8
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Paper level sensor B
PS4
PS6
Paper sensor
PS1
PS2
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
F-8-32
[1] Flag
[2] Cassette paper sensor
[3] Lifter clutch
[4] Cassette paper level sensor A
[5] Cassette paper level sensor B
[6] Paper level sensor flag
[7] Lifter gear
[8] Tray
8-38
Chapter 8
View from the Front

of the Machine
When full with paper
Cassette paper
Cassette paper
level sensor A
level sensor B
Paper
OFF OFF
When half full with paper
Cassette paper
Cassette paper
level sensor A
level sensor B
Paper
OFF ON
When there is little paper
Cassette paper
level sensor B
Paper
Cassette paper
level sensor A
ON ON
Cassette paper sensor

Flag
Paper tray
When there is no paper
F-8-33
T-8-13
Paper level
Paper level
Paper
sensor A
sensor B
sensor
OFF
OFF
OFF
Paper level
Control panel
indication
100% to 50% of
capacity
8-39
Paper level
Paper level
Paper
sensor A
sensor B
sensor
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
---
---
ON
Paper level
50% to 50 sheets
(approx.)
50 sheets or less
(approx.)
No paper
Control panel
indication
Chapter 8
8.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit

8.5.1 Overview
0007-2123
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The paper in the tray of the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the manual feed pickup roller by the work of
the pickup guide plate; the manual feed pickup roller and the separation pad serve to make sure that only a single
sheet of paper is separated and moved into the machine:
(1) the pickup guide plate is locked in place at all times, and does not require drive for pickup operation.
(2) multi-pickup roller is driven by the main motor (M2) through the manual feed pickup clutch (CL1).
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[10]
[7]
[5]
[8]
[6]
F-8-34
[1] Upper guide
[2] Stopper plate
[3] Side guide
[5] Pressure spring
[6] Holding plate
[7] Manual feed paper sensor flag
[8] Separation pad
[10] (to registration roller assembly)
REF
The machine's manual feed pickup unit is not equipped with a sensor that may detect the last sheet of paper.
8-41
Chapter 8
8.5.2 Basic Sequence of Operation
0007-2124
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The multi-pickup roller starts to rotate when the manual pickup clutch (CL1) goes on to start upper separation to pick
up a single sheet of paper. When the leading edge of the sheet reaches the registration sensor (PS26) and is moved a
specific distance, the manual pickup clutch goes off, causing the sheet to arch in the registration roller area.
When the registration clutch (CL2) goes on, the manual feed pickup clutch (CL1) once again goes on to pick up
paper. The manual feed pickup clutch (CL1) goes off immediately before the trailing edge of paper moves past the
manual feed pickup roller; thereafter, the registration roller serves to pull off the paper.
Print start
PRINT
LSTR
Manual feed pickup

clutch ( L1)
Registration
clutch ( L2)
Registration
sensor (PS26)
F-8-35
8.5.3 Identifying the Paper Size
0007-2187
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The width of paper is detected with reference to the output of the variable resistor (SVR1), which operates in
conjunction with the movement of the side guide.
The side guide in the manual feed tray is set when the user moves it to place paper in the cassette.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
F-8-36
[1] Side guide (rear)
[2] Stop arm
8-42
Chapter 8
[3] Center gear

[4] Side guide (front)
[5] Variable resistor (SVR1)
[6] Manual feed tray
8.5.4 Paper Retaining Mechanism
0007-2189
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The holding plate of the machine's cassette is fixed in position at all times, and does not move up/down at time of
pickup, and must temporarily be released when paper is set between it and the manual feed pickup roller. It is linked
to the upper guide so that it opens when the user opens the guide; to prevent the user from placing paper without
opening the upper guide, the guide is equipped with a stopper plate.
1. When the upper guide is closed,
the holding plate is locked in place,
and the stopper plate prevents the user from placing paper.
F-8-37
2. When the upper guide is open,
the holding plate is freed,
and the stopper plate opens, permitting the user to place paper.
8-43
Chapter 8
F-8-38
3. When the upper guide is closed once again,
the holding plate becomes locked in position once again.
F-8-39
8-44
Chapter 8
8.6 Registration Unit

8.6.1 Overview
0007-2213
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M2).
In between the registration roller and the main motor is the registration clutch (SL2), servicing to turn on and off the
registration roller so that the paper will be matched in relation to the image on the drum at correct registration.
J314
J313
DC controller PCB
M2
CL2
F-8-40
8.6.2 Checking Horizontal Registration
0007-2214
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The machine does not have a mechanism to check horizontal registration for both 1st and 2nd sides of a print. The
point of horizontal registration for the 2nd side may be adjusted in service mode (i.e., the image write start position).
The degree of arching for registration on the 2nd side of a double-sided print must be adjusted separately from the
adjustment for the 1st side to accommodate the fact that different feed paths are used up to the registration roller for
1st and 2nd sides.
Service Mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for the 2nd side of small-size double-sided prints.
8-45
Chapter 8
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for the 2nd side of large-size double-sided prints.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>LOOPREFE
Use it to adjust the degree of arching for the 2nd side of double-sided prints.
Reference:
small-size: A4, B5, and the like, whose side in paper feed direction is shorter than that of LTR.
Large-size: A3, A4R, B5R, and the like, whose side in feed direction is longer than that of LTR.
The term "2nd side of a double-sided print" as used in relation to the machine's service mode refers to the side that
receives an image second in order; in other words, it corresponds to the 1st side of the original.
8-46
Chapter 8
8.7 Duplex Feeding Unit

8.7.1 Overview
0007-2218
iR2270 / iR2870
Inside the duplexing assembly are found two sets of rollers that are driven by the main motor (M2) and the duplexing
clutch (CL6).
Different sets of rollers are used to turn over the sheet for duplexing depending on whether or not the machine is
equipped with a delivery accessory*:
If a delivery accessory is present, the reversing rollers are used to turn over the sheet.
If no delivery accessory is present, the delivery rollers are used to turn over the sheet.
*3 Way Unit-A1
Configuration of Components If Without a Delivery Accessory
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
F-8-41
[1] Delivery roller
[3] Reversing flapper
[4] Duplexing feeding roller 1
[5] Duplexing feed sensor (PS17)
8-47
Chapter 8

Configuration of the Components If With a Delivery Accessory
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
F-8-42
8.7.2 Overview
iR3570 / iR4570
Inside the duplexing assembly are 2 sets of rollers that are driven by the duplexing motor (M10).
8-48
0007-2221
Chapter 8
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
F-8-43
8.7.3 Sequence of Image Formation
0007-2223
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The machine goes thorough the following sequence to form images when making double-sided copies/prints:
8-49
Chapter 8
- Configuration Without an Accessory Installed

A4/LTR
4 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
4-2
3-1
4-1
A4/LTR
5 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
4-2
3-1
5-2
4-1
5-1
A4/LTR
6 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
4-2
3-1
5-2
4-1
6-2
A3/LDR
3 sheets
1-2
1-1
2-2
2-1
3-2
5-1
6-1
3-1
1-1
1-2
F-8-44
- Configuration with an Accessory Installed
A4/LTR
4 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
4-2
3-1
4-1
A4/LTR
5 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
4-2
3-1
5-2
4-1
5-1
A4/LTR
6 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
4-2
3-1
5-2
4-1
6-2
A3/LDR
3 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
5-1
6-1
3-1
1-1
1-2
F-8-45
However, in the case of delivery to tray 3 (outside), the machine uses single-sheet circulation.
8-50
Chapter 8
5 sheets
1-2
1-1
2-2
2-1
3-2
3-1
4-2
4-1
1-1
indicates the 1st side of the 1st sheet
1-2
indicates the 2nd side of the 1st sheet
5-2
5-1
F-8-46
8.7.4 Sequence of Image Formation
0007-8703
iR3570 / iR4570
The machine goes thorough the following sequence to form images when making double-sided copies/prints:
A4/LTR
4 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
4-2
3-1
4-1
A4/LTR
5 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
4-2
3-1
5-2
4-1
5-1
A4/LTR
6 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
4-2
3-1
5-2
4-1
6-2
A3/LDR
3 sheets
1-2
2-2
1-1
3-2
2-1
5-1
6-1
3-1
1-1
1-2
F-8-47
However, in the case of delivery to tray 3 (outside), the machine uses single-sheet circulation.
5 sheets
1-2
1-1
2-2
2-1
3-2
3-1
4-2
4-1
1-1
indicates the 1st side of the 1st sheet
1-2
indicates the 2nd side of the 1st sheet
5-2
5-1
F-8-48
8-51
Chapter 8
8.7.5 Flow of Paper (w/o/ delivery option)
0007-3125
iR2270 / iR2870
A4/LTR, 5 Sheets
A number in a circle indicates the 1st side, while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side.
F-8-49
The 1st sheet is picked up.
F-8-50
An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up.
8-52
Chapter 8
1
2
F-8-51
The 1st sheet is turned over and moved to duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd
sheet.
1
3
F-8-52
The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again. The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration.
The 3rd sheet is picked up.
8-53
Chapter 8
1
1
3
2
F-8-53
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and for the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved for
duplexing.
F-8-54
The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 2nd sheet is moved
for registration once again. The 4th sheet is picked up.
8-54
Chapter 8
1
2
2
4
3
F-8-55
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet. The 3rd sheet is moved for
duplexing.
2
1
3
5
F-8-56
The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is reversed and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked
for registration once again. The 5th sheet is picked up.
8-55
Chapter 8
2
1
3
3
5
F-8-57
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet. The 4th sheet is moved for
duplexing.
3
2
F-8-58
The 3rd sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is turned over and moved for registration. The 4th sheet is moved for
registration once again.
8-56
Chapter 8
3
2
1
4
4
F-8-59
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.
4
3
F-8-60
The 4th sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again.
4
3
5
5
F-8-61
8-57
Chapter 8
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet.
5
4
F-8-62
The 5th sheet is delivered.
8.7.6 Flow of Paper (w/ delivery option)
0007-3126
iR2270 / iR2870
A4/LTR, 5 Sheets, Delivery to Tray 1/2
F-8-63
8-58
Chapter 8
F-8-64
F-8-65
The 1st sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd
sheet.
1
3
F-8-66
8-59
Chapter 8
1
1
3
2
F-8-67
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved for
duplexing.
2
4
F-8-68
The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration. The 2nd sheet is
moved for registration once again. The 4th sheet is picked up.
8-60
Chapter 8
1
2
2
4
3
F-8-69
duplexing.
3
5
F-8-70
The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is
8-61
Chapter 8
2 1
3
3
5
4
F-8-71
duplexing.
3
2 1
F-8-72
The 3rd sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 4th sheet is
moved for registration once again.
8-62
Chapter 8
2 1
5
4
4
F-8-73
4
3
2 1
F-8-74
2 1
5
5
F-8-75
8-63
Chapter 8
5
4
2 1
F-8-76
8.7.7 Flow of Paper
0007-3407
iR3570 / iR4570
A4/LTR, 5 Sheets, Delivery to Tray 1/2
F-8-77
8-64
Chapter 8
F-8-78
F-8-79
The 1st sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd
sheet.
1
3
F-8-80
8-65
Chapter 8
1
1
3
2
F-8-81
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved for
duplexing.
2
4
F-8-82
The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration. The 2nd sheet is
8-66
Chapter 8
1
2
2
4
3
F-8-83
duplexing.
3
5
F-8-84
The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is
8-67
Chapter 8
2 1
3
3
5
4
F-8-85
duplexing.
3
2 1
F-8-86
The 3rd sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 4th sheet is
moved for registration once again.
8-68
Chapter 8
2 1
5
4
4
F-8-87
4
3
2 1
F-8-88
2 1
5
5
F-8-89
8-69
Chapter 8
5
4
2 1
F-8-90
8-70
Chapter 8
8.8
Parts
Procedure
Replacement
8.8.1 Pick-up Unit 1

8.8.1.1 Removing the Right
Cover (rear)
0007-6551
F-8-92
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate

[2].
a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2)
2) Open the right lower door [2].
3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover
(rear) [4].
[3]
F-8-93
3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension
[3]
delivery unit [2] from the right door.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-91

Door
0007-6552
F-8-94
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse
1) Open the right door.
band [2]; then, remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS

tightening).
8-71
Chapter 8
F-8-95
5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the
right door.
F-8-97
When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in

F-8-96
Attaching the Right Door
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right
door against the lug.
place, be sure to close the right door first.

Door
0007-7329
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right

door with the hook found on the side plate.
F-8-98
2) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the
connector [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening), and
detach the right door.
8-72
Chapter 8

a Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2)
2) Open the lower right door [2].
(lower front) [4].
F-8-99
[2]

[1]
[4]
[3]
F-8-101
8.8.1.5 Removing the Pickup

Assembly 1
0007-6554
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.
2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then, free the
harness from the 2 wire saddles [2] and the 2
clamps [3].
F-8-100


Cover (lower front)
F-8-102
0007-6553
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup

unit 1 [2].
8-73
Chapter 8

Cover (lower front)
0007-6556
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(lower front) [4].
F-8-103
8.8.2 Pick-up Unit 2

Cover (rear)
0007-6555
[2]
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
[1]

(rear) [4].
[4]
[3]
F-8-105

Assembly 2
[3]
0007-6557
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness
from the guide; then, remove the 4 screws [2], and
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-104
8-74
detach the pickup assembly 2 [3].
Chapter 8
8.8.4 Sensor Mount

Cover (rear)
0007-6558
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-106

8.8.3 Pickup Roller

Roller/Feed
Roller/
Separation Roller
(rear) [4].
0007-6569
[3]
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Slide out the cassette.
2) Open the right door (in the case of the separation
[3]
roller).
[3]
3) Pick the tabs of the individual rollers, and detach
[4]
the pickup roller [1], feed roller [2], and separation

roller [3].
[2]
[1]
F-8-108

Door
0007-6563
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-107
Point to Note When Replacing the Feed/Separation

Roller 1
The collar (roller core) of the machine's feed/
separation roller is black.
8-75
Chapter 8
F-8-112
F-8-109

right door.
[2].
F-8-113
F-8-110

F-8-111
tightening).
8-76
Chapter 8
F-8-116
F-8-114


Door
0007-7331
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

F-8-117

F-8-115
connector [2].

Cover (lower front)
0007-6562
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8-77
Chapter 8
1) Open the right door [1] of the pedestal (if a 2Cassette Pedestal-Y1 is installed).
2) Open the lower right cover [2].
3) Remove the 2 screws, and detach the right cover
(lower front) [3].
F-8-120

Assembly 2
0007-6565
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2]
[3]
[1]
F-8-118

Assembly 1

0007-6564
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

clamps [3].
F-8-121
8.8.4.7 Removing the Sensor

Mounting Plate
0007-6567
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 2 TP screws [1] and the binding screw
[2] from the rear of the pickup assembly, and detach
F-8-119
unit 1 [2].
8-78
the bracket [3].
Chapter 8
8.8.4.8 Mounting the Sensor

Mounting Plate
0007-6568
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
Take care not to orient the pickup unit facing down

when mounting the sensor base; otherwise, the gears
will fall out.
1) After fitting the bushing [1] to the frame, mount the
F-8-122
gear shaft [2].
Pickup Unit 1
F-8-125
2) Fit the 6 points [A] indicated in the figure in the
F-8-123
holes of the base; then, mount the sensor base [2]

using 4 screws [1].
Pickup Unit 2
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the
screw; then, detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3].
3) Remove the bushing and the 5 screws [4]; then,
detach the sensor base [5].
F-8-126
3) Mount the gear [1] and the E-ring [2].
Be sure not to leave out the pickup solenoid [1]. When
F-8-124
mounting it, be sure that the stop [2] is fully engaged
8-79
Chapter 8
with the cam gear [3].

[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-8-127
[2]
F-8-128
Try turning the gears to be sure that they turn without

Cover (rear)
resistance.
8.8.5 Cassette Pick-up Motor 1

Cover
0007-6988
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-6571
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
(rear) [4].

[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-129
8-80
Chapter 8

Motor Base
0007-6983
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Free the harness [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2].
F-8-133
8.8.5.4 Removing the Cassette

Pickup Motor 1
0007-6578
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-130
1) Remove the 2 screws, and detach the cassette
2) Remove the 5 screws [1]. Remove the power cord
pickup motor 1 [2].
base [2].
F-8-131
F-8-134
8.8.6 Cassette Pick-up Motor 2

Cover
0007-6598
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-132

4) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the pickup

motor base [2].
8-81
Chapter 8

[3]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-8-136
[1]

Motor Base
[2]
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
F-8-135

Cover (rear)
0007-6990
1) Free the harness [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2].
0007-6599
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-137
(rear) [4].
2) Remove the 5 screws [1]. Remove the power cord
base [2].
F-8-138
8-82
Chapter 8
F-8-139
4) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the pickup
F-8-141
motor base [2].
8.8.7 Cassette Size Sensor

Cover (rear)
0007-6602
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-140

Pickup Motor 2

0007-6601
(rear) [4].
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the cassette
[3]
pickup motor 2 [2].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-142
8-83
Chapter 8

Door
tightening).
0007-6603
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-146
right door.
F-8-143
[2].
F-8-147
F-8-144
F-8-145
8-84

Chapter 8
F-8-150
F-8-148


Door
0007-7332
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

F-8-151

F-8-149
connector [2].

Cover (lower front)
0007-6606
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8-85
Chapter 8


Assembly 1
0007-6609
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(lower front) [4].

clamps [3].
[2]
[1]
F-8-154
[4]
[3]
F-8-152

unit 1 [2].

Assembly 2
0007-6608
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-155

Size Sensor
0007-6610
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-153
1) Remove the snap stop, and detach the PCB cover

[1].
8-86
Chapter 8
F-8-156
2) Disconnect the connector from the cassette size
sensor relay PCB (in the case of the size sensor 1,
F-8-158
5) Detach the cover [1] from the PCB.
disconnect the connector [1]; in the case of the size

sensor 2, disconnect the connector [2]).
3) Free the harness from the clamp (in the case of the
size sensor 1, the 2 clamps [3]; in the case of the
size sensor 2, the 4 clamps [3] and [4]).
F-8-159
6) Detach the size sensor [1] from the PCB.
F-8-157
4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cassette size
sensor together with the PCB [2] (in the case of the
size sensor 1, together with the size sensor 2; in the
case of the size sensor 2, remove the sensor on its
own).
F-8-160
8.8.8 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor

Cover (rear)
0007-6611
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8-87
Chapter 8

(rear) [4].
F-8-163
[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-161
F-8-164

Door
0007-6612
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

tightening).
F-8-165
F-8-162
[2].
8-88

right door.
Chapter 8
F-8-166
F-8-168


connector [2].
F-8-169
F-8-167


Door
0007-7337
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-89
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
F-8-171

Assembly 1
F-8-170
0007-6614
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

2) Disconnect that 3 connectors [1]; then, free the

Cover (lower front)

0007-6613
clamps [3].
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(lower front) [4].
F-8-172
unit 1 [2].
8-90
Chapter 8
F-8-173
F-8-175

Assembly 2
Pickup Unit 1
0007-6615
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-176
Pickup Unit 2
F-8-174

Mounting Plate
0008-1508
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

the bracket [3].
F-8-177
8-91
Chapter 8

Retry Paper Sensor
0007-6617
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[3]

cassette retry paper sensor [2].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-179

Door
F-8-178
8.8.9 Cassette Paper Sensor

Cover (rear)
0007-6658
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-6618
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(rear) [4].
F-8-180
[2].
8-92
Chapter 8
F-8-181
F-8-184
F-8-182
tightening).
F-8-185
F-8-183
right door.

Door
0007-7339
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-93
Chapter 8
F-8-186
connector [2].
F-8-188


Cover (lower front)
0007-6620
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-187
8-94

(lower front) [4].
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
F-8-191
[4]

Assembly 2
[3]
F-8-189

Assembly 1
0007-6624
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-6623
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


clamps [3].
F-8-192
F-8-190

Mounting Plate
0007-6625
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

unit 1 [2].

the bracket [3].
8-95
Chapter 8

Paper Sensor
0007-6626
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

cassette paper sensor [2].
F-8-193
Pickup Unit 1
F-8-196
8.8.10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor

(A/B)
Cover (rear)
0007-6627
F-8-194
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
Pickup Unit 2

F-8-195
8-96
(rear) [4].
Chapter 8
[3]
[3]
F-8-199
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-197

Door
0007-6656
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-200
tightening).
F-8-198
[2].
F-8-201
right door.
8-97
Chapter 8
F-8-202
F-8-204


connector [2].
F-8-205
F-8-203


Door
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-98
0007-7340
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
F-8-207

Assembly 1
F-8-206
0007-6634
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


Cover (lower front)

0007-6632
clamps [3].
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(lower front) [4].
F-8-208
unit 1 [2].
8-99
Chapter 8
F-8-209
F-8-211

Assembly 2
Pickup Unit 1
0007-6635
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-212
Pickup Unit 2
F-8-210

Mounting Plate
0007-6637
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

the bracket [3].
F-8-213
8-100
Chapter 8

Paper Level Sensor (A/B)
0007-6639
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[3]
1) Disconnect the connector [1] (1 pc. each), and

detach the cassette power level sensor (A/B) [2].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-215

Door
F-8-214
0007-6657
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8.8.11 Slide Resistor

Cover (rear)
0007-6641
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(rear) [4].
F-8-216
[2].
8-101
Chapter 8
F-8-217
F-8-220
F-8-218
tightening).
F-8-221
F-8-219
right door.

Door
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-102
0007-7343
Chapter 8
F-8-222
connector [2].
F-8-224

8.8.11.4 Removing the Manual

Feed Unit
0007-6644
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-223
1) Remove the manual upper guide link [1] (plastic EAttaching the Right Door
ring [2] and boss [3]).

F-8-225
2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the manual feed
guide [1].
8-103
Chapter 8
F-8-229
F-8-226
3) Remove the connector cover [1] (snap-on).

Tray Unit
0007-6648
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

2) Remove the tie-wrap [2].
F-8-227
5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the manual
feed unit [3].
F-8-230
3) Remove the manual feed tray unit [3].
F-8-228
F-8-231
8-104
Chapter 8
8.8.11.6 Removing the Slide

Resistor

0007-6651
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(rear) [4].
1) Remove 2 screws [1], and detach the manual feed

tray upper cover [2].
[3]
If possible, mark the position of the point of horizontal

registration before removal.
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-234

Door
F-8-232
2) Remove the slide resistor [1] (connector [2]).
0007-6654
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-233
F-8-235
8.8.12 Cassette Pickup Solenoid


Cover (rear)
[2].
0007-6652
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

8-105
Chapter 8
F-8-236
F-8-239
F-8-237
tightening).
F-8-240
F-8-238
right door.

Door
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-106
0007-7344
Chapter 8
F-8-241
connector [2].
F-8-243


Cover (lower front)
0007-6659
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-242

(lower front) [4].
8-107
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
F-8-246
[4]

Assembly 2
[3]
F-8-244

Assembly 1
0007-6662
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-6661
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


clamps [3].
F-8-247
F-8-245

Pickup Solenoid
0007-6664
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

unit 1 [2].
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw

[2]; then, detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3].
8-108
Chapter 8

Door
0007-6668
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-248
8.8.13 Cassette Size Sensor Relay

PCB
F-8-250

Cover (rear)
0007-6667
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2].

(rear) [4].
F-8-251
[3]

[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-249
F-8-252
8-109
Chapter 8
tightening).
F-8-253
right door.
F-8-255

F-8-254

Door
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
0007-7347

F-8-256
connector [2].
8-110
Chapter 8

(lower front) [4].
F-8-257
[2]

[1]
[4]
[3]
F-8-259

Assembly 1
0007-6670
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

clamps [3].
F-8-258


Cover (lower front)
F-8-260
0007-6669
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

unit 1 [2].
8-111
Chapter 8
F-8-263
F-8-261
2) Remove the cassette size sensor relay PCB [2] (3

Assembly 2
connectors [2], 2 clamps [3]).

0007-6671
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-264
8.8.14 Manual Tray Assembly

Cover (rear)
F-8-262

Size Sensor Relay PCB
0007-6697
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-6672
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the PCB cover [1] (snap-on).

(rear) [4].
8-112
Chapter 8
[3]
[3]
F-8-267
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-265

Door
0007-6698
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-268
tightening).
F-8-266
[2].
F-8-269
right door.
8-113
Chapter 8
F-8-270
F-8-272


connector [2].
F-8-273
F-8-271


Door
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-114
0007-7348
Chapter 8
F-8-276
F-8-274


Feed Unit
F-8-277
0007-6699
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the manual upper guide link [1] (plastic E-

feed unit [3].
F-8-278
F-8-275
guide [1].
8-115
Chapter 8
8.8.15 Manual Feed Unit

Cover (rear)
0007-6705
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-279


Feed Tray Assembly
(rear) [4].
0007-6703
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[3]

2) Remove the tie-wrap [2].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-282
F-8-280
3) Remove the manual feed tray unit [3].

Door
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
F-8-281
8-116
0007-6707
Chapter 8
F-8-286
F-8-283

right door.
[2].
F-8-287
F-8-284

F-8-285
tightening).
8-117
Chapter 8
F-8-290
F-8-288


Door
0007-7352
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

F-8-291

F-8-289
connector [2].
8-118

Feed Unit
0008-1017
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
Chapter 8

feed unit [3].
F-8-295
F-8-292
guide [1].
F-8-296
8.8.16 Manual Pickup Roller

F-8-293

Cover (rear)
0007-6709
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(rear) [4].
F-8-294
8-119
Chapter 8
[3]
[3]
F-8-299
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-297

Door
0007-6710
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-300
tightening).
F-8-298
[2].
F-8-301
right door.
8-120
Chapter 8
F-8-302
F-8-304


connector [2].
F-8-305
F-8-303


Door
0007-7354
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-121
Chapter 8
F-8-308
F-8-306


Feed Unit
F-8-309
0007-6994
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


feed unit [3].
F-8-310
F-8-307
guide [1].
8-122
Chapter 8
F-8-311
F-8-313

Feed Pickup Roller
0007-6713
8.8.17 Manual Pick-up Clutch
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the manual feed upper cover [1] (snap-on).

Cover (rear)
0007-6675
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(rear) [4].
F-8-312
[3]
2) Remove the bush [2], and detach the manual feed

pickup roller [3] together with the shaft.
3) Remove the plastic E-ring [4], and detach the
manual feed pickup roller from shaft. Take care not
[3]
to drop the parallel pin.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-314

Door
0007-6676
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8-123
Chapter 8
F-8-318
F-8-315

right door.

[2].
F-8-319
F-8-316


F-8-317
tightening).
8-124

Chapter 8
F-8-322
F-8-320


Door
0007-7355
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

F-8-323

F-8-321
connector [2].

Cover
0007-6677
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8-125
Chapter 8


[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-8-325
[1]
[1]
When connecting the 4 fastons, be sure that they are
[1]
[1]
[1]
located as indicated by their specific location
[1]
[1]
numbers.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-324

Power Switch
F-8-326
0007-6679
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 4 fastons [1], and detach the main
power switch [2]. (snap-on type)

Feed Pickup Clutch
0007-6681
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Disconnect the connector (2P) [1].
2) Free the clutch cable [2] from the wire saddle [3].
3) Remove the fixing plate [4]. (2 screws [5])
8-126
Chapter 8
[3]
[3]
[3]
F-8-327
[4]
4) Pull out the manual feed pickup clutch [1].
[2]
[1]
F-8-329

Door
0007-6715
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-328
8.8.18 Manual Separation Pad

Cover (rear)
0007-6714
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-330


[2].
(rear) [4].
8-127
Chapter 8
F-8-331
F-8-334
F-8-332
tightening).
F-8-335
F-8-333
right door.

Door
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-128
0007-7358
Chapter 8
F-8-336
connector [2].
F-8-338


Feed Unit
0007-6716
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-337
1) Remove the manual upper guide link [1] (plastic EAttaching the Right Door

F-8-339
guide [1].
8-129
Chapter 8
F-8-343
F-8-340

Feed Pickup Roller
0007-6717
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the manual feed upper cover [1] (snap-on).
F-8-341
feed unit [3].
F-8-344
2) Remove the bush [2], and detach the manual feed
pickup roller [3] together with the shaft.
3) Remove the plastic E-ring [4], and detach the
manual feed pickup roller from shaft. Take care not
to drop the parallel pin.
F-8-342
8-130
Chapter 8

[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-8-345

Feed Separation pad
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
0007-6719
[1]
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the holding plate [5].
2) Remove the separation pad [6].
[2]
F-8-347

Drive Assembly
0007-6733
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2] from the wire saddle.
F-8-346
8.8.19 Registration Clutch

Cover
0007-6720
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-348
2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive

assembly [2].
8-131
Chapter 8
F-8-350
assembly [2].
F-8-349
Do not touch the screws that are glued in place.

Drive Assembly
0007-7530
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

2) Free the cable from the 6 cable clamps [2].
3) Remove the re-use band [3].
F-8-351
8-132
Chapter 8
8.8.19.4
Removing
Registration Clutch
the
0007-6723
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Disconnect the connector (2P) [1], and free the
cable from the edge saddle [2] and the 3 wire
saddles [3].
2) Remove the E-ring [4], and detach the registration
clutch [5].
F-8-353

Roller 1
8.8.21 Vertical Path Roller

F-8-352

Cover (rear)
8.8.20 Feeding Roller
0007-6736
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Roller/Feed
Roller/
Separation Roller

0008-3154
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(rear) [4].

roller).
roller [3].
8-133
Chapter 8
[3]
[3]
F-8-356
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-8-354

Door
0007-6737
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-357
tightening).
F-8-355
[2].
F-8-358
right door.
8-134
Chapter 8
F-8-359
F-8-361


connector [2].
F-8-362
F-8-360


Door
0007-7359
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-135
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
F-8-364

Assembly 1
F-8-363
0007-6740
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


Cover (lower front)

0007-6739
clamps [3].
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(lower front) [4].
F-8-365
unit 1 [2].
8-136
Chapter 8
F-8-366
F-8-368

Assembly 2
Pickup Unit 1
0007-6741
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-369
Pickup Unit 2
F-8-367

Mounting Plate
0007-6742
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

the bracket [3].
F-8-370
8-137
Chapter 8
8.8.21.8 Removing the Vertical

Path Roller
0007-6743
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Free the claw [A] of the gear [1] at the rear; then,
detach the gear and the bushing [2].

(rear) [4].
[3]
[3]
[3]
[4]
F-8-371
[2]
2) Free the claw [A] of the bushing [1] at the front;
F-8-373
then, shift it to the rear, and lift the vertical path

roller [2] to detach.
[1]

Door
0007-6746
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-372
F-8-374
8.8.22 Duplex Feed Roller 2

Cover (rear)

[2].
0007-6744
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8-138
Chapter 8
F-8-375
F-8-378
F-8-376
tightening).
F-8-379
F-8-377
right door.

Door
0007-7362
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-139
Chapter 8
F-8-380
connector [2].
F-8-382

8.8.22.4 Removing the Duplex

Feed Roller 2
0007-6748
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-381
1) Free the coil spring [1] and, at the same time,
remove the E-ring [2] to pull out the shaft [3]; then,
detach the duplex feed frame [4].

F-8-383
2) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the one-way
8-140
Chapter 8
gear [2].
[3]
[3]
[3]
[4]
F-8-384
[2]
3) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the duplex feed
[1]
F-8-386
roller 2 [2].

Door
0007-6751
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-385
8.8.23 Duplex Feed Sensor

Cover (rear)
0007-6750
F-8-387
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2].
(rear) [4].
8-141
Chapter 8
F-8-388
F-8-391
F-8-389
tightening).
F-8-392
F-8-390
right door.

Door
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
8-142
0007-7366
Chapter 8
F-8-393
connector [2].
F-8-395


Feed Sensor
0007-6976
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-394
1) Remove the 2 screws (w/ collar) [1], and detach the
transfer frame [2].

F-8-396
8-143
Chapter 8
duplex feed sensor [2].

[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-8-397
8.8.24 Duplex Feed Clutch

[2]

Cover
0007-7324
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

F-8-398

Feed Clutch
0007-7325
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2
screws [2]; then, detach the clutch fixing plate [3].
F-8-399
2) Remove the duplex feed clutch [1].
8-144
Chapter 8
F-8-400
F-8-402
8.8.25 Delivery Assembly 1


Cover (rear)

0008-1512
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


(rear) [4].
F-8-403
[3]
8.8.25.3
Removing
Delivery Tray
the
0007-6765
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[3]
[3]
1) Loosen the screw [1].

[4]
3) Detach the delivery tray [3].

[2]
[1]
F-8-401

Cover Unit
0007-6763
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8-145
Chapter 8
F-8-407
F-8-404

Door

tightening).
0007-6766
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-408
right door.
F-8-405
[2].
F-8-409
F-8-406


8-146
Chapter 8
F-8-412
F-8-410


Door
0007-7363
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

F-8-413

F-8-411
connector [2].
8.8.25.6
Removing
Extension Delivery Kit
the
0007-6767
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8-147
Chapter 8
1) Remove the self-tapping screw [1], and detach the

upper inside cover [2].
F-8-416
F-8-414
7) Pull out the Extension Delivery Kit [1] from the

machine.
2) Free the harness [2] from the cable clamp [3], and
detach the 2 re-use bands.
3) Disconnect the connector [1] from the machine
terminal.
F-8-417
8.8.25.7
Removing
Delivery Assembly 1
the
0007-6776
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-415
1) Remove the delivery assembly 1 [1]. (3 screws [2];
4) Open the Extension Delivery Kit [1].
2 stepped screws on the left)

6) Remove the 2 screws [2], and close the Extension
Delivery Kit.
F-8-418
8-148
Chapter 8
8.8.26
Fixing/
Delivery
Drive
Assembly
Cover (rear)
0008-1513
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-420


(rear) [4].

[3]
[3]
[3]
[4]
F-8-421
[2]
[1]
8.8.26.3
Removing
Delivery Tray
F-8-419

Cover Unit
the
0007-6783
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-6781
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
1) Loosen the screw [1].

3) Detach the delivery tray [3].
8-149
Chapter 8
F-8-425
F-8-422

Door

tightening).
0007-6785
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-8-426
right door.
F-8-423
[2].
F-8-427
F-8-424


8-150
Chapter 8
F-8-430
F-8-428


Door
0007-7327
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

F-8-431

F-8-429
connector [2].
8.8.26.6
Removing
Delivery Assembly 1
the
0007-6787
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8-151
Chapter 8

1) Remove the delivery assembly 1 [1]. (3 screws [2];
2 stepped screws on the left)
F-8-435
F-8-432
4) Detach the fixing unit [1] toward the front.
8.8.26.7 Removing the Fixing

Unit
0007-8721
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover
[2].
F-8-436
When mounting the harness cover [1], be sure to keep

the harness [2] within the space [3] indicated in the
figure so that the harness [2] will not come into
F-8-433
2) Disconcert the 3 connectors [1].
F-8-434
8-152
contact with the gear [4].
Chapter 8

[2].
F-8-439
2) Disconnect the connector [1] of the harness, and
free the harness from the cable clamp [2].
F-8-437
Do not touch the screw [1]. Turning it will change the

pressure of the fixing assembly, which cannot be
adjusted in the field, necessitating the replacement of
the fixing assembly.
F-8-440
3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the fixing/
delivery drive assembly 1 [2].
F-8-438
F-8-441
8.8.26.8 Removing the Fixing/

Delivery Drive Assembly
0007-6792
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
8-153
Chapter 8
8.8.27 Separation Roller

Roller/Feed
Roller/
Separation Roller
0008-3155
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

roller).
roller [3].
F-8-442

Roller 1
8-154
Chapter 9Fixing System
Contents
Contents
9.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.1 Power-On Sequence .................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.2 Down Sequence ........................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3 Various Control Mechanisms............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film ................................................................................................... 9-4
9.3.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed in Response to Low Temperature................................................. 9-4
9.3.1.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed ....................................................................................................... 9-4
9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature ................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.2.1 Controlling the Power Supply in Response to Low Temperature........................................................ 9-5
9.3.2.2 Controlling the Feeding in Response to Low Temperature.................................................................. 9-5
9.3.2.3 Controlling the Power Supply at Start-Up............................................................................................ 9-5
9.3.2.4 Copying Temperature Control.............................................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.2.5 Changing the Fixing Film Control Temperature .................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.2.6 Temperature Control in Response to Automatic Double-Sided Copy ................................................. 9-6
9.3.2.7 Temperature Control in Response to Change of Paper Size ................................................................ 9-7
9.3.3 Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3.3.1 Fixing Film Cleaning............................................................................................................................ 9-7
9.3.4 Detecting the Passage of Paper ................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.4.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper............................................................................................................. 9-8
9.4 Protective Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.1 Protective Functions .................................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.2 Detecting an Error ..................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.5.1 Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 9-12
9.5.1.2 Removing the Right Door .................................................................................................................. 9-12
9.5.1.3 Removing the Right Door .................................................................................................................. 9-14
9.5.1.4 Removing the Fixing Unit .................................................................................................................. 9-16
9.5.2 Pressure Roller .......................................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.5.2.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit......................................................................................... 9-18
9.5.2.2 Removing the Grounding Plate .......................................................................................................... 9-22
9.5.2.3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover....................................................................................................... 9-22
9.5.2.4 Removing the Left Side Plate............................................................................................................. 9-24
9.5.2.5 Releasing the Locking Plate ............................................................................................................... 9-25
9.5.2.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ......................................................................................................... 9-26
9.5.2.7 Removing the Inlet Guide .................................................................................................................. 9-29
9.5.2.8 Removing the Pressure Roller ............................................................................................................ 9-29
9.5.3 Cleaning Roller.......................................................................................................................................... 9-31
9.5.3.1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit............................................................................................ 9-31
9.5.3.2 Removing the Cleaning Roller ........................................................................................................... 9-35
9.5.4 Fixing Film ................................................................................................................................................ 9-36
Contents
9.5.4.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit ......................................................................................... 9-36

9.5.4.2 Removing the Grounding Plate........................................................................................................... 9-39
9.5.4.3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover ....................................................................................................... 9-39
9.5.4.4 Removing the Left Side Plate ............................................................................................................. 9-41
9.5.4.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit.......................................................................................................... 9-43
9.5.5 Internal Delivery Sensor ............................................................................................................................ 9-46
9.5.5.3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover ....................................................................................................... 9-50
9.5.5.4 Removing the Left Side Plate ............................................................................................................. 9-52
9.5.5.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit.......................................................................................................... 9-54
9.5.5.7 Removing the Inside Delivery Sensor ................................................................................................ 9-57
9.5.6 Fixing Film Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 9-57
9.5.6.3 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor ...................................................................................................... 9-61
Chapter 9
9.1 Construction
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0006-6002
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine's fixing system has the following major functions:
T-9-1
Item
Description
Fixing method
by fixing film + pressure roller
Fixing heater
plate-type heater
Control temperature
180 deg C (at PSTBY)
Fixing drive control
by control of fixing film speed
Fixing temperature
by main thermistor
detection
Protective
by sub thermistor
mechanism
Cleaning method
by cleaning roller
0006-6003
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine's fixing system has the following major components:
9-1
Chapter 9
[6]
[7]
[8]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
F-9-1
[1] Fixing heater
[2] Fixing film unit
[3] Pressure roller
[4] Power supply brush
[5] Film sensor
[6] Delivery roller
[7] Fixing inside delivery sensor flag
[8] Cleaning roller
9-2
Chapter 9
9.2 Basic Sequence

9.2.1 Power-On Sequence
0006-6005
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

If the thermistor detection temperature is less than 100 deg C when the power is turned on or the sleep mode is
released, the control described below is performed.
1. Increases the speed of the fixing motor in phases (1/4 speed to 1/2 speed and then to normal speed).
2. Performs the start-up current control.
3. Performs the temperature control at 200 deg C for 10 sec.
4. Stops the fixing motor. When the fixing motor is stopped, the fixing temperature control is also stopped, and the
machine enters the stand-by mode.
When the print preparation request is received during wait time, the control described below is performed.
1. Increases the speed of the fixing motor in phases (1/4 speed to 1/2 speed and then to normal speed).
2. Performs the start-up current control.
3. Starts measuring the time passed after the machine reaches the target temperature T deg C.
Target temperature T deg C = 200 deg C (iR3570/iR4570): 190 deg C (iR2270/iR2870)
4. Starts feeding in the case of printing in plain paper mode.
5. Starts feeding when 5 sec have passed after the machine reached the target temperature in the case of printing in
special paper mode.
9.2.2 Down Sequence
0006-6007
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Down sequence is to prevent the machine from operating when the temperature of the end portion of the fixing film
exceeds a specific temperature as when using small-size paper continuously. The details of the control are described
below:
1. The sub thermistor detection temperature is 275 deg C or more.
2. Reduces the number of sheets passed by increasing the paper interval.
3. Returns the number of sheets to the normal when the sub thermistor detection temperature is 265 deg C or less.
9-3
Chapter 9
9.3 Various Control Mechanisms

9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film
9.3.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed in Response to Low Temperature
0006-6037
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

As in the morning, driving the fixing film in a low-temperature environment without warm-up could cause the film
to become displaced. In consideration of this fact, the fixing motor is started up in phases (1/4 speed to 1/2 speed and
then to normal speed).
9.3.1.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed
0007-5124
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The rotation cycle of the fixing film is monitored to control the fixing motor to a specific speed.
When the fixing film rotates and, as a result, the reflecting member positioned in the loop of the film approaches the
speed sensor, the machine detects the rotation of the fixing film.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[A]
[4]
[B]
Off
On
[C]
F-9-2
[1]Speed sensor
[2]Reflecting member
[3]Fixing film (driven by fixing motor)
[4]Pressure roller
[A]Paper feed direction
[B]Speed sensor output
[C]1 rotation of fixing film
Timing of Control
The speed of fixing film rotation is monitored at all times after the fixing motor goes on and its speed reaches a
specific value. The speed of the fixing motor is then controlled so that it remains at a specific level at all times.
9-4
Chapter 9
9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature

9.3.2.1 Controlling the Power Supply in Response to Low Temperature
0007-5125
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

In a low temperature environment, the heater is supplied with power before the fixing film is driven so as to soften
the grease applied to the fixing film. The mechanism of control is as follows:
If the temperature of the fixing film detected by the thermistor is lower than a specific level, the heater is supplied
with power for a specific period of time before a normal start-up mechanism is initiated.
If the temperature of the fixing film detected by the thermistor is higher than a specific level, the normal start-up
mechanism is imitated.
9.3.2.2 Controlling the Feeding in Response to Low Temperature
0007-5401
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

In a low temperature environment, the feeding timing is changed according to the temperature detected by the
environment sensor so as to enhance the fixing capability. The details are described below.
When the environment sensor detection temperature is 13 deg C or less, the feeding timing is delayed by 5000 msec.
In thick paper mode, the feeding timing is not changed even if the environment sensor detection temperature is 13
deg C or less.
9.3.2.3 Controlling the Power Supply at Start-Up
0006-6583
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

When the thermistor detection temperature is 180 deg C or less, the power control to compensate for the heater,
(varying according to input voltage and a heater resistor value) is performed so as to raise the temperature of the
fixing unit to the required temperature for fixing in a short time.
1. starts 65% power supply.
2. uses thermistor reading = T1 (deg C) occurring 400 msec after the start of 65% power supply.
3)uses thermistor reading = T2 (deg C) occurring 500 msec after the start of 65% power supply.
4. computes the difference between T2 and T1, refers to a power supply ratio table to compute a power supply ratio
X (%), and uses the result.
5. uses the thermistor reading = T3 (deg C) occurring 200 msec after the start of X (%) power supply.
6. uses the thermistor reading = T4 (deg C) occurring 300 msec after the start of the X (%) power supply.
7. computes the difference between T4 and T2, refers to a power supply ratio table, computes a power supply ratio
Y (%), and uses the result.
8. repeats step 5 through 7 until the start-up control target temperature is reached.
9. when the start-up control temperature is reached, shifts to copying temperature control.
9-5
Chapter 9
180
85
400ms
200ms
500ms
300ms
F-9-3
A: start-up control
B: copying temperature control
C: 65 (%) power supply
D: X (%) power supply
E: Y (%) power supply
9.3.2.4 Copying Temperature Control
0006-6584
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine uses this mechanism to control the temperature of the fixing heater to an optimum level while a
recording medium is passing through the fixing film assembly; specifically,
1.the machine varies the power ratio in relation to the difference between the temperature detected by the thermistor
and the target control temperature.
2.if the temperature detected by the thermistor is higher than the target control temperature for a specific period of
time (0.6 sec), the machine will decrease the power ratio; if lower, it will increase the power rate.
9.3.2.5 Changing the Fixing Film Control Temperature
0007-5452
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

When a fixing failure occurs or creases appear, the fixing film control temperature can be changed in the service
mode as shown below.
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TEMP-CON (to switch the fixing temperature mode for heavy paper)
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TEMPCON2 (to switch the fixing temperature mode)
0: OFF (default), 1: -10 deg C, 2: -6 deg C, 3: -3 deg C, 4: +3 deg C, 5: +6 deg C, 6: +10 deg C, 7: 15 deg C
9.3.2.6 Temperature Control in Response to Automatic Double-Sided Copy

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
9-6
0007-5453
Chapter 9
The second side of an automatic double-sided copy requires lower control temperature in comparison with the first
side. For this reason, the control temperature is lowered for the second side of an automatic double-sided copy so as
to prevent adverse effects such as rises in temperature.
9.3.2.7 Temperature Control in Response to Change of Paper Size
0007-5454
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine has a function to switch the paper size during continuous mode such as in rotation sort. When smallsize paper is qenerated continuously, the temperature of the end portion of the fixing film rises. Immediately
thereafter, if large-size paper is passed, high-temperature offset might occur at the end portion where the temperature
is likely to have risen. To prevent high-temperature offset, the control temperature is changed when the paper size
chanqes.
9.3.3 Cleaning
9.3.3.1 Fixing Film Cleaning
0007-5300
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Purpose
In the event of a jam or when wear on the fixing film advances, the fixing film is rotated idly for collection of toner
from both the film and the pressure roller to the cleaning roller.
The timing of control is as follows:
1. If the reading of the cleaning counter has exceeded the interval (expressed in terms of the number of sheets), the
machine starts cleaning with the fixing motor rotating at 1/4 speed. The length, timing, and intervals of cleaning
may be set in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-CLN. Further, the cleaning counter reading is reset
at the end of cleaning.
T-9-2
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > FIX-CLN
0 (default)
225
225
225
Cleaning control time
60
60
60
Cleaning intervals
500
200
100
Cleaning control
temperature
If a copy or print job arrives while cleaning is under way, the machine will not pick up paper until the ongoing
cleaning ends.
If last rotation is under way in response to a rise in temperature at the film edge, the machine will hold cleaning until
9-7
Chapter 9
the end of the ongoing last rotation.

2. If a jam has been removed, the machine starts cleaning at time of recovery, at 220 deg C and for 10 sec.
9.3.4 Detecting the Passage of Paper

9.3.4.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper
0006-6014
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The paper passage detection configuration in the fixing unit is shown below.
PSR OUT PD
J303-2
DC controller PCB
PS13
Fixing delivery sensor
F-9-4
When a delay jam of the fixing delivery sensor (PS13) occurs, the fixing motor is stopped immediately so as to
prevent paper from wrapping around the fixing roller.
The pressure of the fixing film and the pressure roller is released when a jam occurs so that jammed paper can be
taken out easily.
9-8
Chapter 9
9.4 Protective Functions

9.4.1 Protective Functions
0006-6009
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

As part of its protective mechanism, the machine has a thermo switch, triacs, and a relay. Protective measures
according to location are described below:
1. When the thermistor is out of order
Software detects a failure, and the triac and the relay are turned off.
The thermo switch is turned off.
2. When the CPU goes out of control
The latch circuit detects the excessive temperature rise, and the relay is turned off.
3. When the triac short-circuits
Software detects failure, and the relay is turned off.
The latch circuit detects the excessive temperature rise, and the relay is turned off.
Protective Circuit Block Configuration Diagram
DCON
and
CPU
and
and
A/D
and
Tr
S_TH
M_TH
AC driver
SW
F-9-5
9-9
Chapter 9
9.4.2 Detecting an Error
0006-6013
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

As part of its protective mechanism, the machine checks for the following error conditions:
T-9-3
Error
Detail
code
code
E000
0000
Symptom
Description
The fixing
In the course of start-up control, the
temperature fails to
thermistor reading is less than 30 deg C 1
increase.
sec after the start of power supply or is

less than 70 deg C 2 sec after the start of
power supply; the machine will identify
an error condition if any of the foregoing
continues for 200 msec or more.
E001
0000
The thermistor
The thermistor detects 235 deg C for 200
detects
msec or more continuously.
overheating.
0001
A hardware circuit
A hardware circuit detects overheating in
detects
relation to the thermistor (main or sub).
overheating.
0002
The sub thermistor
The thermistor detects 295 deg C or more
detects
for 200 msec or more continuously.
overheating.
E002
0000
The fixing
In the course of start-up control, the
temperature fails to
thermistor detects a temperature lower
reach a specific
then 115 deg C for 200 msec continuously
level.
after it has detected 100 deg C; the

thermistor detects a temperature less than
150 deg C for 200 msec or more
continuously after it has detected 140 deg
C; or, the thermistor detects a temperature
lower than 165 deg C for 20 msec or more
continuously 1 sec after it has detected
160 deg C.
E003
0000
The fixing
In the course of normal temperature
temperature has
control, the thermistor detects a
dropped to an
temperature lower than 140 deg C for 20
abnormally low
msec or more continuously.
level.
9-10
Error
Detail
code
code
E007
0000
Symptom
Description
The fixing film
The reading of the main thermistor is in
rotates in an
excess of 100 deg C with the fixing motor
abnormal way.
in a locked state and, in addition, the

machine fails to detect the marker signal
for 6 sec.
E014
0000
The machine
During operation, the machine detects an
detects a fixing
overload condition continuously for 3 sec
motor error.
or more.
Chapter 9
9.5
Parts
Procedure
Replacement
9.5.1 Fixing Unit

Cover (rear)
0007-7874
F-9-7
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


[2].
(rear) [4].
[3]
F-9-8
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-9-6

Door
0007-7879
F-9-9
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


tightening).
9-12
Chapter 9
F-9-10
right door.
F-9-12

F-9-11

Door
0007-7882
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

F-9-13
connector [2].
9-13
Chapter 9

[2].
F-9-14
F-9-16


F-9-17
F-9-15

F-9-18

Unit

0007-7884
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
9-14
Chapter 9
F-9-19

F-9-21
9.5.2 Pressure Roller

9.5.2.1 Removing the Inside
Delivery Cover Unit
0007-7910
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2],
and detach the inside delivery cover unit [3].
F-9-20
F-9-22
Note 1
Point to note when removing the inside delivery
cover unit
Remove the inside delivery cover unit while
supporting the guide [1] in the arrow direction A and
opening it in the arrow direction B in the figure.
Otherwise, the guide may come off the inside delivery
9-15
Chapter 9
cover unit.
[d] [2]
[1]
[c]
[e]
[2]
F-9-23
[1]
Note 2
Procedure for attaching the guide
Perform the following steps if the guide has come off
the inside delivery cover unit.
[2]
[1]
[a]
1) Attach the torsion spring [2] to the duplexing

support feeder mount [1]. At this time, hook the
edge of the torsion spring on the area A of the
duplexing support feeder mount.
[b]
F-9-25
3) Hook the edge [1] of the torsion spring on the
spring-hook area [2] of the inside delivery cover.
[1]
[A]
[2]
F-9-24
2) Attach the guide [1] to the duplexing support feeder
mount [2]. At this time, fit [b] into [a] and [d] into
[c]. Make sure that the edge [e] of the torsion spring
is outside the guide.
9-16
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
F-9-27
2) Attach the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2], and
fix the inside delivery cover unit [3].
F-9-26
Note 3
Attaching the inside delivery cover unit
1) Attach the inside delivery cover unit while
supporting the guide [1] in the arrow direction A
and opening it in the arrow direction B. Opening the
F-9-28
guide can prevent it from coming off the inside

delivery cover unit. After attaching, make sure that
the guide [1] rotates smoothly.
9.5.2.2
Removing
Grounding Plate
the
0007-7911
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding
plate [2].
9-17
Chapter 9
F-9-29

Film Cover
0007-7912
F-9-32
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the selftapping screw [2]; then, detach the fixing film cover
[3].
F-9-30
F-9-33
9.5.2.4 Removing the Left Side

Plate
0007-7913
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the left side plate
cover [2].
F-9-31
When mounting the fixing film cover unit, be sure to

check that it has not ridden over the emboss [1]
indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightening
the screw.
9-18
Chapter 9
When mounting the left side plate, be sure that it is

correctly positioned so that the locking lever and the
teeth are correctly engaged. (See the figure.)
F-9-34
F-9-38
F-9-35
3) Slide the left side plate [1] in the direction of the
9.5.2.5 Releasing the Locking

Plate
0007-7914
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
arrow to detach.
1) Turn the locking gear [1] in the direction of the
arrow to release the locking roller.
F-9-36
F-9-39
F-9-37
9-19
Chapter 9

Film Unit
0007-7915
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) While pushing down the release lever (front) [1],
pull out the heater contact [2].
F-9-40
Do not touch the screw [1] used to keep the fixing

assembly in place. Turning the screw will change the
F-9-43
2) While pushing down the release lever (rear) [1],
F-9-44
F-9-41
3) Turn the locking plate [1] in the direction of the
3) Remove the screw [1], and free the AC harness [2].
arrow to release it.
F-9-45
F-9-42
9-20
4) Free the AC harness [1] from the edge saddle [2].
Chapter 9
F-9-49
F-9-46
5) Free the relay connector [1] of the signal cable from
the connector holder [2].
9.5.2.7 Removing the Inlet

Guide
0007-7916
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Slide the inlet guide [1] in the direction of the arrow
to detach.
F-9-47
6) Disconnect the connector [2] from the relay
connector [1].
F-9-50
9.5.2.8 Removing the Pressure

Roller
0007-7918
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the drive gear
[2].
F-9-48
7) Remove the fixing film unit [1].
9-21
Chapter 9
F-9-51
2) Lift the front of the pressure roller [1].
F-9-54
The insulating bush may be of 2 different shapes: one

for the iR3570/4570 and the other for the iR2270/
2870. If the machine is an iR2270/2870, be sure to pay
attention to the direction of the protrusion of the
insulating bush.
F-9-52
3) Push in the bush [1] found at the rear in the
direction of the arrow to free it; then, detach the
pressure roller.
F-9-53
Be sure to pay attention to the position and the

orientation of the insulating bush.
9-22
F-9-55
Chapter 9
9.5.3 Cleaning Roller
Note 2
9.5.3.1 Removing the inside

delivery cover unit

0007-7890
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[1]
[A]
F-9-56
[2]
F-9-58
Note 1
cover unit

cover unit.
F-9-57
9-23
Chapter 9
[d] [2]
[1]
[c]
[e]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-9-60
[1]
[a]
Note 3
[b]
F-9-59


9-24
Chapter 9
F-9-63
2) Remove the cleaning roller holder [1].
F-9-61
F-9-64
The foregoing steps assume that the fixing unit has

already been removed from the machine. The cleaning
roller may also be removed without first removing the
fixing unit from the machine in the same way.
F-9-62
9.5.3.2 Removing the Cleaning

Roller
9.5.4 Fixing Film

Delivery Cover Unit
0007-7891
0007-7898
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 2 self-tapping screws [1], and detach
the cleaning roller together with the cleaning roller

holder [2].
9-25
Chapter 9
[1]
[A]
F-9-65
[2]
Note 1
F-9-67

cover unit
cover unit.
F-9-66
Note 2
9-26
Chapter 9
[d] [2]
[1]
[c]
[e]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-9-69
[1]
[a]
Note 3
[b]
F-9-68


9-27
Chapter 9
F-9-72

Film Cover
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
F-9-70
[3].
F-9-73
F-9-71
9.5.4.2
Removing
Grounding Plate
0007-7900
the
0007-7899
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-9-74
plate [2].

the screw.
9-28
Chapter 9
F-9-77
F-9-75
F-9-78
arrow to detach.
F-9-76

Plate
0007-7901
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-9-79
cover [2].
F-9-80
9-29
Chapter 9

F-9-83

F-9-81

Plate
0007-7902
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-9-84
F-9-82
F-9-85
9-30
Chapter 9

Film Unit
0007-7909
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-9-89
F-9-86
F-9-90
connector [1].
F-9-87
F-9-91
F-9-88
9-31
Chapter 9
F-9-92
9.5.5 Internal Delivery Sensor

Delivery Cover Unit
F-9-94
0007-7923
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
Note 2


[1]
F-9-93
[A]
Note 1
cover unit
[2]

F-9-95

cover unit.

9-32
Chapter 9
[d] [2]
[1]
[c]
[e]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-9-97
[1]
[a]
Note 3
[b]
F-9-96


9-33
Chapter 9
F-9-100

Film Cover
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
F-9-98
[3].
F-9-101
F-9-99
9.5.5.2
Removing
Grounding Plate
0007-7925
the
0007-7924
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-9-102
plate [2].

the screw.
9-34
Chapter 9
F-9-105
F-9-103
F-9-106
arrow to detach.
F-9-104

Plate
0007-7926
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-9-107
cover [2].
F-9-108
9-35
Chapter 9

F-9-111

F-9-109

Plate
0007-7927
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-9-112
F-9-110
F-9-113
9-36
Chapter 9

Film Unit
0007-7929
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-9-117
F-9-114
F-9-118
connector [1].
F-9-115
F-9-119
F-9-116
9-37
Chapter 9
9.5.6 Fixing Film Sensor

Delivery Cover Unit
0007-7895
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-9-120

Delivery Sensor
0007-7932
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the harness [1].
F-9-123
Note 1
cover unit
F-9-121
2) Remove the front latch [2] of the inside delivery
sensor [1]; then, detach the inside delivery sensor.

cover unit.
F-9-122
F-9-124
9-38
Chapter 9
Note 2
[d] [2]
[1]

[c]
[e]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[A]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[a]
F-9-125
[b]
F-9-126
9-39
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
F-9-128
F-9-127
Note 3
F-9-129

9.5.6.2
Removing
Grounding Plate
the
0007-7896
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

plate [2].
9-40
Chapter 9
F-9-130

Film Sensor
F-9-133
0007-7897
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-9-131
2) Detach the harness [1] from the guide [2].
F-9-132
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the fixing
film sensor [2].
9-41
Chapter 10External and

Controls
Contents
Contents
10.1 Control Panel.................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.3 LCD Indication Processing ..................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.4 LCD Indication Processing ..................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.5 Adjustment of the LCD Contact.............................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.6 Adjustment of the LCD Contact.............................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.7 Functions of the Control Panel CPU ....................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.8 Functions of the Control Panel CPU ....................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Counters.......................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 10-4
10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count............................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3 Fans ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-7
10.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 10-7
10.3.2 2-Speed Control....................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.3.3 Sequence of Operation ............................................................................................................................ 10-8
10.4 Power Supply System..................................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.4.1 Power Supply .......................................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit .......................................................................................... 10-9
10.4.1.2 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit .......................................................................................... 10-10
10.4.1.3 Power Supply Route in the Reader Unit......................................................................................... 10-12
10.4.1.4 Timing of Supply to the Reader Unit ............................................................................................. 10-12
10.4.1.5 Connections to Various Accessories .............................................................................................. 10-13
10.4.1.6 Connections to Various Accessories .............................................................................................. 10-14
10.4.2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB......................................................................................... 10-15
10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB .................................................................... 10-15
10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB....................................................................... 10-15
10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Accessories Power Supply PCB .................................................................... 10-16
10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the All-Night Power Supply PCB........................................................................ 10-16
10.4.3 Protection Function ............................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.4.4 Backup Battery ...................................................................................................................................... 10-17
10.4.4.1 Backup Battery ............................................................................................................................... 10-17
10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function........................................................................................................................ 10-17
10.4.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 10-17
10.4.5.2 Machine as Supplied with Power ................................................................................................... 10-18
10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 10-20
10.5.1 Main Drive Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 10-20
10.5.1.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly ............................................................................................. 10-20
10.5.1.3 Removing the Main Drive Assembly ............................................................................................. 10-21
10.5.2 Power Supply Unit ................................................................................................................................ 10-23
10.5.2.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower) .................................................................................................. 10-23
Contents
10.5.2.3 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB..............................................................................10-24

10.5.2.4 Removing the Main Power Supply.................................................................................................10-25
10.5.3 Control Panel .........................................................................................................................................10-27
10.5.3.1 Removing the Control Panel...........................................................................................................10-27
10.5.4 Control Panel LCD Unit ........................................................................................................................10-30
10.5.4.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover .......................................................................................10-32
10.5.4.3 Removing the Control Panel Inside Frame.....................................................................................10-32
10.5.4.4 Removing the Control Panel LCD..................................................................................................10-33
10.5.4.7 Removing the Control Panel Frame................................................................................................10-35
10.5.4.8 Removing the Control Panel LCD PCB .........................................................................................10-37
10.5.5 DC Controller PCB................................................................................................................................ 10-38
10.5.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................10-38
10.5.6 Control Panel Inverter PCB ...................................................................................................................10-40
10.5.6.3 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB.....................................................................................10-42
10.5.6.7 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB.....................................................................................10-47
10.5.7 Control Panel Key Switch PCB .............................................................................................................10-47
10.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB ..............................................................................10-50
10.5.7.8 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB ..............................................................................10-56
10.5.8 Control Panel CPU PCB ........................................................................................................................10-56
10.5.8.3 Removing the Controller Panel CPU PCB .....................................................................................10-58
10.5.8.6 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB .........................................................................................10-61
10.5.9 All Night Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................10-62
10.5.9.2 Removing the All-Night Power Supply PCB .................................................................................10-62
10.5.10 Controller Power Supply PCB.............................................................................................................10-63
10.5.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover.............................................................................................................10-63
10.5.10.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower).................................................................................................10-64
10.5.10.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) ..................................................................................................10-65
10.5.10.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB............................................................................10-65
Contents
10.5.10.5 Removing the Controller Power Supply PCB .............................................................................. 10-66

10.5.11 Option Power Supply PCB.................................................................................................................. 10-67
10.5.11.1 Removing the Rear Cover ............................................................................................................ 10-67
10.5.11.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower) ................................................................................................ 10-68
10.5.11.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear).................................................................................................. 10-69
10.5.11.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB ........................................................................... 10-69
10.5.12 High-Voltage PCB .............................................................................................................................. 10-70
10.5.12.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ................................................................................................... 10-70
10.5.12.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case ................................................................................................. 10-71
10.5.12.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge..................................................................................................... 10-72
10.5.12.4 Removing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................. 10-73
10.5.12.5 Removing the Developing Assembly........................................................................................... 10-75
10.5.12.6 Removing the Upper Tray ............................................................................................................ 10-77
10.5.12.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover .......................................................................................... 10-78
10.5.12.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp .............................................................................................. 10-78
10.5.12.9 Removing the Left Cover ............................................................................................................. 10-79
10.5.12.10 Removing the Laser Unit............................................................................................................ 10-80
10.5.12.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly................................................................................................ 10-82
10.5.12.12 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ............................................................................................... 10-83
10.5.12.13 Removing the Right Door .......................................................................................................... 10-84
10.5.12.16 Removing the Fixing Unit .......................................................................................................... 10-89
10.5.12.17 Removing the Gear..................................................................................................................... 10-92
10.5.12.18 Removing the High-Voltage PCB .............................................................................................. 10-93
10.5.13 Exhaust Fan ......................................................................................................................................... 10-94
10.5.13.1 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan............................................................................................... 10-94
10.5.13.2 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan............................................................................................... 10-95
10.5.14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly .......................................................................................................... 10-97
10.5.14.1 Removing the Rear Cover ............................................................................................................ 10-97
10.5.14.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly ........................................................................................... 10-98
10.5.14.3 Removing the Main Drive Motor ................................................................................................. 10-99
10.5.14.4 Removing the Main Drive Motor ............................................................................................... 10-101
10.5.15 Fixing Driver Motor .......................................................................................................................... 10-102
10.5.15.1 Removing the Rear Cover .......................................................................................................... 10-102
10.5.15.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................. 10-102
10.5.15.3 Removing the Fixing Drive Motor ............................................................................................. 10-104
10.5.16 Right Door ......................................................................................................................................... 10-105
10.5.16.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) ............................................................................................... 10-105
10.5.17 Circuit Braker .................................................................................................................................... 10-108
10.5.17.1 Removing the Rear Cover .......................................................................................................... 10-108
10.5.17.2 Removing the Circuit Breaker.................................................................................................... 10-109
Chapter 10
10.1 Control Panel

10.1.1 Overview
0006-6159
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The machine's control panel consists of the following PCBs, LCD, and touch panel:
The major functions of the control panel are as follows:
- LCD indication
- contrast adjustment
- touch switch input
- hardware key input
Main controller PCB
Control panel control block
J1018A,J1018B
J2117A,J2117B
Touch panel
J1114
J1112
J1113
J1110,J1111
J2137
J6891,J6892
Keypad PCB
Color LCD
Control panel
inverter PCB
Control panel
F-10-1
10.1.2 Overview
0006-6163
/ iR3530
The machine's control panel consists of the following PCBs, LCD, and touch panel:
The major functions of the control panel are as follows:
- LCD indication
- contrast adjustment
- touch switch input
- hardware key input
10-1
Chapter 10
from Controller Unit
A18
4
J1118
1
14
A1
J511
B1
B18
1
J1116
16
Touch Panel
16
J6802
Control Panel Key

Switch PCB
J1119
Control Panel CPU PCB

1
14
LCD Panel
J1117
14
4
J956
1
3
J955
1
J6801
1
1
J1121
3
1
J1120
Control Panel
Inverter PCB
to Foot Switch
F-10-2
10.1.3 LCD Indication Processing
0006-6160
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The CPU on the main controlled PCB sends data (display data) to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed by the
program.
The data is sent through the control panel PCB to reach the color LCD.
10.1.4 LCD Indication Processing
0006-6164
/ iR3530
The CPU on the main controlled PCB sends data (display data) to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed by the
program.
The data is sent through the control panel PCB to reach the LCD.
10.1.5 Adjustment of the LCD Contact
0006-6161
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The machine is equipped with a density adjustment volume (VR6801) on its keypad PCB for use by the user to adjust
the contrast of the LCD screen.
10.1.6 Adjustment of the LCD Contact

/ iR3530
10-2
0006-6165
Chapter 10
The machine is equipped with a density adjustment volume (VR2) on its keypad PCB for use by the user to adjust
the contrast of the LCD screen.
10.1.7 Functions of the Control Panel CPU
0006-6162
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

- Monitoring the Key Inputs
It communicates the keypad and function key inputs to the CPU on the main controller PCB.
- Monitoring the Touch Panel Input
It communicates the key inputs made on the touch panel to the CPU on the main controller PCB.
- Controlling the Buzzer Sound
- Controlling the Control Panel LED
Memo:
the color LCD is driven by the main controller, and the control panel CPU PCB serves to relay the drive signals.
10.1.8 Functions of the Control Panel CPU
0006-6166
/ iR3530
- Monitoring the Key Inputs
It communicates the keypad and function key inputs to the CPU on the main controller PCB.
- Monitoring the Touch Panel Input
It communicates the key inputs made on the touch panel to the CPU on the main controller PCB.
- Controlling the Buzzer Sound
- Controlling the Control Panel LED
Memo:
the LCD is driven by the main controller, and the control panel CPU PCB serves to relay the drive signals.
10-3
Chapter 10
10.2 Counters
10.2.1 Overview
0006-5378
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine is equipped with counters that keep track of printouts according to the type of printer unit. The counters
are indicated in response to a press on the Check key on the control panel. The following shows the functions of the
counter as set at time of shipment from the factory.
T-10-1
Japan*1
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
total 1
***
101
Japan*1
total 2
****
102
120VTW
total 1
*2
101
120V UL
total 1
*3
230V *4
240V EUR
not
not
not
not
indicated
indicated
indicated
indicated
**
**
**
**
**
000
000
000
000
000
copy
total A
not
not
not
(total 2)
(total 2)
indicated
indicated
indicated
**
**
**
202
127
000
000
000
total
copy
copy
not
not
(large)
(total 1)
(large)
indicated
indicated
**
**
103
201
203
000
000
total
copy
copy
not
not
(large)
(total 1)
(large)
indicated
indicated
**
**
101
103
201
203
000
000
total 1
total
copy
copy
not
not
(large)
(total 1)
(large)
indicated
indicated
**
**
101
103
201
203
000
000
total 1
total
total
scan
not
not
(large)
(small)
(total 1)
indicated
indicated
**
**
000
000
*5
101
10-4
not
indicated
103
104
501
Chapter 10
240V CA
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
total 1
total
copy
copy
not
not
(large)
(total 1)
(large)
indicated
indicated
**
**
000
000
*6
101
103
201
203
<Guide to Symbols>
large: large-sized paper (in feed direction, 364 mm or longer; count x 1)
small: small-sized paper (in feed direction, 364 mm or less).
total: all (C + P); count x 1.
double-sided: in auto double-side copying count x 1; feed.
- The 3-digit symbol in the Counter column indicates the setting in the following service does item:
1 through 6 under COUNTER>OPTION>USER>COUNTER.
- Counters 2 through 6 may be changed in the following service mode mode item:
COPIER>OPTION>USER.
*1 :F14-3213/ 3223/ 3218/ 3211/ 3228/ 3221/ 3318/ 3311/ 3328/ 3321/ 3319/ 3312/ 6718/ 6711/ 6728/ 6721/ 6719/
6712
*2 :None in particular
*3 :F14-3338/ 3331/ 6738/ 6731/ 5438/ 5431
*4 :F14-3248/ 3241/ 3348/ 3341/ 6748/ 6741/ 5448/ 5441
*5 :F14-3298/ 3291/ 3398/ 3391/ 6798/ 6791/ 5498/ 5491
*6 :F14-3268/ 3261/ 3368/ 3361/ 6768/ 6761/ 5468/ 5461
** by default, not indicated; may be changed in service mode.
*** '1' is set for the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USE>CNT-SW.
**** '1' is set for the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW.
10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count
0006-5385
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The timing at which the count is increased differs depending on the printing mode (single-sided or double-sided),
target of delivery, and type of accessory:
1. Singe-Sided Printing, 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print
In single-side printing or for the 2nd side of a double-sided print, the count is increased when the trailing edge of
the sheet is discharged outside the machine in relation to the output of the following sensors:
T-10-2
Condition
Finisher absent
Target of
delivery
Tray 1
Sensor
Delivery sensor (PS14)
10-5
Chapter 10
Condition
Target of
delivery
Sensor
Tray 2
No. 2 delivery sensor (PS1A)
Tray 3
Finisher present
Delivery sensor of the finisher
2. 1st Side of a Double-Sided Print

When the double-sided print feed sensor (PS17) goes on, the machine will assume that printing on the 1st side has
been completed, thereby increasing the count.
10-6
Chapter 10
10.3 Fans
10.3.1 Overview
0006-5388
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The names and the functions of the fans used in the machine are as follows:
T-10-3
Notation
Name
Filter
2-speed
Description
control
FM1
Heat discharge fan
Present
Used
Cools the fixing assembly.
Present
Used
Cools the fixing assembly.
(rear)
FM2
Heat discharge fan

(front)
FM1
FM2
F-10-3
10.3.2 2-Speed Control
0006-5389
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The rotation of the 2 fans used in the machine is controlled to 2 different speeds by the voltage switchover circuit of
the individual fans.
10-7
Chapter 10
DC controller PCB
24V
13V
24V or 13V
Full-speed
signal
CPU
Voltage
Half-speed
switching circuit
Clock signal
signal
Fan
F-10-4
10.3.3 Sequence of Operation
0006-5390
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1. Standby Mode, Sleep Mode
In standby mode or sleep mode, the heat discharge fan (front, rear; FM1/2) is at rest.
2. Printing
While printing is under way, the fans are switched between full speed and half speed depending on whether the
machine is in full speed mode or half speed mode and the reading of the environment sensor (HU1).
- Double-Side Printing
T-10-4
Environment sensor (HU1) reading
Full speed, half speed
25 deg C or more
Full speed
Less than 25 deg C
Half speed
- Single-Sided Printing
T-10-5
Environment sensor (HU1) reading
Full speed, half speed
30 deg C or ore
Full speed
Less hand 30 deg C
Half speed
Note 1:
While the machine is in continuous printing mode, the insertion of one or more double-sided prints will start the
control used for double-sided printing.
Note 2:
The printing interval covers the interval up to when the fixing motor (M3) stops rotation.
10-8
Chapter 10
10.4 Power Supply System

10.4.1 Power Supply
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit
0008-0541
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The machine's DC power is controlled by the printer unit power supply PCB.
The following shows the functions of the individual power supply PCBs used or accessories and the distribution of
power:
T-10-6
Name
Description
Printer unit power

supply PCB
Generates DC power (24 V, 13 V); supplies

DC power to the controller power supply
PCB and cassette pedestal.
Accessories power
supply PCB
Supplies power to the side paper deck,

buffer path, and finisher.
Main switch
Turns on/off the power to the AC driver

PCB.
Door switch
Turns on/off 24 VU1 to the DC controller

PCB.
Leakage breaker
Cuts power in the event of an error.
Environment heater
switch PCB
Turns on/off power to the cassette heater,

printer unit heater, and deck heater.
High-voltage power
supply PCB
Generate various high voltage.
AC driver PCB
Supplies AC power to the printer unit power

supply PCB, accessories power supply
PCB, Supplies AC power to all-night power
supply PCB; drives the fixing system.
Controller power
supply PCB
Supplies DC power to the 3-way unit, fax

board, controller, HVT and DC controller
PCB; generates DC power (13V, 5V, 3.3V).
Remarks
Optional
Generates DC power (5V,3.3V).
10-9
Chapter 10
Name
Description
All-night power
supply PCB
Remarks
Generates and supplies all-night power (3

VB).
Reader heater(H5)
Heater switch
SW5
DADF
-N1
Reader heater(H6)
HVT
High-voltage
power supply PCB
DC controller PCB
Pickup
heater
mounting
kit
2 4VU2
24VU1
13VA1
5VA
3VA
Printer power supply block
24VU2
13VA2
Cassette pedestal(H1C)
24VU1
Printer
unit
Deck heater(H7)
SW2
Front cover
open/close switch
Heater
switch PCB
Main switch
SW1
24VU2
Cassette heater(H4)
ELCB2
13VA2
Leakage breaker
Fixing main heater(H1)

AC driver PCB
Printer
power
supply PCB
Fixing sub heater(H2)
24VU1
24VU2
13VA1
13VA2
Thermal switch(TP1)
13VB
3VB
To Finisher-Q3/Q4
24VU1: non-all night

24VA: non-all night
13VA1: non-all night

13VB: non-all night
5VA: non-all night
3VA: non-all night

3VB: all night
24VU2
13VA
13VB
5VA
Controller
PCB
To 3-Way Unit-A1
Super G3 Fax
Board-Q1
13VA2
To Finisher-S1
To Buffer Path-E1
To Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2
13VA2
3VB
To 3-Way Unit-A1
To Finisher-Q3/Q4
3VB
3VA
Accessories
All-night
power
power
supply PCB supply PCB
13VA1
24VA
24VU2
(by way of Cassette

Feeding Unit-Y2)
Side Paper Deck-Q1
To Buffer Path-E1
To Finisher-S1
F-10-5
10.4.1.2 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit
0008-8136
/ iR3530
The machine's power is supplied by the printer power supply PCB. The DC power to accessories is supplied by the
accessories power supply PCB.
The functions of the individual power supply PCBs are as follows, shown together with the distribution of power:
T-10-7
10-10
Name
Description
Printer power supply

PCB
generates DC power (24 V, 13 V). supplies

DC power to controller PCB, cassette
pedestal
Remarks
Name
Description
Remarks
Accessories power
supply PCB
supplies DC power to finisher.
Main switch
turns on/off AC power to AC driver PCB.
Door switch
turns on/off DC power to DC driver PCB.
Leakage breaker
cuts off power in the event of error.
High-voltage power
supply PCB
generates various high voltage.
AC driver PCB
supplies AC power to printer power supply

PCB, accessories power supply PCB,
uninterrupted power supply PCB. Fixing
drive.
Controller power
supply PCB
supplies DC power to 3way unit-A1, fax

board, controller, DC controller PCB, HVT.
generates DC power (5 V, 3.3 V).
Uninterruptive power
supply PCB
generates and supplies uninterruptive

power (3 VB).
Reader heater(H5)
Heater switch
SW5
DADF
-N1
Reader heater(H6)
HVT
High-voltage
power supply PCB
DC controller PCB
Pickup
heater
mounting
kit
2 4VU2
13VA1
24VU1
5VA
3VA
Printer power supply block
24VU2
13VA2
Cassette pedestal(H1C)
24VU1
Printer
unit
Deck heater(H7)
SW2
Front cover
open/close switch
Heater
switch PCB
Main switch
SW1
24VU2
Cassette heater(H4)
ELCB2
13VA2
Leakage breaker
Fixing main heater(H1)

AC driver PCB
Printer
power
supply PCB
Fixing sub heater(H2)
24VU1
24VU2
13VA1
13VA2
Thermal switch(TP1)
3VB
13VB
5VA: non-all night
F-10-6
Super G3 Fax
Board-Q1
3VA: non-all night

3VB: all night
24VU2
13VA
13VB
5VA
Controller
PCB
To 3-Way Unit-A1

13VB: non-all night
13VA2
To Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2

24VA: non-all night
13VA2
3VB
To 3-Way Unit-A1
To Finisher-S1
3VB
3VA
Accessories
All-night
power
power
supply PCB supply PCB
13VA1
24VA
24VU2
To Finisher-S1
Chapter 10
10.4.1.3 Power Supply Route in the Reader Unit
0006-5393
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The printer unit controller PCB generates the following DC voltages using the 13 VDC supplied by the printer unit:
- 24 VDC (for motor drive)
- 13 VDC (for LED array)
- 5 VDC (for sensor drive)
- 3.3 VDC (for IC drive/for CCD drive)
24 VDC power is used to drive the motors, while 13 VDC power is used to turn on the LED array for
illumination of originals.
To printer unit
(scanner PCB)
100 VAC
From printer unit
DC24V
DC13V
DC13V/3.3V
To DF
AC100V
24 VDC, 13 VDC
From printer unit
To DF
04
J5
DC24V
J5
00
J5
01
J5
J5
02
05
J5
03
J5
10
AC100V
Printer unit
controller PCB
Generates 5 VDC from 13 VDC

Generates 3.3 VDC from 13 VDC
F-10-7
10.4.1.4 Timing of Supply to the Reader Unit

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
The reader unit is supplied with 24 VDC/1.3 VDC by the printer unit at such times as described below.
10-12
0006-5394
Chapter 10
Sleep mode
Scan
Standby
Main power switch ON

Power plug content
to outlet
PSTBY
SCAN
DC 13V/24V
F-10-8
10.4.1.5 Connections to Various Accessories
0006-5395
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The following diagram shows the connections between the printer unit and the various accessories used for the
supply of power:
[1]
[A]
[B]
[7]
[C]
[2]
[3]
[E]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[D]
F-10-9
[1] DADF I/F cable
[2] Finisher-Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q4 I/F cable
10-13
Chapter 10
[3] Pickup heater cable

[4] Side deck heater cable
[5] Side deck I/F cable
[6] Cassette pedestal I/F cable
[7] AC input
[A] DADF-N1
[B] Reader unit
[C] Printer unit
[D] Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2
[E] Paper Deck-Q1
10.4.1.6 Connections to Various Accessories
0008-8143
/ iR3530
The following diagram shows the connections between the printer unit and the various accessories used for the
supply of power:
[1]
[A]
[B]
[4]
[C]
[2]
[3]
[D]
F-10-10
[1] DADF I/F cable
[2] Pickup heater cable
[3] Cassette pedestal I/F cable
[4] AC input
10-14
Chapter 10
[A] DADF-N1
[B] Reader unit
[C] Printer unit
[D] Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2
10.4.2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB

10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB
0006-5642
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The following are the ratings and the tolerances of the printer unit power supply PCB:
T-10-8
Output
13VA1
13VA2
All-night/
non-all
non-all
non-all night
night
night
Rated output
13.2V
+/-3%
Power supply
tolerance
13VB
24VU1
24VU2
non-all night
non-all night
13.2V
13.2V
24V
+/-3%
+/-3%
+5, -5% (0.1 to

8A)
+8%, -6% (from
0A to 0.1 A, from
8A to 10A)
10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB
0006-5643
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The following are the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the controller power supply PCB:
T-10-9
Output
3VA
5VA
All-night/non-all night
non-all
night
non-all
night
Rated output
3.4V
5.1V
Power supply tolerance
+/-4%
+/-3%
10-15
Chapter 10
10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Accessories Power Supply PCB
0006-5644
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The following are the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the accessories power supply PCB:
T-10-10
Output
24VA
All night/non-all night
non -all night
Rated output
24V
+/-5% (from 0.1A to 6.5A)

+8%,-6% (from 0A to 0.1A, from 6.5 to 12A)
10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the All-Night Power Supply PCB
0006-5646
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The following are the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the all-night power supply PCB:
T-10-11
Output
3VB
All-night/non-all night
all night
Rated output
3.4V
+/-3%
10.4.3 Protection Function

10.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms
0006-5396
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine's DC power supply PCB and accessories power supply PCB are equipped with an over-current
protective mechanism and an over-voltage protective mechanism that will automatically shut off the output voltage
to protect its electrical circuitry in the event of a short circuit or other fault in any of its loads causing over-current.
In the event of a fault in the 3 VB power (all-night power supply), all supplies of power will be shut off. A fault in
other power supplies will shut off power to all loads except for 3 VB.
If a malfunction occurs in 3VB (all-night power supply), it is necessary to turn off the main power switch of the
printer unit, remove the cause triggering the protection circuit, and replace the all-night power supply PCB. (The fuse
10-16
Chapter 10
of the all-night power supply PCB is likely to have blown.)

For other cases than above, the protection circuit can be reset by turning off the main power switch of the printer unit,
removing the cause triggering the protection circuit, leaving the printer unit alone for more than 3 min, and tuning
on the power again.
10.4.4 Backup Battery

10.4.4.1 Backup Battery
0008-0861
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The controller PCB and the DC controller PCB are equipped with a lithium battery (1 pc. each) to serve as a source
of power, backing up various data in the even of power failure.
T-10-12
Controller PCB
manganese dioxide lithium battery (3 V, 1000 mAh)
DC controller PCB
lithium battery (3 V, 600 mAh)
Life
DC controller PCB: 7 yr or less

Controller PCB: 8.8 yr or more
(with the power plug disconnected)
Replacement
The batteries cannot be replaced on their own in the

field.
Be sure to exercise care whenever you have to replace the battery. In certain cases, it may explode.
Do not use a battery which is not of a type specifically indicated (same name, or equivalent).
Dispose of any used battery according to the instructions of its manufacturer.
10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function

10.4.5.1 Overview
0006-5741
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1. Standby Mode
When the machine is in standby mode, all its power supplies are provided with power, and the machine is ready for
immediate operation.
2. Sleep Mode
2-1. Sleep 1
10-17
Chapter 10
When the machine is in sleep mode 1, its control panel remains off, and the polygon motor (M1) will not rotate even
when any of the control panel keys is pressed. In this mode, the machine is provided with power as in standby mode.
2-2. Sleep 3
When the machine is in sleep mode 3, only 3 VB is available. The machine will move to standby mode from sleep 3
in response to any of the following:
- print job
- press on the control panel power switch
- incoming fax
The following shows the sections of the machine that are provided with power in sleep 3:
Main controller PCB
SDRAM
CPU
LAN
controller
block
Image
processing
block
Scanner unit
Control panel
power switch
Fax
reception
detector
Hard disk drive
Printer unit
powered in sleep 3
not powered in sleep 3
F-10-11
3. AC Off Mode
When the machine is in AC off mode, its power swish is off. All its power supplies and its heater control mechanism
are off.
10.4.5.2 Machine as Supplied with Power

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
- Standby Mode, Sleep Mode, AC Off Mode
10-18
0006-6167
Chapter 10
T-10-13
Stand-
Sleep mode
by mode
Reader unit
AC off
mode
Remote 1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Remote 2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
13VA2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
24VU2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
3VA
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
5VA
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
13VA1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
24VU1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
24VU2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
3VA
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
all night
3VB
ON
ON
ON
OFF
non-all
5VA
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
12VA
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
all night
5VS
ON
ON
ON
OFF
non-all
13VA1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
24VU2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
non-all
night
non-all
night
DC controller
non-all
PCB
night
non-all
night
non-all
night
non-all
night
non-all
night
Main controller
non-all
PCB
night
night
non-all
night
Fax
night
non-all
night
Memo:
The power supply output state is determined according to combinations of remote 1 and 2. States, i.e., remote 1 and
2, are output from the main controller PCB.
10-19
Chapter 10
10.5 Parts
Procedure
Replacement

10.5.1 Main Drive Assembly

Cover
0007-6423
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-13

assembly [2].

[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-14
F-10-12

Drive Assembly
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
10-20
0007-6424
Chapter 10

Drive Assembly
0007-7367
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

2) Free the cable from the 6 cable clamps [2].
3) Remove the re-use band [3].
F-10-15
assembly [2].
F-10-16
10.5.2 Power Supply Unit

Cover
0007-6375
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


10-21
Chapter 10
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-10-18
[2]
10.5.2.3
Removing
the
Accessories Power Supply
F-10-17

Cover (lower)
PCB
0007-6376
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
0007-6378
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Disconnect the connector J640 [1].
1) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2 [1].

2) Remove the 4 screws [2] and the other screw [3];
then, detach the left cover (lower) [4].
If the rear cover has already been detached, the screw

[3] should also have been removed.
F-10-19
2) Remove the 6 connectors [1], and free the harness
from the cable clamp [2].
10-22
Chapter 10
F-10-20
F-10-23
3) Remove the 5 binding screws [1], and detach the
3) Free the harness [1] of the pedestal connector from

the lamp [2].
accessories power supply PCB [2].
F-10-24
F-10-21

Power Supply
4) Disconnect the 7 connectors [1], and free the

harness from the 4 clamps [2].
0007-6379
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the finisher
connector [2].
F-10-25
5) Free the harness [1] from the clamp [2].
F-10-22
2) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the pedestal
connector [2].
10-23
Chapter 10
F-10-28
F-10-26
6) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main
power supply [2].
F-10-29
F-10-27
10.5.3 Control Panel

10.5.3.1 Removing the Control
Panel
0007-6426
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1) Remove the rubber cap [1], and remove the screw
F-10-30
[2].
4) Slide the control panel [1] in the direction of the

arrow.
10-24
Chapter 10
F-10-31
F-10-34
F-10-32
F-10-35

control panel.

[2].
4) Slide the control panel in the direction of the arrow.
F-10-33

Panel
0009-2836
F-10-36
/ iR3530
control panel.
10-25
Chapter 10
F-10-37
F-10-40
10.5.4 Control Panel LCD Unit

arrow.

Panel
0007-7569
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

[2].
F-10-41
F-10-38
F-10-42
control panel.
F-10-39
10-26
Chapter 10
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [3] between the

control panel inverter PCB.
F-10-43

Panel Base Cover
0007-7571
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
F-10-45
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the control

panel base cover [2].
4) Remove the control panel inside frame [1]. (2 TP

screws [2], and 11 self-tapping screws [3])
F-10-44

Panel Inside Frame
F-10-46
0007-7573
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors between the control
panel PCB and the control panel key switch PCB;
then, free the harness from the 2 clamps [2].
control panel PCB and the control panel LCD.

Panel LCD
0007-7575
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the control panel
LCD [2].
Be sure to move the stopper in the direction of the

arrow to detach. These 2 stoppers are moved in
different directions.
10-27
Chapter 10
F-10-47

Panel
F-10-50
0009-2846
/ iR3530

control panel.
F-10-51
F-10-48

Panel Base Cover
0009-2847
/ iR3530
F-10-49
[2].
10-28
F-10-52
Chapter 10

Panel Frame
panel hook [2].

0009-2848
/ iR3530
1)Disconnect the flat cable [1] in the direction of the
arrow.
2)Move the connector stopper [2] in the direction of
the arrow, and disconnect the flat cable [3].
F-10-56
6)Remove the self-tapping screws [1] and the flathead screw [2]; then, detach the control panel frame
[3].
F-10-53
3)Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].
F-10-57
Routing the Harness When Mounting the Control

Panel Frame
F-10-54
1.Check to be sure that the inverter harness is routed

[1] as shown in the figure.
4)Free the harness from the 3 clamps [1].
F-10-55
F-10-58
5)Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the control
10-29
Chapter 10
2.After mounting the control panel frame, be sure to

route the inverter harness through the edge saddle [1].

[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-59
[1]
[1]

Panel LCD PCB
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
0009-2849
[1]
[1]
/ iR3530
1)Disconnect the connector [1] from the control panel
inverter PCB.
[2]
2)Remove the 3 self-tapping screws [2], and detach

the control panel LCD PCB [3].
F-10-61
10.5.5.2 Removing the DC

Controller PCB
0007-6398
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-60
10.5.5 DC Controller PCB

Cover
0007-7370
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

10-30
F-10-62
Chapter 10
How to Remove the Flexible Cable [1]
F-10-65
10.5.6 Control Panel Inverter PCB

F-10-63
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the DC controller
PCB.

Panel
0007-6428
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

[2].
F-10-64
F-10-66
Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller
PCB
Be sure to remove the boot ROM [1] from the exiting
DC controller PCB, and mount it to the new DC
controller PCB.
F-10-67
10-31
Chapter 10
F-10-71
F-10-68
arrow.

Panel Base Cover
0007-6430
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

F-10-69
F-10-72

Panel Inverter PCB
0007-6466
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1) Remove the control panel inverter PCB [1]. (3
F-10-70
control panel.
10-32
connectors [2], 4 screws [3])
Chapter 10
F-10-73
F-10-76

Panel

0009-2841
control panel.
/ iR3530
F-10-77
F-10-74

Panel Base Cover
0009-2842
/ iR3530
F-10-75
[2].
F-10-78
10-33
Chapter 10

Panel Frame
panel hook [2].

0009-2843
/ iR3530
arrow.
F-10-82
[3].
F-10-79
F-10-83

Panel Frame
F-10-80

F-10-81
10-34
F-10-84
Chapter 10

F-10-87
F-10-85

Panel Inverter PCB
0009-2844
/ iR3530
the control panel inverter PCB [3].
F-10-88
F-10-86
10.5.7 Control Panel Key Switch

F-10-89
PCB

Panel
arrow.
0007-6437
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

[2].
10-35
Chapter 10
F-10-90
F-10-93

Panel Frame
0007-6456
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

control panel PCB and the control panel key switch
PCB; then, free the harness front the 3 clamps [2].
F-10-91
control panel.

arrow. These 2 stoppers are moved in different
directions.
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [4] of the control panel
inverter PCB.
screw [2]; 11 self-tapping screws [3])
F-10-92

Panel Base Cover

Panel Key Switch PCB
0007-6438
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
0007-6451
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570


arrow. These 2 stoppers must be moved in different
10-36
Chapter 10
directions.
control panel inverter PCB.
F-10-96

Panel
F-10-94
0009-2851
/ iR3530
screw [2]; 11 self-tapping screws [3])
F-10-97
F-10-95
4) Remove the control panel key switch PCB [1]. (5

self-tapping screws [2])
F-10-98
[2].
10-37
Chapter 10

Panel Frame
0009-2853
/ iR3530
arrow.
F-10-99
control panel.
F-10-102
F-10-100

Panel Base Cover
0009-2852
/ iR3530
F-10-103

F-10-101
F-10-104
10-38
Chapter 10
panel hook [2].

F-10-108
F-10-105
[3].

Panel Key Switch PCB
0009-2854
/ iR3530
the control panel key switch PCB [2].
F-10-106
F-10-109

Panel Frame
10.5.8 Control Panel CPU PCB

Panel
0007-7565
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

[2].
F-10-107
10-39
Chapter 10
F-10-113
F-10-110
F-10-114
F-10-111

control panel.
F-10-115
F-10-112
arrow.

Panel Base Cover
0007-7566
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

10-40
Chapter 10
F-10-116
10.5.8.3
Removing
the
Controller Panel CPU PCB
F-10-118
0007-7567
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] of the cable used

between control panel PCB and the control panel
key switch PCB.
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2] used between the
arrow. Each of the 2 stoppers has its own direction
F-10-119
of movement.
3) Disconnect the control panel cable [4].
4) Remove the 4 TP screws [5], and detach the control
panel PCB [7].

[2].
F-10-120
F-10-117

Panel

0009-2837
control panel.
/ iR3530
10-41
Chapter 10
F-10-121
F-10-123

Panel Base Cover
0009-2838
/ iR3530
F-10-124
panel CPU PCB [2].
F-10-122

Panel CPU PCB
0009-2839
/ iR3530
F-10-125
arrow.
the arrow to detach the flat cable [3].
10.5.9 All Night Power Supply PCB

Cover
0007-6385
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
10-42
Chapter 10
2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the all-night

power supply PCB [2].

[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-128
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
10.5.10 Controller Power Supply

PCB
[1]
[1]

Cover
[1]
0007-6380
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2]

F-10-126
10.5.9.2 Removing the AllNight Power Supply PCB

0007-6386
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-127
10-43
Chapter 10
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-10-130
[2]

Cover (Rear)
F-10-129

Cover (lower)
0007-6382
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-6381
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the left cover

(rear) [2].


F-10-131
10.5.10.4
Removing
the
PCB
0007-6383
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

10-44
Chapter 10
F-10-132
F-10-135

2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the controller
power supply PCB [2].
F-10-133
F-10-136
10.5.11 Option Power Supply PCB

Cover
0007-6370
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-134
10.5.10.5
Removing
the
Controller Power Supply
PCB

0007-6384
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
10-45
Chapter 10
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-10-138
[2]

Cover (Rear)
F-10-137

Cover (lower)
0007-6372
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-6371
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the left cover

(rear) [2].


F-10-139
10.5.11.4
Removing
the
PCB
0007-6373
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

10-46
Chapter 10
F-10-140
F-10-143

F-10-141
F-10-144

Toner Case
0007-8028
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-142
10.5.12 High-Voltage PCB

Cover Unit
0007-8021
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
10-47
Chapter 10
F-10-147
F-10-145
receptacle
F-10-148

F-10-146


Cartridge

0007-8400
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

10-48

side down.
Chapter 10
[1]
F-10-152
F-10-149

Unit
0007-8401
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-153
F-10-150
F-10-154
F-10-151
10-49
Chapter 10
F-10-157
F-10-155
10.5.12.5
Removing
Developing Assembly
the
0007-8402
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-158
F-10-156

F-10-159
10-50
Chapter 10

Tray
0007-8403
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2].
F-10-162
F-10-160
Reference:

F-10-163

Cartridge Cover
0007-8404
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

bottle cover [2].
F-10-161
10-51
Chapter 10
F-10-167
F-10-164

Cover
0007-8405
0007-8407
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[2].
[2]
[1]
F-10-165
[1]
[1]
F-10-168

Unit
0007-8409
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-166
10-52
connectors [2].
Chapter 10
F-10-171
F-10-169
front.
connector [2].
F-10-172

F-10-170

10.5.12.11
Removing
Hopper Assembly
the
0007-8411
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

right color [2].
10-53
Chapter 10
F-10-173
F-10-176


image faults.
F-10-174
F-10-177

Cover (rear)
0007-8412
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-175
assembly [2].
10-54
(rear) [4].
Chapter 10
[3]
[3]
F-10-180
[3]
[4]
[2]

[1]
F-10-178

Door
0007-8413
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-181
tightening).
F-10-179
[2].
F-10-182
right door.
10-55
Chapter 10
F-10-183
F-10-185


[2].
F-10-186
F-10-184
F-10-187


Door

tightening).
0007-8416
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
10-56
Chapter 10
F-10-188
right door.
F-10-190

F-10-189

Door
0007-8417
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

F-10-191
connector [2].
10-57
Chapter 10

[2].
F-10-192
F-10-194


F-10-195
F-10-193

F-10-196
10.5.12.16
Removing
Fixing Unit
the
0007-8419
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
10-58
Chapter 10
F-10-197

F-10-199
10.5.12.17 Removing the Gear
0007-8420
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the gear cover
[2].
F-10-200
F-10-198
2) Remove the gear [1].

F-10-201
10-59
Chapter 10
10.5.12.18
Removing
High-Voltage PCB
the
0007-8422
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing
member [2].
F-10-205
10.5.13 Exhaust Fan

10.5.13.1 Removing the Heat
Discharge Fan
F-10-202
2) Slide the guide [1] as shown to detach.
0007-6433
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[B]
[C]
[A]
F-10-203
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the latch
[2] and 3 screws [3]; then, detach the high-voltage
PCB [4].
F-10-206
[2].
F-10-204
F-10-207
10-60
Chapter 10
3) Remove the feed guide [1].
F-10-208
F-10-211
4) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the feed guide
2) Remove the 2 self-tapping screws [2], and detach

the upper right cover [1].
(lower) [2].
F-10-212
F-10-209
3) Remove the self-tapping screw [1], and detach the
5) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the heat
feed guide [2].
discharge fan [2].
F-10-213
F-10-210
4) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the feed guide
10.5.13.2 Removing the Heat

Discharge Fan
(lower) [2].
0007-7531
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

10-61
Chapter 10
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-214
[1]
5) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the heat

discharge fan [2].
[2]
F-10-216

Drive Assembly
0007-6418
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-215

10.5.14
Motor
of
Main
Drive
Assembly
Cover
0007-7368
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-217


assembly [2].
10-62
Chapter 10
F-10-219
Points to Note During the Work

Be sure that the 2 timing belts [2] are fitted to the shaft
[1] of the main drive motor as shown.
F-10-218

Drive Motor
F-10-220
0007-6421
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Adjusting the Tension of the Main Drive Motor
motor [2].
1) Temporarily fix the main drive motor in place to the
main motor base.
2) So that the motor gear [1] and the teeth [2] of the
pulley mesh correctly, move the motor in the
10-63
Chapter 10
F-10-221
3) Tighten the screws [1] of the main drive motor in
F-10-224
the order indicated.
10.5.15 Fixing Driver Motor

Cover
0007-6403
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-222


Drive Motor
0007-7369
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

F-10-223
2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main dive
motor [2].
10-64
Chapter 10
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-227
[1]
[1]
[1]
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the DC controller

PCB.
[2]
F-10-225
10.5.15.2 Removing the DC

Controller PCB
0007-6404
F-10-228
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller

PCB
Be sure to remove the boot ROM [1] from the exiting
DC controller PCB, and mount it to the new DC
controller PCB.
F-10-226
How to Remove the Flexible Cable [1]
F-10-229
10-65
Chapter 10

Drive Motor
0007-6405
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[3]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-10-232
F-10-230
2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the fixing
drive motor [2].

Door
0007-6444
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-231
F-10-233
10.5.16 Right Door

Cover (rear)

[2].
0007-7020
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

(rear) [4].
10-66
Chapter 10
F-10-234
F-10-237
F-10-235
tightening).
F-10-238
F-10-236
right door.

Door
0007-7050
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530
10-67
Chapter 10
F-10-239
connector [2].
F-10-241

10.5.17 Circuit Braker
F-10-240

Cover
0007-6388
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530


10-68
Chapter 10
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-244
[2]
F-10-242
10.5.17.2 Removing the Circuit

Breaker
Points to Note When Mounting

When mounting the circuit breaker, be sure that the
AC harness is identified correctly by color as shown.
0007-6389
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-10-243
F-10-245
2) Remove the 4 fastons [1], and detach the circuit
breaker [2].
10-69
Chapter 11MEAP
Contents
Contents
11.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2 MEAP Counter ............................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform .............................................................................................................. 11-4
Chapter 11
11.1 Overview
0008-1396
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

The term MEAP stands for Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform, and is used to generically refer to a
platform for software built into MFPs and peripheral equipment. The architecture is based on Java (J2ME, i.e., Java
2 Platform Micro Edition), and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications.
A MEAP application behaves independently from its host printer's system software, and may be installed or
uninstalled using SMS (Service Management Service), which is an interface that runs as part of the browser on a PC.
As long as the device supports MEAP, most MEAP applications may be added to the device in the field.
11-1
11.2 MEAP Counter
0008-1397
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

In addition to the commonly found print counters, a device that supports MEAP is equipped with a counter
mechanism used to keep track of which functions are used as well as how often they are used for individual MEAP
applications that are installed. The MEAP counter readings may be checked by making the following selections on
the device control panel: Counter Check Key>MEAP Counter Check. A device may possess the following MEAP
counters, and which counter to use and, therefore, to display all depend on the application in question.
A counter reading may be of a type that is forced to increase as a job is expected or of a type that is increased when
the application sends instructions; or, it may be of a type that increases independently of the host device, thus
increasing solely in response to the application being run; specifics are as follows:
T-11-1
Type
Count item
forced
total
total (black-and-white 1)
total (black-and-while large)
scan (total 1)
black-and-white scan (total 1)
in response to instructions from application
black-and-white scan 1
application-independent
free 1
free 2
free 3
free 4
free 5
free 6
free 7
free 8
free 9
free 10
free 11
Type
Count item
free 12
MEMO:
forced: the device forces the counter to increase its reading in response to execution of a job.
in response to instructions from application: the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from
the application.
application independent: the counter operates according to the specifications of the application.
11.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform
0008-1398
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

In addition to the installation of the system software, language file, and RUI, a printer equipped with MEAP functions
calls for the installation of MEAP content, which offers functions (system services) needed to run MEAP
applications and class libraries needed by the MEAP applications to control the device.
It is important that the version of the system software be fully compatible with the version of the MEAP content,
calling for special care. (In the case of a mismatch, the device will not be able to run the MEAP application.) For
version information, refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the system software.
The following shows the components of a MEAP application:
[5]
[7] [8]
[1]
[6]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F-11-1
[1] User Interface Control Bock
installed as part of the system software
[2] Device Control Block
[3] Operating System
[4] Java VM
[5] MEAP System Services (includes SDL/SSO)
installed as part of MEAP content
[6] Device Control Class Library
installed as part of MEAP content
[7] internally developed application
[8] externally developed application
Chapter 12Maintenance
and Inspection
Contents
Contents
12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts............................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.2 Reader Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.3 Printer Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2 Durables and Consumables ............................................................................................................................ 12-2
12.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2.2 Reader Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2.3 Printer Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ............................................................................................................ 12-5
12.3.1 Scheduled Servicing for the Reader Unit ................................................................................................ 12-5
12.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit ................................................................................................ 12-5
12.3.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures ................................................................................................... 12-8
12.3.4 Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing ..................................................................................... 12-10
12.4 Cleaning........................................................................................................................................................ 12-12
12.4.1 Cleaning the Transfer/Feed Guide ........................................................................................................ 12-12
12.4.2 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-........................................................... 12-12
12.4.3 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator.............................................................................................. 12-21
12.4.4 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator.............................................................................................. 12-29
Chapter 12
12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts

12.1.1 Overview
0007-4595
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine has parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific level of functional performance.
(The loss of the function of any of these parts will significantly affect the machine performance, regardless of the
presence/absence of external changes or damage.)
If possible, schedule the replacement so that it coincides with a scheduled service visit.
The timing of replacement may vary depending on the site environment or user habit.
12.1.2 Reader Unit
0007-4596
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The reader unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
12.1.3 Printer Unit
0007-9108
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The printer unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
12-1
Chapter 12
12.2 Durables and Consumables

12.2.1 Overview
0007-4598
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine has parts that may require replacement once or more during the period of product warranty because of
wear or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to their indicated estimated lives.
- Checking the Timing of Replacement
Use the following service mode item to check the timing of replacement:
- Copier
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC
- Accessory
12.2.2 Reader Unit
0007-4599
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The reader unit does not have parts that are classified as durables.
12.2.3 Printer Unit
0007-4600
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
T-12-1
As of Dec. 2004
Ref.
Parts name
Parts No.
Q't
Life
y
[1]
Transfer roller
FC6-2911-000
150,000
prints
[2]
Static eliminator
FL2-0247-000
holder
[3]
Developing cylinder
150,000
prints
FL2-0290-000
480,000
prints
12-2
Remarks
As of Dec. 2004
Ref.
Parts name
Parts No.
Q't
Life
Remarks
150,000
iR2270/2870/
prints
2230/2830
y
[4]
Fixing film unit
FM2-0293-
000
100V
Fixing film unit
FM2-0358-
000
150,000
iR2270/2870/
prints
2230/2830
115V
Fixing film unit
FM2-0359-
000
150,000
iR2270/2870/
prints
2230/2830
230V
Fixing film unit
FM2-1792-
000
Fixing film unit
FM2-1793-
000
Fixing film unit
FM2-1794-
000
[5]
Pressure roller
Pressure roller
[6]
Waste toner box
FC6-2942-000
FC5-7207-000
FM2-0303-
000
Waste toner box
FM2-0303-
000
[7]
Fixing heat discharge
FB5-4931-000
roller
Fixing heat discharge
FB5-4931-000
roller
[8]
Pickup roller
FB6-3405-000
240,000
iR3570/4570/
prints
3530 100V
240,000
iR3570/4570/
prints
3530 115V
240,000
iR3570/4570/
prints
3530 230V
150,000
iR2270/2870/
prints
2230/2830
240,000
iR3570/4570/
prints
3530
75,000
iR2270/2870/
prints
2230/2830
85,000
iR3570/4570/
prints
3530
150,000
iR2270/2870/
prints
2230/2830
240,000
iR3570/4570/
prints
3530
120,000
prints
[9]
Feed/separation
FC5-6934-000
roller
[10]
Manual feed
prints
FC5-0488-000
separation pad
[11]
Manual feed pickup

roller
120,000
240,000
prints
FB1-8581-000
240,000
prints
As of Dec. 2004
Ref.
Parts name
Parts No.
Q't
Life
Remarks
150,000
iR2270/2870/
prints
2230/2830
240,000
iR3570/4570/
prints
3530
300,000
iR2270/2870/
prints
2230/2830
y
[12]
Heat discharge fan
FC5-1546-000
filter
Heat discharge fan
FC5-1546-000
filter
[13]
Pressure roller
RS5-1446-000
bushing
The value is the mean value collected from the results of evaluation. The
parts number may change because of changes in design.
[13] [5]
[7]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[12]
[4]
[10]
[2]
[1]
[9]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[9]
[6]
F-12-1
[8]
[9]
Chapter 12
12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure

12.3.1 Scheduled Servicing for the Reader Unit
0007-5055
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The reader unit does not have items that require scheduled servicing.
Be sure to clean the copyboard glass and the ADF reading glass during every service visit.
12.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit
0007-5176
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated.
T-12-2
Tran
sfer
asse
mbly
Location
Transfer/feed guide assembly
Task
clean:(dry wiping)
Interval
120,000 prints
Remarks
[1]Feed guide
[2]Transfer guide
12-5
Deve
lopin
g
asse
mbly
Location
Photosensitive drum butting

spacer/feed guide
Task
clean:(dry wiping)
Interval
120,000 prints
Remarks
[1]Photosensitive drum butting spacer

[2]Feed guide
Fixin
g
asse
mbly
Location
Fixing inlet guide
Task
clean:(dry wiping/alcohol)
Interval
120,000 prints
Remarks
[1]Fixing inlet guide

Location
Film bias static eliminator
Task
clean
Interval
150,000 prints (iR2270/2870)

240,000 prints (iR3570/4570)
Remarks
[1]Film bias static eliminator
Chapter 12
Laser
scan
ner
asse
mbly
Location
Dust-blocking glass
Task
clean:(dry wiping or alcohol)
Interval
120,000 prints
Remarks
[1]Dust-blocking glass
The foregoing values are estimates only, and are subject to change depending on future data.
12.3.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures
0007-5173
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
- As a rule, perform scheduled servicing every 120,000 prints.

- Before setting out on a scheduled visit, check with the Service Book, and take parts for which replacement is
expected.
- If the power plug is exposed to dust, humidity, or oily smoke, the resulting buildup can prove to be a fire hazard.
(The buildup of dust, for instance, can absorb moisture and suffer insulating failure.) Be sure to disconnect the power
plug on a periodical basis, and remove any buildup of dust and dirt with a dry cloth.
<Work Procedure>
1) Report to the person in change, and have an understanding of the situation.
2) Record the counter reading, and check the faulty prints.
3) Check the following items, and adjust or clean the parts as needed.
12-8
Chapter 12
T-12-3
Item
Test copy
image density
background (for soiling)
characters (for clarity)
margin
fixing
misregistration, soiled back
margin (single-sided)
leading edge:2.51.5mm
left:2.51.5mm
margin (double-sided)
leading edge:2.52.0mm
left edge:2.52.0mm
Laser exposure
dust-blocking glass (cleaning)
system
Feeding system
toner/feed guide
fixing inlet guide
Developing
developing butting spacer
system
4) Check the waste toner collection case.

If the case is half full or more, empty it in an appropriate bag for collection. Or, replace the waste toner collection
case.
- When disposing of the waste toner, be sure to follow all applicable regulations of the local government.
- Do not dispose of waste toner in fire. (Doing so can cause an explosion.)
5) Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass.
6) Make test copies.
7) Make sample copies.
8) Check the operation of the leakage breaker.
While the machine is supplied with power (power switch ON), press the test switch of the leakage breaker to see if
the breaker operates normally (i.e., the lever will shift to OFF to cut off the power).
If the leakage breaker fails to operate normally, replace the breaker, and make a check once again.
<Resetting>
When you have checked the operation of the leakage breaker, turn off the power switch, shift the lever to ON, and
turn on the power switch.
12-9
Chapter 12
9) Put the sample copies in order, and clean up the area around the machine.
10) Record the latest counter readings. At this time, be sure to also record the settings of the following: 'FX-UP-RL'
and 'DV-UNIT-K'.
11) Fill out the form in the Service Book, and report to the person in charge. be sure also to indicate the check on the
leakage breaker in the history of checks.
12.3.4 Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing
0007-5177
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
- If you used solvent, be sure that it has dried before putting the part back into the machine.
- Unless otherwise indicated, do not use a cloth moistened with water.
- Be sure to provide scheduled servicing at specific intervals.
[1]
[5]
[8]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[2]
[7]
F-12-2
[1]Copyboard glass, reading glass (clean, using water or mild detergent)
12-10
[2]Transfer/feed guide (clean; dry wiping)

[3]Fixing inlet guide (clean; dry wiping; alcohol)
[4]Photosensitive drum butting spacer (clean; dry wiping)
[5]Dust-blocking glass (clean; dry wiping or with alcohol)
[6]Waste toner collection case (check)
[7]Leakage breaker (check)
[8]Film bias static eliminator (clean)
Chapter 12
12.4 Cleaning
12.4.1 Cleaning the Transfer/Feed Guide
0007-5129
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

F-12-3
2) Clean (dry wipe) the feed guide [1] and the transfer guide [2].
F-12-4
12.4.2 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, DustBlocking Glass, and Fixing Inlet Guide
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
A. Preparatory Work
1) Open the upper front cover [1].
12-12
0007-5128
Chapter 12
F-12-5
2) Remove the face rubber [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, slide the front cover unit [3] to the left to detach.
F-12-6
3) Remove the waste toner box [1].
F-12-7
12-13
Chapter 12
F-12-8
5) Remove the locking screw [1] of the pressure lever.
F-12-9
6) Shift the locking lever [1] of the developing assembly to the left to release the developing assembly.
F-12-10
7) Remove the screw (M5) [1].
12-14
Chapter 12
F-12-11
F-12-12
- Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum.

- Do not expose the surface of the photosensitive drum to light more than necessary.
- Do not touch the spur of the drum unit.
9) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the developing assembly [2].
12-15
Chapter 12
F-12-13
B. Cleaning the Developing Spacer and the Feed Guide
1) Clean the developing assembly spacer [1] and the feed guide [2]. (Dry wipe them using lint-free paper.)
F-12-14
C. Cleaning the Dust-Blocking Glass
1) Clean the dust-blocking glass [1]. (Dry wipe it, or use alcohol.)
F-12-15
D. Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide
12-16
Chapter 12
1) Remove the screw (w/ washer) [1], and detach the fixing inlet guide (upper) [2].
F-12-16
2) Clean the fixing inlet guide (upper) [1] with alcohol. Be sure to completely remove all toner sticking to the fixing
inlet guide (upper).
[1]
F-12-17
3) Clean the fixing inlet guide (lower) [1] using lint-free paper.
F-12-18
4) Mount the fixing inlet guide (upper) using a screw (w/ washer).
E. After the Work
1) Put the drum unit [1] in the machine.
12-17
Chapter 12
F-12-19
2) Secure the drum unit in place using a screw (M5) [1].
F-12-20
3) Put the developing unit in the machine.
3-1) Place segment A of the developing assembly on segment B of the developing assembly rail.
3-2) By sliding the base [2] of the developing assembly [1] along the developing assembly rail [3], fit the assembly
in place inside the machine.
F-12-21
4) Connect the connector [1], and push the developing assembly [2] all the way in.
12-18
Chapter 12
F-12-22
5) Shift back the locking lever [1] of the developing assembly to the right to lock the assembly in place.
F-12-23
6) Fit and tighten the screw [1] of the locking lever.
F-12-24
8) Fit the waste toner box [1].
12-19
Chapter 12
F-12-25
9) Mount the front cover unit [3] using 2 screws [2], and fit the face rubber [1].
At this time, be sure to slide it to the right so that the claw of the front cover matches the machine.
F-12-26
10) Close the upper front cover [1].
F-12-27
12-20
Chapter 12
12.4.3 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator
0007-8642
iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

A. Removing the Right Door
1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if w/ Cassette Feeding Unit)
[3]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-12-28
F-12-29
5) Remove the self-tapping screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].
12-21
Chapter 12
F-12-30
6) Remove the joint shaft [1], and detach the extension delivery unit [2] from the right door.
F-12-31
7) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then, remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening) [3].
F-12-32
8) Free and detach the right door [1] from the hinge assembly [2].
F-12-33
12-22
Chapter 12
B. Removing the Fixing Assembly

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2].
F-12-34
F-12-35
F-12-36
4) Remove the fixing unit [1] toward the front.
12-23
Chapter 12
F-12-37
C. Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding plate [2].
F-12-38
2) Clean the film bias static eliminator [1] found behind the grounding plate (to remove the cake of toner, if any, that
may have collected on the static eliminator).
[1]
F-12-39
3) Mount the grounding plate [2] with 2 screws.
12-24
Chapter 12
F-12-40
D. Mounting the Fixing Assembly
1) Mount the fixing unit [1] to the machine frame.
F-12-41
2) Secure the fixing assembly in place using 4 screws [1].
F-12-42
3) Connect the 3 connectors [1].
12-25
Chapter 12
F-12-43
4) Mount the harness cover [2] using a screw [1].
F-12-44
E. Mounting the Right Door
1) Match the hole [1] of the right door bottom and the pin [2].
F-12-45
2) Match the mounting plate [1] of the right door top against the hook [2], and mount the right door.
3) Secure the mounting plate [1] using 3 screws [3].
4) Connect the connector [4], and fit the reuse band [5] in place.
12-26
Chapter 12
F-12-46
5) Open the expansion delivery kit [1].
6) Lift the expansion delivery kit [1] slightly to match it against the right door [2].
F-12-47
When matching the position, take care so that the expansion delivery kit will not open wider than 80 deg.
7) Push in the pin [1] through the hole [2] until it stops; then, connect the expansion delivery kit [3] to the right door
[4].
12-27
Chapter 12
F-12-48
F-12-49
Check to be sure that the joint pin is fully fitted as shown in the figure.
8) Using the self-tapping screw [1] you removed in step A-5), fix the joint plate [2] in place.
Check to be sure that the protrusion [3] of the joint plate is fully in the mounting hole.
F-12-50
10) Mount the right cover (rear) using 5 screws.
12-28
Chapter 12
Take care not to trap the harness [1] by the cut-off [2] of the right cover (rear).
F-12-51
12.4.4 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator
0008-2928
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3530

A. Removing the Right Door
1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit-Y2)
[3]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-12-52
12-29
Chapter 12
F-12-53
5) Remove the reuse band [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
6) Remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening) [3]; then, detach the right door.
F-12-54
B. Removing the Fixing Assembly
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2].
F-12-55
12-30
Chapter 12
F-12-56
F-12-57
4) Slide out the fixing unit [1] toward the front.
F-12-58
C. Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding plate [2].
12-31
Chapter 12
F-12-59
2) Clean the film bias static eliminator [1] found on the back of the grounding plate. (Be sure to remove the cake of
toner that may have collected on the static eliminator.)
[1]
F-12-60
3) Fix the grounding plate [2] in place using 2 screws [1].
F-12-61
D. Mounting the Fixing Assembly
1) Fit the fixing unit [1] to the machine frame.
12-32
Chapter 12
F-12-62
2) Secure the fixing assembly in place using 4 screws [1].
F-12-63
3) Connect the 3 connectors [1].
F-12-64
4) Mount the harness cover [2] using a screw [1].
12-33
Chapter 12
F-12-65
E. Mounting the Right Door
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the protrusion.
2) Engage the hinge [2] found at the top of the right door on the hook on the machine side plate.
F-12-66
3) Fix the mounting base [1] in place using 2 screws [3].
4) Connect the connector [4], and fit the reuse band [5] in place.
12-34
Chapter 12
F-12-67
5) Mount the right cover (rear) using 5 screws.
Take care not to trap the harness [1] by the cut-off [2] of the right cover (re).
F-12-68
12-35
Chapter 13Standards and

Adjustments
Contents
Contents
13.1 Image Adjustments......................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.1 Standards for Image Position .................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.2 Adjusting the Image Position .................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.1.3 Cassette.................................................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1.4 Manual Feed Tray ................................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.1.5 Side Paper Deck ...................................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.2 Scanning System .......................................................................................................................................... 13-11
13.2.1 After Replacement of the CIS ............................................................................................................... 13-11
13.2.2 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the ........................................................... 13-11
13.3 Laser Exposure System ................................................................................................................................ 13-14
13.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit................................................................................................ 13-14
13.4 Image Formation System.............................................................................................................................. 13-15
13.4.1 After Replacing the Developing Unit.................................................................................................... 13-15
13.4.2 After Replacing the Drum Unit (APVC correction) ............................................................................. 13-15
13.5 Electrical Components ................................................................................................................................. 13-16
13.5.1 After Replacing the HDD...................................................................................................................... 13-16
13.5.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................... 13-16
13.5.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB ............................................................................................ 13-17
13.5.4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ......................................................................................... 13-18
13.6 Pickup/Feeding System ................................................................................................................................ 13-21
13.6.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the ................................................................ 13-21
13.6.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex ................................................... 13-25
13.6.3 Adjusting the Manual Feed Pickup Horizontal Registration................................................................. 13-25
13.6.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value ............................................................................................. 13-26
Chapter 13
13.1 Image Adjustments
2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 1.5mm
13.1.1 Standards for Image

Position
0
2
4
5
6
0007-4812
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

A print made at a magnification of 100% must meet
the following standards for image margin/non-image
width:
10
F-13-4
13.1.2 Adjusting the Image

Position
0007-4813
- Margin Along the Leading Edge
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

2.5 1.5mm
2.5 2.0mm
Using the source of paper indicated, make 10 prints

each to see if the image margin and the non-image
margin are as indicated:
[1] Cassettes
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
F-13-1
[2] Manual feed tray

[3] Side paper deck
- Left/Right Image Margin

2.5 1.5mm
2.5 2.0mm
If not as indicated, adjust the image position as

follows:
1.Adjusting the Leading Edge Image Margin (1st
side)
Adjust the registration in service mode:
4
5
6
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST
8
10
Decrease the REGIST setting.

(a decrease of '10' will
increase the margin by 1 mm)
1st side of copy : 2.5 1.5mm
F-13-2
Paper
leading edge
- Leading Edge Non-Image Width

2.5 1.5mm
2.5 1.5mm
Increase the REGIST setting.

(an increase of '10' will
increase the margin by 1 mm)
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
F-13-5
2. Adjusting the Left/Right Image (1st side)
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Mechanical Horizontal Registration Adjustment
F-13-3
3. Adjusting the Leading Edge Image Margin (2nd
- Left/Right Non-Image Width
side)
Adjust the registration in service mode:
13-1
Chapter 13
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>RG-REFE.
Paper left edge
2nd side of
double-sided copy :
2.5 2.0mm
Decrease the RG-REFE setting.

(a decrease of '10' will increase
the margin by 1 mm)
Decrease the
ADJ-RE-L setting
increase the margin
by 0.1 mm)
Increase the
ADJ-RE-L setting.
decrease the margin
by 0.1 mm)
Paper leading
edge
Increase the RGF-REFE setting.
(an increase of '10' will decrease
the margin by 1 mm)
2nd side of large-size

double-sided copy
: 2.5 2.0mm
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 1618 20
F-13-6
2
4
5
6
4. Adding the Left/Right Image Margin (2nd side)

Adjust the horizontal registration in service mode.
8
10
- Small Size
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE
Image left edge
Decrease the
AD-J-REFE setting.
decrease the non-image
width by 1 mm)
Increase the
ADFJ-REFE value.
increase the non-image
width by 1 mm)
F-13-8
5. Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width
Use service mode to make adjustments:
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X
2nd side of
small-size
double-sided
copy : 2.5 2.0mm
Decrease the ADJ-X setting.

(a decrease of '10' will decrease
the non-image width by 1 mm)
1st side : 2.5 1.5mm
(2nd side of double-sided copy
: 2.5 1.5mm)
Image leading
edge
2
4
5
6
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 1618 20
Increase the ADJ-X setting.
width by 1 mm)
8
10
F-13-7
- Large Size (longer than A4/LTR in feed direction)
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-RE-L
13-2
F-13-9
6. Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width
Use service mode to make adjustments:
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y
Chapter 13
3) Check the index [1].

Image edge
Decrease the value of ADJ-Y.
decrease the non-image
width by 1 mm)
(the same applies to a 2-cassette pedestal.)
Increase the ADJ-Y setting.

width by 1 mm)
2.5 1.5mm
(2nd side of
double-sided copy
: 2.5 1.5mm)
0
2
4
5
6
8
F-13-12
10
F-13-10
A-1.Adjusting the Cassette 1 (left/right image
13.1.3 Cassette
0007-4907
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
margin; 1st side)

front) [1].
A. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (1st side)

1) Open the pedestal lower right cover [1] and lower
right color [2]; then, remove the 2 screws [3], and
detach the cover (lower front) [4].
F-13-13
5) Loosen the fixing screw [2] on the horizontal
[2]
registration adjusting plate [1] of the cassette.

[1]
move the horizontal registration adjusting plate

back and forth. (Moving the plate toward the rear of
the machine will increase the left/right image
[4]
[3]
margin along the image front.)
F-13-11
2) Take out the cassette 1 or 2.
(in the case of a 2-cassette pedestal, the cassette 3 or
4)
13-3
Chapter 13
7)Put the cassette 2 back in place.

8)Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of
paper, and check to make sure that the margin is as
indicated.
9)Mount the right front cover of the machine.
B. Adjusting the Left/Right Image Margin (2nd
side)
F-13-14
7) Loosen the fixing screw.
8) Put the cassette 1 back in place.
9) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of
paper, and check to make sure that the marking is as
indicated.
10)Fit the grip (right front) in place.
B-1. 2nd Side of Small-Size Paper (left/right image

margin)
1)If the margin is not as indicated, change the
setting of the 2nd side left/right image margin of the
cassette 1:
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
An increase of '1' will decrease the left/right
image margin along the front side by 0.1 mm.
11)Mount the right front cover of the machine.
Paper left edge

Decrease the
ADJ-REFEsetting.
(a decrease of
'1' willdecrease
the margin by 0.1 mm)
Increase the ADJ-EFE setting.

increase the margin by
0.1 mm)
A-2.Adjusting the Cassette 2 (left/right image

margin; 1st side)
2nd side of small-size

double-sided copy
: 2.5 2.0mm
4)Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the horizontal

5)While referring to the index you checked in step
3), move the horizontal registration adjusting plate
4
5
6
back and forth. (Moving the plate toward the rear of

the machine will increase the left/right image
margin along the image front.)
10
F-13-16
B-2. 2nd Side of Large-Size Paper (left/right image

margin)
1)Enter the same ADJ-REFE:
2)Make a double-sided copy using large-size paper,
and check to make sure that the marking is as
F-13-15
6)Tighten the fixing screw.
13-4
indicated.
3)If not as indicated, change the adjustment value
for the 2nd side right/left image margin for large-size
Chapter 13
paper:
An increase of '1' will decrease the left/right
image margin on the front side by 0.1 mm.
Paper left edge
Decrease the
ADJ-REF-L setting.
(a decrease of '1'
will increase the
margin by 0.1 mm)
Increase the
ADJ-REF-L setting.
(an increase of '1'
will decrease the
margin by 0.1 mm)
2nd side of large-size

double-sided copy
: 2.5 2.0mm
F-13-18
0
5) So that the margin is as indicated, move the top
cover of the manual feed tray back and forth.
4
5
6
Moving the top cover of the manual feed tray toward

the rear of the machine will decrease the left/right
image margin along the front side.
10
6) Tighten fixing screw on the top cover of the manual
F-13-17
feed tray.
4)Record the new setting on the service label:
8) Make a copy using the manual feed tray as the
- ADJ-REFE
source of paper, and check to make sure that the
- ADJ-RE-L
margin is as indicated.
5)Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.
13.1.4 Manual Feed Tray
13.1.5 Side Paper Deck

0007-4910
0007-4911
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Check to make sure that the 4 adjusters [1] of the
A. Adjusting the Left/Right Image Margin (1st
pedestal of the host machine are in contact with the
side; mechanical)
floor.

2) Make a copy using the manual feeder as the source
[1]
of paper, and check to be sure that the left/right image

margin is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
- If not as indicated, make the following adjustments:
3) Remove the paper from the manual feed tray.
4) Loosen the fixing screw [1] on the upper over of the
manual feed d tray.
[1]
F-13-19
13-5
Chapter 13
2) Connect the power plug of the host machine, and

turned on the power switch.
3) When the host machine has completed its wait
period, open the machine using the paper deck as the
source of paper to make sure that the operation is
normal.
A. Adjusting the Let/Right Image Margin (1s side;
mechanical adjustment)
1) Make a copy using the paper deck as the source of
paper, and check to make sure that the left/right image
margin in the image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
- If not as indicated, go through the following:
2) Slide out the compartment.
3) Turn the 2 screws [2] to adjust the mounting
position of the latch plate [1] of the deck open
solenoid (SL2D) found at the left rear.
At this time, use the index [3] of the latch plate as a
reference.
[1]
F-13-20
13-6
[3]
[2]
Chapter 13
13.2 Scanning System
13.2.2 After Replacing the

Reader Controller PCB or
13.2.1 After Replacement

of the CIS
Initializing the RAM

0007-9838
0007-9839
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

- Before replacing the reader controller PCB, be
Be sure to enter the value indicated on the CIS label
attached to the contact image sensor (CIS) using the
following service mode item:
sure to print out the latest P-PRINT page.

<if you are executing RAM initialization for the
reader controller without replacing the PCB>
- Using the SST, upload the backup data of the reader
controller, and download it after initializing the RAM
(main scanning direction MTR correction value)
so that you need not perform the following:

1. Reader Unit-Related Adjustments
software (R-CON).
COPIER>FUNCTION>LEARN>R-CON.
Then,
press the OK key to initialize the RAM; thereafter,

3) Enter the following values in service mode:
a. values indicated on the service label (found
XX
behind the left cover of the reader unit)

a-1. CIS read position adjustment (for fixed reading)
MTF-MG
F-13-21
(for fixed reading)
Be sure also to update the value indicated on the

service label found behind the left cover of the reader
unit so that it is identical to the value indicated on the
CIS label.
a-3. shading position adjustment (for fixed reading)
a-4. main scanning direction MTF
Reference:
At time of shipment from the factory, no CIS label is
attached.
If a value other than '0' is set before replacement of

the
reader
controller
PCB
(COPIER>FUNCTION>BODY>CCD-LUT), set a
value other than '0' once again, and make the
2. ADF-Related Adjustments
The machine is designed to retain ADF-related
13-7
service data in its reader controller RAM. As such, if you have replaced the reader controller or initialized the
RAM, you will also have to make ADF-related adjustments.
1) Enter the following values by referring to the values indicated on the P-PRINT page you have previously printed
out.
a. main scanning direction position adjustment (for stream reading)
FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST
2)Make adjustments using the following service mode items:

a. Tray Width Adjustment
b. CIS Read Position Adjustment (for stream reading)
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>STRD-POS
c. White Level Adjustment
When you have made all the foregoing adjustments, put the P-PRINT page [1] in the service book case, and dispose
of the previous printout.
F-13-22
Chapter 13
13.3 Laser Exposure System

Laser Scanner Unit
0007-5178
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Enter the values recorded on the label on the laser
scanner unit for the following in service mode:
- COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>LA-DELAY
13-9
Chapter 13
13.4
Image
System
Formation

Developing Unit
0007-5179
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Execute the following service mode items:
- COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STIR-K
2) Initialize the following service mode items:
- COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DVG-CYL
A test copy that is made right after the toner has

been stirred can be soiled on its back with a small
amount of stray toner. The symptom will likely
disappear when 3 or so copies are made.

Drum
Unit
(APVC
correction)
0007-5181
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Connect the power plug to the power outlet, and
turn on the main power unit.
2) In the host machine's service mode, make the
following
selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>D-GAMMA.
- The machine will pick up paper from cassette 1
(regardless of the size of the paper inside the
cassette).
- If no paper exists in cassette 1, the machine will try
to find paper in the lower cassettes in order.
- The paper will be discharged blank to end APVC
correction.
4) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.
13-10
Chapter 13
13.5 Electrical Components
COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-T/
BLANK-B

HDD
0007-8275
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-RPRI>OFST-DC/ OFSTAC
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR all items under
1) Format the HDD.
Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., while holding
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ all items under
down the 2 and 8 keys, turn on the main power).

Using the HD format function of the SST, format all
- COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ all items under
partitions ($); for details, see the descriptions given

- COPIER>ADJUST>FIXING all items under
for upgrading.
2) Download the system software.
Using
the
SST,
download
the
following:
- COPIER>ADJUST>MISC all items under
LANGUAGE, RUI, PS-FRONT, OCR dictionary,
4) Execute the following service mode items:
SSL coding key, SSL CA certificate, MEAP
- COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > D-GAMMA
content.
Keep in mind that the machine may take about 5 min
to start up after downloading.
Main Controller PCB

DC Controller PCB

0007-5188
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0007-4922
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
If you are replacing the main controller PCB, be sure

to transfer the following components from the
old to new PCB:
[1]boot ROM
- Before replacing the DC controller PCB, print out

the latest P-PRINT page.
C O P I E R > F U N C T I O N > M I S C - P > P -
[2]HDD
[3]image memory (SDRAM)
[4]counter memory PCB
PRINT
software.
2) Using the following service mode item, initialize
the memory of the DC controller PCB:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON
3) Using the following service mode items, enter the
values indicated on the P-PRINT page:
- COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>LA-DELAY/ LAOFF/ POWER
- COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>DE-OFST
F-13-23
13-11
Chapter 13
If the user uses NetSpot Accountant (NSA) in
register cards for the device in the course of Net Spot
Combination with a Card Reader
Accountant setup work.
The SDRAM of the main controller retains card ID
12) Download the card ID.
used by NSA. If you have replaced the main
Keep the machine in a standby state < and
controller, you will have to download the card data
download the card ID to be used from the NSA>
from NSA once again to permit NSA to perform
13) Check the count control particulars in user mode.
statistical operations.
system control setup>group ID control>count
If you have formatted the HDD and downloaded the
control
system software, you will have to go through a

specific set of steps:
See that only the downloaded ID data is shown.

14) Check to see that the operation is normal.
Make copies using a user card that has been
1) Format the HDD.
registered using the NSA, and check to see that the
2) Download the system software.
count of the card in question has been incremented
3) Make the following selections:
correctly.
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD.
4) Enter a card No.
Enter the first of the numbers that will be used for
group control, and press the OK key (e.g., if you are
planning to use cards from No. 1 thorough No. 100,
enter '1').

Reader Controller PCB
0007-9843
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
5) turn off and then on the main power.

6) Check the count control mechanism in user mode.
system control setup>group ID control>count
control
check to see as many as 'ID00000001 through
ID00001000' have been prepared.
control
setup>network
sure to print out the latest P-PRINT page.

<if you are executing RAM initialization for the
reader controller without replacing the PCB>
- Using the SST, upload the backup data of the reader
controller, and download it after initializing the RAM
7) Set the IP address in user mode.

system
- Before replacing the reader controller PCB, be
setup>TCP/IP
so that you need not perform the following:
setup>IP address
1. Reader Unit-Related Adjustments
Set 'IP address', 'gateway address', and 'sub net mask'.
8) Enter a number of your choice in user mode.
software (R-CON).
system administrator info setup>system control
group ID>system control ID No.

9) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec
or more.
COPIER>FUNCTION>LEARN>R-CON.
Then,
press the OK key to initialize the RAM; thereafter,

10) Go through the instructions on the control panel
3) Enter the following values in service mode:
for shut-down sequence so that the main power switch
a. values indicated on the service label (found
may be turned off.
behind the left cover of the reader unit)
11) Turn off the main power switch. Wait for 3 sec or
more, and turn it back on.
Unless you have registered 'system control group
ID' and 'system control ID No.', you will not be able to
13-12
a-1. CIS read position adjustment (for fixed reading)

Chapter 13
(for fixed reading)
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>STRDPOS
a-3. shading position adjustment (for fixed reading)
c. White Level Adjustment

a-4. main scanning direction MTF
If a value other than '0' is set before replacement of
the
reader
controller
PCB
(COPIER>FUNCTION>BODY>CCD-LUT), set a
When you have made all the foregoing adjustments,

put the P-PRINT page [1] in the service book case,
and dispose of the previous printout.
value other than '0' once again, and make the

2. ADF-Related Adjustments
The machine is designed to retain ADF-related
service data in its reader controller RAM. As such,
if you have replaced the reader controller or
initialized the RAM, you will also have to make
ADF-related adjustments.
F-13-24
1) Enter the following values by referring to the values
indicated on the P-PRINT page you have
previously printed out.
a. main scanning direction position adjustment (for
stream reading)
FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST
2)Make adjustments using the following service

mode items:
a. Tray Width Adjustment
b. CIS Read Position Adjustment (for stream
reading)
13-13
Chapter 13
13.6 Pickup/Feeding System

13.6.1
Adjusting
Horizontal
When
the
Registration
Replacing
the
Cassette
0007-4923
[2]
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
[1]
- 1st Side Adjustment (mechanism)

1) Make a copy using the cassette 1/2, and check to
make sure that the front margin is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
- If the value is not as indicated for the cassette 1 or 2,
make the following adjustments:
(-)
[4]
[3]
F-13-26
4) Take out the cassette 1 or 2.
5) Check the index [1] of the adjusting plate.
(+)
0
2
4
6
8
10
F-13-27
2.51.5mm
F-13-25
- Adjusting the Cassette 1

2) If a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2 is installed, open the
front) [1].
right door [1] of the pedestal.

3) Open the lower right cover [2]; then, remove the 2
screws [3], and detach the cover (lower front) [4].
F-13-28
13-14
Chapter 13

[1].
8) While referring to the index you check in step 5),
move the adjusting plate back and forth. Moving the
adjusting plate toward the rear of the machine will
increase the margin along the image front.
F-13-30
9) Put the cassette 2 back in place.
paper, and check to make sure that the margin in the
F-13-29
image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

11) Mount the right front cover.

10) Put the cassette 1 back into the machine.
- margin adjustment (2nd side; small-size)

paper; then, check to make sure that the margin in the
1) Make a double-sided copy (small-size) using the
image front direction is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
cassette you have adjusted for the 1st side as the
12) Fit the grip (right front) in place.
source of paper, and check to make sure that the front
13) Mount the right front cover of the machine.
- Adjusting the Cassette 2
(-)
(+)
6) Loosen the fixing screws [2] on the horizontal

0
2
move the adjusting plate back and forth. Moving the

adjusting plate toward the rear of the machine will
increase the margin along the image front.
6
8
10
2.52.0mm
F-13-31
2) If the value is not as indicated, change the
adjustment value of the 2nd side horizontal
registration for small-size.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
An increase of '1' will decrease the margin at the front
13-15
Chapter 13
direction is longer than A4/LTR.
by 0.1 mm.
3) Record the new setting on the service label.
- ADJ-REFE
(-)
(+)
- margin adjustment (2nd side; large-size; A4/LTR

or longer in feed direction)
0
2
1) Make a double-sided copy (large-size) using the

cassette you have adjusted for the 1st side as the
source of power, and check to make sure that the front
(-)
8
10
(+)
2.52.0mm
F-13-33
0
2
adjustment value of the 2nd side horizontal

registration for small-/large-size.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJREFE(small-size)
8
10
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-RE-L(largesize)
2.52.0mm
F-13-32
An increases of '1' will decrease the margin at the front

by 0.1 mm.
adjustment value for 2nd side horizontal registration
- ADJ-REFE
for large-size.
- ADJ-RE-L
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-RE-L
An increase of '1' will decrease the margin on the front
by 0.1 mm.
13.6.3
Adjusting
Manual
- ADJ-RE-L
Horizontal Registration
13.6.2
Adjusting
Horizontal
When
Duplex Unit
0007-4925
- 1st Side (mechanical)
the
1) Place paper in the manual feed tray.

For instructions on how to place paper, see the label
0007-4924
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

1) Make double-sided small- and large-size copies,
and check to make sure that the front margin is 2.5
+/-2.0 mm. A sheet is large-size if its length in feed
13-16
Pickup
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
the
Registration
Replacing
Feed
the
attached to the manual feeder assembly.

of paper, and check to make sure that the front margin
is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
Chapter 13
(-)
(+)
13.6.4
Registering
the
Paper Width Basic Value
0007-4926
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

0
2
4

2) Register the paper width basic value for A4R as
follows:
8
10
2-1) Match the manual feed side guide [1] against the
2.51.5mm
A4R marking.
F-13-34
[1]
- If the value is not as indicated, make the following

adjustments:
3) Remove paper from the manual feed tray.
4) Loosen the fixing screw [1] on the top cover of the
manual feed tray.
move the top cover of the manual feed tray back
and forth. Moving the top cover of the manual feed
[1]
F-13-36
tray toward the rear of the machine will increase the

front margin.
2-2) Start service mode, and select 'register manual

feed d A4R width'.
CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A4R
2-3) Press the OK key to save the new A4R width.
3) Register the paper width basic value for A4 as
follows:
3-1) Mach the manual feed guide against the A4
marking.
3-2) In service mode, select 'manual feed A4 width'.
CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A4
F-13-35
3-3) Press the OK key to save the new A4 width.
6) Tighten the fixing screw on the top cover of the
4) Register the paper width basic value for A6R as
manual feed tray.
follows:
4-1) Match the manual feed side guide against the
A6R marking.
of paper, and check to make sure that the margin along
4-2) In service mode, select 'register A6R width'.
the front is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A6R
4-3) Press the OK key to save the new A6R width.
13-17
5) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

6) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more.
7) Go through the steps for the shut-down sequence shown on the control panel so that the main power switch may
be turned off.
8) Turn off the main power switch.
9) Wait for 3 sec or more; then, turn the main power switch back on.
10) Print out the latest P-ROINT page in service mode.
11) Put the printed P-PRINT page [1] in the service book case, and dispose of the previous printout.
F-13-37
Chapter 14Correcting
Faulty Images
Contents
Contents
14.1 Making lnitial Checks .................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1 Site Environment ..................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Checking the Paper.................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper............................................................................................................ 14-1
14.1.4 Checking the Durables ............................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.1.5 Checking the Periodically Serviced Items............................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Systems ........................................................................................... 14-2
14.1.7 Others ...................................................................................................................................................... 14-3
14.2 Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................. 14-4
14.2.1 Image Faults ............................................................................................................................................ 14-4
14.2.1.1 Uneven Density ................................................................................................................................ 14-4
14.2.1.1.1 Uneven Density in Sub Scanning Direction .............................................................................. 14-4
14.2.1.1.2 Uneven Density Caused by Irregular Rotation of the Main Motor ........................................... 14-5
14.2.1.2 Partially Blank/Streaked................................................................................................................... 14-6
14.2.1.2.1 White lines appear in sub scanning direction on solid black and halftone images: Dust on .... 14-6
14.2.1.2.2 White lines appear in sub scanning direction on solid black and halftone images: Foreign .... 14-7
14.2.1.2.3 Horizontal Line/Blurring at Intervals of 94 to 95 mm .............................................................. 14-8
14.2.1.2.4 White Lines in Sub Scanning Direction .................................................................................... 14-9
14.2.1.3 Smudged/Streaked.......................................................................................................................... 14-11
14.2.1.3.1 Stray Toner Along Fine Lines ................................................................................................. 14-11
14.2.1.3.2 Soiled Image Leading Edge..................................................................................................... 14-12
14.2.1.3.3 Black Dots ............................................................................................................................... 14-14
14.2.1.4 Ghost/Memory................................................................................................................................ 14-15
14.2.1.4.1 Ghost........................................................................................................................................ 14-15
14.2.2 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................... 14-16
14.2.2.1 No Power ........................................................................................................................................ 14-16
14.2.2.1.1 Upon installation, machine does not start up / LCD does not come on although main power .. 1416
14.2.2.2 Noise............................................................................................................................................... 14-17
14.2.2.2.1 Noise at Time of Pickup from the Cassette ............................................................................. 14-17
14.2.3 Transmission/fax-related ....................................................................................................................... 14-17
14.2.3.1 Transmission Problem .................................................................................................................... 14-17
14.2.3.1.1 Latter half of image is lost when scanning and sending A3-size original from DF ................ 14-17
14.2.4 Specifications-related FAQ ................................................................................................................... 14-18
14.2.4.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications.................................................................................................. 14-18
14.2.4.1.1 Equation to calculate estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable .... 14-18
14.2.4.1.2 Settings for not displaying "Mail Box" tab on LCD ............................................................... 14-18
14.2.4.1.3 How to check estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts ........ 14-18
14.2.4.1.4 Output image size is different between when using "Zoom by Percentage" function and .... 14-18
14.2.4.1.5 Applicable paper sizes............................................................................................................. 14-19
14.2.4.1.6 How to clear "system administrator" password....................................................................... 14-19
14.2.4.1.7 Applicable paper types ............................................................................................................ 14-19
14.2.4.1.8 Unable to select [Stack Bypass Settings] button ..................................................................... 14-19
14.2.4.1.9 Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4: Necessary options when installing finisher ....................... 14-20
Contents
14.2.4.1.10 Necessary options when expanding iR Security Kit-A2 .......................................................14-20

14.2.4.1.11 Stack Bypass Standard Settings: How to register arbitrary paper size and paper type as ....14-20
14.2.4.1.12 How to fix Ethernet setting at 10BASE-T .............................................................................14-20
14.2.4.2 FAQ on Send Specifications...........................................................................................................14-21
14.2.4.2.1 Address cannot be deleted .......................................................................................................14-21
14.2.4.3 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications......................................................................................................14-21
14.2.4.3.1 How to display FAX error codes on Activity Report ..............................................................14-21
14.2.4.3.2 How to output System Dump List ...........................................................................................14-21
14.2.4.3.3 How to print FAX Activity Report when necessary................................................................14-21
14.2.4.3.4 How to erase all destinations stored in Address Book and One-Touch buttons at once .........14-22
14.3 Outline of Electrical Components ................................................................................................................14-23
14.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid .....................................................................................................................................14-23
14.3.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids...................................................................................................................14-23
14.3.2 Motor .....................................................................................................................................................14-24
14.3.2.1 Motors.............................................................................................................................................14-24
14.3.3 Fan .........................................................................................................................................................14-27
14.3.3.1 Fans.................................................................................................................................................14-27
14.3.4 Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................14-28
14.3.4.1 Sensors ............................................................................................................................................14-28
14.3.5 Switch ....................................................................................................................................................14-33
14.3.5.1 Switches ..........................................................................................................................................14-33
14.3.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others...................................................................................................................14-34
14.3.6.1 Lamps, Heaters, and Others............................................................................................................14-34
14.3.6.2 Lamps, Heaters, and Others............................................................................................................14-37
14.3.7 PCBs ......................................................................................................................................................14-40
14.3.7.1 PCBs ............................................................................................................................................... 14-40
14.3.7.2 PCBs ............................................................................................................................................... 14-43
14.3.8 Variable Resistors(VR), Light-Emitting Diodes(LED),and Check Pins by .........................................14-46
14.3.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB ...................................14-46
14.3.8.2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker ....................................................................................14-47
14.3.8.3 All-Night Power Supply PCB.........................................................................................................14-47
Chapter 14
14.1 Making lnitial Checks

14.1.1 Site Environment
0007-9383
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

a. There must be a source of power whose voltage is as specified (+/-10%). The power plug must never be
disconnected day and night.
b. The machine must not be in an area subject to high humidity (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier). The
site must not be too cold or subject to dust. The machine must not be near a source of fire.
c. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas.
d. The machine must not be exposed to the rays of the sun. As necessary, curtains must be provided.
e. The area must be well ventilated. The machine must be on a level floor.
In addition, be sure that there is a source of power that can be used by the machine at all times.
14.1.2 Checking the Paper
0007-9384
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

a. Be sure the paper being used is of a type recommended by Canon.
b. Be sure that the paper is not moist. Try using paper fresh out of package.
14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper
0007-9385
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

a. There must be paper in the cassette or the tray deposited within a specific limit.
b. If transparencies are used, be sure that they are placed in the manual feed tray in the correct orientation.
14.1.4 Checking the Durables
0007-9386
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Refer to the table of durables, and replace those that have reached the end of their lives.
14.1.5 Checking the Periodically Serviced Items
0007-9387
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Refer to the periodical servicing chart and the table of periodically replaced parts. As necessary, clean or replace
parts.
14-1
Chapter 14
14.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Systems
0007-9388
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Reader Unit
- Check the scanner unit (contact sensor, white plate, copyboard glass) for scratches, dirt, and foreign matter.
- Check the contact sensor unit to see if it moves smoothly and if it is free of dirt.
- Check to see if the contact sensor is free of flickering.
- Check to see that the scanner system is free of condensation.
Process Components
- Check to see that the drum unit and the developing unit are properly fitted.
- Check to see that the photosensitive drum is free of scratches and dirt.
Transfer Components
- Check to see that the transfer roller is free of wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
Fixing Assembly
- Check to see if the fixing film and the pressure roller are free of wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check to see that the fixing thermistor is free of an open circuit.
- Check to see if the thermal switch is free of disruption in its electrical continuity.
Paper Feed System
- Check to make sure that there is no paper lint or foreign matter.
- Check to make sure that there is no buildup of paper around the pickup, feed, and separation rollers. See that they
are free of wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check to make sure that the paper is free of a bent leading edge and is free of curling, waving, and excess moisture.
- Try using paper and transparency of a type recommended by Canon to see if the problem is corrected.
Mechanical
- Check to make sure that the load imposed on the drive system is not more than permitted.
- Check to make sure that the gears are free of wear and chipping.
Cassette
- Check to see that the cassette is correctly fitted. Check to see that the paper size is correctly set. Try replacing with
a fault-free cassette to see if the problem is corrected.
- Check to see that the movement of the holding plate of the cassette is normal and the plate is free of deformation.
- Check to see that the side guide plate and the rear guide plate of the cassette are fitted correctly.
- Check to see if the switch of the cassette heater is turned on (only if a cassette heater is mounted).
Service Mode
- Check to see that the various adjustment settings of the CCD are as indicated on the service label.
(COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>all items)
- Check to see if registration adjustment is executed.
14-2
Chapter 14
(COPIER>ADJUST>FEED>ADJ>REGIST)
- Check to see if the image read start position adjustment is correct.
(COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X/ADJ-Y)
- Check to see if the setting of ADJUST/OPTION is identical to that indicated on the service label.
- Check to see if all errors have been reset.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR-ERR)
General
- Check to see if the power plug is securely connected.
- Check to see if the power outlet provides a specific level of AC voltage.
- Check to see that that the sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids are operating normally and all connectors are
connected securely. (Be sure to check the power supply and signal routes by referring to the general circuit
diagram.)
- Check to see that the leakage breaker and circuit breaker are operating normally.
- Check to see that there is no biting of wires and loosening of screws.
- Check to see that all external panels and covers have been correctly fitted.
- Check to see that the main power switch and the control panel power switch are turned on.
- Check to see that the power and signal cables are correctly routed.
- Check to see that the operation of the cover switch is normal.
- Check to see that none of the fuses on the PCBs have an open circuit.
- Check to see that the user has a correct understanding of how to use the machine and is using it correctly.
14.1.7 Others
0007-9389
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

If a machine is brought from a cold to warm room, its inside can start to develop condensation, leading to various
problems.
a. condensation on the BD sensor is likely to cause problems associated with E100
b. condensation on the dust-proof glass is likely to cause poor image density in sub scanning direction
c. condensation on the contact sensor of the reader unit or on the copyboard glass can cause light images
d. condensation on the pickup or feed guide can cause paper feed problems
If the problem given in d. above has occurred, dry wipe the units in the feed system. Do not open the package
containing a toner cartridge, developing unit, or drum unit right after it has been brought in from a cold to warm place
to avoid condensation. Be sure to leave it alone for a while (1 to 2 hr), opening it after it has become fully used to the
temperature of the site.
14-3
Chapter 14
14.2 Troubleshooting
14.2.1 Image Faults
14.2.1.1 Uneven Density
14.2.1.1.1 Uneven Density in Sub Scanning Direction
0007-7464
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Description>
This fault can occur when the machine is left alone for about 10 min to 5 hr without removing a paper jam.
<Cause>
When a paper jam occurs, the machine forces the main motor to stop, thus stopping the operation without removing
charges from the surface of the photosensitive drum. If the machine is left alone for a long time with the surface
potential of its photosensitive drum uneven, potential memory tends to occur within a layer of the photosensitive
drum, ultimately resulting in uneven density in sub scanning direction.
<Field Remedy>
To rid the surface of the photosensitive drum of potential memory, leave the machine alone for 30 min after removing
the jam. There is no specific instructions as to how it may be left alone.
<Image Sample>
14-4
F-14-1
14.2.1.1.2 Uneven Density Caused by Irregular Rotation of the Main Motor
0007-9967
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Symptom>
Uneven density at specific intervals tends to occur in sub scanning direction (from leading edge to trailing edge in
relation to paper movement) when the main motor starts to rotate irregularly.
- iR2270/2870
intervals of about 3.5 mm
Chapter 14
- iR3570/4570
intervals of about 6.3 mm
To facilitate a check, use a halftone test pattern.
<Remedy>
Replace the main motor.
14.2.1.2 Partially Blank/Streaked

14.2.1.2.1 White lines appear in sub scanning direction on solid black and halftone images: Dust on
top cover of Developing Assembly
0008-3408
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
As a result of inspection, it was found this symptom occurred because the laser light was intercepted by dust on the
top cover of the developing assembly. If the symptom occurs, remove the developing assembly and clean its top
cover referring to the Service Manual [Maintenance and Inspection > Cleaning > Cleaning the Developing Assembly
Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-Blocking Glass and Fixing Inlet Guide].
14-6
F-14-2
14.2.1.2.2 White lines appear in sub scanning direction on solid black and halftone images: Foreign
substances adhere to edge of Feeder Guide
0008-3472
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Description
As a result of inspection, it was found this symptom occurred because foreign substances on the edge of the feed
guide of the developing assembly came into contact with the surface of the drum. If the symptom occurs, clean the
feed guide referring to the Service Manual [Maintenance and Inspection > Cleaning > Cleaning the Developing
Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-Blocking Glass and Fixing Inlet Guide].
F-14-3
14.2.1.2.3 Horizontal Line/Blurring at Intervals of 94 to 95 mm
0007-7091
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Cause>
The coefficient of friction on the surface of the photosensitive drum where the edge of the cleaning blade remains in
contact tends to change, causing uneven rotation and thus blurring.
This problem tends to occur during the initial period of use (less than 10K), when the coefficient of friction is
relatively even, or when a halftone image is generated after leaving the machine alone for 1 to 2 days. This problem,
on the other hand, tends to disappear when about 10 printouts are made.
This problem can also occur when the drum unit is taken out of and put back in the machine, with the edge of the
cleaning blade forcing itself against the surface of the photopositive drum and increasing the friction.
<Field Remedy>
Make about 10 copies of the Test Chart.
<Image Sample>
F-14-4
14.2.1.2.4 White Lines in Sub Scanning Direction
0007-7465
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Cause>
The presence of foreign matter inside the developing assembly can make its way to the developing cylinder,
preventing toner from being evenly deposited on the cylinder and, thus causing white lines.
<Field Remedy>
Replace the Developing Assembly
<Image Sample>
F-14-5
<Note>
If you remove the right door or the drum unit when replacing the fixing assembly and work with the developing
assembly inside the machine, the developing cylinder will remain exposed and become subjected to dust or other
foreign matter. For this reason, it is important to remove the developing assembly as well as the drum unit when
disassembling and assembling the image formation or fixing system. This, however, does not apply if you are simply
replacing the drum unit.
Chapter 14
If you have removed the developing assembly, be sure to place it on a clean sheet of paper to protect it from dust.
14.2.1.3 Smudged/Streaked
14.2.1.3.1 Stray Toner Along Fine Lines
0007-7083
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Cause>
The moisture held in paper evaporates in response to the heat from the fixing assembly, thus causing toner to fly
astray. This problem tends to occur when paper has low resistance and in a high temperature/high humidity
environment.
<Field Remedy>
Use the following service mode item to decrease the developing bias, thus suppressing the symptom:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-SMR
0: default
1: decrease the developing bias by a single step (-20 V)
2: decrease the developing bias by 2 steps (-40 V)
If '2' is selected, the lines can become thinner.
<Image Sample>
14-11
F-14-6
14.2.1.3.2 Soiled Image Leading Edge
0007-7089
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Cause>
This problem occurs when paper moves between the photosensitive drum and the transfer roller. When the
photopositive surface comes close to or into contact with the toner-coated surface of paper, the toner layer can
become shifted toward the trailing edge of the paper. This problem tends to be conspicuous when the toner layer is
relatively high against the width of lines (about 0.2 to 0.6 mm) and, in addition, when the lines are at a right angle to
the feed direction (axial direction of the photosensitive drum).
<Field Remedy>
Use the following service mode item to decrease the developing bias, thus suppressing the symptom:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-SMR
0: default
1: decrease the developing bias by a single step (-20 V)
2: decrease the developing bias by 2 steps (-40 V)
If '2' is selected, the lines can become thinner.
<Image Sample>
F-14-7
14.2.1.3.3 Black Dots
0007-7093
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Cause>
On some types of paper (especially those with a high calcium carbonate content), toner offset to the fixing film can
start to cake, moving from the fixing film or the pressure roller to the face or back of paper.
<Field Remedy>
Use the following service mode item to change the timing at which the fixing pressure roller is cleaned:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-CLN
0: disable cleaning (default)
1: execute cleaning during last rotation every 500 printouts
<Image Sample>
Chapter 14
F-14-8
14.2.1.4 Ghost/Memory
14.2.1.4.1 Ghost
0007-7096
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Cause>
This problem tends to occur when there are both residual toner and fresh toner on the developing cylinder and, thus,
difference in charge between these two kinds of toner.
<Field Remedy>
14-15
Chapter 14
Make several copies of a solid image.

<Image Sample>
F-14-9
14.2.2 Malfunction
14.2.2.1 No Power
14.2.2.1.1 Upon installation, machine does not start up / LCD does not come on although main
power indicator on control panel lights up: Poor connection of ROM/RAM
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
14-16
0008-3477
Chapter 14

Field Remedy
In inspection, reinsertion of the ROM corrected the symptoms. If any of the symptoms mentioned above occurs
during installation, reinsert the BOOTROM or the RAM.
14.2.2.2 Noise
14.2.2.2.1 Noise at Time of Pickup from the Cassette
0007-7052
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Cause>
When double-feeding occurs at time of pickup, the contact between the sheets and the feed roller and the separation
roller cause the separation roller assembly to vibrate.
<Field Remedy>
Replace the roller with a sponge retard roller (FB5-0873; to be used as needed; cassette only).
14.2.3 Transmission/fax-related
14.2.3.1 Transmission Problem
14.2.3.1.1 Latter half of image is lost when scanning and sending A3-size original from DF
0009-2432
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Description
As a result of inspection, the following was found: When an A3-size original with sharp folds is set in the
document feeder (DF), the machine detects it as A4-size and scans the corresponding area. This is because the
latter half of the original is folded and fails to come into contact with the document length sensor flag on the
DF, consequently preventing the length sensor from detecting the original as large size.
When scanning an original with sharp folds from the DF, remove the folds or place it on the copyboard glass.
Moreover, the use of the Preview button on the LCD before scanning enables you to check whether the full
image of the original is scanned. Please explain these to your customer.
14-17
Chapter 14
14.2.4 Specifications-related FAQ

14.2.4.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications
14.2.4.1.1 Equation to calculate estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable
parts
0009-2407
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts are calculated from the following equation:
(L x D / C) - D
D: Days between installation of the host machine (or part replacement) and to date, C: Counter, L: Limit (life
of the parts)
Note that the remaining days are just reference because they are predicated on that the host machine will be
continuously used at the same pace as before.
14.2.4.1.2 Settings for not displaying "Mail Box" tab on LCD
0009-2408
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
You can select in service mode whether or not the operation panel for the mail box functions is displayed. In
order not to display it, change the setting in service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> UI-BOX], set
it to "0" (not display). Then, turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
14.2.4.1.3 How to check estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts
0009-2409
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Description
In service mode [COPIER> Counter> MISC] and [COPIER> Counter> DRBL-1/DRBL-2], the rightmost
reading for each consumable parts indicates how many days are left before the next replacement.
14.2.4.1.4 Output image size is different between when using "Zoom by Percentage" function and
"Preset Zoom" function although same copy ratio is set
0009-2412
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Description
In the "Zoom by Percentage" function, originals can be reduced or enlarged in an integer magnification which
14-18
is set on the LCD. In the "Preset Zoom" function, on the other hand, all the preset buttons on the LCD show an
integer: however, rescale of the original is done at the decimal level. This is the reason why the size of the output
image differs between those functions. This is true for other models.
14.2.4.1.5 Applicable paper sizes
0009-2414
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following lists paper sizes that can be loaded in each paper input:
a. Cassette: A3, LDR, B4, LGL, A4, LTR, A4R, LTRR, B5, A5R, B5R, STMTR, EXE, Com10, Monarch, DL,
ISO-C5ISO-B5, YOKEI No. 4
b. Manual Feed Tray: A3, LDR, B4, LGL, A4, LTR, A4R, LTRR, B5, A5R, B5R, STMTR, EXE, Postcard A6R
Modified, Double Postcard A5R Modified, A4 Modified, Com10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5ISO-B5, YOKEI No. 4
c. Side Paper Deck-Q1: A4, LTR
For more details, refer to the Service Manual [Introduction > Product Specifications > Function List > Types of
Paper].
14.2.4.1.6 How to clear "system administrator" password
0009-2416
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> PWD-CLR], press the OK key. Then, turn the control panel
switch OFF and turn the main power OFF/ON.
14.2.4.1.7 Applicable paper types
0009-2418
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following lists paper types that can be loaded in each paper input:
a. Cassette: Plain Paper (64-80g), Recycled Paper (64-80g), Heavy Paper (81-128g), OHT, 3-Hole Paper,
Tracing Paper, Envelope
b. Manual Feed Tray: Plain Paper (64-80g), Recycled Paper (64-80g), Heavy Paper (81-128g), OHT, Postcard,
4-Plane Postcard, Label Paper, 3-Hole Paper, Tracing Paper, Envelope
c. Side Paper Deck-Q1: Plain Paper (64-80g), Recycled Paper (64-80g), 3-Hole Paper
For more details, refer to the Service Manual [Introduction > Product Specifications > Function List > Types of
Paper].
14.2.4.1.8 Unable to select [Stack Bypass Settings] button
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
0009-2419
[ Manual-related ]
Description
If [Stack Bypass Standard Settings] is set at [On], the button [Stack Bypass Settings] does not work. In such a
case, in user mode [Common Settings> Stack Bypass Standard Settings], select [Off].
14.2.4.1.9 Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4: Necessary options when installing finisher
0009-2422
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following options are necessary depending on model when installing the finisher.
230V machine of iR2870/2270
- Buffer Path Unit-E1
- Accessories Power Supply-P2
- 3 Way Unit-A1
230V machine of iR4570/3570 and 120V machine of all models
- Buffer Path Unit-E1
- Accessories Power Supply-P2
14.2.4.1.10 Necessary options when expanding iR Security Kit-A2
0009-2424
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Description
The following options are necessary when expanding the iR Security Kit-A2 (License).
- Expansion Bus-B1
- USB Application Interface Board-D1
14.2.4.1.11 Stack Bypass Standard Settings: How to register arbitrary paper size and paper type as
standard mode for stack bypass
0009-2426
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Common Settings> Stack Bypass Standard Settings> On> Register], select any paper size and
paper type.
Once the above setting is done, it is unnecessary to select the size and type for stack bypass. So, it is convenient
if the customer always uses paper of the same size and same type for stack bypass.
14.2.4.1.12 How to fix Ethernet setting at 10BASE-T
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
0009-2428
Chapter 14
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Ethernet Driver Settings> Auto Detect], select [Off]. Then,
select [10BASE-T] for [Ethernet Type].
14.2.4.2 FAQ on Send Specifications

14.2.4.2.1 Address cannot be deleted
0009-2405
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Description
An address cannot be deleted if it is registered in one-touch button or as a group. In such a case, delete the
address from one-touch button or the group in advance.
14.2.4.3 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications

14.2.4.3.1 How to display FAX error codes on Activity Report
0009-2410
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [FAX> SSSW> SW01> bit0], set it at "1".
14.2.4.3.2 How to output System Dump List
0009-2411
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [FAX> REPORT> DUMP], press the OK key to output the system dump list.
14.2.4.3.3 How to print FAX Activity Report when necessary
0009-2425
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
When you want to print the FAX Activity Report at a timing other than the specified times or every 40
transmissions,
select [Send screen > System Monitor > Fax > Log] and press "Print List."
14-21
14.2.4.3.4 How to erase all destinations stored in Address Book and One-Touch buttons at once
0009-2429
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode, [COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ADRS-BK > OK], then turn the control panel power
switch off and switch on the main power of the machine again.
Chapter 14
14.3 Outline of Electrical Components

14.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid
14.3.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids
0007-6833
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have a clutch or solenoid.
<Printer Unit>
T-14-1
Notatio
Name
n
CL1
manual feed pickup clutch
Description
Remarks
drives the manual feed

pickup roller
CL2
registration clutch
drives the registration roller
CL3
developing sleeve clutch
drives the developing sleeve
CL6
duplex feed clutch
drives the duplex roller 1/2
iR2270/2270F/2870/
2870F
SL1
cassette 1 pickup solenoid
drives the cassette 1 pickup

roller
SL2
cassette 2 pickup solenoid
drives the cassette 2 pickup

roller
T-14-2
Notatio
PART-
n
CL1
CL2
Parts No.
CHK
DC controller PCB
FH6-5076
CL>1
J306
FH6-5075(iR2270/2270F/2870/
CL>2
J313
2870F)
FK2-0361(iR3570/3570F/4570/
4570F)
CL3
FK2-0404
CL>3
J313
CL6
FH6-5005
CL>4
J306
14-23
Chapter 14
Notatio
PART-
Parts No.
CHK
DC controller PCB
SL1
FK2-0408
SL>1
J308
SL2
FK2-0408
SL>2
J318
CL3
CL2
CL6
CL1
SL1
SL2
F-14-10
14.3.2 Motor
14.3.2.1 Motors
0007-6835
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Reader Unit>
T-14-3
Notation
M501
Name
Description
reader motor
drives the carriage
T-14-4
Notati
on
M501
14-24
Parts No.
FH5-1028
Reader
controller PCB
J505
Error
E202
Chapter 14
M501
F-14-11
<Printer Unit>
T-14-5
Notatio
Name
n
M1
polygon motor
M2
main motor
Description
Remarks
drives the laser scanner

drives the major components
of the printer unit
M3
fixing motor
drives the fixing assembly
M4
delivery motor 1
drives the delivery roller
M5
bottle rotation motor
drives the rotation of the bottle
M6
cassette 1 pickup
drives the pickup unit 1
motor
M7
cassette 2 pickup
drives the pickup unit 2
motor
M10
duplex feed motor
drives the duplex roller 1/2
iR3570/3570F/4570/
4570F
M12
hopper motor
drives the hopper
14-25
T-14-6
DC
Notati
Parts No.
on
M1
PART-CHK
controller
Error
PCB
scanner unit
MTR>1
J316
E110
MTR>2
J312
E010
E014
FM2-0276(iR2270/2270F/2870/
2870F)
FM2-0334(iR3570/3570F/4570/
4570F)
M2
FK2-0385(iR2270/2270F/2870/
2870F)
FM2-0362
(iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F)
M3
FK2-0367
MTR>3
J311,J319
M4
FK2-0365
MTR>4
J305
M5
FK2-0015
MTR>5
J302A
M6
FK2-0377
MTR>6
J307A
M7
FK2-0377
MTR>7
J307A
M10
FL2-3266
MTR>8
306
M12
FK2-0379
MTR>9
J302A
E025
E025
Chapter 14
M3
M10
M2
M6
M7
M4
M5
M12
M1
F-14-12
14.3.3 Fan
14.3.3.1 Fans
0007-6836
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have a fan.
<Printer Unit>
14-27
Chapter 14
T-14-7
Notatio
Name
Description
FM1
heat discharge fan (front)
discharges heat from the fixing unit
FM2
heat discharge fan (rear)
discharges heat from the fixing unit
T-14-8
Notati
on
Parts No.
I/O
DC controller PCB
Error
FM1
FK2-0360
P020-6
1:ON
J307B
E805
FM2
FK2-0360
P023-2
1:ON
J307B
E805
FM2
FM1
F-14-13
14.3.4 Sensor
14.3.4.1 Sensors
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
<Reader Unit>
14-28
0007-6837
T-14-9
Notatio
Name
Description
copyboard cover open/
detects the state (open/closed) of the
closed sensor (rear)
copyboard cover
copyboard cover open/
detects the state (open/closed) of the
closed sensor (front)
copyboard cover
PS503
CIS HP sensor
detects the CIS home position
PS504
original sensor 1
PS505
original sensor 2
PS506
original sensor 3
PS507
original sensor 4
detects original size (AB, Inch/AB)
PS508
original sensor 5
detects original size (Inch/A)
CIS1
CIS
reads originals
PS501
PS502
detects original size (AB, Inch/A,

Inch/AB)
detects original size (AB, A, Inch/
AB)
detects original size (for all
countries)
T-14-10
Notatio
n
Reader
Parts No.
I/O
controller
PCB
PS501
WG8-5624
P006-7
PS502
WG8-5624
P006-5
PS503
WG8-5624
P006-6
PS504
FH7-7569
PS505
1: copyboard cover
closed
1: copyboard cover
Jam/error
code
J506
J506
0090, 0091
1: HP
J506
E202
P004-0
0: original present
J507
FH7-7569
P004-1
0: original present
J507
PS506
FH7-7569
P004-2
0: original present
J508
PS507
FH7-7569
P004-3
0: original present
J508
PS508
FH7-7569
P004-3
0: original present
J508
CIS1
FL2-2997
closed
J510
E225
Chapter 14
PS508
PS507
PS506
PS502
PS501
PS504
PS505
CIS1
PS503
F-14-14
<Printer Unit>
T-14-11
Notatio
n
14-30
Name
Description
PS1
cassette 1 paper sensor
detects the presence/absence of cassette 1
PS2
cassette 2 paper sensor
detects the presence/absence of cassette 2
PS3
cassette 1 paper level sensor A
detects paper level A in cassette 1
PS4
cassette 1 paper level B sensor
detects paper level B in cassette 1
PS5
cassette 2 paper level A sensor
detects paper level A in cassette 2
PS6
cassette 2 paper level B sensor
detects paper level B in cassette 2
PS7
manual feeder paper sensor
detects paper in the manual feeder
PS8
fixing film speed sensor
detects the speed of the fixing film
PS9
pre-registration sensor
detects paper before registration
PS10
cassette 1 retry sensor
detects pickup retry in cassette 1
PS11
detects pickup retry in cassettes 2
PS13
fixing outlet sensor
detects paper at the fixing outlet
PS14
No. 1 delivery sensor
detects delivery
PS15
No. 1 delivery full sensor
detects a delivery full condition
PS16
waste toner sensor
detects a waste toner full condition
PS17
duplex feed sensor
detects duplex feed
Notatio
Name
Description
PS18
feed cover sensor
detects the feed cover state
PS22
front cover sensor
detects the state (open/closed) of the front cover
HU1
environment sensor
detects the machine inside temperature
TS1
developing assembly toner sensor
detects the toner inside the developing assembly
TS2
sub hopper toner sensor
detects the tone inside the sub hopper
TH1
fixing main thermistor
detects the temperature of the fixing heater
TH2
fixing sub thermistor
detects the temperature of the fixing heater
TH3
drum thermistor
detects the temperature of the drum
TP1
thermal switch
cuts off the power to the heater in response to

overheating
T-14-12
Notatio
n
Parts No.
I/O
DC controller
PCB
JAM
PS1
FH7-7312
P028-5
1: paper absent
J308
PS2
FH7-7312
P019-5
1: paper absent
J318
PS3
FH7-7312
P028-6
PS4
FH7-7312
P028-7
PS5
FH7-7312
P019-6
PS6
FH7-7312
P019-7
PS7
FH7-7312
P021-0
PS8
FM2-2769
PS9
FK2-0149
P027-1
1: paper present
J313
xx05
PS10
FH7-7312
P030-4
1: detected
J308
xx01
PS11
FH7-7312
P019-4
1: detected
J318
xx02
PS13
FK2-0149
P029-2
1: paper present
J303
xx07
PS14
FK2-0149
P029-0
1: paper present
J305
xx08
1: level about 50% or

less
1: level about 50
sheets or less
1: level about 50% or
less
1: level about 50
sheets or less
0: paper present
J308
J308
J318
J318
J307B
J303
Notatio
n
Parts No.
DC controller
I/O
PCB
PS15
FK2-0149
P029-1
0: paper present
PS16
FK2-0149
P023-4
0: full
J302B
PS17
FK2-0149
P021-2
1: paper present
J307B
PS18
FH7-7312
J308
PS22
FK2-0149
J302B
HU1
FK2-0160
J302A
TS1
FK2-0358
J302B
TS2
FK2-0358
J302A
JAM
J305
T-14-13
Notation
TH1,TH
2
TP1
Parts No.
fixing film unit
DC controller PCB
J304
iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F
FM2-0293(100V)
J202
FM2-0358(120V)
FM2-0359(230V)
iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F
FM2-1792(100V)
FM2-1793(120V)
FM2-1794(230V)
TH3
AC driver PCB
FM2-2776
J302A
Chapter 14
PS8
TS2
TH3
TH1, TH2
TP1
PS13
PS10
PS1
PS22
PS3
TS1
PS4
PS14
PS18
PS15
PS11
PS17
PS2
PS7
PS5
PS6
PS16
PS9
HU1
F-14-15
14.3.5 Switch
14.3.5.1 Switches
0007-6838
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have a switch.
<Printer Unit>
14-33
Chapter 14
T-14-14
Notation
Name
Description
SW1
main power switch
turns on/off the main power switch
SW2
door switch
checks the right door
SW5
environment heater switch
turns on/off the environment heater (option)
T-14-15
Notatio
n
Parts No.
SW1
FK2-0140
SW2
FK2-0384
SW5
WC1-5182
DC controller PCB
AC driver PCB
J201
J309
SW1
SW5
SW2
F-14-16
14.3.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others

14.3.6.1 Lamps, Heaters, and Others
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
<Reader Unit>
14-34
0007-6839
Chapter 14
T-14-16
Notatio
Name
Parts No.
Description
n
H5
reader heater (left)
NPN
H6
reader heater (right)
NPN
LCD panel
FL2-1092
LCD1
prevents condensation on the reading

glass
prevents condensation on the
copyboard glass
display on the control panel (touch

panel)
H6
H5
LCD1
F-14-17
<Printer Unit>
T-14-17
Notation
Name
Description
H1
fixing main heater
fixing main heater
H2
fixing sub heater
fixing sub heater
H4
cassette heater
H7
deck heater
ELCB1
leakage breaker (100V)
prevents absorption of moisture by the paper inside the

cassette
prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side
deck
leakage breaker
14-35
Notation
ELCB2
Name
Description
leakage breaker (230V)
leakage breaker
LA1
pre-exposure lamp
removes residual charges from the drum
VA1
varistor
varistor
HDD1
hard disk
stores programs and image data
SVR1
paper width detecting VR
detects the width of paper in the manual feeder
speaker
speaker (fax unit)
SP1
T-14-18
Notation
H1,H2
H4
Parts No.
fixing film unit
fixing film unit
iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F
iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F
FM2-0293(100V)
FM2-1792(100V)
FM2-0358(120V)
FM2-1793(120V)
FM2-0359(230V)
FM2-1794(230V)
FK2-0375(100V)
FK2-0376(230V)
H7
NPN(100V)
FH7-4585(230V)
ELCB1
FH7-7626
ELCB2
FH7-7625
T-14-19
Notatio
n
Parts No.
LA1
FK2-0368
VA1
FL2-3265
HDD1
WM2-5216
Main controller PCB
DC controller PCB
J302B
J1026
Chapter 14
Notatio
n
Parts No.
SVR1
FM2-2768
SP1
FM2-0342
Main controller PCB
DC controller PCB
J302B
H7
HDD1
H1, H2
LA1
ELCB1
ELCB2
SVR1
H4
VA1
SP1
F-14-18
14.3.6.2 Lamps, Heaters, and Others
0009-2918
/ iR3530
<Reader Unit>
T-14-20
Notati
Name
on
Parts No.
H5
Reader heater (left)
NPN
H6
Reader heater (right)
NPN
LCD panel
FH6-0735
LCD1
Description
Prevents condensation on the reading
glass (100, 230 V)
Prevents condensation on the platen
board glass (100, 230 V)
Control panel indication (touch panel)
14-37
Chapter 14
H6
H5
LCD1
F-14-19
<Printer Unit>
T-14-21
Notati
Name
on
H1
Fixing main heater
Fixing main heater
H2
Fixing sub heater
Fixing sub heater
H4
Cassette heater
H7
Deck heater
ELCB
Prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the

cassette
Prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side
deck
Leakage breaker (100 V)
Leakage breaker
Leakage breaker (230 V)
Leakage breaker
LA1
Pre-exposure lamp
Removes residual charge from the drum
VA1
Varistor
Varistor
1
ELCB
2
HDD1
*1
14-38
Description
Hard disk
Program, Image storage
Chapter 14
Notati
Name
on
SVR1
SP1
Description
Paper-width detection
Manual feed paper-width detection
volume
Speaker
Speaker(FAX unit)
*1A hard disk(HDD1) is an optional in iR2230/2830/3530.

T-14-22
Name
Parts No.
H1,H2
Fixing film unit
Fixing film unit
iR2230/2230F/2830
iR3530
FM2-0293(100V)
FM2-1793(120V)
FM2-0358(120V)
FM2-1794(230V)
FM2-0359(230V)
H4
FK2-0375(100V)
FK2-0376(230V)
ELCB1
FH7-7626
ELCB2
FH7-7625
T-14-23
Notat
ion
Parts No.
LA1
FK2-0368
VA1
FL2-3265
HDD
1
WM2-5216
SVR1
FM2-2768
SP1
FM2-0342
Main controller PCB
DC controller PCB
J302B
J1026
J302B
14-39
Chapter 14
HDD1
H1, H2
LA1
ELCB1
ELCB2
SVR1
H4
VA1
SP1
F-14-20
14.3.7 PCBs
14.3.7.1 PCBs
0007-9881
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<Reader Unit>
T-14-24
Name
14-40
Part No.
Description
[1]
reader controller PCB
FG3-3765
controls the reader unit/ADF
[2]
control panel CPU PCB
FG6-8938
controls the control panel
[3]
control pen key PCB
FG3-2834
[4]
control panel inverter PCB
FG6-8939
controls the inputs from the

keypad keys
controls the activation of the
backlight of the LCD
Chapter 14
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
F-14-21
<Printer Unit>
T-14-25
Name
Parts No.
Description
[2]
cassette 1 size detection PCB
FM2-2770
detects the size of cassette 1
[3]
cassette 2 size detection PCB
FM2-2770
detects the size of cassette 2
cassette size detection relay
FM2-2771
relays data for cassette size
FM2-2773
generates the pseudo CI signal
scanner unit
generates the BD signal
[4]
PCB
[5]
pseudo-CI PCB
[6]
BD PCB
FM2-0276(iR2270/
2270F/2870/2870F)
FM2-0334(iR3570/
3570F/4570/4570F)
[7]
NCU PCB
FM2-2790
controls the line switching

operation
[9]
fax board PCB
FM2-2789
control the fax unit
[10]
laser driver PCB
scanner unit
controls the laser unit drive
FM2-0276(iR2270/
2270F/2870/2870F)
FM2-0334(iR3570/
3570F/4570/4570F)
[11]
G3 fax power supply PCB
FM2-0860
G3 fax power supply
[12]
modular PCB
FM2-0343
line I/F
14-41
Name
[13]
high-voltage power supply
Parts No.
Description
FM2-0261
high-voltage power supply
main power supply
printer power supply
PCB
[14]
printer power supply PCB
PCB unit
FM2-0245
[15]
controller power supply PCB
FM2-2764
controller PCB
[16]
AC driver PCB
main power supply
AC drive
PCB
FM2-0245
[17]
accessories power supply
FK2-0339
accessorizes power supply
PCB
[18]
environment switch PCB
FG3-2797
heater power supply switch
[19]
DC controller PCB
FM2-2767
controls the printer unit/

accessory
[20]
main controller PCB
FM2-3226
processes output image data for

the printer unit
[21]
expansion bus PCB
FM2-2804
connection interface
[22]
USB board
FM2-3010
USB interface
[23]
all-night power supply PCB
FK2-0341
supplies power thorough day and

night
Chapter 14
[2]
[3]
[10]
[11]
[9]
[4]
[6]
[20]
[5]
[7]
[19]
[22]
[13]
[21]
[12]
[18]
[15]
[23]
[17]
[16]
[14]
F-14-22
14.3.7.2 PCBs
0009-2934
/ iR3530
<Reader Unit>
T-14-26
Ref.
[1]
Name
Parts No.
FG3-3765
Function
Controls the reader unit/ADF.
14-43
Chapter 14
Ref.
Name
Parts No.
Function
Controls the activation of the LCD
[2]
Control panel inverter PCB
FM2-2753
[3]
FM2-2754
Controls the control panel.
[4]
Control panel key PCB
FG6-8939
Controls the keypad inputs.
back light.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-14-23
<Printer Unit>
T-14-27
Ref.
Name
Parts No.
Description
[1]
Arrestor PCB (100 V)
FM2-2973
Protects against high voltage.
[2]
Cassette 1 size detection
FM2-2770
FM2-2770
FM2-2771
Cassette size detection relay
PCB
[3]

PCB
[4]
Cassette size detection relay

PCB
[5]
Pseudo CI PCB
FM2-2773
Pseudo CI signal generation
[6]
BD PCB
Scanner unit
BD signal generation
FM2-0276(iR2230/
2230F/2830)
FM2-0334(iR3530)
[7]
14-44
NCU PCB
FM2-2790
Line switch control
Ref.
Name
Parts No.
Description
[9]
Fax board PCB
FM2-2789
Fax unit control
[10]
Laser driver PCB
Scanner unit
Laser unit drive control
FM2-0276(iR2230/
2230F/2830)
FM2-0334(iR3530)
[11]
G3 fax power supply PCB
FM2-0860
G3 fax power supply
[12]
Modular PCB
FM2-0343
Line I/F
[13]
High-voltage power supply
FM2-0261
High-voltage power supply
Main power supply PCB
Printer power supply
PCB
[14]
Printer power supply PCB
unit
FM2-0260(100/115V)
FM2-02458(230V)
[15]
Controller power supply
FM2-2764
Controller power supply
Main power supply PCB
AC drive
PCB
[16]
AC driver PCB
unit
FM2-0260(100/115V)
FM2-02458(230V)
[17]
[18]
Accessories power supply
FK2-0338(100/115V)
PCB
FK2-0339(230V)
Accessories power supply
Environment switch PCB
FG3-2797
Heater power switch
FM2-2767
Controls the printer unit/
(100, 230 V)
[19]
DC controller PCB
accessories.
[20]
Main controller PCB
FM2-3226

[21]
Expansion bus PCB
FM2-2804
Interface
[22]
USB board
FM2-3010
USB interface
[23]
Uninterruptive power supply
FK2-0340(100/115V)
Supplies uninterruptive
PCB
FK2-0341(230V)
power.
Chapter 14
[11]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[10]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[20]
[19]
[22]
[13]
[21]
[12]
[18]
[15]
[23]
[17]
[1]
[16]
[14]
F-14-24
14.3.8 Variable Resistors(VR), Light-Emitting Diodes(LED),and Check Pins by

PCB
14.3.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB
0007-6841
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins found in the machine, those that are
needed when servicing the machine in the field are discussed.
14-46
Chapter 14
- Some LEDs carry current and emit light when they are off; this is a normal condition, and must be kept in mind.
- Take note of the following:
...VR that may be used in the field.
...VR that must not be used in the field.
14.3.8.2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker
0007-7795
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Points to Note When Checking the Output of a PCB
Normally, an AC voltage is applied to the terminal of the leakage breaker [1].
Take care not to touch it when making a check.
F-14-25
14.3.8.3 All-Night Power Supply PCB
0007-6843
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
J691
J692 J693
VR201
J601
F-14-26
14-47
T-14-28
Notation
Description
VR201
for factory use
Chapter 15Self
Diagnosis
Contents
Contents
15.1 Error Code Table ............................................................................................................................................ 15-1
15.1.1 Error Code ............................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2 Error Code Details.......................................................................................................................................... 15-4
15.2.1 Error Code Details................................................................................................................................... 15-4
15.2.2 E602 in Detaill....................................................................................................................................... 15-15
15.3 Error Code (SEND) ...................................................................................................................................... 15-30
15.3.1 Results of Self-Diagnosis ...................................................................................................................... 15-30
15.3.2 Error Codes............................................................................................................................................ 15-32
15.4 Jam Code ...................................................................................................................................................... 15-41
15.4.1 Jam Cover (printer unit) ........................................................................................................................ 15-41
15.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related) ................................................................................................................... 15-42
15.4.3 Jam Code (ADF-related) ....................................................................................................................... 15-43
15.5 Alarm Code .................................................................................................................................................. 15-46
15.5.1 Alarm Code ........................................................................................................................................... 15-46
15.5.2 Alarm Code ........................................................................................................................................... 15-46
15.6 Finisher/Saddle Finisher Error Codes .......................................................................................................... 15-47
15.6.1 Error Code in Detail (finisher, puncher) ............................................................................................... 15-47
15.6.2 Error Code Detail (finisher, puncher).................................................................................................... 15-72
15.7 DADF Error Codes....................................................................................................................................... 15-82
15.7.1 Error Code in Detail (DF) ..................................................................................................................... 15-82
Chapter 15
15.1 Error Code Table

15.1.1 Error Code
0008-0942
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
T-15-1
Code
Error name/description
E000
fixing overheating
E001
fixing assembly overheating
E002
fixing assembly low temperature
E003
post-standby fixing low temperature
E007
fixing film rotation error
E010
main motor rotation error
E014
fixing motor rotation error
E019
waste toner case full, waste toner case full sensor error
E020
toner clogging between sub hopper and developing assembly
E024
developing assembly connector disconnection
E025
hopper motor, bottle motor error
E032
NE controller counter error
E064
power supply voltage error (high-voltage)
E100
BD interval error
E110
scanner motor error
E191
communication error for high voltage power supply
E202
CIS home position detection error
E225
CIS light intensity error
E227
reader unit power supply error
E248
backup memory error
E261
zero-cross signal error
E315
image data error
E400
feeder communication error
15-1
Code
E490
wrong DF type
E500
finisher communication error
E503
finisher internal communication error
E505
finisher backup memory error
E514
stack delivery/trailing edge assist motor error
E519
gear change motor error
E530
rear alignment error
E531
stapling error
E532
stapler shift error
E535
swing error
E537
front alignment error
E540
stack tray ascent error/upper tray ascent error
E542
lower tray ascent error
E577
paddle error
E584
shutter error
E590
punching error
E591
puncher dust sensor error
E592
punch horizontal registration sensor error
E593
punch shift error
E5F0
saddle paper positioning error
E5F1
saddle paper folding error
E5F2
saddle guide error
E5F3
saddle alignment error
E5F4
saddle rear stapling error
E5F5
saddle front stapling error
E5F6
saddle butting error
E5F8
saddle connector error
E5F9
saddle switch error
E602
hard disk error
Code
E604
image memory error/shortage
E609
hard disk error
E610
herd disk coding key fault
E674
fax board communication error
E710
IPC initialization error
E711
IPC communication error
E713
communication error for finisher
E716
communication error for pedestal
E717
communication error for NE controller
E719
coin vendor error
E730
PDL software error
E732
scanner communication error
E733
printer communication error
E740
Ether board error
E743
DDI communication error
E744
language file/boot ROM error
E745
TokenRing board error
E746
accessories board wrong model error
E748
controller board and SDRAM size mismatch
E805
fan error
Chapter 15
15.2 Error Code Details

15.2.1 Error Code Details
0008-1078
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
T-15-2
Code
E000
0001
Cause
Remedy
The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high.

While startup control is under way, the
Reset the condition in service mode:
reading of the main thermistor is less than
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
30 deg C continuously for 200 msec or
Replace the main thermistor. Replace the
more 1 sec after the start of power supply.
DC controller PCB.

70 deg C continuously for 200 msec or
more 2 sec after the start of power supply.
120 deg C continuously for 200 msec 6
sec after the start of power supply.
The startup control does not end 30 sec
after the start of power supply.
E001
0000
The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high.

The reading of the main thermistor is 250
deg C or more continuously for 200
msec.

DC controller PCB.
0001
0002
The hardware circuit detects overheating
of the main or sub thermistor for 200
msec.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
The reading of the sub thermistor is 295
deg C or more continuously for 200
msec.
Replace the sub thermistor. Replace the DC

controller PCB.
E002
15-4
The rise in temperature of the fixing assembly is faulty.
Code
0000
Cause
Remedy
115 deg C continuously for 400 msec 1.3
sec after it has indicated 100 deg C.
DC controller PCB.

150 deg C continuously for 400 msec 1.3
sec after it has indicated 140 deg C.
E003
0000
E007
0000
E010
0001
The fixing temperature is too low after a standby state.

While regular temperature control is
under way, the reading of the main
thermistor is less than 140 deg C
continuously for 400 msec or more.
DC controller PCB.
The rotation of the fixing film is faulty.

While the fixing motor is rotating, the
marker signal is not detected for 6 sec
with the reading of the main thermistor
indicating 100 deg C or more.
DC controller PCB.
The rotation of the main motor is faulty.

Detection is executed every 100 msec
Replace the main motor. Replace the DC
after the start of motor rotation; however,
controller PCB.
the drive detection signal is absent for 2

sec.
0002
During motor rotation, detection is
Replace the main motor. Replace the DC
executed every 100 msec; however, the
controller PCB.
drive signal is absent 5 times in sequence.

E014
0001
The rotation of the fixing motor is faulty.

Detection is executed every 100 msec
Replace the fixing motor. Replace the DC
after the start of motor rotation; however,
controller PCB.
the drive detection signal is absent for 2

sec.
0002
During motor rotation, detection is
Replace the fixing motor. Replace the DC
executed every 100 msec; however, the
controller PCB.
drive signal is absent 5 times in sequence.

E019
The waste toner case is full, or the waste toner case full sensor is faulty.
Code
0000
Cause
Remedy
When the waste toner case is identified as
Replace the waste toner sensor. Replace the
being full for 2000 prints continuously,
DC controller PCB.
an alert is issued; thereafter, the case is

identified as being full continuously for
100 prints.
E020
0000
The path between the sub hopper and the developing assembly is clogged with toner.
The developing assembly toner sensor
Replace the developing assembly toner
detects the absence of toner, while the
sensor. Replace the sub hopper toner sensor.
sub hopper toner sensor detects the
Replace the DC control PCB.
presence of toner. With the developing

clutch turned on, the hopper feedscrew
motor is rotated for 1 sec intermittently
194 times; still, the developing assembly
toner sensor does not detect the presence
of toner.
E024
0000
The developing assembly connector is disconnected.

The connection detection signal is absent
Replace the developing assembly toner
continuously for 100 msec.
sensor. Connect the connector. Replace the

DC controller PCB.
E025
0000
0001
The hopper motor or the bottle motor is faulty.

The sub hopper toner sensor connection
Replace the sub hopper toner sensor.
detection signal is absent for 100 msec 10
Connect the connector. Replace the
times in sequence.
detection PCB.
While the hopper motor is rotating, the
Replace the hopper motor. Replace the
motor error lock signal is detected
bottle motor. Replace the DC controller
continuously 4 times every 56 msec. Or,
PCB.
while the bottle motor is rotating, the

motor error lock signal is detected 22
times in sequence every 10 msec.
E032
0001
The NE controller counter malfunctions.

An open circuit is detected for the count
Turn off the main power, and check the
pulse signal.
cable for an open circuit; then, turn the main

power back on.
E064
0001
The voltage of the power supply is faulty (high-voltage error).

The value read from the EEPORM is
Turn off and then back on the main power.
outside a specific range.
Replace the EEPROM.
Code
0002
Cause
Remedy
While output is being generated, the AD
Replace the high-voltage power supply.
value of the primary DC voltage is 230
(DEC) or more for 100 msec 2 times in

sequence. (However, after output, it is
not detected for 100 msec.)
0003
value of the developing DC voltage is
224 (DEC) or more for 10 msec 2 times

in sequence. (However, after output, it is
0004
value of the transfer output current is 205
Replace the controller PCB.
(DEC) or more for 100 msec 2 times in

sequence. (However, after output, it is
0005
value of the transfer output voltage is 0
(DEC) for 100 msec 2 times in sequence.

(However, after output, it is not detected
for 100 msec.)
E100
0001
The BD interval is outside a specific range.

After the machine has become ready for
Replace the laser unit. Replace the DC
image formation (i.e., the scanner motor
controller PCB. Check the wiring.
is ready for operation, and the laser has

been turned on), an error has occurred 50
times or more (BD error).
E110
0001
The scanner motor is faulty.

The scanner motor speed lock signal does
not indicate a locked state a specific
period of time after the scanner motor has

been started.
0002
The speed lock signal indicates a
deviation 10 times in sequence at
intervals of 10 msec after the signal has

indicated a locked state.
0003
With the image clock switched over, the
scanner motor speed lock signal does not
indicate a locked state 6.5 sec after a

switchover is made from low to normal
speed or 8 sec after a switchover is made
from normal to low speed.
Code
E191
0000
Cause
Remedy
There is an error in the communication with the high-voltage power supply.

The data transmission/reception does not
end normally 500 msec after the most
recent transmission/reception of data

ended normally.
E202
0001
There is an error in the detection of the CIS home position.

The attempt to detect the home position
Disconnect and then connect the harness
fails when the CIS is moved forward.
connector. Replace the following as

necessary: scanner home position sensor,
scanner motor, reader controller PCB.
0002
The attempt to detect the home position
Disconnect and then connect the harness
fails when the CIS is moved back.
connector. Replace the following as

necessary: scanner home position sensor,
scanner motor, reader controller PCB.
E225
0001
The light intensity of the CIS is faulty.

During shading operation, the intensity is
Disconnect and then connect the flexible
below a specific level.
cable. Replace the following as necessary:

flexible cable, CIS, reader controller PCB.
0002
During DF stream reading, the sheet-to-
sheet light intensity is faulty.
cable. Replace the following as necessary:

flexible cable, CIS, reader controller PCB.
E227
0001
The reader unit power supply is faulty.

At time of power-on, the 24-V port is off.
Disconnect and then connect the power

supply harness connector. Replace the
power supply.
0002
At the start of a job, the 24-V port is off.

power supply.
0003
At the end of a job, the 24-V port is off.

power supply.
0004
E248
When a load is being driven, the 24-V
port is off.
supply harness. Replace the power supply.
The backup memory is faulty.
Code
0000
Cause
Remedy
[Cause] A check error has occurred on
1. Check the presence/absence of a backup
the backup SRAM board.
SRAM PCB.
2. Disconnect and then connect the backup
[Location] bottom ROM
SRAM PCB.
3. Replace the backup SRAM PCB with a
[Timing of Detection] once when the
new one.
boot ROM is started up

0001
An error has occurred at power-on.
Replace the reader controller PCB.
0002
An error has occurred during a write
operation.
0003
An error has occurred during a read
operation following a write operation.

E261
0000
The zero-cross signal is faulty.

When the relay is on, the zero-cross
Replace the AC driver PCB. Replace the DC
signal is not detected for 500 msec or
controller PCB.
more.
E315
There is an error in image data.
0007
There is an error in JBIG encoding.
Turn off and then back on the power.
000d
There is an error in JBIG decoding.
Turn off and then back on the power.
E602
0001
There is an error on the hard disk.

[Cause] An HDD detection error has
See the details under 602.
occurred. The HDD cannot be detected.

The HDD does not become ready. The
HDD returns an error.
[Detection] while boot ROM is in session

BARSAC startup, mounting
(usrIde)
[Timing of Detection] once at startup

0002
[Cause] There is no startup file. The

program for the main CPU does not exist
on the HDD or in BOOTDEV/BOOT,
and so on.
[Detection] while boot ROM is in use

at time of system file loading (usrIde)
Code
0003
Cause
[Cause] An HD write abort error has
Remedy
occurred. The sectors for BOOTDEV on

the HD cannot be read.
[Detection] BARSAC (all; at time of

bootable startup)

0006
[Cause] A subbootable that matches the
PDL type does not exit in BOOTDEV/

BOOT.
[Detection] during loading of sub boot in

oclibroot
[Timing of Detection] once at bootable

startup
0007
[Cause] An ICC profile that matches the
PDL type does not exist in BOOTDEV/

PDL.
[Detection] beginning of oclibroot;

judgment based on functions of PDL
team that are called in
[Timing of Detection] once at bootable

startup
01XX
/DOSDEV is faulty.
02XX
/FSTDEV is faulty.
03XX
/DOSDEV2 is faulty.
04XX
/FSTPDEV is faulty.
05XX
/DOSDEV3 is faulty.
06XX
/PDLDEV is faulty.
07XX
/DOSDEV4 is faulty.
08XX
/BOOTDEV is faulty.
09XX
/DOSDEV5 is faulty.
FFXX
There is an error in a partition that cannot
be identified.
E604
The image memory is faulty or is inadequate.
Code
0000
Cause
The memory size does not match the
Remedy
Increase the memory.
model.
E609
0008
There is an error on the HDD.

At startup, the HDD fails to reach a
Replace the hard disk. Replace the DC
specific temperature level within a
controller PCB.
specific period of time.

0009
E610
At time of sleep recovery, the
Replace the hard disk. Replace the DC
temperature fails to reach a specific level.
controller PCB.
The HDD coding key is faulty.

The SRM/PCB is faulty. The battery has
Try step 1); if it fails, try step 2).
become exhausted, leading to loss of

SRAM contents.
1) Turn off and then back on the power

switch to generate the key once again.
2) If the same error still continues, replace
the board on which the SRAM is mounted.
(Keep in mind that doing so will lead to loss
of all user data.)
E674
An error has occurred in communication between the fax control PCB (2-line) and main
controller PCB.
0001
An attempt to set mode for the fax device
1. Check the connection of the cable
has failed.
between the fax control PCB (2-line) and

the main controller PCB.
2. Replace the ROM DIMM of the fax
control PCB (2-line).
3. Replace the fax control PCB (2-line).
4. Replace the main controller PCB.
E710
0001
There is an error in the initialization of the IPC.

The machine fails to become ready 3 sec
Check the cable.
or less after the IPC chip startup.

0002
When the main power is turned on, the
Check the cable.
communication IC (IPC) on the DC

controller PCB cannot be initialized.
E711
0001
There is an error in the IPC communication.

The occurrence of an error has been
Check the cable.
recorded in the error register of the IPC

chip 4 times or more within 1.5 sec.
0002
The occurrence of an error has been
Check the cable.
recorded in the error register of the IPC

chip 4 times or more within 2 sec.
E713
There is an error in the communication with the finisher.
Code
0000
Cause
Remedy
The communication with the finisher
Check the cable. Replace the DC controller
does not resume within 5 sec after it has
PCB. Replace the finisher controller PCB.
been disrupted.
E716
0000
There is an error in the communication with the pedestal.

After the presence of a pedestal has been
Check the cable. Replace the DC controller
detected, the communication fails to be
PCB. Replace the pedestal drive PCB.
normal for 5 sec.

E717
0001
There is an error in the communication with the NE controller.

The NE controller is not connected at
Check the cable; thereafter, reset the
power on, although it was connected
condition in service mode:
before the power was turned off because
of an error.
0002
An IPC error has occurred while the NE
controller is in operation.
There is an open circuit for the IPC. An
error has occurred, and the IPC

communication remains disabled.
E719
0001
There is a coin vendor error.

The coin vendor is not connected when
the power is turned on, although it was
connected before the power was turned
off because of an error.

0002
While the coin vendor is in operation, an
IPC error has occurred, IPC has
developed an open circuit, or an error
preventing recovery of IPC

communication has occurred.
An open circuit has been detected in the
line for the pickup/delivery signal.
An illegal signal has been detected.
0003
While the unit price is being checked at
startup, an error occurs in the
communication with the coin vendor.
Code
0011
Cause
Remedy
An error has occurred at new card reader
startup.
The new card reader is not connected
when the power is turned off, although it

was connected when the power was
turned off.
0012
An IPC error has occurred at new card
reader startup.
There is an IPC open circuit. An error has
occurred that prevents recovery of IPC

communication.
E730
1001
There is a PDL software error.

An initialization error has occurred.
1. Execute PDL resetting.

2. Turn on the power once again.
100A
An error that may be critical to the
system (e.g., failed initialization) has
occurred.
9004
There is an error in the communication
1. Turn on the power once main.
(PAI) with an external controller.
2. Check the connection of the open I/F

board and the cable.
3. Replace the board for the external
controller open I/F.
4. Replace the main board.
9005
There is a fault in the connector of the
1. Turn on the power once main.
vide cable to the external controller.
2. Check the connection of the open I/F

board and the cable.
3. Replace the board for the external
controller open I/F.
A006
The PDL board does not respond. A
subbootable is faulty or absent.

3. Check the connection of the SURF board.
4. Re-install the firmware.
A007
There is a mismatch between the control
software of the machine and the PDL
control software in regard to version.
3. Execute system formatting (all), and

reinstall the system.
Code
B013
Cause
There is corruption in the font data.
Remedy
2. Re-install the software.
3. Execute system formatting (all), and
reinstall the system.
E732
0001
There is an error in the communication with the scanner.

There is a DDI-S communication error.
1. Check the connector used to connect the

scanner.
2. Check the power supply of the scanner (to
see if initialization takes place at startup).
3. Replace the reader controller, scanner
board, or main board as necessary.
E733
0000
There is an error in the communication with the printer.

At startup, communication with the
1. Check the connector used to connect to
printer fails.
the printer.
2. Check the power supply of the printer (to
3. Replace the DC controller or the main
board.
0001
There is a DDI-P communication error.
1. Check the connection with the printer.

2. Check the power supply of the printer (to
3. Replace the DC controller or the main
board.
E740
0002
E743
0000
There is an error on the Ether board.

The MAC address is illegal.
Replace the LAN card.
There is an error in the DDI communication.

An SCI error has occurred. The received
data is faulty. A reception timeout
cable used to connect the reader unit and the
condition has occurred. An SEQ timeout
printer unit. Replace the following as
error has occurred.
necessary: flexible cable, reader controller

PCB, main controller PCB.
E744
0001
There is an error in the language file/boot ROM.

The version of the language file on the
Download a language file of the correct
HDD and that of the bootable do not
version.
match.
0002
0003
The size of the language file on the HDD
is too large.
version.
There is no language file on the HDD
indicated by config.txt for a switchover.
version.
Chapter 15
Code
0004
1000
2000
E745
0001
Cause
Remedy
An attempt to switchover to a language
on the HDD fails.
version.
The boot ROM that is mounted is of the
Replace the boot ROM with one of the
wrong type.
model in question.
The engine ID indicated by the software
Replace it with a software ID of the correct
ID is illegal.
model.
There is a fault on the TokeRing board.

An attempt at PCI initialization has
1. Disconnect and then connect the
failed.
TokeRing board.
2. Replace the TokeRing board.
0002
The MAC address is faulty.
1. Replace the TokenRing board.
0003
There is an error in the acquisition/setting
of board information.
0004
There is a connection error.
1. Check the connection of the cable.

2. Replace the cable.
3. Check the power source of the MAU.
4. Replace the MAU.
0005
E746
0003
E748
1001
E805
0000
Other Errors
The accessories board is of the wrong type.
At startup, a board for a different model
Replace the UFR board of the correct type
has been detected.
(model).
There is a mismatch between controller board and SDRAM size.

There is a mismatch between the control
Check the correct combination between
board and the SDRAM.
board and SDRAM.
There is a fan error.

While the fan is at rest, the lock signal has
Replace the fan. Replace the DC controller
been detected for 5 sec.
PCB.
While the fan is in operation, the lock

signal is not detected for 5 sec.
15.2.2 E602 in Detaill
0008-1182
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
15-15
T-15-3
X
Description
Remedy
0
0
The HDD cannot be recognized.
1. Turn off the main switch, and check the cable
The startup partition (BOOTDEV)
connector. Then, turn on the main switch.
cannot be found at startup.
2. Check to see if the HDD spins up when the

main switch is turned on and if the 5V/12V
power is supplied.
3. If the symptom still exists after the foregoing,
replace the HDD, re-install the system software.
If the symptom still exists, replace the main
board.
The system software for the main
1. Start up in safe mode, and format the HDD
CPU does not exist.
using the SST (all); then, re-initial the system

software (System, Language, RUI); then turn off
and then back on the main power switch.
suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD
and re-install the system software.
Description
Remedy
0
0
Suspension of a write operation to
1. Find the sector for which the write operation
the boot device has been detected.
has been suspended; then, execute recovery

operation.
<in the case of black-and-white E code>
1-1 The machine will not permit the use of
service mode; go through the following:
1-2 Turn off the power. Then, turn on the power
while holding down on the 1 and 9 keys so that
the repair routine for the sector for which the
write operation was suspended will
automatically start up and the screen will turn
solid black.
1-3 Wait for about 40 to 50 min. There will soon
be an indicator of progress of work. The screen
will turn solid white when the routine ends.
<if the spanner symbol is indicated>
1-1 Set 'CHK-TYPE-0', and execute 'HDCHECK' (50 to 50 min); thereafter, turn off and
then back on the main power switch.
start up in safe mode; then, format the HDD (full)
using the SST, and re-install the system software
(System, Language, RUI), and turn off and then
back on the main power switch.
Symptom absent
The system software of the sub CPU
1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full
does not exist.
formatting using the SST and re-install the
Symptom absent
system software (System, Language, RUI); then,

turn off and then back on the main power.
and re-install the system software once again.
Chapter 15
Description
Remedy
The IC profile does not exist.

system software (System, Language, RUI); then,
2. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing,
[E602-XXYY]
T-15-4
XX
YY
CHK
Partiti
Descripti
on in
on
TYP
questio
01
02
03
11, 21
13, 25
10, 12,
14, 22,
23, 24
At startup
DOSD
General
EV
data
During routine operation
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
dy
dy
dy
dy
dy
dy
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
storage
area
2
FSTDE
Image
data
storage
area (e.g.,
Box)
DOSD
Image
EV2
thumbnail
display
data area
(e.g.,
Box)
FSTPD
Image
EV
data
storage
area (e.g.,
Box)
15-18
XX
YY
CHK
Partiti
Descripti
on in
on
TYP
questio
01
02
03
11, 21
13, 25
10, 12,
14, 22,
23, 24
At startup
DOSD
General
EV3
file
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
dy
dy
dy
dy
dy
dy
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
*2
*6
*9
*10
*11
*12
*3
*8
*9
*10
*11
*12
storage
area (user
settings,
logs, PDL
spool,
image
data
control
info)
6
PDLD
PDL-
EV
related
file
storage
area (font,
registered
form, ICC
profile,
color
correction
info file
for PDL
function)
DOSD
Firmware
EV4
storage
area
(address
book,
filter)
BOOT
Firmware
DEV
storage
area
(System,
Language
, RUI)
Chapter 15
XX
YY
CHK
Partiti
Descripti
on in
on
TYP
questio
01
02
03
11, 21
13, 25
10, 12,
14, 22,
23, 24
At startup
DOSD
For future
EV5
expansion
Not
Entire
identifi
HDD
ed
(check on
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
Reme-
dy
dy
dy
dy
dy
dy
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
*4
*7
*9
*10
*11
*12
faulty
sector and
recovery)
[HDD formatting]
T-15-5
X
CHK
Partition
Descriptio
Typical
HDD
Normal
Safe mode +
in
item
formattin
mode +
HDD
TYP
question
deleted
g by HD-
HDD
formatting
CLEAR
formattin
with SST
g with
SST
1
DOSDE
General
Entire
Possible (4
FSTDEV
Possible;
data
collection
partitions,
specified
however,
storage
of image
simul-
(4
selection of a
area
data (e.g.,
taneously)
partitions,
specific
simul-
partition is
taneously)
not allowed,
Box)
requiring
deletion of all
data. After
formatting,
the system
software must
be
downloaded.
15-20
CHK
Partition
Descriptio
Typical
HDD
Normal
Safe mode +
in
item
formattin
mode +
HDD
TYP
question
deleted
g by HD-
HDD
formatting
CLEAR
formattin
with SST
g with
SST
2
FSTDEV
Image data
Entire
Possible (4
FSTDEV
Possible;
storage
collection
partitions,
specified
however,
area (e.g.,
of image
simul-
(4
selection of a
Box)
data (e.g.,
taneously)
partitions,
specific
simul-
partition is
taneously)
not allowed,
Box)
requiring
deletion of all
data. After
formatting,
the system
software must
be
downloaded.
3
DOSDE
Image
Entire
Possible (4
FSTDEV
Possible;
V2
thumbnail
collection
partitions,
specified
however,
display
of image
simul-
(4
selection of a
data area
data (e.g.,
taneously)
partitions,
specific
(e.g., Box)
Box)
simul-
partition is
taneously)
not allowed,
requiring
deletion of all
data. After
formatting,
the system
software must
be
downloaded.
CHK
Partition
Descriptio
Typical
HDD
Normal
Safe mode +
in
item
formattin
mode +
HDD
TYP
question
deleted
g by HD-
HDD
formatting
CLEAR
formattin
with SST
g with
SST
4
FSTPDE
Image data
Entire
Possible (4
FSTDEV
Possible;
storage
collection
partitions,
specified
however,
area (e.g.,
of image
simul-
(4
selection of a
Box)
data (e.g.,
taneously)
partitions,
specific
simul-
partition is
taneously)
not allowed,
Box)
requiring
deletion of all
data. After
formatting,
the system
software must
be
downloaded.
5
DOSDE
General
Items that
V3
file storage
are
area (user
relatively
selection of a
settings,
less critical
specific
Possible
DOSDEV
Possible;
3 specified
however,
logs, PDL
partition is
spool,
not allowed,
image data
requiring
control
deletion of all
info)
data. After
formatting,
the system
software must
be
downloaded.
CHK
Partition
Descriptio
Typical
HDD
Normal
Safe mode +
in
item
formattin
mode +
HDD
TYP
question
deleted
g by HD-
HDD
formatting
CLEAR
formattin
with SST
g with
SST
6
PDLDE
PDL-
User Font
related file
IccProfil
Possible
PDLDEV
Possible;
specified
however,
storage
selection of a
area (font,
specific
registered
partition is
form, ICC
not allowed,
profile,
requiring
color
deletion of all
correction
data. After
info file for
formatting,
PDL
the system
function)
software must
be
downloaded.
DOSDE
Firmware
Address
Not
DOSDEV
Possible;
V4
storage
book
possible
4 specified
however,
area
selection of a
(address
specific
book,
partition is
filter)
not allowed,
requiring
deletion of all
data. After
formatting,
the system
software must
be
downloaded.
Chapter 15
CHK
Partition
Descriptio
Typical
HDD
Normal
Safe mode +
in
item
formattin
mode +
HDD
TYP
question
deleted
g by HD-
HDD
formatting
CLEAR
formattin
with SST
g with
SST
8
BOOTD
Firmware
System
Not
Not
Possible;
EV
storage
software
possible
possible
however,
area
selection of a
(System,
specific
Language,
partition is
RUI)
not allowed,
requiring
deletion of all
data. After
formatting,
the system
software must
be
downloaded.
DOSDE
For future
None in
V5
expansion
particular
Possible
DOSDEV
Possible;
5 specified
however,
selection of a
specific
partition is
not allowed,
requiring
deletion of all
data. After
formatting,
the system
software must
be
downloaded.
Not
Entire
identified
HDD
(check on
faulty
sector and
recovery)
* When the machine starts up for the first time after its HDD has been formatted, it may take longer than usual to
complete the startup session.
[Remedy]
15-24
T-15-6
*1
YY
Description
Remedy
01
The ongoing write operation
1. Set '0' to TYPE-TYPE, and execute
has been suspended (at
HDD-CHECK (50 to 50 min). Thereafter,
startup).
turn off and then back on the power.

2. If the symptom still exists after the
foregoing, type in TYPE-TYPE for the
partition in question, and execute HDDCLEAR. Thereafter, turn off and then back
on the main switch.
*2
01
The ongoing operation has
1. If possible, ask the user to back up the
been suspended (at startup).
address book data using the RUI.

2. Set '0' to TYPE-TYPE, and execute
foregoing, start download mode, and
execute full formatting using the SST and
re-install the system software (System,
Language, RUI). Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the main power.
*3
01
To run a recovery session for the boot
partition, you will have to use safe mode in
startup).
combination with the SST.
1. Set '0' for TYPE-TYPE, and execute

turn off and the back on the power.
2. If the symptom still exits after the
foregoing, start download mode, and
execute full formatting using the SST, and
then back on the power.
*4
01
startup).

foregoing, execute HDD-CLEAR using
TYPE-TYPE=1, 2, 3, 5. Thereafter, turn
off and then back on the power.
*5
YY
Description
Remedy
02
A file system error has
1. Type in TYPE-TYPE of the partition in
occurred.
question, and execute HDD-CLEAR.

Thereafter, turn off and then back on the
main switch.
2. If the system still exits after the
foregoing, suspect a fault on the HDD, and
replace the HDD and re-install the system
software.
*6
02
There is a file system error.
The system software is designed so that the

information in this partition (e.g., address
book, filter) is not deleted inadvertently;
i.e., you will not the able to execute HDDCLEAR from service mode.
1. If possible, ask the user to back up the

address book data using the RUI.
2. From service mode, start download
mode; then, execute full formatting using
the SST and re-install the system software
(System, Language, RUI). Thereafter, turn
off and the back on the main power.
*7
02
This type of error is highly rare.
occurred.
1. Using TYPE-TYPE=1, 2, 3, 5, execute
HDD-CLEAR. Thereafter, turn off and
then back on the power.
software.
*8
YY
Description
Remedy
02
The system software is designed so that a
occurred.
recovery session will not run for the boot

partition unless you use safe mode in
combination with the SST.

system software (System, Language,
RUI). Thereafter, turn off and then on the
main power.
software.
*9
03
There is poor contact of the
1. Check the cable and power supply
HDD, or a v.x Works system
connectors.
error has occurred.

foregoing, start up in safe mode, and
execute full formatting using the SST and
then back on the main power.
software.
*10
11,21
The HDD has poor contact.
This type of error is highly rare in relation

to read/write operations.
1. Check the cable and the power supply

connectors.
2.If the symptom still exits after the
replace the HDD and install the system
software.
Chapter 15
*11
YY
Description
Remedy
13, 25
There is a likelihood of the presence of
has been suspended.
damage to the file data on the HDD (e.g.,

Box).

foregoing, set '1' for TYPE-TYPE, and
execute HDD-CLEAR.
(In the case of DOSDEV4 or BOOTDEV,
execute formatting and re-installation once
again.)
software.
*12
10, 12, 14,
There is a system error or a
The data may be corrupted or there is a
22, 23, 24
packet data error.
software bug.

system software (System, Language,
RUI). Thereafter, turn off and then back on
the main power.
software.
- HD-CLEAR
When you have executed HD-CLEAR, all contents of the partition in question (files, sub directories) will be lost.
The actual formatting will take place when the machine is started up after it has been turned off upon execution of
HD-CLEAN.
At this time, the Startup screen shows a progress bar, its edge reaching the end in about 5 min. Be sure not to turn
off the power while the progress bar is moving.
This function (i.e., mode item) cannot be used for BOOTDEV and DOSDEV4; to re-format any of these 2 partitions,
you will have to use the SST.
Keep in mind that formatting of the HDD in service mode will necessarily be full formatting.
- HD-CHECK
If the power is cut while data is being written to the HDD, the occurrence of a write-suspended sector is a possibility.
15-28
Chapter 15
When HD-CHECK is run on such a sector, repairs will be made, but all data in the sector will be lost. A writesuspended sector may be repaired only by HDD-CHECK (0); if not TYPE-TYPE=0, the task will be limited to an
FS level check.
If the write-suspended sector happens to be a critical sector that holds a control area, there is no way of repairing it;
you will have to execute HDD formatting.
- Replacing the HDD
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Connect the new HDD.
3. Start up the machine in safe mode.
4. Connect the SST, and execute full formatting.
5. Using the SST, download the system software (System, Language, RUI).
6. Turn off and then back on the power. (It may take about 5 min for the machine to start up).
15-29
Chapter 15
15.3 Error Code (SEND)

15.3.1 Results of Self-Diagnosis
0008-0278
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
T-15-7
Cause
Remedy
There is a shortage of TCP/IP resources. Try again later.

While continuous transmission is under way or
Wait a while; then, try again.
has ended in FTP or Windows (SMB), a

shortage of TCP/IP resources has occurred, not
permitting reference.
Set the IP address.
The IP address of the machine has yet to be set.
In user mode, set the IP address; thereafter,

turn off and then on the machine.
The server does not respond. Check the settings.

The settings of the selected server are not
Wait a while; then, try again. If browsing is still
correct, or the server has not been turned on.
not permitted, select a different server.
Or, there may be a shortage of resources.

NetWare is in use. Try again later.
NetWare is printing using PSeve or
Wait until NetWare finishes printing; then, try
NDSPServer, not permitting browsing.
again.
The layer in question at the target is too deep to browse.

The number of characters is in excess of the
The layer in question cannot be specified.
number allowed.
Specify a different address.
There is no response.
The server is not ready for file transmission.
Check the target.
The network is cut for file transmission. (An
Check the network.
attempt to connect to the target of transmission

may have failed, or there is an open circuit in
the middle.)
The tree name is not specified for NetWare
Type in the tree name.
transmission.
An error has occurred for TCP/IP in the course
Check the condition of the network cable and
of e-mail or i-fax transmission.
the connector.
Check TCP/IP.
15-30
Cause
Remedy
The machine's TCP/IP is not in operation.
In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings (IP

address, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP).
The selected server cannot be found. Check the settings.

The IP address in question cannot be identified.
1. In user mode, check the DNS settings.

2. On the DNS side, check the DNS data
settings.
If the login information for the LDAP server is
In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings (DNS
set to 'use (security authentication)', the host
settings).
name in question cannot be identified.

The selected server cannot be connected. Check the settings.
An attempt to connect to the IP address/port in
1. In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings
question fails.
(gateway address of the IP address settings).

2. In user mode, check the LDAP server
settings.
3. Check to see that the LDAP server is
operating normally.
4. If the login information of the LDAP server
is set to 'use (security authentication)', check to
see if the UDP packet is blocked by a filter.
Check the user name, password, or the settings.

If the login information of the LDAP server is
In user mode, check the LDAP server settings
set to 'use' or 'use (security authentication)', the
(user name, password).
user name or the password is wrong.

If the login information of the LDAP server is
In user mode, check the LDAP server settings
set to 'use (security authentication)', the
(domain name).
domain name is wrong.

A timeout condition has occurred, and a search cannot be completed. Check the settings.
The search cannot be completed within the
In user mode, increase the length of time before
specified period of time.
a timeout condition occurs (part of LDAP

server settings).
An upper limit for search results has been exceeded. If the desired address is not indicated
in the results, change the search conditions.
The number of matches has exceeded the
1. Narrow down the search conditions, and try
number of results brought up in response to the
again.
search.
2. Try increasing the upper limit.
The search conditions include a character that cannot be used for the selected server.
The symbol \ is used in the search condition.
Remove the symbol \ from the search

condition, and try once again.
Chapter 15
Cause
Remedy
The combination of characters used in the
Check to be sure that the combination of
search condition fails to make up a correct
characters is in keeping with the rule; then, try
search condition.
once again.
There must be as many "s as there are "s

The symbol * is not included within
parentheses.
If LDAP of the server and the character code is
Remove any character that cannot be used;
version 2 (JIS), there is a character that is not
then, try once gain.
part of the ASCII code (0x20-0x7E).

The version setting of the server is wrong, and the search cannot be initiated. Check the
settings.
In user mode, the LDAP server settings (server
In user mode, set the LDAP server settings so
LDAP version and character code) is set for
that the LDAP server version and the character
version 3; however, the LDAP server is
code are both version 2.
operating for version 2.
15.3.2 Error Codes
0008-0315
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
T-15-8
Cause
Remedy
# 001
There is a paper or original jam.
Remove the jammed paper or original.
# 003
A communication lasting longer than a specific
1. Decrease the resolution for transmission.
period of time (64 min) will cause an error state.
2. In the case of reception, ask the source to

decrease the resolution or divide the original.
# 005
The target does not respond within 35 sec.
Check to be sure that the target is ready to

communicate; then, try once again.
The target is a non-G3 model.
Check the target.
# 009
There is no paper.
Supply paper.
The cassette is not fitted properly.
Fit the cassette correctly.
# 011
15-32
Cause
Remedy
The original to be transmitted is not placed
Start over from the beginning.
properly.
# 012
The target is out of recording paper, and
Ask the target to supply recording paper.
transmission has failed.

# 018
There is no response to a redial attempt.
Check to make sure that the target is ready for

communication; then, try once again.
The target is engaged for a different
communication, and transmission has failed.
The settings do not match the settings of the
target, and the transmission has failed.
# 022
The particulars of the group address selected as
Try transmitting once again.
the forwarding target may have been deleted, or

there is no more than a user box, thus causing
the transmission to fail.
The attempt to transmit to an address registered
Try once again.
in the address book has failed because the

address has been removed from the address
table while in wait for transmission.
# 037
There is a shortage of memory, not permitting
Remove error files and unnecessary files to
reception.
increase available memory.
# 080
F code is not set on the target.
Check the F code of the target, and start over.
# 081
The appropriate password is not set on the
Check the password of the target, and start
target.
over.
# 099
The transmission has been suspended in the
Start over.
middle.
# 102
There is a mismatch of F code or password.
Check the F code and the password of the

target, and start over.
# 107
Cause
Remedy
There is a shortage of memory, not permitting
1. Decrease the resolution, and try once again.
transmission.
2. Remove unnecessary files to increase

available space.
# 701
The group ID set when the job was introduced
Type in the correct group ID or the ID No.
no longer exits. Or, the password has been
(using the keypad); then, start over.
changed.
# 702
The memory is full, not permitting
1. Wait a while. Try again until the ongoing
transmission.
transmission of a job ends.

2. Try not to transmit to too many addresses at
once; rather, try dividing the address into
smaller groups.
# 703
The memory image area is full, not permitting
1. Wait a while. Try transmitting after the
further writing.
ongoing transmission of a job ends.

2. Remove files from the Box; if the operation
still fails to return to normal, turn off and then
back on the main power.
# 704
An error has occurred while an attempt is made
Check the settings of the address, and try once
to obtain address information from the address
again; if the operation is still not normal, try
book.
turning off and then back on the main power.
# 705
The image data size is in excess of the upper
Try changing the upper limit imposed on
limit imposed on transmission data size set in
transmission data size as part of the
user mode, thus causing suspension of
communication control settings of system
transmission.
control settings (user mode). When selecting

low resolution mode or using i-fax, try
decreasing the number of images to send at one
time so that the transmission will not be in
excess of the upper limit imposed on transfer
data size.
# 706
An address table is being imported from or to
Start over once again.
the remote UI; or, a different transmission

component is being used.
# 711
All memory of the Box is used.
Delete files from the Box.
Cause
Remedy
# 712
The Box is full of files.
Remove file from the Box.
# 713
The file has been removed from the Box before
Put the file in question back into the Box, and
transmitting the URL.
start over.
# 751
The server is yet to start up. The network is
Check the target. Check the network.
disconnected. (The connection to the target

may have failed, or the connection may have
been cut in the middle.)
# 752
The SMTP server name of the e-main/i-fax in
Using the network settings of the system
question may be wrong, or the server in
control setup (user mode), check the SMTP
question is yet to start up. Or, the appropriate
server name, domain name, and e-mail address.
domain name or e-mail address has not been
Check to see that the SMTP server is operating
set. Or, the network has been disconnected.
normally. Check the connection of the network.
# 753
A TCP/IP error has occurred in the course of e-
Check the condition of the network cable and
mail transmission. (e.g., socket, select error)
the connector. If the operation does not return

to normal, try turning off and then back on the
main power of the machine.
# 754
The server has not been started up for
Check the server and the network. Check the
transmission, or the network is disconnected.
settings of the target.
Or, the target settings are wrong.

# 755
The TCP/IP settings are not operating
In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings.
normally, thus not permitting transmission.

The appropriate IP address has not been set up.
When the machine is started up, its IP address
is not assigned by means of DHCP, RARP, or

BOOTP.
# 756
In system control setup (user mode), 'use
In network settings of system control setup
NetWare' is set to 'off' in NetWare settings.
(user mode), set 'use NetWare' to 'on'.
# 801
Cause
Remedy
While e-mail is being transmitted or i-fax is
1. Check to see that SMTP is operating
transmitted/received, the communication with
normally.
the SMTP server encountered a timeout error
2. Check the condition of the network.
because of a factor associated with the main

server.
While an SMTP connection is being used, the
1. Check to see if SMTP is operating normally.
SMTP server has returned an error.
The address setting is not correct.
3. Check the address setting.
When data is transmitted to the file server, an
4. Check the condition of the file server and the
error has occurred owing to a factor associated
setting.
with the server.

An attempt has been made to transmit data to an
Check the address setting.
address not authorized for a write operation.

In the course of transmitting data (file server),
Change the setting of the file server so that
it was found that there is a file having the same
overwriting may be permitted.
name, and an overwrite operation to the file is

prohibited.
In relation to transmission (file server), the
Check the address setting.
folder name or the password that has been

specified is wrong.
# 802
In the system control setup (user mode), the
In the network settings under system control
settings of the SMTP server for e-mail/i-fax are
settings (user mode), check the SMTP server
wrong.
name and the DNS server name. Check to see if
The setting of the DNS server is wrong.
the DNS server is operating normally.
The attempt to connect to the DNS server has

failed.
# 803
Before all pages have been transmitted, the
Try once again.
target has cut off the network.

# 804
When an attempt is made to transmit to the file
Check the address.
server, it has been found that no match exits in

the specified directory.
You are not authorized for access to the folder.
Set the server so that you will be authorized to

access the folder.
# 806
When an attempt to transmit to the file server is
Change the user name or the password of the
made, it has been found that the specified user
address.
name or password is wrong.
Cause
Remedy
The address specified for e-mail/i-fax
Check the address of the e-mail/i-fax in
transmission is wrong.
question.
# 810
When an attempt is made to receive i-fax, a
1. In user mode, check the POP server name
POP server connection error has occurred.
setting.
2. Check the operation of the POP server.
While a connection is made to the POP server,
an error has been returned by the POP server.
setting.
While a connection is made to the POP server,
a timeout error has occurred owing to a factor
setting.
associated with the server.

# 815
If a file that has been transmitted to the file
Wait a while, and then try once again. Or,
server is being printed, you will not be able to
change the NetWare server settings of the
log in to the server in question.
target, or stop PServer.
# 818
The data that has been received is in a format
Ask the source to change the file format and
that does not permit printing.
transmit it once again.
# 819
The data that has been received is of a type that
Ask the target to check the settings and transmit
cannot be handled (i.e., its MIME information
it once again.
is illegal).
# 820
Ask the source to check the settings and
cannot be handled (i.e., BASE64 or Unicode is
transmit it once again.
illegal).
# 821
Ask the target to check the settings and transmit
cannot be handled (i.e., TIFF interpretation
once again.
error has occurred).

# 822
cannot be handled (i.e., the image cannot be
transmit once again.
decoded).
# 827
Cause
Remedy
cannot be handed (i.e., part of its MIME
transmit once again.
information is not supported).

# 828
HTML data has been received.
Ask the source to use a format other than

HTML.
# 829
The data that is being received consists of 100
The machine is designed so that it removes data
pages or more.
for the 100th and subsequent pages and prints

or saves in memory up to the 999th page. Ask
the source to transmit the remaining pages one
again.
# 830
A DSN error notice has been received because
1. Check the i-fax address and the target
of the following: the i-fax address or the target
settings.
settings are wrong, or the data of the file that
2. In user mode, decrease the upper limit
has been transmitted is greater than the size
imposed on the size of transmission data so that
permitted by the mail server.
it is lower than the size permitted by the mail

server.
3. Check the condition of the mail server, DNS
server, and network.
# 831
An attempt to receive i-fax in SMTP has failed
Change the reception/printing range settings
because of the reception/printing range settings
made as part of the IP address range setting in
made as part of the IP address range setting in
user mode.
user mode.
# 832
In user mode, the e-mail setting or the network
1. In user mode, check the DNS setting, e-mail/
setting is yet to be made, causing a mail server
i-fax setting, and IP address made as part of the
fault and, thus, preventing reception of MDN
network settings.
(transmission confirmation) mail.
2. Check the condition of the mail server and

the DNS server.
# 833
The network settings have not been made in
1. In user mode, check the DNS setting, e-mail/
user mode or there is a mail-server related fault,
i-fax setting, and IP address made as part of the
thus preventing the transmission of the mail
network settings.
(MDN; transmission acknowledgement).
2. Check the condition of the mail server and

the DNS server.
# 834
Cause
Remedy
The i-fax address or the condition settings of
Check the specified i-fax address and the target
the target may be wrong, there may be a fault in
conditions.
the network or the mail server, or the target may

have encountered a memory full condition, thus
causing an MDS error notice.
# 835
The number of text lines is more than the
Ask the target to decrease the number of text
maximum number of lines permitted for i-fax.
lines and try once again.
# 837
A request has been made by a host that comes
Check the setting of the IP address range in user
under the restrictions imposed by 'IP address
mode. The attempt to access in question may be
range setting' in user mode.
illegal.
# 839
The SMTP authentication (SMTPAUTH) user
Check the user name and password used for
name or password for e-mail/i-fax (network
SMTP authentication (SMTPAUTH) as part of
settings) may be wrong.
the network settings under system control

settings (user mode).
# 841
In relation to an attempt for transmission for e-
1. Set 'SSL' to 'OFF' as part of the network
mail/i-fax, there is no coding algorithm that
settings under system control settings (user
may be used in common with the mail server.
mode).
2. Add a coding algorithm that may be used in
common (mail server settings).
# 842
In relation to an attempt for transmission of e-
1. Set 'SSL' to 'OFF' as part of the network
mail/i-fax, a request has been made for the use
settings under the system control settings (user
of a client certificate by the mail server.
mode).
2. Change the mail server settings so that it will
not request a client certificate.
# 843
The time used by the KDC (key distribution
1. Correct the time as part of the date/time
center) server and the time used by the machine
settings under the system control settings (user
are different significantly.
mode).
2. Correct the time used by the KDC (key
distribution center) server.
# 847
The memory of the Box has been used up, not
Remove unnecessary files from the fax box or
permitting the storage of the received file in the
the system box.
fax box.
Cause
Remedy
# 851
The remaining memory of the machine is
Check the remaining memory of the machine;
running short.
then, remove unnecessary files for the Box.
There are more than 100 files in the specified
Remove unnecessary files from the specified
box, not permitting additional storage.
box.
# 852
The main power switch has been turned off
Check to see that the main power switch is on;
while a job is being executed, causing an error.
as necessary, try once again.
# 899
The transmission of e-mail or i-fax has ended.
1. Check with the target to see if the
However, the transmission has gone through
transmission has arrived.
multiple servers, and there is no way of finding
2. Check to see if an error notice has arrived.
out whether the transmission has reached the

target.
# 995
The reservation for the transmission has been
cancelled.
As necessary, start over.
Chapter 15
15.4 Jam Code

15.4.1 Jam Cover (printer unit)
0007-8207
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
T-15-9
Code
Jam
01xx
delay jam
02xx
stationary jam
0Axx
residual jam
T-15-10
Code
Sensor
Sensor notation
xx01
cassette 1 tray sensor
PS10
xx02
PS11
xx03
PS1 (cassette pedestall)
xx04
PS2 (cassette pedestall)
xx05
registration sensor
PS9
xx06
---
---
xx07
fixing delivery sensor
PS13
xx08
PS14
xx09
PS1A (2/3 delivery unit)
xx0A
reversal sensor
xx0B
xx0C
duplexing assembly feed sensor
xx0D
duplex/feed sensor
PS17
xx0E
deck retry sensor
PS6D (side paper deck)
xx0F
deck pull-off sensor
PS1D (side paper deck)
xx11
buffer inlet sensor
PS1B (buffer path unit)
xx12
buffer outlet sensor
PS2B (buffer path unit)
15-41
Chapter 15
15.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related)
0008-0980
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

- Finisher-Q3/Q4
T-15-11
Code
Jam
Sensor notation
1001
inlet path sensor feed delay jam
PI3
1002
punch path sensor (punch registration
LED5/PTR5
sensor) feed delay jam
1004
delay path sensor feed delay jam
PI4
1101
inlet path sensor feed stationary jam
PI3
1102
punch path sensor (punch registration
LED5/PTR5
sensor) feed stationary jam
- Finisher-S1
15-42
1104
delivery path sensor feed stationary jam
PI4
1200
timing jam
PI3
1500
stapler jam
STP
1300
power-on jam
PI3,PI4
1400
door open jam
DOOR
1644
punch jam
LED5/PTR5
1645
punch power-on jam
LED5/PTR5
1791
saddle feed sensor feed delay jam
PI8S,PI19S,PI20S
1792
saddle delivery sensor feed delay jam
PI11S
1793
saddle inlet sensor feed delay jam
PI22S
17A1
saddle feed sensor feed stationary jam
P18S,PI19S,PI20S
17A2
saddle delivery sensor feed stationary jam
PI11S,PI17S
17A3
saddle inlet sensor feed stationary jam
PI22S
1786
saddle staple jam
SSTP
1787
saddle power-on jam
PI11S,PI18S,PI19S,PI20S,PI22S
1788
saddle door open jam
DOOR
Chapter 15
T-15-12
Code
Jam
Sensor notation
1011
inlet path sensor feed delay jam
PI5
1121
inlet path sensor feed stationary jam
PI5
1F81
stack delivery jam
PI1
1506
staple jam
STP
1307
power-on jam
POWER ON
1408
door open jam (joint)
DOOR
1644
punch hole jam
SR2
1347
punch power-on jam
LED7/PTR7
15.4.3 Jam Code (ADF-related)
0008-0981
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
T-15-13
Code
0003
Jam
registration sensor
Sensor notation
PI2
delay
Description
The registration sensor does not
detect paper with 1.5 sec after
pickup.
At time of reversal, the registration
sensor does not detect paper even
after the read motor has rotated for a
specific period of time.
0004
registration sensor
PI2
stationary
After the registration sensor has gone

on, it does not go off even when the
paper has been moved for 500 mm
(700 mm if in extra length mode).
0005
read sensor delay
PI2,PI3
The read sensor does not detect paper

even when the feed motor has rotated
for a specific period of time after it
has received the pickup request
signal from the reader unit.
15-43
Code
0006
Jam
read sensor stationary
Sensor notation
PI3
Description
After the read sensor has gone on, it
does not go off even when the paper
has been moved 500 mm (700 mm if
in extra length mode).
0007
delivery sensor delay
PI3,PI4
The delivery sensor does not detect

paper even after the read motor has
rotated for a specific period of time in
response to the read request signal
from the reader unit.
0008
delivery sensor
PI4
stationary
After the delivery sensor has gone

on, it does not go off even after the
paper has been moved 500 mm (700
mm if in extra length mode).
0044
1st sheet registration
PI2
sensor stationary
The 1st original has been identified

as a registration sensor stationary
jam.
0045
1st sheet read sensor
PI2,PI3
delay
0046
1st sheet read sensor
as a read sensor delay jam.

PI3
stationary
0047
1st sheet delivery
1st sheet delivery
PI3,PI4
timing error

as a delivery sensor delay jam.
PI4
sensor stationary
0071

as a read sensor stationary jam.
sensor delay
0048

as a delivery sensor stationary jam.
TIMING NG
The software sequence fails to end

normally within a specific period of
time.
0090
ADF open
reader unit sensor
The ADF has been opened while the

machine is in operation (while the
drive system is in operation).
0091
user ADF open
reader unit sensor
The ADF has been opened while the

machine is in operation (while the
drive system is at rest).
0092
ADF cover open
PI10
The ADF cover has been opened

while the machine is in operation
(while the drive system is in
operation).
0093
user cover open
PI10
The ADF cover has been opened

while the machine is in operation
(while the drive system is at rest).
Code
0094
Jam
initial stationary
Sensor notation
PI2,PI3,PI4
Description
The presence of paper is detected
inside the feeder when the 1st sheet is
being picked up.
0095
pickup fault
PICKUP NG
With no original in the tray, the

pickup signal is received for 2 sec.
Chapter 15
15.5 Alarm Code

15.5.1 Alarm Code
0008-0978
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
T-15-14
Location code
Description
02 scanner system
0002
indication of soiling of glass in stream reading

mode
04 pickup/feed
0008
optional deck lifter error
system
0011
1st cassette retry alarm
0012
2nd cassette retry alarm
0013
3rd cassette retry alarm
0014
4th cassette retry alarm
0018
optional deck retry alarm
61 finisher
0001
no staple
62 saddle stitcher
0001
no stitch staple
65 puncher
0001
punch waste case full
15.5.2 Alarm Code
0009-4187
/ iR3530
T-15-15
Location code
Alarm Code
02 Scanner
0002
alerts to soiling on glass in stream reading mode
0008
accessory deck lifter error
0011
1st cassette retry alarm
0012
2nd cassette retry alarm
0013
3rd cassette retry alarm
0014
4th cassette retry alarm
0018
accessory deck retry alarm
61 Finisher
0001
no staple
65 Puncher
0001
punch waste case full
04 Pickup/feeder
15-46
Chapter 15
15.6 Finisher/Saddle Finisher Error Codes

15.6.1 Error Code in Detail (finisher, puncher)
0008-1518
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
T-15-16
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
code
E500
0001
E503
0002
0003
E505
Replace the finisher

controller PCB.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
fault in
communicatio
n with the
finisher
(common
among all
finishers)
fault in
communicatio
n with the
finisher
(Finisher-Q3/
Q4)
fault in
communicatio
n between
finisher and
saddle unit

controller PCB.
Replace the saddle
controller PCB. Check
the cable.
fault in
communicatio
n between
finisher and
punch unit

controller PCB.
Replace the punch
drive PCB. Check the
cable.
fault in the
data stored in
backup
memory
Turn off the main

power. Check the
wiring of the DC
controller PCB and the
finisher controller, and
check the fuse of the
24-V power supply.
Thereafter, turn the
main power back on.
fault in the
EEPROM data
of the punch
unit
Replace the punch

driver PCB. Replace
the finisher controller
PCB.
0001
0002
fault in the
backup
memory of the
finisher
(common
among all
finishers)
15-47
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
When the stack

retaining
spacer is
returned to
home position,
the belt escape
home position
sensor does not
go on within
1.5 sec.

controller PCB.
Replace the stack
delivery motor. Check
the stack delivery drive
mechanism.
code
E514
0001
0002
E514
fault in stack
delivery motor
(Finisher-S1)
0001
0002
fault in trailing
edge assist
motor
(Finisher-Q3/
Q4)
When the stack

retaining
spacer is
shifted from
home position,
the belt escape
home position
sensor does not
go off within
1.5 sec.
The home
position sensor
does not go off
even when the
trailing edge
assist motor
has rotated for
a specific
period of time.
The home
position sensor
does not go on
even after the
trailing edge
assist motor
has rotated for
a specific
period of time.

control PCB. Replace
the trailing edge assist
motor.
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The home
position sensor
does not go off
even when the
gear change
motor has
rotated for a
specific period
of time.

controller PCB.
Replace the gear
change motor. Check
the gear change
mechanism.
code
E519
0001
0002
E530
Gear change
motor error
(Finisher-Q3/
Q4)
8001
8002
Rear
alignment
error
(Finisher-S1)
The home
position sensor
does not go on
even when the
gear change
motor has
rotated for a
specific period
of time.
The home
position sensor
does not go on
within 2000
msec after the
start of
operation
when the rear
aligning plate
is shifted to
home position.
The home
position sensor
does not go off
within 1000
msec after the
start of
operation
when the rear
aligning plate
is shifted from
home position.

controlled PCB.
Replace the rear
alignment motor.
Check the rear aligning
plate drive mechanism.
Check the rear
alignment home
position sensor.
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The home
position sensor
does not go off
even when the
front
alignment
motor has been
rotated for a
specific period
of time.

controller PCB.
Replace the front
alignment motor.
Check the front
aligning plate drive
mechanism. Check the
front alignment home
position sensor.
code
E530
0001
0002
E531
Front
alignment
error
(Finisher-Q3/
Q4)
8001
Stapler error
(Finisher-S1)
8002
The home
position sensor
does not go on
even when the
front
alignment
motor has been
rotated for a
specific period
of time.
At time of
staple jam
recovery, the
home position
sensor does not
go on with 500
msec after the
start of reverse
rotation of the
stapler motor.
The home
position sensor
does not go off
within 500
msec after the
stapler motor
has been
started.

controller PCB.
Replace the stapler.
Check the harness.
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The home
position sensor
does not go off
even when the
stapler motor
has rotated for
a specific
period of time.

controller PCB.
Replace the stapler.
Check the harness.
code
E531
0001
0002
E532
Stapler error
(Finisher-Q3/
Q4)
8001
8002
Stapler shift
error
(Finisher-S1)
The home
position sensor
does not go on
even when the
stapler motor
has rotated for
a specific
period of time.
The stapler
slide home
position sensor
does not go on
within 11 sec
when the
stapler is
shifted to
home position.
The stapler
slide home
position sensor
does not go off
within 1.0 sec
when the
stapler is
shifted from
home position.

controller PCB.
Replace the stapler
shift motor. Check the
stapler shift home
position sensor. Check
the harness.
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The home
position sensor
does not go off
even after the
stapler shift
motor has
rotated for a
specific period
of time.

controller PCB.
Replace the stapler
stapler shift home
the harness.
code
E532
0001
0002
E535
Stapler shift
error
(Finisher-Q3/
Q4)
0001
0002
Swing cam
error
(Finisher-S1)
The home
position sensor
does not go on
even when the
stapler shift
motor has
rotated for a
specific period
of time.
The home
position sensor
does not go off
within 1000
msec after the
start of
operation
when the
swing arm is
shifted from
home position.
The home
position sensor
does not go off
within 1.0 sec
when the stack
delivery roller
swing arm is
moved from
home position.

controller PCB.
Replace the swing cam
motor. Check the
swing cam home
the harness.
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The home
position sensor
does not go off
even when the
swing motor
has rotated for
a specific
period of time.

controller PCB.
motor. Check the
swing cam home
the harness.
code
E535
0001
0002
E537
Swing cam
error
(Finisher-Q3/
Q4)
8001
8002
Front
alignment
error
(Finisher-S1)
The home
position sensor
does not go on
even when the
swing motor
has rotated for
a specific
period of time.
The home
position sensor
does not go on
within 2.0 sec
when the front
aligning plate
is moved to
home position.
The home
position sensor
dos not go off
within 1.0 sec
when the front
aligning plate
is shifted from
home position.

controller PCB.
Replace the front
alignment motor.
Check the front
front alignment home
position sensor.
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The home
position sensor
does not go on
within 2000
msec after the
start of
operation
when the read
aligning plate
is moved to
home position.

controller PCB.
Replace the rear
alignment motor.
Check the rear
alignment home
position sensor.
code
E537
0001
0002
E540
Rear
alignment
error
(Finisher-Q3/
Q4)
8002
8003
Stack tray
motor error
(Finisher-S1)
The home
position sensor
does not go off
within 1000
msec after the
start of
operation
when the rear
aligning plate
is moved form
home position.
The operation
to detect the
paper surface
of the stack
tray does not
end within 1.0
sec.

controller PCB.
Replace the tray ascent/
descent motor. Check
the stack tray drive
paper surface sensor.
An abnormal
combination of
sensor states
has been
detected.

the stack tray upper
limit sensor. Check the
stack tray lower limit
sensor. Check the stack
tray upper paper
surface sensor. Check
the stack tray lower
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
code
E540
0002
Upper tray
ascent/descent
motor clock
error
0003
Upper tray
ascent/descent
motor error
(Finisher -Q3/
Q4)
Area error
Replace the No. 1 tray

area sensor PCB.
controller PCB.
Safety switch
activation
Check the No. 1 tray

closed detecting
switch. Replace the
finisher controller
PCB.
0004
E542
0002
0003
Lower tray
ascent/descent
motor error
(Finisher-Q3/
Q4)

shift motor. Replace
PCB. Check the tray
ascent/descent
mechanism.
Lower tray
ascent/descent
motor clock
error
Area error

shift motor. Replace
PCB. Check the tray
ascent/descent
mechanism.
shift area sensor PCB.
controller PCB.
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The paddle
home position
sensor does not
go on within
1.5 sec when
the paddle is
shifted to
home position.
Check the paddle

motor. Check the
paddle home position
sensor. Replace the
finisher controller
PCB.
code
E577
8001
8002
E584
Paddle error
(Finisher-S1)
0001
0002
Shutter unit
error
(Finisher-Q3/
Q4)
The paddle
home position
sensor does not
go off within
1.0 sec when
the paddle is
moved to
home position.
The shutter
open sensor
does not go off
(i.e., the
shutter does
not close).
The shutter
open sensor
does not go on
(i.e., the
shutter does
not open).
Check the stack edging

motor. Check the open/
close clutch. Check the
shutter home position
sensor. Replace the
finisher controller
PCB.
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The punching
home position
is not detected
even when the
puncher motor
has been
driven for 20
msec.
Check the punch

motor. Check the
punch motor clock
sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB.
controller PCB.
code
E590
0001
0002
E591
0001
0002
E592
E592
Punch motor
error
0001
0002
Punch dust
sensor error
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
horizontal
sensor error
paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
The punch
home position
sensor is not
defected even
after the motor
has stopped at
time of punch
motor initial
operation.
Error in lightreceiving
voltage while
light is emitted
voltage while
light is not
emitted
voltage when
light is emitted
(trailing edge
sensor)
voltage when
light is not
emitted
(trailing edge
sensor)
Check the waste paper

case full sensor. Check
the punch driver PCB.
controller PCB.
Check the paper

trailing edge sensor.
Check the horizontal
registration sensor.
Check the punch driver
PCB. Replace the
finisher controller
PCB.
Check the paper trailing
edge sensor. Check the
horizontal registration
sensor. Check the punch
drive PCB. Replace the
finisher controller PCB.
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
Power trailing
voltage when
light is emitted
(horizontal
registration
sensor 1)
voltage when
light is not
emitted
(horizontal
registration
sensor 1)
voltage when
light is emitted
(horizontal
registration
sensor 2)
Check the paper training
voltage when
light is not
emitted
(horizontal
registration
sensor 2)
Check the paper training
voltage when
light is emitted
(horizontal
registration
sensor 3)
code
E592
0003
edge sensor/
registration
sensor
E592
0004
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
0005
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
0006
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
0007
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error

driver PCB. Replace the



finisher controller.

Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
Paper trailing
voltage when
light is not
emitted
(horizontal
registration
sensor 3)
voltage when
light is not
emitted
(horizontal
registration
sensor 4)
voltage when
light is not
emitted
(horizontal
registration
sensor 4)
The lightreceiving
voltage home
position sensor
does not go off
when light is
emitted.

registration motor.
registration home
the punch driver PCB.
the punch shift
mechanism.
code
E592
0008
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
0009
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
000A
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E593
0001
0002
Punch shift
motor error
The lightreceiving
voltage home
position sensor
does not go on
when light is
not emitted.



Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The paper
positioning
plate home
position sensor
does to go on
when the paper
positioning
motor has been
driven for 1.33
sec.
Paper
positioning
plate motor
(M4S)/paper
positioning
plate home
position sensor
(P17S)
Check the paper

positioning plate
motor. Check the paper
positioning plate home
position sensor.
the paper positioning
code
E5F0
0001
0002
Saddle paper
positioning
plate error
The paper
positioning
plate home
position sensor
doest not go
off when the
paper
positioning
plate motor has
been driven for
1 sec.
Paper
positioning
plate motor
(M4S)/paper
positioning
plate home
position sensor
(P17S)
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The number of
detection
pulses of the
paper folding
motor clock
sensor has
dropped below
a specific
value.
Paper folding
motor (M2S)/
paper folding
motor clock
sensor (P14S)
Check the paper

folding motor. Check
the paper folding motor
clock sensor. Replace
PCB. Check the paper
folding plate drive
mechanism.
code
E5F1
0001
0002
Saddle paper
folding error
The state of the

paper folding
home position
sensor doest
not change
when the paper
folding motor
has been
driven for 3
sec.
Paper folding
motor (M2S)/
paper folding
motor clock
sensor (P14S)
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The guide
home position
sensor does not
go on when the
guide motor
has been
driven for
0.455 sec.
Guide motor
(M3S)/guide
home position
sensor (PI13S)
Check the guide motor.

Check the guide home
position sensor.
the guide drive
mechanism.
code
E5F2
0001
0002
Saddle guide
error
The guide
home position
sensor does not
go off when
the guide
motor has been
driven for 1
sec.
Guide motor
(M3S)/guide
home position
sensor (PI13S)
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The aligning
plate home
position sensor
does not go on
when the
alignment
motor has been
driven for 0.5
sec. (at time of
initialization,
1.67 sec.)
Alignment
motor (M5S)/
aligning plate
home position
sensor (PI5S)
Check the alignment

motor. Check the
alignment home
the aligning plate drive
mechanism. Replace
PCB.
code
E5F3
0001
0002
saddle
alignment
error
The aligning
plate home
position sensor
does not go off
when the
alignment
motor has been
driven for 1
sec.
Alignment
motor (M5S)/
aligning plate
home position
sensor (PI5S)
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The stitching
home position
sensor does not
go on when the
stitch motor
(rear) has been
rotated in
reverse for 0.5
sec or more.
Stitch motor
(rear; M6S)/
stitching home
position sensor
(rear; MS5S)
Replace the stitcher

(rear). Check the
harness. Replace the
finisher controller
PCB.
code
E5F4
0001
0002
Saddle rear
stapling error
The stitching
home position
sensor does not
go off when
the stitch
motor (rear)
has been
rotated in
normal
direction for
0.5 sec or
more.
Stitch motor
(rear; MS)/
stitching home
position sensor
(rear; MS5S)
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
The stitching
home position
sensor does not
go on when the
stitch motor
(front) has
been rotated in
reverse for 0.5
sec or more.
Stitch motor
(front; M7S)/
stitching home
position sensor
(front; MS7S)
Replace the stitcher

(front). Check the
finisher controller
PCB.
code
E5F5
0001
0002
Saddle front
stapling error
The stitching
home position
sensor does not
go off when
the switch
motor (front)
has been
rotated in
normal
direction for
0.5 sec or
more.
Stitch motor
(front; M7S)/
stitching home
position sensor
(front; MS7S)
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
Check the paper

butting plate motor.
Check the paper
butting plate home
position sensor.
controller PCB.
code
E5F6
0001
Saddle butting
error
The paper
butting plate
home position
sensor does not
go on when the
paper butting
plate motor has
been driven for
0.3 sec.
Paper butting
plate motor
(M8S)/paper
butting plate
home position
sensor (PI14S)
E5F6
0002
Saddle butting
The paper
butting plate
home position
sensor does not
go off when
the paper
butting plate
motor has been
driven for 80
msec or more.
Paper butting
plate motor
(M8S)/paper
butting plate
home position
sensor (PI14S)
error
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
Saddle butting
The number of
detection
pulses of the
paper butting
plate motor has
dropped below
a specific
value.
paper butting
plate motor
(M8S)/paper
butting plate
motor clock
sensor (PI1S)
Check the paper

Check the paper
butting plate motor
clock sensor. Replace
PCB.
code
E5F6
0003
error
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
Saddle butting
The paper
butting plate
leading edge
sensor does not
go off when
the paper
butting plate
motor has been
driven for 80
msec.
Paper butting
plate motor
(M8S)/paper
butting plate
leading edge
sensor (PI15S)
Check the paper

Check the paper
butting plate leading
edge sensor. Replace
PCB.
code
E5F6
0004
error
E5F6
0005
Saddle butting
error
The paper
butting plate
leading edge
sensor does not
go on when the
paper butting
plate motor has
been driven for
0.3 sec.
Paper butting
plate more
(M8S)/paper
butting plate
leading edge
sensor (PI15S)
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
0001
The connector
of the paper
butting plate
home position
sensor has
been identified
as being
disconnected.
Connector of
guide home
position sensor
(PI13S)
Connect the connector

of the guide home
the harness. Replace
PCB.
0002
The connector
of the paper
butting plate
home position
sensor has
been identified
as being
disconnected.
Connector of
paper butting
plate home
position sensor
(PI14S)

of the paper butting
plate home position
sensor. Check the
finisher controller
PCB.
The connector
of the paper
butting plate
leading edge
sensor has
been identified
as being
disconnected.
Connector of
paper butting
plate leading
edge sensor
(PI15S)

of the paper butting
plate leading edge
sensor. Check the
finisher controller
PCB.
code
E5F8
Saddle
connector
error
0003
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
Saddle switch
error
The inlet cover

switch has
been identified
as being open
for 1 sec or
more after the
start of
printing or the
start of initial
rotation with
the following
sensors
identifying
their
respective
covers as being
closed:
- inlet cover
sensor (PI9S)
- nt cover
open/closed
sensor (PI2S)
- delivery
cover sensor
(PI3S)
Or, the front
over switch
(MS2S) or the
delivery cover
switch (MS3S)
is open.
Inlet cover
switch
(MS1S)/front
cover switch
(MS2S)/
delivery cover
switch (MS3S)
Check the inlet cover

switch. Check the inlet
cover sensor. Check
the front cover open/
closed sensor. Check
the delivery cover
sensor. Replace the
finisher controller
PCB.
code
E5F
0001
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
Saddle switch
The front
cover switch
has been
identified as
being open
from the start
of printing or
the start of
initial rotation
with the
following
sensors
identifying
their
respective
covers as being
closed.
- inlet cover
sensor (PI9S)
- front cover
open/closed
sensor (PI2S)
- delivery
cover sensor
(PI3S)
- front cover
switch
(MS2S)/
delivery cover
switch (MS3S)
Check the front cover

switch. Check the inlet
cover sensor. Check
the front cover open/
closed sensor. Check
the delivery cover
sensor. Replace the
finisher controller
PCB.
code
E5F
0002
error
Chapter 15
Code
Detail
Name
Detection
Remedy
Saddle switch
The delivery
cover switch
has been
identified as
being open
after the start
of printing or
the start of
initial rotation
of the host
machine with
the following
sensors
identifying
their
respective
covers as being
closed:
- inlet cover
sensor (PI9S)
- front cover
open/closed
sensor (PI2S)
- delivery
cover sensor
(PI3S)
- delivery
cover switch
(MS3S)
Check the delivery

cover switch. Check
the inlet cover sensor.
Check the inlet cover
sensor. Check the front
cover open/closed
sensor. Check the
delivery cover sensor.
controller PCB.
code
E5F
0003
error
15.6.2 Error Code Detail (finisher, puncher)

/ iR3530
15-72
0009-4183
T-15-17
Code
Detail
Items
Description
Remedial action
code
E500
0001
Finisher
communicatio
n error
E503
0003
Finisher internal
communication
error
E505

the cable. Replace the
DC controller PCB.
There is an
error in the
communicatio
n between the
finisher and
the punch unit.
0001
0002
Finisher
backup
memory error
There is an
error in the
data stored in
the backup
memory.
There is an
error in the
punch unit
EEPROM
data.

controller PCB.
Replace the punch
driver PCB. Check the
cable.
Turn off the main
power, and check the
following: DC
controller PCB and
finisher PCB wiring,
24V fuse. Thereafter,
turn on the main power.
Replace the punch
driver PCB. Replace
PCB.
Code
Detail
Items
Description
Remedial action
When the stack

retainer is
moving to
home position,
the return belt
escape HP
sensor does not
go on within
1.5 sec.

controller PCB.
Replace the stack
delivery motor. Check
the stack delivery drive
mechanism.
code
E514
0001
0002
E530
Stack delivery
motor error
(Finisher-S1)
8001
8002
Rear
alignment
error
(Finisher-S1)
When the stack

retainer is
moving from
home position,
the return belt
escape HP
sensor does not
go off within
1.5 sec.
When the rear
aligning plate
is moving to
home position,
the HP sensor
is not
identified as
being ON
within 2000
msec after the
start of the
movement.
When the rear
aligning plate
is moving from
home position,
the HP sensor
is not
identified as
being OFF
within 1000
msec after the
start of the
movement.

controller PCB.
Replace the rear
alignment motor.
plate drive unit. Check
the rear alignment HP
sensor.
Code
Detail
Items
Description
Remedial action
At time of a
staple jam
recovery
session, the HP
sensor is not
identified as
being ON
within 500
msec after the
start of staple
motor reversal
drive.

controller PCB.
Replace the Staple.
Check the harness.
code
E531
8001
Staple error
(Finisher-S1)
E532
8002
The HP sensor
is not
identified as
being OFF
within 500
msec after the
start of staple
motor drive.
8001
When the
stapler is
moving to
home position,
the stapler
slide HP
sensor does not
go on within
11 sec.
8002
Stapler shift
error
(Finisher-S1)
When the
stapler is
moving from
home position,
the stapler
slide HP
sensor does not
go off within
1.0 sec.

controller PCB.
Replace the stapler
stapler shift home
the harness.
Code
Detail
Items
Description
Remedial action
When the
swing arm is
moving from
home position,
the HP sensor
is not
identified as
being OFF
within 1000
msec after the
start of the
movement.

controller PCB.
motor. Check the
swing cam home
the harness.
code
E535
0001
Swing cam
error
(Finisher-S1)
E537
0002
When the stack

delivery roller
swing arm is
moving from
home position,
the swing cam
HP sensor does
not go off
within 1.0 sec.
8001
When the front

aligning plate
is moving to
home position,
the front
alignment HP
sensor does not
go on within
2.0 sec.
8002
Front
alignment
error
(Finisher-S1)
When the front

alignment
plate is moving
from home
position, the
front
alignment HP
sensor does not
go off within
1.0 sec.

controller PCB.
Replace the front
alignment motor.
Check the front
unit. Check the front
alignment HP sensor.
Code
Detail
Items
Description
Remedial action
The stack tray

paper surface
detection does
not end within
1.0 sec.

controller PCB.
Replace the tray ascent/
descent motor. Check
the stack tray drive
An error
sensor output
combination
has been
detected.

the stack tray upper
limit sensor. Check the
stack tray lower limit
tray paper surface
tray lower paper
surface sensor.
code
E540
8002
8003
E577
Stack tray
shift motor
error
(Finisher-S1)
8001
8002
Paddle error
(Finisher-S1)
When the
paddle is
moving to
home position,
the paddle HP
sensor does not
go on within
1.5 sec.
When the
paddle is
moving from
home position,
the paddle HP
sensor does not
go off within
1.0 sec.
Check the paddle

motor. Check the
paddle home position
sensor. Replace the
finisher controller
PCB.
Code
Detail
Items
Description
Remedial action
The punch
home position
sensor is not
detected even
when the
punch motor
has been
driven for 200
msec.
Check the punch

motor. Check the
punch motor clock
sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB.
controller PCB.
code
E590
0001
0002
E591
0001
0002
E592
Punch motor
error
0001
Punch dust
sensor error
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
horizontal
registration
sensor error
At time of
punch motor
initial
operation, the
punch home
position sensor
is not detected
after the motor
has stopped.
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
shined.
Check the dust case full

sensor. Check the
punch driver PCB.
controller PCB.
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
not shined.
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
shined (trailing
edge sensor).
Check the paper

trailing edge sensor.
registration sensor.
PCB. Replace the
finisher controller
PCB.
Code
Detail
Items
Description
Remedial action
Paper trailing
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
not shined
(trailing edge
sensor).
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
shined
(horizontal
registration
sensor 1).
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
not shined
(horizontal
registration
sensor 1).
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
shined
(horizontal
registration
sensor 2).
Check the power trailing
code
E592
0002
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
0003
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
0004
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
0005
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error




Code
Detail
Items
Description
Remedial action
Paper trailing
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
when light is
not shined
(horizontal
registration
sensor 2).
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
shined
(horizontal
registration
sensor 3).
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
not shined
(horizontal
registration
sensor 3).
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
shined
(horizontal
registration
sensor 4).
code
E592
0006
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
0007
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
0008
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E592
0009
Paper trailing
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error



finisher control PCB.

Code
Detail
Items
Description
Remedial action
Paper trailing
There is an
error in the
voltage of light
reception
while light is
not shined
(horizontal
registration
sensor 4).
The light
reception
voltage HP
sensor does not
go off when
light is shined.

registration motor.
registration HP sensor.
PCB. Check the
finisher controller
PCB. Check the punch
shift mechanism.
code
E592
000A
edge sensor/
registration
sensor error
E593
0001
0002
Punch shift
motor error
The light
reception
voltage HP
sensor does not
go on while
light is not
shined.

Chapter 15
15.7 DADF Error Codes

15.7.1 Error Code in Detail (DF)
0008-1517
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570
T-15-18
Code
Detai
l code
E400
0001
Descriptio
n
Type
Remedy
Check sum
error
Disconnect and then

connect the connector.
Replace the reader
controller PCB.
Replace the ADF
controller PCB.
Reception
status error
Disconnect and then

Replace the reader
control PCB. Replace
the ADF control PCB.
Reception
interrupt error
Disconnect and then

Replace the reader
controlled PCB.
Replace the ADF
controller PCB.
The installed
DF is not of a
supported type.
Install an ADF that is

compatible with the
machine.
0002
DF
communica
tion error
0003
E490
0001
Wrong DF
15-82
Chapter 16Service Mode
Contents
Contents
16.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................ 16-1
16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections ....................................................................................... 16-2
16.1.3 Ending Service Mode .............................................................................................................................. 16-3
16.1.4 Back-Up................................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.1.5 Initial Screen............................................................................................................................................ 16-3
16.1.6 2nd/3rd Item Screen ................................................................................................................................ 16-4
16.1.7 4th Item Screen........................................................................................................................................ 16-4
16.2 DISPLAY ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.1 COPIER................................................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.1.1 Copier List ........................................................................................................................................ 16-6
16.2.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................ 16-13
16.2.2.1 Feeder List ...................................................................................................................................... 16-13
16.3 I/O ................................................................................................................................................................ 16-14
16.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................... 16-14
16.3.2 <DC-CON> ........................................................................................................................................... 16-15
16.3.3 <R-CON> .............................................................................................................................................. 16-19
16.3.4 <FEEDER> ........................................................................................................................................... 16-21
16.3.5 <SORTER> ........................................................................................................................................... 16-22
16.4 ADJUST ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-34
16.4.1 COPIER................................................................................................................................................. 16-34
16.4.1.1 Copier List ...................................................................................................................................... 16-34
16.4.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................ 16-44
16.4.2.1 FEEDER List.................................................................................................................................. 16-44
16.4.3 SORTER................................................................................................................................................ 16-45
16.4.3.1 Sorter List ....................................................................................................................................... 16-45
16.5 FUNCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 16-46
16.5.1 COPIER................................................................................................................................................. 16-46
16.5.1.1 Copier List ...................................................................................................................................... 16-46
16.5.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................ 16-59
16.5.2.1 Feeder List ...................................................................................................................................... 16-59
16.6 OPTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 16-63
16.6.1 COPIER................................................................................................................................................. 16-63
16.6.1.1 Copier List ...................................................................................................................................... 16-63
16.6.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................ 16-97
16.6.2.1 Feeder List ...................................................................................................................................... 16-97
16.6.3 SORTER................................................................................................................................................ 16-97
16.6.3.1 Sorter List ....................................................................................................................................... 16-97
16.6.4 BOARD ................................................................................................................................................. 16-98
16.6.4.1 Board List ....................................................................................................................................... 16-98
16.7 TEST ........................................................................................................................................................... 16-99
16.7.1 COPIER................................................................................................................................................. 16-99
16.7.1.1 Copier List ...................................................................................................................................... 16-99
16.8 COUNTER ................................................................................................................................................ 16-102
Contents
16.8.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................... 16-102

16.8.1.1 Copier List .................................................................................................................................... 16-102
Chapter 16
16.1 Outline
16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode
0007-8133
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine's service mode has a 3-layer screen construction: Initial screen, Level 1/2 screen, and Level 3 screen.
Its mode items are grouped into those used in regular maintenance work (Level 1 items) and those used in response
to faults (Level 2 items).
User screen
)(2,8)(
Reset key
Initial screen
(Level 1)
Initial screen
(Level 2)
)(2)
(Select an item.)
Main/intermediate
item screen
(Level 1)
(Select an item.)
Main/intermediate
item screen
(Level 2)
(Select a main item from the top of screen.)

(The corresponding intermediate items are
then displayed and can be selected.)
Sub-item screen
(Level 1)
(Select a main item from the top of screen.)

(The corresponding intermediate items are
then displayed and can be selected.)
Sub-item screen
(Level 1)
Sub-item screen
(Level 2)
Previous/next page
Sub-item screen
(Level 2)
Previous/next page
F-16-1
The machine's service mode is divided into the following 7 types:
16-1
Chapter 16
COPIER
FEEDER
DISPLAY
status indication mode
SORTER
I/O
BOARD
ADJUST
FUNCTION
input/output indication mode

adjustment mode
operation/inspection mode
OPTION
settings mode
TEST
test print mode
COUNTER
counter mode
F-16-2
16.1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections
0007-8135
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
If you want to execute a machine operation using a service mode item, be sure to disconnect all cables from an
external controller or a network before starting service mode. Particularly, if you are using a FUNCTION
(operation/inspection) mode item, the arrival of a print job from an external source can cause the machine to
malfunction, leading to damage.
1) Press the asterisk key "
" on the control panel.
2) Press the 2 and 8 keys of the keypad at the same time.

3) Press the asterisk key "
" on the control panel.
In response to the foregoing key operations, the machine will bring up the following Initial screen:
Copier's service mode

COPIER
ADF's service mode

only when installed.
Sorter's or finisher's service mode
only if installed; the absence
of a mode for a sorter prevents
the indication of the notation.
Optional board's service mode

only if installed
F-16-3
16-2
FEEDER
SORTER
BOARD
Chapter 16
16.1.3 Ending Service Mode
0007-8136
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

A press on the Reset key will bring back the Service Mode Initial screen.
Another press on the Reset key will end service mode, and bring back the User screen (standard screen).
If you used service mode (ADJUST, FUNCTION, OPTION), be sure to turn off and then on the main power
switch after ending service mode.
16.1.4 Back-Up
0007-8137
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

At time of shipment from the factory, all machines are adjusted individually, and adjustment values are recorded in
their respective service labels.
If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB, or if you have initialized the RAM, the
adjustment values (for ADJUST and OPTION) will return to their default settings. If there has been any change in a
service mode item, be sure to update its setting indicated on the service label. As necessary, make use of the space
in the service label (as when recording an item not found on the label).
- Service Label for the Reader Controller PCB (behind the left cover [1] of the reader unit)
- Service Label [2] for the Main Controller PCB/DC controller PCB (behind the front cover unit of the printer unit)
[1]
[2]
F-16-4
16.1.5 Initial Screen
0007-8138
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
16-3
Chapter 16
COPIER
Initial item
FEEDER
Touch to select
an item.
SORTER
BOARD
F-16-5
16.1.6 2nd/3rd Item Screen
0007-8139
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
Display
I/O
Adjust
Function
Option
Test
Counter
2nd item
Touch to select
an item.
VERSION
USER
ACC-STS
3rd item
ANALOG
CST-STS
Touch to select
an item.
JAM
ERR
F-16-6
16.1.7 4th Item Screen

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
16-4
0007-8140
Page
Display
I/O
Adjust Function Option
Counter
< READY >
< 1/3 >
<VERSION>
3rd
item
Test
DC-CON
Machine States
READY:
JAM:
SERVICE:
WAITING:
DOOR:
COPYING:
ERROR:
NO-TONER:
WTNR-FUL:
NO-PAPER:
ALERM:
IP
PANEL
ANAPRO
POWER
4th
item
PREV
ready for service/copy

paper jam present
service mode under way
operation (e.g., initial rotation) under way
cover open
copying under way
error present
toner absent
waste toner case full
paper absent
alarm condition present
+/-
NEXT
OK
Previous page
Next page
F-16-7
Display
I/O
Adjust Function Option
Reverses to indicate
selection
xxxxx
Counter
< READY >
< 1/3 >
<ADJ-XY>
ADJ-X
Test
yyyyy
{aaaaa
bbbbb}
numerical input range
value before change

input value
ADJ-X
PREV
NEXT
+/-
OK
stores input value
toggles between + and Stop
key: press it to stop the ongoing operation.
Clear
key: press to clear an input.
Start
key: press to start copying without leaving service mode.
F-16-8
Chapter 16
16.2 DISPLAYStatus Display Mode

16.2.1 COPIER
16.2.1.1 Copier List
0007-9077
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<VERSION>
T-16-1
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
Sub-item
Description
Level
ROM version of each circuit board

Marking style<R-CON XX.YY> XX : Version number ,YY : Development control number
- <--.--> if no circuit boards are connected.
16-6
DC-CON
ROM version of the DC controller circuit board
R-CON
ROM version of the reader controller circuit board
PANEL
ROM version of the CPU circuit of the operator panel
POWER
ROM version of the composite power circuit board
FEEDER
ROM version of the DADF controller circuit board
SORTER
ROM version of the finisher controller circuit board
FAX
ROM version of the fax board
NIB
Version of the network software
SDL-STCH
ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller circuit board
MN-CONT
ROM version of the main controller circuit board
DIAG-DVC
ROM version of the self-diagnostic device
RUI
Version of the remote UI
PUNCH
Version of the punch unit
LANG-EN
Version of the English language file
LANG-FR
Version of the French language file
LANG-DE
Version of the German language file
LANG-IT
Version of the Italian language file
LANG-JP
Version of the Japanese language file
JAVA-VM
Version of JavaVM in bootable
MEAP
Version of the MEAP Description on the hard disk
Chapter 16
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Sub-item
Description
Level
OCR-CN
Version of the simple-font Chinese OCR
OCR-JP
Version of the Japanese OCR
OCR-KR
Version of the Korean OCR
OCR-TW
Version of the full-font Chinese OCR
BOOTROM
Boot ROM version of the main controller circuit board

Marking style: xx.yy_z
z indicates the boot ROM type.

LANG-CS
Version of the Czech language file
LANG-DA
Version of the Danish language file
LANG-EL
Version of the Greek language file
LANG-ES
Version of the Spanish language file
LANG-ET
Version of the Estonian language file
LANG-FI
Version of the Finnish language file
LANG-HU
Version of the Hungarian language file
LANG-KO
Version of the Korean language file
LANG-NL
Version of the Dutch language file
LANG-NO
Version of the Norwegian language file
LANG-PL
Version of the Polish language file
LANG-PT
Version of the Portuguese language file
LANG-RU
Version of the Russian language file
LANG-SL
Version of the Slovenian language file
LANG-SV
Version of the Swedish language file
LANG-TW
Version of the full-font Chinese language file
LANG-ZH
Version of the simple-font Chinese language file
LANG-BU
Version of the Bulgarian language file
LANG-CR
Version of the Croatian language file
LANG-RM
Version of the Rumanian language file
LANG-SK
Version of the Slovak language file
LANG-TK
Version of the Turkish language file
<ACC-STS>
16-7
T-16-2
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
Sub-item
FEEDER
Description
DADF connection status
0: Not connected 1: Connected
SORTER
Level
1
Finisher and punch unit connection status

Sorter type 0: None 1: Finisher 2: Saddle finisher
Punch type 0: None 1: 2 holes 2: 2/3 holes 3: 4 holes (fr) 4: 4 holes
(sw)
DECK
Paper deck connection status

CARD
Card reader connection status

0: Card reader connected with no card inserted
1: Card reader not connected or connected with card inserted
(1: Ready to copy, 0: Not ready to copy)

DATA-CON
Copy data controller connection status

RAM
Capacity of the memory on the main controller circuit board 256 MB,
512 MB
COINROBO
Coin vendor connection status

NIB
Network board connection status

0: No board connected
1: Ethernet board connected
2: Token ring board connected

3: Ethernet board and token ring board connected
PS/PCL
NETWARE
Not used
Netware firmware installation status
0: Not installed 1: Installed
SEND
Send function addition status

0: Send function not added 1: Send function added
PDL-FNC1/2
1
1
Valid PDL
0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111 (0:OFF,1:ON)
b31 to b16 for PDL-FNC1
b15 to b0 for PDL-FNC2
b31: BDL, b30: PS, b29: PCL, b28: PDF, b27: LIPS, b26: N201, b25:
I5577, b24: ESC/P, b23: HPGL, b22: HPGL2, b21: IMAGING, b20:
KS, b19 to b0: Reserved
HDD
Model name of the hard disk drive
Chapter 16
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

Sub-item
PCI1/2/3
Description
Level
PCI1/2/3 board name

Not connected: Hyphen (-) displayed
Connected: Board name displayed
<ANALOG>
T-16-3
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
Sub-item
Description
Level
TEMP
In-machine temperature (environment sensor): Unit: deg C
HUM
In-machine humidity (environment sensor): Unit: %RH
ABS-HUM
Water content (environment sensor): Unit: g
DR-TEMP
Photoconductor drum ambient temperature (drum sensor): Unit: deg C
FIX-C
Fixing heater temperature (main thermistor): Unit: deg C
FIX-E
Fixing heater edge temperature (sub-thermistor): Unit: deg C
<CST-STS>
T-16-4
COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
Sub-item
WIDTH-MF
Description
Paper width on the manual feedtray
Unit: mm
Level
2
<JAM>
16-9
Chapter 16
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
F-16-9
Touch an arbitrary jam display screen to see details about the jam.
(1) To previous page
(2) To next page
(3) Jam sequential number
(4) Jam type
(5) Corresponding sensor
(6) To next jam screen
(7) To previous jam screen
<No.> Jam sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest jam has the greatest number.)
<DATE> Jam occurrence date
<TIME1> Jam occurrence time
<TIME2> Jam reset time
<L>Location of the jam: 0 - 2 (0:host machine, 1:Feeder, 2:Finisher)
<CODE>Jam Code
<P> Paper feed position
1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3: Cassette 3, 4: Cassette 4, 5: Side paper deck, 6: Manual feed tray, 7: Duplex section
<CNTR> Software counter value of the paper feed stage
<SIZE> Paper size
<ERR>
16-10
Chapter 16
F-16-10
<No.> Error sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest error has the greatest number.)
<DATE> Error occurrence date
<TIME1> Error occurrence time
<TIME2> Error reset time
<CODE> Error code
<DTL> Error detail code (0000 for none)
<L> Error location
0: Main controller 1: DADF 2: Finisher 3: Not used 4: Reader unit 5: Printer unit
6: Various PDL board 7: Fax board
<P> Not used
<HV-STS>
T-16-5
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS
Sub-item
PRIMARY
Description
Primary charge current at photoconductor drum Registrationance
detection control (APVC) Unit: uA
Leve
1
TR
Transfer current setting for the job executed last Unit: uA
BIAS
Developing bias setting for the job executed last Unit: V
TR-V
Voltage at transfer charging roller Registrationance detection

control (ATVC) Unit: V
<CCD>
16-11
Chapter 16
T-16-6
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
Sub-item
Description
Level
TARGET-R
Red shooting target value
OFST
CCD offset level adjustment value
GAIN
CCD gain level adjustment value
MFIL
Main-scan MTF correction index
SFIL
Subscan MTF correction index
<SENSOR>
T-16-7
COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR
Sub-item
DOC-SZ
Description
Document size detected by the document size sensor
Level
2
<ALARM-2>
F-16-11
<No.> Alarm sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest alarm has the greatest number.)
<DATE> Alarm occurrence date
<TIME1> Alarm occurrence time
<TIME2> Alarm reset time
<CODE> Alarm location code and alarm code
<DTL> Alarm detail code
<CNTR> Total counter value at alarm occurrence
<ENVRNT>
Environmental log display
Changes of [In-machine temperature (deg C)/humidity (%) / Fixing roller surface (center) temperature (deg C) are
displayed as log data.
16-12
Chapter 16
Remarks: The data acquisition cycle can be set at COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ENVP-INT in Service Mode.
F-16-12
T-16-8
Item
Description
No.
Error sequential number: (The oldest error has the greatest number.)
DATE
Data acquisition date
TIME
Data acquisition time
D+deg C
In-machine temperature
E+%
In-machine humidity
F+deg C
Fixing roller surface temperature
16.2.2 FEEDER
16.2.2.1 Feeder List
0007-9922
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

FEEDER >DISPLAY
T-16-9
FEEDER >DISPLAY
Sub-item
Description
Level
FEEDSIZE
Document size detected by the feeder
TRY-
Distance between document width detection slides (Paper width
WIDE
detection [mm])
16-13
Chapter 16
16.3 I/O I/O Display Mode

16.3.1 Outline
0008-0893
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The figures below show the COPIER>I/O screen and the next pages describe the items (necessary items for market
services only).
Display
I/O
Adjust
Function
Option
Test
Counter
Option
Test
Counter
DC-CON
R-CON
FEEDER
SORTER
MN-CONT
F-16-13
<Screen interpretation>
Display
I/O
<DC-CON>
Adjust
Function
< 1/3 >
P001 xxxxxxxx
P002 xxxxxxxx
P003 xxxxxxxx
P004 xxxxxxxx
P005 xxxxxxxx
P006 xxxxxxxx
P007 xxxxxxxx
P008 xxxxxxxx
0
7
F-16-14
16-14
< READY >
Chapter 16
16.3.2 <DC-CON>
0008-1403
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
T-16-10
Address
P001
P002
P003
P004
P005
Bit
Display contents
Remarks
0-1
For development
Fixing motor FG output signal
Polygon motor FG output signal
4-7
For development
8-15
Not used
0-1
For development
2-3
Not used
4-5
For development
Thermistor: Overheat
0:Relay OFF
High-voltage board high voltage reset
0:High voltage reset
detection
detection
8-15
Not used
0-7
For development
8-15
Not used
0-7
For development
8-15
Not used
0-5
Not used
High-voltage board high voltage reset
0:High voltage reset
request
request
For development
8-15
Not used
16-15
P006
Cassette 1 feed motor current switching 0
Fixing motor deceleration signal
Fixing motor acceleration signal
Thermistor pull-up resistor switching
1:At low temperature
Fan half-speed switching signal
1:Half speed
8-15
Not used
P007
0-15
Not used
P008
0-2
For development
Laser power select
Main motor
1:ON
5-7
For development
8-15
Not used
0-5
Not used
Polygon motor acceleration signal
7-15
For development
P010
0-7
Not used
P011
0-7
Not used
P012
0-7
Not used
P013
0-7
Not used
P014
0-7
Not used
P015
0-7
Not used
P016
0-7
Not used
P017
0-7
For development
P018
0-7
For development
P009
P019
Manual feed clutch
1:ON
Registration clutch
1:ON
Sleeve clutch
1:ON
Duplex transport clutch
1:ON
(iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F model only)
P020
1:Detected
Cassette 2 paper sensor
1:No paper
Cassette 2 paper level A sensor
1Half or less
Cassette 2 paper level B sensor
1:About 50 sheets or less
Polygon motor standby signal
1:STBY
Bottle rotation motor
1:ON
Hopper screw motor
1:ON
Pre-exposure board
1:Pre-exposure with large

quantity of light
First paper ejection motor current switching
0
5
First paper ejection motor current switching
1
6
Heat exhaust fan F
Pre-exposure light quantity switching
1:ON
1:Pre-exposure with
medium quantity of light
P021
Manual feed detection sensor
0:Paper present
Toner detection
1:Toner remaining
Duplex transport sensor
1:Detected
Heat exhaust fan F lock detection
0:Locked
4-7
For development
P022
0-7
For development
P023
Duplex motor current switching 10
Duplex motor current switching 11
Heat exhaust fan R
1:ON
For development
Waste toner sensor
0:Full
For development
Pre-exposure switching
1:Pre-exposure with small

quantity of light
For development
P024
0-7
For development
P025
0-3
For development
Pickup 1 solenoid
1:ON
Pickup 2 solenoid
1:ON
6-7
For development
P026
1-7
For development
P027
Door switch
1:OPEN
Pre-registration sensor
1:etected
For development
Heat exhaust fan R lock detection
For development
Main motor lock detection
0:Locked
Bottle power supply overcurrent detection
For development
0-4
For development
Cassette 1 paper sensor
1:No paper
Cassette 1 paper level A sensor
1:Half or less
Cassette 1 paper level B sensor
1:About 50 sheets or less
First paper ejection sensor
1:Detected
First paper ejection full sensor
0:Full
Fused paper ejection sensor
1:Detected
Front door sensor
0:OPEN
4-7
For development
0-1
For development
Paper feed door sensor
0:OPEN
Hopper level sensor
0:No toner
1:Detected
5-7
For development
P031
0-7
Not used
P032
0-7
Not used
P033
0-7
Not used
P034
0-7
Not used
P035
0-7
Not used
P028
P029
P030
0:Locked
Chapter 16
16.3.3 <R-CON>
0008-1274
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
T-16-11
Address
Bit
Address
Remarks
P001
Not used
For development
For development
For development
For development
Not used
For development
Size sensor drive signal
P002
Not used
24V power supply monitor signal
0:Normal
Optical motor drive signal
1: Forward 0:
1:ON
Reverse
P003
P004
For development
For development
13V power supply monitor signal
Not used
For development
For development
For development
For development
For development
LED control signal
For development
None
None
Document size detection 0
0:Normal
1:ON
0:Document present
16-19
Address
P005
P006
P007
P008
Bit
Address
Remarks
Document size detection1
0:Document present
0:Document present
0:Document present
Not used
For development
For development
Not used
0-3
For development
4-7
None
Not used
For development
For development
For development
ADF sensor interrupt input
0:In operation
Platen sensor interrupt input 0
1:Platen closed
HP sensor interrupt input
1:HP
Platen sensor interrupt input 1
1:Platen closed
For development
For development
For development
For development
Optical motor driver power saving
0:active
ADF feed motor clock interrupt input
Repetition of 0/1
ADF read motor clock interrupt input
Repetition of 0/1
Not used
Lamp ON signal
1:ON
CIS drive ON signal
1:ON
For development
For development
For development
For development
Chapter 16
Address
P009
Bit
Address
For development
For development
0-4
For development
5-7
None
Remarks
16.3.4 <FEEDER>
0008-1275
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
T-16-12
Address
Bit
Display contents
Remarks
P001
Read sensor
1:Detected
Pre-registration sensor
1:Detected
Stamp solenoid
1:ON
Clutch
1:ON
Document load LED
1:ON
P003
0-7
P004
Document detection sensor
Cover sensor
For development
For development
For development
End sensor
P002
P005
1:Document present
1:Closed
1:Paper present
16-21
Chapter 16
Address
Bit
Display contents
Remarks
Length sensor 2
1:Paper present
Length sensor 1
1:Paper present
A4/LTR judgment sensor
1:Paper present
Paper ejection sensor
P006
0-7
For development
P007
0-7
P008
0-7
P009
0-7
P010
0-7
For development
P011
0-7
For development
1:Paper present
16.3.5 <SORTER>
0008-1276
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
T-16-13
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P001
STACKER
Entry transport motor A
Entry transport motor B
Entry transport motor A-
Entry transport motor B-
Entry transport motor current switching
0:ON
0
5
Entry transport motor current switching
0:ON
1
6
Entry transport/bundle ejection motor
1:ON
standby signal
P002
16-22
STACKER
Common solenoid ON signal
Punch transport motor A
0:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
Punch transport motor A-
Punch transport motor B
Punch transport motor B-
Punch transport motor current
1:ON
switching 0
5
Punch transport motor current
1:ON
switching 1
P003
P004
P005
STACKER
STACKER
STACKER
Tray 2 motor clock
Tray 1 motor clock
For development
For development
For development
For development
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Saddle connection detection signal
Not used
Oscillating HP sensor
1:ON
Top cover sensor
0:ON
Front cover sensor
0:ON
Front cover interlock sensor
1:ON
Gear change HP sensor
1:ON
Not used
For development
For development
Punch send request signal
0:ON
Saddle 13VON signal
1:ON
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
0:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P006
P007
P008
P009
STACKER
STACKER
STACKER
STACKER
Punch connection sensor
0:ON
Not used
Not used
Punch motor standby
1:ON
Entry sensor(IRQ0)
1:ON
Paper rear end sensor(IRQ1)
1:ON
Punch communication input(IRQ2)
0:ON
Not used
Tray proximity sensor
0:ON
Tray 2 area sensor 1
0:ON
0:ON
0:ON
Tray 2 paper detection sensor
1:ON
Tray 2 paper surface sensor
1:ON
Entry motor clock input
Bundle ejection motor clock input
1:ON
Tray 3 connection sensor
0:ON
High-quality paper sensor
1:ON
Tray 1 interlock detection sensor
1:ON
0:ON
0:ON
0:ON
1:ON
Tray 1 shift motor CW
0:ON
Tray 1 shift motor enable
1:ON
Tray 1 shift motor power switching 0
0:ON
0:ON
Tray 2 shift motor CW
0:ON
Tray 2 shift motor enable
1:ON
0:ON
0:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P010
STACKER
0
1
Not used
Oscillating pressure motor power
0:ON
switching 0
2
Oscillating pressure motor phase-A

pulse output
Oscillating pressure motor phase-B

pulse output
P011
P012
P013
STACKER
STACKER
STACKER
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Entry roller spaced solenoid
For development
For development
Buffer roller spaced solenoid
1:ON
Transport path sensor
1:ON
Not used
Not used
Not used
Gear change phase A
Gear change phase B
Gear change motor current switching 0
0:ON
Gear change motor current switching 1
0:ON
Not used
For development
For development
For development
For development
Pre-alignment HP sensor
1:ON
Pre-alignment HP sensor
1:ON
Processing tray paper detection sensor
1:ON
Rear-end assist HP sensor
1:ON
Not used
1:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P014
STACKER
Not used
Not used
Post-alignment motor phase A
Post-alignment motor phase B
Post-alignment motor current switching
0:ON
P015
STACKER
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Pre-alignment phase A
Pre-alignment phase B
Pre-alignment motor current switching
0:ON
0
3
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
T-16-14
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P016
STACKER
Rear-end assist phase A
Rear-end assist phase B
Rear-end assist motor current switching
0:ON
Rear-end assist motor current switching
0:ON
Rear-end assist standby
Not used
Not used
Not used
1:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P017
P018
STACKER
STACKER
Stapler slide standby
1:ON
Stapler CW
1:ON
Stapler CCW
1:ON
Not used
Stapler slide phase A
Stapler slide phase B
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Stapler HP sensor
1:ON
Staple Ready signal
1:ON
Staple Present signal
1:ON
Stapler connection signal
0:ON
Stapler slide HP sensor
1:ON
Stapler - alignment plate interference
1:ON
sensor
P019
STACKER
Stapler slide current switching 0
0:ON
Stapler slide current switching 1
0:ON
Under-bundle roller clutch
1:ON
Shutter clutch
1:ON
First paper ejection roller spaced
1:ON
solenoid
P020
STACKER
Buffer paper rear-end press solenoid
1:ON
Bundle-out motor current switching 1
0:ON
Bundle-out motor current switching 0
0:ON
Bundle-out motor phase A
Bundle-out motor phase B
Bundle-out motor phase A-
Bundle-out motor phase B-
Ejection-position paper detection sensor
1:ON
Scalable interlock
1:ON
Shutter HP sensor
1:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P021
P022
P023
P024
STACKER
STACKER
STACKER
SADDLE
Oscillating guide interlock
1:ON
DIPSW_8
0:ON
DIPSW_7
0:ON
DIPSW_6
0:ON
DIPSW_5
0:ON
DIPSW_4
0:ON
DIPSW_3
0:ON
DIPSW_2
0:ON
DIPSW_1
0:ON
PUSU switch 1
0:ON
PUSU switch 2
0:ON
PUSU switch 3
0:ON
Not used
5V detection signal
1:ON
24V detection signal
0:ON
Not used
Fan error detection signal
0:ON
FAN ON
1:ON
LED1
0:ON
LED2
0:ON
LED3
0:ON
FIN internal power supply ON
0:ON
Not used
Not used
Return roller spaced solenoid
Guide motor phase A
Guide motor phase B
Guide motor current switching
Saddle transport motor current

switching
Saddle transport motor phase A
Saddle transport motor phase B
Saddle transport motor phase A-
0:ON
0:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P025
SADDLE
Saddle transport motor phase B-
Alignment motor phase A
Alignment motor phase B
Alignment motor current switching
0:ON
Paper positioning motor current
0:ON
switching
P026
P027
SADDLE
SADDLE
Paper positioning motor phase A
Paper positioning motor phase B
For development
For development
Not used
For development
Not used
For development
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Stapler current detection signal
1:ON
Stapler current detection signal
1:ON
Paper ejection cover sensor connector
0:ON
open
P028
SADDLE
Front cover sensor connector open
0:ON
Butting plate HP connector open
0:ON
Folding roller guide HP connector open
0:ON
Saddle stapler unit connector open
0:ON
Butting plate TOP connector open
0:ON
Inside staple detection
1:ON
Front staple detection
1:ON
Front stapler motor reverse rotation
0:ON
signal
3
Transport motor driver standby signal
Not used
0:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P029
P030
SADDLE
SADDLE
Not used
Not used
Not used
Front cover open - 24V down detection
1:ON
Entry cover open - 24V down detection
1:ON
Folding motor forward rotation signal
1:ON
Folding motor reverse rotation signal
1:ON
Folding motor clock sensor
1:ON
Butting motor clock sensor
1:ON
Stapler HP sensor
1:ON
Stapler HP sensor
1:ON
Paper positioning plate HP sensor
0:ON
Folding roller guide HP sensor
1:ON
Entry cover open detection
0:ON
Saddle stapler open detection
1:ON
Butting plate HP sensor
1:ON
Butting plate TOP sensor
1:ON
Not used
Transport clock
T-16-15
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P031
SADDLE
Saddle tray paper detection sensor
0:ON
Paper positioning section paper
0:ON
detection sensor
P032
SADDLE
Crescent roller HP sensor
0:ON
Saddle paper ejection path sensor
0:ON
Saddle path (upstream) sensor
1:ON
Saddle path (midstream) sensor
1:ON
Saddle path (downstream) sensor
1:ON
Saddle path sensor
1:ON
Butting motor enable signal
1:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
Butting motor forward rotation signal
1:ON
Butting motor reverse rotation signal
1:ON
Folding roller HP sensor
1:ON
Front door open detection sensor
0:ON
Paper ejection cover open detection
0:ON
sensor (photosensor)
6
Saddle alignment HP sensor
0:ON
Paper ejection cover open and 24V
1:ON
down detection
P033
P034
P035
SADDLE
SADDLE
SADDLE
Entry flapper solenoid
1:ON
Saddle path switching flapper 1
1:ON
Saddle path switching flapper 2
1:ON
Intermediate transport solenoid
1:ON
Not used
Not used
Entry path sensor
Not used
Inside stapler motor forward rotation
0:ON
Inside stapler motor reverse rotation
0:ON
Front stapler motor forward rotation
0:ON
Not used
Folding roller HP connector open
Not used
Not used
Not used
DIPSW_1
0:ON
DIPSW_2
0:ON
DIPSW_3
0:ON
DIPSW_4
0:ON
DIPSW_5
0:ON
DIPSW_6
0:ON
DIPSW_7
0:ON
DIPSW_8
0:ON
1:ON
0:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P036
P037
P038
P039
SADDLE
SADDLE
PUNCHER
PUNCHER
Not used
Not used
Push switch 1
0:ON
5V detection signal
0:ON
24V detection signal
0:ON
Not used
Not used
Not used
POWER_ON
1:ON
LED1
1:ON
LED2
1:ON
LED3
1:ON
LEDY
0:ON
TRAY_MTR_CUR
0:ON
TRAY_MTR_B
0:ON
TRAY_MTR_A
0:ON
DIPSW1
0:ON
DIPSW2
0:ON
DIPSW3
0:ON
PCH-OUT
Rear-end sensor
Punch encoder clock
Punch HP sensor
For development
For development
For development
1:ON
0:ON
Address
Controller
Bit
Display contents
Remark
s
P040
P041
P042
P043
PUNCHER
PUNCHER
PUNCHER
PUNCHER
For development
For development
For development
For development
Horizontal registration HP sensor
1:ON
Horizontal registration motor STB
0:ON
Punch motor CCW
0:ON
Punch motor CW
0:ON
DIPSW4
0:ON
Horizontal registration motor CUR
0:ON
For development
LED1
For development
For development
LED2
0:ON
Front cover sensor
0:ON
For development
PUSHSW2
0:ON
PUSHSW1
0:ON
Top cover sensor
0:ON
0:ON
Chapter 16
16.4 ADJUSTAdjustment Mode

16.4.1 COPIER
0007-9190
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<AE>
T-16-16
COPIER > ADJUST > AE
Sub-
Description
item
AETBL
Level
Adjusting the character density at image density adjustment

<Setting range> 1 to 9 (Default: 5)
Setting a greater value makes characters darker.
Setting a smaller value makes characters lighter.

If RAM on the reader controller circuit board has been cleared, enter the
value from the service label.
<ADJ-XY>
T-16-17
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
Sub-item
Description
Level
Adjusting the mage read start position

- If RAM on the reader controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been
replaced, enter the value from the service label.
- If the setting of this item has been changed, enter the new value into the service label.
ADJ-X
Adjusting the optical image head position (image read start position in
the subscan direction)
Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0.1 mm
backward.
16-34
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY

Sub-item
ADJ-Y
Description
Level
Adjusting the CCD read start cell position (image read start position in
the main scan direction)
1

outward.
ADJ-S
Adjusting the optical shading measuring position

Increasing the value by 1 shifts the shading measuring position 0.1 mm

forward.
ADJ-Y-DF
Adjusting the main scan position at DF flow read

outward.
STRD_POS
Adjusting the CCD read start position at DF flow read

Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0.1 mm to
left.
Original
Increase the setting

(so that the read start
position moves toward
the trailing edge).
Decrease the setting

position moves toward
the leading edge).
CIS Unit
F-16-15
Chapter 16
Decrease the setting

position moves toward the rear).
Read start position
Increase the setting

(so that the read
start position moves
toward the front).
Original
F-16-16
<CCD>
T-16-18
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
Sub-item
MTF-MG
Description
Level
Entering a main-scan MTF correction value

- If the CIS unit has been replaced, enter the value from the label affixed
to the CIS unit.
- If RAM on the reader controller circuit board has been cleared or the
board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
- If the setting of this item has been changed, enter the new value into the
service label.
DFTAR-R
Entering a shading target value (red) when DF is in use (Ordinary

document read position)
If an image error (attributable to a dirty chart or other) has occurred after

the execution of COPIER>FUNCTION>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2, enter
factory measurement data in this mode.
DFTAR2-
Entering a shading target value (red) when DF is in use (Secondary
document read position)

If an image error (attributable to a dirty chart or other) has occurred after
the execution of COPIER>FUNCTION>DF-WLVL2, enter factory
measurement data in this mode.
<LASER>
16-36
Chapter 16
T-16-19
COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
Sub-item
LA-OFF
Description
Level
Adjusting the rear-end laser OFF position

<Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0)
If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the

LA-
Entering a delay value after laser unit displacement (Matching the
DELAY
laser main scan)

1
<Setting range> 360 to 440

Enter the delay value peculiar to the unit affixed to the unit at laser unit
replacement.
POWER
Adjusting the laser power


<DEVELOP>
T-16-20
COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP
Sub-item
DE-OFST
Description
Level
Entering an offset value for the developing bias DC

Setting a greater value increases the density.
<DENS>
16-37
Chapter 16
T-16-21
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
Sub-item
Description
DENS-
Correcting the image (copy/print) density
ADJ
The F-value table is corrected if an image becomes fogged or
Level
blurred.
Setting a greater value reduces fogging.
Setting a smaller value reduces blurring.

board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service
label.
<BLANK>
T-16-22
COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
Sub-item
Description
BLANK-T
Entering an adjustment value for the chipping width at the front of
Level
an image
Setting a greater value increases the chipping width.

BLANK-B
Entering an adjustment value for the chipping width at the rear of an

image
Setting a greater value increases the chipping width.
<HV-PRI>
16-38
Chapter 16
T-16-23
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
Sub-item
OFST1DC
Description
Level
Entering an adjustment value for primary charge DC offset 1

If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board
itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Note: If the compound power circuit board has been replaced, enter the
value from the label affixed to the casing of the new compound power
circuit board.
OFST1AC
Entering an adjustment value for primary charge AC offset 1

Note: If the compound power circuit board has been replaced, enter the
value from the label affixed to the casing of the new compound power
circuit board.
<HV-TR>
T-16-24
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
Sub-item
TR-OFST
Description
Level
Entering an output adjustment value for transfer charge current offset


TR-SPP
Entering an output adjustment value for thick-paper transfer bias (for

simplex printing on thick paper and duplex printing on the 1/2 side)
- Increasing the value is very effective.
1
TR-TP-TM
Adjusting the time of applying weak bias to the transfer tip

<Setting range> 0 to 127 (Default: 0) (Unit: 2 ms)

16-39
Chapter 16
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

Sub-item
TR-TP-LV
Description
Level
Adjusting the level of applying weak bias to the transfer tip

<Setting range> -50 to 50 (Default: 0) (Unit: %)

2TR-TGT1
to 2TRTGT8
Setting an offset value for the paper sharing voltage in ATVC

<Setting range> -10 to 10
(Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM

clearance: 0)
TR-PPR1 to
TR-PPR8
Setting a paper type at ATVC setting

(Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM
clearance: 0)
1: Plain paper (Default), 2: thick paper, 3: envelope, 4: tracing paper,
5: OHP transparency, 6: Postcard, 7: Label paper, 8: Bond paper
TR-ENV1
to TRENV8
Setting environment at ATVC setting

1: Category A (low temperature) (Default), 2: Category B (room

temperature), 3: Category C (high temperature)
TR-DUP1 to
TR-DUP8
Setting simplex paper feed mode at ATVC setting

<Setting range>1to 4
1: Simplex (Default), 2: Auto duplex feed, 3: Multiple simplex feed, 4:

Multiple duplex feed
<FEED-ADJ>
T-16-25
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
Sub-item
REGIST
Description
Level
Adjusting the registration roller clutch ON timing

Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image 0.1 mm forward.
label.
16-40

Sub-item
LOOP-CST
Description
Level
Adjusting the registration loop amount at cassette paper feed

label.
LOOP-MF
Adjusting the registration loop amount at cassette paper feed

label.
ADJ-REFE
Adjusting the horizontal registration at paper re-feed (Small

paper)
- If the image is deviated to this side, increase the value.

label.
LOOPREFE
Adjusting the registration loop amount at duplex paper feed

label.
RG-HF-SP
Adjusting the registration clutch ON timing

label.
ADJ-RE-L
Adjusting the horizontal registration at paper re-feed (Large

paper)
- If the image is deviated to this side, increase the value.

label.
LOOP-THK
Adjusting the registration loop amount at thick-paper feed

2
LOOP-SP
Adjusting the registration loop amount at special-paper feed

2
Chapter 16

Sub-item
LOOP-ENV
Description
Level
Adjusting the registration loop amount at envelope feed from a

cassette
<CST-ADJ>
T-16-26
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
Sub-item
MF-A4R
Description
Level
Entering the basic paper width of the manual feed tray (A4R)
For replacing the paper with detection VR or registering a new value

for the firs time, this service mode shall be executed by
FUNCTION>CST.
MF-A6R
Entering the basic paper width of the manual feed tray (A6R)

FUNCTION>CST.
MF-A4
Entering the basic paper width of the manual feed tray (A4)
FUNCTION>CST.
<FIXING>
16-42
Chapter 16
T-16-27
COPIER > ADJUST > FIXING
Sub-item
Description
FX-FL-SP
Entering a fine adjustment value for the fixing film speed when plain
Level
paper is used.
Make a fine adjustment of the target control speed for the fixing film
speed when plain paper is used.
<Setting range> -3 to 3 (Default: 0) (Unit: ms)

FX-FL-TH
Entering a fine adjustment value for the fixing film speed when thick
paper is used.
speed when thick paper is used.

FX-FL-
Entering a fine adjustment value for the fixing film speed when low-
LW
speed plain paper is used.

speed when low-speed plain paper is used.

<MISC>
T-16-28
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
Sub-item
Description
IMG-
Entering a fine adjustment value for the image delay in the subscan
DLY
direction
Level
Make a fine adjustment of the image delay in the subscan direction when
image data is transferred from the controller board to the DCON board.
iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F: +23 (Default)

iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F: +35 (Default)
16-43
Chapter 16
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

Sub-item
Description
Level
C1/2/3/4-
Entering a horizontal registration adjustment value for Cassette 1/2/3/4
ADJ-Y
Enter a laser write start position for paper fed from Cassette 1/2/3/4
2
according to the registered numeric value.

MF-ADJ-
Entering a horizontal registration adjustment value for the multiple
manual feed tray

Enter a laser write start position for paper fed from the multiple manual
feed tray according to the registered numeric value.

DK-ADJ-
Entering a horizontal registration adjustment value for the side paper
deck
Enter a laser write start position for paper fed from the side paper deck
according to the registered numeric value.

FRAME-
Entering a fine adjustment value in the subscan direction for zooming
Enter an image zooming value in the subscan direction according to the

2
registered numeric value.

<Setting range> -10 to 10 (-1% to 1%)
FRAME-
Entering a fine adjustment value in the main scan direction for zooming
Enter an image zooming value in the main scan direction according to

2
the registered numeric value.

<Setting range> -10 to 10 (-1% to 1%)
16.4.2 FEEDER
16.4.2.1 FEEDER List
0007-9921
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

FEEDER >ADJUST
T-16-29
FEEDER >ADJUST
Sub-item
16-44
Description
Level
Chapter 16
DOCST
Adjusting the front position of document image

<Adjustment method> Setting a greater value delays the image
front timing.
1
(Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after
RAM clearance: 0)
LA-
Adjusting the document transport speed at feeder flow read
SPEED
<Adjustment method> Setting a greater value increases the

speed (Reducing the image)
1
(Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after
RAM clearance: 0)
16.4.3 SORTER
16.4.3.1 Sorter List
0007-9953
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

SORTER > ADJUST
T-16-30
SORTER > ADJUST
Sub-item
Description
PNCH-
Adjusting the distance from the paper end to the
HLE
punched hole position
Level
1
(Value at shipping / Value after RAM clearance: 0)
16-45
Chapter 16
16.5 FUNCTION Operation/Inspection Mode

16.5.1 COPIER
0007-9317
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<INSTALL>
T-16-31
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
Sub-item
TONERS
Description
Level
Stirring toner in the developer at installation

<Operating procedure>
1. Select an item to reverse its display.
2. "Check the Developer" is displayed.
Check that the developer connector is connected.
3. Press the OK key to start operation. The operation automatically stops
after count-down.
<Reference>
"Check the Developer" is displayed to prevent the connector from being
disconnected when the developer is replaced. Therefore, this message is
not necessary when the machine is shipped with the developer for
installation.
STRD-
Automatically adjusting the CCD read position at flow read
POS
- This is necessary when DF is installed and when ADF is removed and

mounted again.
1) Select an item to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
- Adjustment automatically starts and stops.

2) Since the value is updated in the service mode,
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRD-POSenter the value into the service
label.
CARD
Installing and setting the card reader

Enter the card number (1 to 2001) and press the OK key. (One thousand
cards can be used from the input card number.)

Then the card management information (department ID and PIN) is
initialized.
E-RDS
16-46
for future expansion
Chapter 16
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

Sub-item
RGW-
Description
PORT
COM-
TEST
COM-
LOG
RGW-
Level
ADR
<CCD>
T-16-32
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
Sub-item
CCDADJ
Description
Level
Automatically adjusting CCD

1) Place about 10 or more sheets of standard white paper (whitest paper
used by the user, excluding color print paper) on the document table.
2) Select <CCD-ADJ> to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
3) Adjustment is executed automatically (about 15 seconds). During
adjustment, <ACTIVE> is displayed at the upper right of the screen.

4) The LED lamp (for document lighting) lights twice and the automatic
adjustment ends with <OK> displayed on the screen.
5) Since all items are updated in this service mode
(COPIER>ADJUST>CCD), enter the values into the service label.
DFWLVL1/
2
Adjusting the ADF white level (Platen scan/Flow read scan)

1) Place the user's usual paper on the document table and execute
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1: Read the white level in
Book mode (to check the transparency of the glass for Book mode).
2) Load the user's usual paper on DF and execute
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2: Read the white level in DF

(flow read) mode (to check the transparency of the glass for flow read).
(Reading both sides of the chart)
Front side read: Calculating DFTAR-R
Back side read: Calculating DFTAR2-R
Note: Both items shall be executed simultaneously.
LUTADJ2
Data 2 for CCD link correction
16-47
Chapter 16
<DENS>
T-16-33
COPIER > FUNCTION > DENS
Sub-
Description
item
WHITEME
Level
Automatically correcting the white level

1) Place about 10 or more sheets of standard white paper (the user's usual
paper) on the document table.

2) Select <WHITE-ME> to reverse the display. Then press the OK key.
3) The document lighting lamp scans once and the operation terminates.
PD-
Outputting a print pattern for automatic density adjustment in Character
DENS
mode
Note: Since binarizing is supported by the PD method in Character mode,
execute this mode to adjust the density automatically.
1
1) Select <PD-DENS> to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
2) Paper is fed from Cassette 2 and a 17-tone print pattern is output. This
print pattern is used in <PD-ME>.
PD-ME
Automatically adjusting the density in Character mode (Reading PDDENS output pattern)
1) Set the PD-DENS output pattern on the document table by noting the
following:
- Face the print side down.
- Orient the white (light) side of the 17-tone chart toward the vertical size
plate.
- Align the output pattern with the index inside left of the document table.
2) Select <PD-ME> to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
3) The document lighting lamp is turned ON and OFF for 13 automatic
scans.
<DPC>
16-48
Chapter 16
T-16-34
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
Sub-item
Description
D-
Controlling photoconductor drum resistance measurement (APVC)
GAMMA
Note: Execute this mode only in the following cases and skip it when
Level
unnecessary.
- Adjustment if the drum unit has been replaced
- Fault isolation if automatic copy density adjustment (PD-ME) has
ended abnormally
- Reference for checking the drum endurance
1) Select an item and press the OK key.
2) Automatic control terminates after outputting one blank copy.
3) Select DISPLAY>HV-STS>PRIMARY to display the
measurement results.
<CST>
T-16-35
COPIER > FUNCTION > CST
Sub-item
Description
MF-A4R
Registering the basic paper width of the manual feeder
MF-A6R
A4R width: 210 mm, A6R width: 105 mm, A4 width: 297 mm
MF-A4
For micro adjustment after basic width registration, select MF-A4R,
Level
MF-A6R, or MF-A4 from COP. COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ.

1) Place an A4R size document on the manual feed and align the size
guide with the A4R width.

2) Select (MF-A4R) in this service mode to reverse its display. Press
the OK key to register the numeric value after automatic adjustment.
3) Also about the A6R and A4 sizes, register the basic width by
following the steps of 1) and 2).
<FIXING>
16-49
Chapter 16
T-16-36
COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
Sub-item
NIP-CHK
Description
Level
Making output for measuring the fixing nip width automatically

1) Register Plain Paper or Recycled Paper for the manual feed tray.
(User mode: Setting Common Specifications>Registering Paper Type).
2) Place plain paper or recycled paper of the A4 (LTR) size on the
manual feed tray.
3) Select this service mode and press the OK key (to feed paper from
the manual feed tray).

4) The fed paper is held once by the fixing roller and ejected after about
10 seconds.
5) Check that the nip width of the ejected paper conforms to the
standard.
Note: This machine does not allow nip width adjustment. This item is
used for nip width checking only.
<PANEL>
T-16-37
COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
Sub-item
LCD-CHK
Description
Level
Checking the LCD display for missing dots

1) Select this item and press the OK key to start operation. The front of
the panel lights repeatedly in order of white, black, red, green, and blue.
(Check this lighting.)
2) Press the Stop key to terminate the operation.
LED-CHK
Checking LED lighting in the operating section

1) Select this item and press the OK key to start operation. The LED
lamps light sequentially.

2) Press LED-OFF to terminate the operation.
LED-OFF
Checking LED lighting in the operating section

1) Select this item to terminate LED-CHK operation.
16-50
Chapter 16
COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL

Sub-item
KEY-CHK
Description
Level
Checking key input

1) Select KEY-CHK to display the input key numbers and names.
2) Press a key to check. If the key is normal, the touchpanel displays the
corresponding key. (See the attached table.)
3) Select KEY-CHK again to exit from key input check.
TOUCHC
HK
Adjusting the coordinate positions on the analog touchpanel

- Align the press positions on the touchpanel and the coordinate
positions on the LCD section.
- If the LCD section has been replaced, execute this service mode.
1) Select TOUCHCHK to reverse its display. Then press the OK key.
2) Press sequentially the nine positive signs (+) that appear on the
touchpanel in order.
<Input Key Numbers and Names>

T-16-38
Key
Screen Display
0 to 9, #, and *
0 to 9, #, and *
Reset
RESET
Stop
STOP
User Mode
USER
Start
START
Clear
CLEAR
PIN
ID
Help
Counter Check
BILL
<PART-CHK>
16-51
T-16-39
COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
Sub-item
CL
Description
Level
Specifying a clutch to check its operation

(Range: 1 to 6)
1) Select this item.
2) Enter the code of the clutch from the ten-key pad.

4) Press CL-ON to check its operation.
CL-ON
Starting the clutch operation check

1) Select this item and press the OK key to repeat ON and OFF in
the following pattern:

0.5-second ON ->10-second OFF -> 0.5-second ON -> 10-second
OFF -> 0.5-second ON -> OFF
MTR
Specifying a motor to check its operation

(Range: 1 to 16)
2) Enter the code of the motor from the ten-key pad.

4) Press MTR-ON to check its operation.
MTR-ON
Starting the motor operation check


20-second ON -> OFF
SL
Specifying a solenoid to check its operation

(Range: 1 to 9)
2) Enter the code of the solenoid from the ten-key pad.

4) Press SOL-ON to check its operation.
SL-ON
Starting the solenoid operation check

0.5-second ON -> 5-second OFF -> 0.5-second ON -> 5-second
OFF -> 0.5-second ON -> OFF
Chapter 16
T-16-40
- Designation numbers and corresponding clutches
Multiple paper feed clutch (CL1)
Duplex transport clutch (iR2270/2270F/2870/
2870F only) (CL6)
Registration clutch (CL2)
Extraction clutch (deck) (CL1)
Developing sleep clutch (CL3)
Paper feed clutch (deck) (CL2)
T-16-41
- Designation numbers and corresponding motors
1
2
Polygon motor (M1)

Main motor (M2)
Fixing motor (M3)
Hopper screw motor (M12)

Cassette 3 paper feed motor (cassette
10
pedestal) (M1)
Cassette 4 paper feed motor (cassette
11
pedestal) (M2)
First paper ejection motor (M4)
12
Deck paper feed motor (deck) (M1)
Bottle rotation motor (M5)
13
Deck lifter motor (deck) (M2)
Cassette 1 paper feed motor (M6)
Cassette 2 paper feed motor (M7)
Duplex motor (iR3570/3570F/4570/

4570F only) (M10)
Second paper ejection motor (2/3 paper
14
ejection) (M1)
Third paper ejection motor (2/3 paper
15
ejection) (M2)
Buffer pass motor (M1)
16
T-16-42
- Designation numbers and corresponding solenoids
1
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (CL1)
Storage open solenoid (deck) (SL2)
Cassette 2 pickup solenoid (SL2)
First flapper solenoid (SL1)
4
5
Cassette 3 pickup solenoid (cassette

pedestal) (SL2)
Cassette 4 pickup solenoid (cassette
pedestal) (SL2)
Second flapper solenoid (2/3 paper

ejection) (SL2)
Second flapper solenoid (2/3 paper
ejection) (SL3)
Pickup solenoid (deck) (SL1)
<CLEAR>
16-53
T-16-43
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
Sub-item
ERR
Description
Level
Clearing an error code

(Object error code: E000/E001/E002/E003)
1) Select this item and press the OK key.

2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
DC-CON
Clearing RAM on the DC controller circuit board

The RAM is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and
ON.
1) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT to print out the
contents of the service mode.

4) Enter the P-PRINT output data as required.
R-CON
Clearing RAM on the reader controller circuit board

ON.
1) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT to print out the

JAM-HIST
Clearing the jam history

The jam history is cleared when the OK key is pressed.
1
ERR-HIST
Clearing the error history

The error history is cleared when the OK key is pressed.
1
PWD-CLR
Clearing the password of the system administrator set in user mode

The password is cleared when the OK key is pressed.
1

Sub-item
ADRS-BK
Description
Level
Clearing the address book on the reader controller circuit board

The address book is cleared when the main power switch is turned
OFF and ON.
1
CNT-
Clearing the service counter incremented by the main controller
MCON
circuit board
CNT-
Clearing a service counter incremented by the DC controller circuit
DCON
board
This applies to SORT, FIN-STPR, SADDLE, and SDL-STPL under
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2.
OPTION
Resetting a service mode (OPTION) to default (values after RAM

clearance)
The service mode is reset when the OK key is pressed.
This clears data in the main controller, DC controller, and reader
controller.
1) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT to print the
MMI
Clearing the following settings in User mode

- Backup data (user-defined values) for copy operations
- Backup data (user-defined values) of common settings
- Various backup data (user-defined values), excluding fax
The settings are cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF
and ON.
Chapter 16

Sub-item
MN-CON
Description
Level
Clearing RAM on the main controller circuit board

ON.
1) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT to print the

CARD
Clearing the card ID (department) related data

The card ID related data is cleared when the main power switch is
turned OFF and ON.
1
ALARM
Clearing the alarm log

The alarm log is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF
and ON.
1
SLT-CLR
Clearing the salutation setting


SND-STUP
Clearing the send-read settings

The send-read settings are cleared when the main power switch is
turned OFF and ON.
1
CA-KEY
Clearing the CA certificate and key pair

The CA certificate and key pair are cleared when the main power
switch is turned OFF and ON.
2
<MISC-R>
16-56
Chapter 16
T-16-44
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R
Sub-item
Description
SCANLAMP
Level
Lighting the LED lamp (for document lighting)

1

2) Press the OK key. The LED lamp (for document lighting) is
lit for three seconds.
<MISC-P>
T-16-45
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
Sub-item
P-PRINT
Description
Level
Printing out the service mode settings


2) Press the OK key to start printing.
USER-PRT
Printing out the user mode list


LBLPRNT
Printing out the service label

1) Load A4 or LTR paper on Cassette 1.

PRE-EXP
Checking the pre-exposure lamp (LED)

1) Press this item to reverse its display.
2) Press the OK key. After executing each operation for several
seconds, the machine stops automatically. (All lit)

Reference
If the lighting of the pre-exposure lamp gives a problem to the
photoconductor drum, rotate the drum.
16-57
Chapter 16
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

Sub-item
D-PRINT
Description
Level
Printing out the service mode (DISPLAY) contents

This mode outputs only the DISPLAY items (excluding ones output
by P-RPINT/LBL-PRINT/HIST-PRINT and ALARM).
1
ENV-PRT
Printing out the in-machine temperature & humidity and fixing

temperature change log
Changes of the in-machine temperature & humidity and the fixing
temperature (center) are printed as log data.
KEY-HIST
Printing out the operating section key input history


HIST-PRT
Printing out the jam history and error history


TRSDATA
Transferring memory received data to the box


2) Press the OK key to start data transfer.
<SYSTEM>
T-16-46
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
Sub-item
DOWNLO
AD
Description
Switching to Download mode
2) Press the OK button to enter Download mode.
16-58
Level
Chapter 16
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM

Sub-item
CHKTYPE
Description
Level
Specifying a partition number for executing HD-CHK

2) Select a partition number with the ten-key pad.
0: Entire HDD
1: Image accumulation area
2: General-purpose file (user-defined data/various log data/PDL spool
data/image data management information) storage area

3: PDL-related file storage area
4: Firmware/address book/file storage area
5: MEAP area
6: Address book area
Remarks: HD-CLEAR shall be indispensable for 4 and 6.
HDCHECK
Checking and restoring the partition specified by CHK-TYPE


3) The result (1:OK, 2:NG (hardware), 3:NG (software) restored/
alternative sector) is displayed.
HDCLEAR
Initializing the partition specified by CHK-TYPE


16.5.2 FEEDER
0007-9924
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

FEEDER >FUNCTION
16-59
T-16-47
FEEDER >FUNCTION
Sub-
Description
item
MTRCHK
Level
Checking the ADF motor and other individually

1) Press MTR-CHK to reverse its display.
2) Enter a part corresponding number from the ten-key
pad.

4) Press MTR-ON to check the motor operation.
<Setting range>
0 to 1
TRY-A4
Automatically adjusting document width detection by DF

(A4 width)
TRY-
A5R
(A5R width)
TRY-
LTR
(LTR width)
TRY-
LTRR
(LTRR width)
FEED-
Checking ADF paper feed operation
CHK
1) Press FEED-CHK to reverse its display.
pad.
4) Press FEED-ON to check ADF paper feed operation.
Paper feed mode
0: Simplex feed
1: Duplex feed
2: Simplex feed with stamping
3: Duplex feed with stamping
[Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after
RAM clearance: 0]
FEEDER >FUNCTION
Sub-
Description
item
CL-CHK
Level
Checking DF clutch operation

1) Press CL-CHK to reverse its display.
pad.
4) Press CL-ON to check DF clutch operation.
CL-ON
Starting clutch operation

Press CL-ON. Then press the OK key to start clutch
operation. Press the OK key again to stop the operation.
(The operation stops automatically in two seconds but the

status changes to STOP only when the OK key is pressed
again.)
SL-CHK
Checking ADF solenoid operation

1) Press SL-CHK to reverse its display.
pad.
4) Press SL-ON to check ADF solenoid operation.

Part corresponding number
0: Pressurizing solenoid
1: Stamping solenoid
[Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value
after RAM clearance: 0]
SL-ON
Starting solenoid operation

Operation specifications shall differ depending on the
model.
1) Press SL to reverse its display. Then press the OK key
to start solenoid operation.
2) Press the OK key again to stop the operation.
(The operation stops automatically in five seconds but the
again.)
FEEDER >FUNCTION
Sub-
Description
item
MTRON
Level
Starting motor operation

Operation specifications shall differ depending on the
model.
1) Press MTR-ON to reverse its display. Then press the
OK key to start motor operation.

2) Press the OK key again to stop the operation.
(The operation stops automatically in five seconds but the
again.)
ROLLCLN
Cleaning the ADF roller

While the roller is being rotated automatically by a motor,
press alcohol-moistened lens cleaning paper against the
roller for cleaning.
1) Press ROLL-CLN to reverse its display.

2) While the roller is rotating, press alcohol-moistened
lens cleaning paper against the roller for cleaning.
3) Press ROLL-CLN to reverse its display. Press the OK
key to stop the roller.
FEEDON
Checking ADF paper feed operation

1) Press FEED-ON and then the OK key to start paper
feed in the operation mode set by FEED-CHK.
Chapter 16
16.6 OPTION Machine Settings Mode

16.6.1 COPIER
0007-9547
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<BODY>
T-16-48
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
Sub-item
MODEL-SZ
Description
Lev
el
Switching regular resized display and ADF document size detection

<Setting range>
0: AB (6R5E) [Default]
1: INCH (5R4E)
2: A (3R3E)
3: AB/INCH (6R5E)
FIX-TEMP
Switching the plain paper down sequence table

Setting range
0: OFF [Default]
1: Priority to productivity, control temperature fixed at -10deg C
2: Control temperature fixed at -6deg C

4: Priority to fixing, control temperature fixed at +3deg C
5: Control temperature fixed at +6deg C
TRANS-SW
Switching transfer high-voltage control from constant current control to

constant voltage control
<Setting range>
0: No switching [Default], 1: Constant voltage mode 1, 2: Constant

voltage mode 2
16-63

Sub-item
TEMP-CON
Description
Lev
el
Switching thick-paper fixing temperature mode

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]

PRIAC-SW
Improving the image quality in case of a drum charging fault

Note: This setting is cleared if APVC is executed with a new drum unit
or if a service mode (FUNCTION>D-GAMMA) is executed.
<Setting range>
0: No UP [Default], 1: 50 mA UP, 2: 100 mA UP
TEMPCON2
Improving fixing (Increasing the fixing temperature)

Note: Valid for iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F only
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]

Sub-item
CONFIG
Description
Lev
el
Selecting several types of firmware installed on the hard disk and

switching the country, language, and paper size type of this machine
<Adjustment method>
XXYYZZAAXX: Country (UP), YY: Language (ja), ZZ(00) Destination,
AA(00): Paper size type
The display contents conform to the display method of
(COPIER>DISPLAY>USER>LANGUAGE). Enclosed in the brackets
are defaults. The country and language are only displayed.
1) Select <CONFIG>.
2) Select an item to reverse its display. Then press the + or - key to change
the contents.
3) Each time the + or - key is pressed, the contents change sequentially.
4) Display the intended contents at all items and press the OK key.
W/SCNR
Setting whether a scanner is present (Copy model)
<Setting range>
0: Printer model [Default]
1: Model with scanner
FTPTXPN
Specifying the send destination port (FTP) number

<Setting range>
0 to 65535 (Default: 21)

DFDST-L1
Adjusting the dust detection level when DF is used (Inter-paper

correction)
Setting a greater value makes it easy to detect even small particles.
1
<Setting range>
0 to 255
(0 to set this mode OFF) (Default: 205)
DFDST-L2
Adjusting the dust detection level when DF is used (Post-job detection)

Setting a greater value makes it easy to detect even small particles.
<Setting range>
0 to 255
(0 to set this mode OFF) (Default: 205)
CCD-LUT
Setting whether or not to use LUT for gain correction

0: Do not use (Default)
1: Use (One-point correction)
2: Do not use (Three-point correction)

Sub-item
ENVP-INT
Description
Lev
el
Setting the in-machine temperature & humidity and fixing temperature

log acquisition cycle
Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ENV-PRT and
COPIER>DISPLAY>ENVRNT to set the log acquisition cycles.
<Setting range>
0 to 480 <minute> (0 for no log acquisition)
Default: 60
BASE-SW
Switching from the MEAP-Full mode to the Base model

<Setting range>
0: OFF (Base model), 1: ON (Full model)

FIX-LOW
Improving fixing at low temperature

Note: Valid for iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F only
1
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default], 1: Low-temperature fixing improvement mode ON
SC-L-CNT
Switching the threshold value of the paper size (Large/Small) of the scan
counter
<Setting range>
0: Count B4 as the small size [Default]

1: Count B4 as the large size
FIX-CLN
Setting the timing at which the fixing pressure roller is cleaned

<Setting range>
0: No cleaning(Default), 1: Once every 500 sheets at 225deg C regulated
temperature and 60-second idling, 2: Once every 200 sheets at 225deg C

regulated temperature and 60-second idling, 3: Once every 100 sheets at
225deg C regulated temperature and 60-second idling
CPMKP-SW
Turning ON and OFF the sequence of reducing the copy speed to maintain
the fixing performance for copy images
2
<Setting range>
0: OFF, 1: ON
HUM-SW
Changing the charge output setting by humidity sensor

<Setting range>
0: Automatic control by humidity sensor [Default]
1 to 5: Fixed environment and deemed control corresponding to the
parameters of charging, development, and transfer

Sub-item
SCANSLCT
Description
Lev
el
Turning ON or OFF the function of calculating a scan area from the

selected paper size
<Setting range>
0: OFF (Determining the scan area by document detection)

1: ON (Determining the scan area by paper size)
SENS-CNF
Setting the arrangement of document detection sensors

<Setting range>
0: AB type [Default]
1: Inch type
2: A type
RAW-
Setting whether or not to print out received data with no change
DATA
If a received image has a problem, the problem is used to isolate the data
contents and image processing.
2
<Setting range>
0: Usual operation [Default]
1: Print out with no change
SHARP
Changing the sharpness level (Setting the central value)

<Setting range>
1 to 5 [Default: 3]
COTDPC-D
Saving the toner (Potential (VD) low)

<Setting range>
0: No saving [Default]
1: Down about 10%

2: Down about 20%
3: Down about 30%
RMT-LANG
Changing the remote UI language from web

<Adjustment method>
Select a language code with the + or - key.

IFAX-LIM
Limiting the number of output lines when a large amount of data has been
received by IFAX.
<Setting range>
0: No limit
0 to 999 [Default: 500]

Sub-item
DF-BLINE
Description
Lev
el
Taking corrective measures against a black line caused by dust on the

platen at flow read
<Setting range>
0: No corrective measures [Default]

1: Corrective measures
TEMP-TBL
Reserved
FIX-SMR
Taking corrective measures against smearing at fixing
<Setting range>
1: Lower the absolute value of developing bias Vdc by 20 V
2: Lower the absolute value of Vdc by 40 V

3: (Reserved)
FAN-EXTN
Setting the post-job fan extension mode

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
SMTPTXPN
Changing the SMTP send port number

<Setting range>
0 to 65535 (units of 1) [Default: 25]

SMTPRXPN
Changing the SMTP send port number

<Setting range>

POP3PN
Changing the POP receive port number

<Setting range>

RUI-DSP
Setting whether to display a copy screen for RUI (Option switch

conforming to the Disability Law)
<Setting range>
0: Do not display [Default]
1: Display

Sub-item
ORG-LGL
Description
Lev
el
Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF

This is targeted at LGL notified of by DF.
<Setting range>
0: LEGAL [Default]
1: FOOLSCAP
2: A-FOOLSCAP
3: FORIO
4: G-LEGAL
5: OFFICIO
6: E-OFFICIO
7: A-OFFICIO
8: B-OFFICIO
9: A-LEAGAL
10: M-OFFICIO
11: LEGAL
ORG-LTR

This is targeted at LTR notified of by DF.
<Setting range>
0: LTR [Default]
1:G-LTR
2:A-LTR
3:EXECTIVE
4:LTR
ORG-LTRR

This is targeted at LTR-R notified of by DF.
<Setting range>
0: LTR-R [Default]
1:G-LTR-R
2:A-LTR-R
3:OFFICIO
4:E-OFFICIO
5:EXECTIVE-R
6:LTR-R
ORG-LDR

This is targeted at LDR notified of by DF.
<Setting range>
0: LDR [Default]
1:A-LETTER
2:LDR

Sub-item
ORG-B5
Description
Lev
el

This is targeted at B5 notified of by DF.
<Setting range>
0: B5 [Default]
1: K-LEAGAL
2:B5
UI-BOX
Setting whether or not to display the box screen of the operating section
<Setting range>
0: Do not display
1: Display [Default]
UI-SEND
Setting whether or not to display the send screen of the operating section
<Setting range>
0: Do not display
UI-FAX
Setting whether or not to display the fax screen of the operating section
<Setting range>
0: Do not display
UI-EXT
Setting whether or not to display the extended screen of the operating

section
<Setting range>
0: Do not display
NEGA-GST
Making additional setting about the pre-exposure sequence (excluding

laser)
<Setting range>
0: Environmental control [Default]
1: Full
2: Slightly weak
3: Weak
NW-SPEED
Selecting the data transfer speed at service network connection

<Setting range>
0: Auto [Default]
1: 100Base-TX
2: 100Base-T

Sub-item
STS-PORT
Description
Lev
el
Turning the TOT synchronous command communication port ON or OFF

The port for Inquiry/Response (synchronous) command communication
in TUIF over TCP/IP is turned ON or OFF.
2
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
CMD-PORT
Turning the TOT asynchronous status communication port ON or OFF

The port for asynchronous status communication in TUIF over TCP/IP is
turned ON or OFF.
2
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
NS-CMD5
Limiting the use of CRAM-MD5 in SMTP authentication

This is set to limit the use of CRAM-MD5 in SMTP authentication
<Setting range>
0: Dependent on the SMTP server [Default]

1: Do not use
NS-GSAPI
Limiting the use of GSSAPI in SMTP authentication

This is set to limit the use of GSSAPI in SMTP authentication.
<Setting range>

1: Do not use
NS-NTLM
Limiting the use of NTLM in SMTP authentication

This is set to limit the use of NTLM in SMTP authentication.
<Setting range>

1: Do not use
NS-PLNWS
Limiting the use of PLAIN and LOGIN for SMTP authentication in an

environment of communication packet encryption
This is set to limit the use of PLAIN and LOGIN for SMTP authentication
in an environment where communication packets are encrypted
<Setting range>
1: Do not use

Sub-item
NS-PLN
Description
Lev
el
Limiting the use of PLAIN and LOGIN for SMTP authentication in an

environment
This is set to limit the use of PLAIN and LOGIN for SMTP authentication
in an environment where communication packets are not encrypted.
<Setting range>
1: Do not use
NS-LGN
Limiting the use of LOGIN for SMTP authentication

This is set to limit the use of LOGIN for SMTP authentication in an
environment where communication packets are encrypted
2
<Setting range>
1: Do not use
MEAP-PN
Changing the HTTP port number of the MEAP application

2
SVMD-ENT
Switching how to enter service mode

0: [User mode key] -> Simultaneous press of [2] and [*]-> [User mode]
(Default)
1: [User mode key] -> Simultaneous press of [4] and [9]-> [User mode]
SSH-SW
Turning the SSH server function ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
RMT-LGIN
Turning remote login to the SSH server ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
RE-PKEY
Turning the regeneration of the SSH server key ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
U-NAME
Setting a user name for connection to the SSH server

Setting value:
Up to 8 characters (half-size alphanumeric)
Chapter 16

Sub-item
U-PASWD
Description
Lev
el
Setting a user password for connection to the SSH server

Setting value:
Up to 8 characters (half-size alphanumerics)

DA-PORT
Turning the TOT asynchronous status communication port ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: CLOSE [Default]
1: OPEN (when DA is attached)
DA-CNCT
Setting DA connection
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
CHNG-STS
Setting the TOT status connection port number

<Setting range>
1 to 65535 [Default: 20010]

CHNGCMD
Setting the TOT status connection port number

<Setting range>
1 to 65535 [Default: 20000]

MEAP-DSP
Turning screen transition from MEAP to Native ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF (Transition to the Native screen) [Default]

1: ON (No transition to the Native screen)
ANIM-SW
Turn MEAP application error/jam screen display ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF (Display warning screen) [Default]

1: ON (Do not display warning screen)
MEAP-SSL
Setting the MEAP HTTPS port

<Setting range>
0 to 65535 (same as the setting of another network port system) [Default:

8443]
CCD-TYPE
Setting the CCD unit type

<Setting range>
0: Initial CCD unit [Default]

1: Revised CCD unit
<USER>
16-73
T-16-49
COPIER > OPTION >USER
Sub-item
Description
COPY-LIM
Changing the upper limit of copy count

<Setting range>
Level
1 to 9999 [Default: 999]

SLEEP
Turning the sleep function ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF
1: ON [Default]
The sleep function is set with Timer in User Mode.
COUNTER1
Setting Software counter 1 on the User mode screen

<Setting value>
101: Total 1
[Value at shipping / Value after RAM clearance = 101 -> Cannot be

changed]
COUNTER2to
6
Setting Software counters 2 to 6 on the User mode screen

<Setting range>
0 to 999
CONTROL
Limiting the user of a control card for a PDL job

<Setting range>
0: Do not use [Default]

1: Use
B4-L-CNT
Setting whether to count B4 as the large size or the small size on

Software counters 1 to 6
<Setting range>
0: Small size [Default]

1: Large size
COPY-JOB
Prohibiting copy job reservation when a card reader and a coin

robot are used
<Setting range>
0: Copy job reserved [Default]
1: Copy job not reserved

Sub-item
PR-PSESW
Description
Level
Setting whether or not to display the print pause function switch

<Setting range>
0: No print pause function [Default]
The user screen does not display the print pause function.
(Conventional specification)
1: Print pause function [Default]
The user screen does not display the print output stop and restart
settings.
IDPRN-SW
Switching the count-up job type about the department management

counter
<Setting range>
0: Counting BoxPrint, ReportPrint, SendLocalPrint, and PDLPrint
in the PRINT category

1: Counting ReportPrint, SendLocalPrint, and PDLPrint in the
PRINT category
CNT-SW
Switching the charging counter and default display items

<Setting range>
- When the set value is 0 [Default]
101: Total 1
- When the set value is 1
102: Total 2
202: Copy total 2
127: Total A Total 2

- When the set value is 2
101: Total 1
104: Total small
103: Total large
501: Scan total 1
REMPNL
Turning the remote panel function ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
BCNT-AST
Switching the job type of counting box prints by ASSIST

<Setting range>
0: Count as PDL job [Default]
1: Count as Copy job

Sub-item
DOC-REM
Description
Level
Setting whether or not to display the document removal message

<Setting range>
0: Do not display [Default 1]

1: Display
SIZE-DET
Turning the document size detection function ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF (When the platen is opened, the user will not be dazzled
because the lamp does not light.)

1: ON [Default]
DATE-DSP
Switching the date display format

<Setting range>
0: YYMM/DD
1: DD/MM/YY
2: MM/DD/YY
MB-CCV
Limiting the mailbox control card user

<Setting range>
0: No [Default]
1: Yes
TRY-STP
Setting output or no output in the tray full state

<Setting range>
0: Ordinary mode (Interrupt when the finisher tray is full) [Default]

1: Interrupt by height detection only
MF-LG-ST
Setting the long mode key

<Setting range>
0: Ordinary [Default]
1: Display a long mode key on the corresponding mode screen
CNT-DISP
Setting whether or not to display a serial number when the counter

confirmation key is pressed
<Setting range>
0: Display a serial number [Default]

1: Do not display a serial number
PH-D-SEL
Setting the number of lines for printing in Photo mode

<Setting range>
0: 141 lines [Default]
1: 134 lines

Sub-item
OP-SZ-DT
Description
Level
Turning document size detection in Book mode ON or OFF

Copying with the platen open is switched to the manual document
size input mode (conventional) or the automatic document size
detection mode.
<Setting range>
0: Manual document size input mode [Default]
1: Automatic document size detection mode
NW-SCAN
Enabling or disabling the network scan function

<Setting range>
0: Network scan function disabled [Default]
1: Network scan function enabled
Notes:
Not changeable for anything in Japan
Always 1 for PSPCL outside Japan
Changeable for other outside Japan
HDCR-DSP
Setting whether or not display HDD clearance in User mode and

changing the contents of clearance
<Setting range>
1: Clear once with 0 [Default]
2: Clear once with random data
3: Clear three times with random data

JOB-INVL
Setting the job interval at interrupt

<Setting range>
0: Output the next job continuously in interrupt copying (Standard)
[Default]
1: Start outputting the next job after the last paper of the interrupted
copy job is output
2: Start outputting the next job after the last paper of all jobs is
output
LGSW-DSP
Setting whether or not to display [Log display ON/OFF] on the

User mode screen
<Setting range>
0: Do not display [Log display ON/OFF] [Default]
1: Display [Log display ON/OFF]

Sub-item
PCL-COPY
Description
Level
Supporting the PCL command [COPIES Meru/Pinatubo/Hood]

<Setting range>
0: Control each page according to the command of the COPIES
command specified to the page [Default]

1: Meru/Pinatubo/Hood compatible mode
2 to 65535: Reserved
PRJOB-CP
Setting the CCV count pulse at reception and report output

<Setting range>
0: Do not output count pulse [Default]

1: Output count pulse
DPT-ID-7
Registering the department ID and entering 7 digits for

authentication
<Setting range>
0: Conventional [Default]
1: 7-digit input
RUI-RJT
Disconnecting the HTTP port from RUI by three authentication

failures
<Setting procedure>
0: Invalid [Default]
1: Valid
CTM-S06
Setting whether or not to erase the password from the export file of
the file send address
<Setting range>
0: Do not erase the password from the export file. [Default]

1: Erase the password from the export file.
CTM-S07
Setting whether or not to erase the RUI address display or the send
password source display on the edit screen
<Setting range>
0: Do not erase the send password source display on the edit screen.
[Default]
1: Erase the send password source display on the edit screen.
FREG-SW
Setting whether or not to display the free section of the MEAP

counter (SEND)
<Setting range>
1: Display
Chapter 16

Sub-item
MEAPSAFE
Description
Level
Turning the MEAP Safe mode ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON (Safe mode)
IFAX-SZL
Enabling or disabling the send size limit in IFAX transmission (not

via server only)
<Setting range>
0: Send size limit enabled (via server/not via server)

1: Send size limit disabled (not via server only) [Default]
IFAX-PGD
Setting whether or not to permit split send in pages (only beyond the
upper limit of the send data size)
<Setting range>
0: Do not permit split send in IFAX Simple mode transmission

[Default]
1: Permit split send in IFAX Simple mode transmission
AFN-PSWD
Limiting access in User mode

<Setting range>
0: OFF (Transition to the User mode screen with no password
request) [Default]
1: ON (Transition to the User mode screen after password
matching)
PTJAM-RC
Turning PDL jam recovery ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF (Do not recover)

1: ON (Recover) [Default]
SLP-SLCT
Setting whether or not to use a network application supporting

BW2 (CL1)
<Setting range>
0: Do not use (1w(2w) sleep possible) [Default]

1: Use (1w(2w) sleep not possible) [Default]
PS-MODE
Setting PS internal mode

<Setting range>
0 to 65535
0: Not compatible [Default]
1: PS Type 3 Halftone command compatible (conventional) (Dither

growth forward and reverse)
2 to 65535: Reserved
Software counter specifications
16-79
Chapter 16
100 - 199: Total

200 - 299: Copy (001 to 099 added in case of shortage)
300 - 399: Print
400 - 499: Copy and print
500 - 599: Scan
600 - 699: Box print
700 - 799: Receive print
800 - 899: Report print
900 - 999: Send
Explanations of symbols and terms in the table
- YES: Counter valid in this machine
- Large size: Paper greater than B4
- Small size: Paper of B4 or smaller
- Counter Description: Numerals 1 and 2 indicate the counts of large size paper.
In service mode (COPIER>OPTION>USER>B4-L-CNT), B4 or greater can be set as the large size.
- Total A: Total excluding local and remote copies
- Total B: Total excluding local and remote copies and box prints
- Copy: Local and remote copies
- Copy A: Local and remote copies and box prints
- Print: PDL, report, and box prints
- Print A: PDL and report prints
- Scan: Black-and-white and color scans
T-16-50
No.
16-80
Counter Description
Support
101
Total 1
yes
102
Total 2
yes
103
Total (Large)
yes
104
Total (Small)
yes
105
Total (Full-color 1)
106
Total (Full-color 2)
108
Total (Black-and-white 1)
yes
109
Total (Black-and-white 2)
yes
110
Total (Monochrome / Large)
111
Total (Monochrome / Small)
112
Total (Black-and-white / Large)
yes
113
Total (Black-and-white / Small)
yes
114
Total 1 (Duplex)
yes
115
Total 2 (Duplex)
yes
No.
Counter Description
Support
116
Large (Duplex)
yes
117
Small (Duplex)
yes
118
Total (Monochrome 1)
119
Total (Monochrome 2)
120
Total (Full-color / Large)
121
Total (Full-color / Small)
122
Total (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
123
Total (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)
124
Total (Full-color + Monochrome 2)
125
Total (Full-color + Monochrome 1)
126
Total A1
yes
127
Total A2
yes
128
Total A (Large)
yes
129
Total A (Small)
yes
130
Total A (Full-color 1)
131
Total A (Full-color 2)
132
Total A (Black-and-white 1)
yes
133
Total A (Black-and-white 2)
yes
134
Total A (Monochrome / Large)
135
Total A (Monochrome / Small)
136
Total A (Black-and-white / Large)
yes
137
Total A (Black-and-white / Small)
yes
138
Total A1 (Duplex)
139
Total A2 (Duplex)
140
Large A (Duplex)
141
Small A (Duplex)
142
Total A (Monochrome 1)
143
Total A (Monochrome 2)
144
Total A (Full-color / Large)
145
Total A (Full-color / Small)
146
Total A (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
147
Total A (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)
148
Total A (Full-color + Monochrome 2)
No.
Counter Description
Support
149
Total A (Full-color + Monochrome 1)
150
Total B1
yes
151
Total B2
yes
152
Total B (Large)
yes
153
Total B (Small)
yes
154
Total B (Full-color 1)
155
Total B (Full-color 2)
156
Total B (Black-and-white 1)
yes
157
Total B (Black-and-white 2)
yes
158
Total B (Monochrome / Large)
159
Total B (Monochrome / Small)
160
Total B (Black-and-white / Large)
yes
161
Total B (Black-and-white / Small)
yes
162
Total B1 (Duplex)
163
Total B2 (Duplex)
164
Large B (Duplex)
165
Small B (Duplex)
166
Total B (Monochrome 1)
167
Total B (Monochrome 2)
168
Total B (Full-color / Large)
169
Total B (Full-color / Small)
170
Total B (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
171
Total B (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)
172
Total B (Full-color + Monochrome 2)
173
Total B (Full-color + Monochrome 1)
201
Copy (Total 1)
yes
202
Copy (Total 2)
yes
203
Copy (Large)
yes
204
Copy (Small)
yes
205
Copy A (Total 1)
yes
206
Copy A (Total 2)
yes
207
Copy A (Large)
yes
208
Copy A (Small)
yes
No.
Counter Description
Support
209
Local copy (Total 1)
yes
210
Local copy (Total 2)
yes
211
Local copy (Large)
yes
212
Local copy (Small)
yes
213
Remote copy (Total 1)
yes
214
Remote copy (Total 2)
yes
215
Remote copy (Large)
yes
216
Remote copy (Small)
yes
217
Copy (Full-color 1)
218
Copy (Full-color 2)
219
Copy (Monochrome 1)
220
Copy (Monochrome 2)
221
Copy (Black-and-white 1)
yes
222
Copy (Black-and-white 2)
yes
223
Copy (Full-color / Large)
224
Copy (Full-color / Small)
225
Copy (Monochrome / Large)
226
Copy (Monochrome / Small)
227
Copy (Black-and-white / Large)
yes
228
Copy (Black-and-white / Small)
yes
229
Copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
230
Copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)
231
Copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)
232
Copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)
233
Copy (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
234
Copy (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
235
Copy (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
236
Copy (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)
237
Copy (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)
238
Copy (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)
245
Copy A (Full-color 1)
246
Copy A (Full-color 2)
247
Copy A (Monochrome 1)
No.
Counter Description
Support
248
Copy A (Monochrome 2)
249
Copy A (Black-and-white 1)
yes
250
Copy A (Black-and-white 2)
yes
251
Copy A (Full-color / Large)
252
Copy A (Full-color / Small)
253
Copy A (Monochrome / Large)
254
Copy A (Monochrome / Small)
255
Copy A (Black-and-white / Large)
yes
256
Copy A (Black-and-white / Small)
yes
257
Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
258
Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)
259
Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)
260
Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)
261
Copy A (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
262
Copy A (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
263
Copy A (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
264
Copy A (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)
265
Copy A (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)
266
Copy A (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)
273
Local copy (Full-color 1)
274
Local copy (Full-color 2)
275
Local copy (Monochrome 1)
276
Local copy (Monochrome 2)
277
Local copy (Black-and-white 1)
yes
278
Local copy (Black-and-white 2)
yes
279
Local copy (Full-color / Large)
280
Local copy (Full-color / Small)
281
Local copy (Monochrome / Large)
282
Local copy (Monochrome / Small)
283
Local copy (Black-and-white / Large)
yes
284
Local copy (Black-and-white / Small)
yes
285
Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
286
Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)
No.
Counter Description
Support
287
Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)
288
Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)
289
Local copy (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
290
Local copy (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
291
Local copy (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
292
Local copy (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)
293
Local copy (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)
294
Local copy (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)
002
Remote copy (Full-color 1)
003
Remote copy (Full-color 2)
004
Remote copy (Monochrome 1)
005
Remote copy (Monochrome 2)
006
Remote copy (Black-and-white 1)
yes
007
Remote copy (Black-and-white 2)
yes
008
Remote copy (Full-color / Large)
009
Remote copy (Full-color / Small)
010
Remote copy (Monochrome / Large)
011
Remote copy (Monochrome / Small)
012
Remote copy (Black-and-white / Large)
yes
013
Remote copy (Black-and-white / Small)
yes
014
Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
015
Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)
016
Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)
017
Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)
018
Remote copy (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
019
Remote copy (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
020
Remote copy (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
021
Remote copy (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)
022
Remote copy (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)
023
Remote copy (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)
301
Print (Total 1)
yes
302
Print (Total 2)
yes
303
Print (Large)
yes
No.
Counter Description
Support
304
Print (Small)
yes
305
Print A (Total 1)
yes
306
Print A (Total 2)
yes
307
Print A (Large)
yes
308
Print A (Small)
yes
309
Print (Full-color 1)
310
Print (Full-color 2)
311
Print (Monochrome 1)
312
Print (Monochrome 2)
313
Print (Black-and-white 1)
yes
314
Print (Black-and-white 2)
yes
315
Print (Full-color / Large)
316
Print (Full-color / Small)
317
Print (Monochrome / Large)
318
Print (Monochrome / Small)
319
Print (Black-and-white / Large)
yes
320
Print (Black-and-white / Small)
yes
321
Print (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
322
Print (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)
323
Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)
324
Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)
325
Print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
326
Print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
327
Print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
328
Print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)
329
Print (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)
330
Print (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)
331
PDL print (Total 1)
yes
332
PDL print (Total 2)
yes
333
PDL print (Large)
yes
334
PDL print (Small)
yes
335
PDL print (Full-color 1)
336
PDL print (Full-color 2)
No.
Counter Description
Support
339
PDL print (Black-and-white 1)
yes
340
PDL print (Black-and-white 2)
yes
341
PDL print (Full-color / Large)
342
PDL print (Full-color / Small)
345
PDL print (Black-and-white / Large)
yes
346
PDL print (Black-and-white / Small)
yes
351
PDL print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
352
PDL print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
355
PDL print (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)
356
PDL print (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)
401
Copy + Print (Full-color / Large)
402
Copy + Print (Full-color / Small)
403
Copy + Print (Monochrome / Large)
404
Copy + Print (Monochrome / Small)
405
Copy + Print (Monochrome 2)
406
Copy + Print (Monochrome 1)
407
Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
408
Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)
409
Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)
410
Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)
411
Copy + Print (Large)
412
Copy + Print (Small)
413
Copy + Print (2)
414
Copy + Print (1)
415
Copy + Print (Monochrome / Large)
416
Copy + Print (Monochrome / Small)
417
Copy + Print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
418
Copy + Print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
419
Copy + Print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
420
Copy + Print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)
421
Copy + Print (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)
422
Copy + Print (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)
501
Scan (Total 1)
yes
No.
Counter Description
Support
502
Scan (Total 2)
yes
503
Scan (Large)
yes
504
Scan (Small)
yes
505
Black-and-white scan (Total 1)
yes
506
Black-and-white scan (Total 2)
yes
507
Black-and-white scan (Large)
yes
508
Black-and-white scan (Small)
yes
509
Color scan (Total 1)
510
Color scan (Total 2)
511
Color scan (Large)
512
Color scan (Small)
601
Box print (Total 1)
yes
602
Box print (Total 2)
yes
603
Box print (Large)
yes
604
Box print (Small)
yes
605
Box print (Full-color 1)
606
Box print (Full-color 2)
607
Box print (Monochrome 1)
608
Box print (Monochrome 2)
609
Box print (Black-and-white 1)
yes
610
Box print (Black-and-white 2)
yes
611
Box print (Full-color / Large)
612
Box print (Full-color / Small)
613
Box print (Monochrome / Large)
614
Box print (Monochrome / Small)
615
Box print (Black-and-white / Large)
yes
616
Box print (Black-and-white / Small)
yes
617
Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
618
Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / Small)
619
Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)
620
Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)
621
Box print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
622
Box print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
No.
Counter Description
Support
623
Box print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
624
Box print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)
625
Box print (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex)
626
Box print (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)
701
Receive print (Total 1)
yes
702
Receive print (Total 2)
yes
703
Receive print (Large)
yes
704
Receive print (Small)
yes
705
Receive print (Full-color 1)
706
Receive print (Full-color 2)
707
Receive print (Gray-scale 1)
708
Receive print (Gray-scale 2)
709
Receive print (Monochrome 1)
yes
710
Receive print (Monochrome 2)
yes
711
Receive print (Full-color / Large)
712
Receive print (Full-color / Small)
713
Receive print (Gray-scale / Large)
714
Receive print (Gray-scale / Small)
715
Receive print (Monochrome / Large)
yes
716
Receive print (Monochrome / Small)
yes
717
Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Large)
718
Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Small)
719
Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale 2)
720
Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale 1)
721
Receive print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
722
Receive print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
723
Receive print (Gray-scale / Large / Duplex)
724
Receive print (Gray-scale / Small / Duplex)
725
Receive print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
726
Receive print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)
801
Report print (Total 1)
yes
802
Report print (Total 2)
yes
803
Report print (Large)
yes
No.
Counter Description
Support
804
Report print (Small)
yes
805
Report print (Full-color 1)
806
Report print (Full-color 2)
807
Report print (Gray-scale 1)
808
Report print (Gray-scale 2)
809
Report print (Monochrome 1)
yes
810
Report print (Monochrome 2)
yes
811
Report print (Full-color / Large)
812
Report print (Full-color / Small)
813
Report print (Gray-scale / Large)
814
Report print (Gray-scale / Small)
815
Report print (Monochrome / Large)
yes
816
Report print (Monochrome / Small)
yes
817
Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Large)
818
Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Small)
819
Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale 2)
820
Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale 1)
821
Report print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
822
Report print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
823
Report print (Gray-scale / Large / Duplex)
824
Report print (Gray-scale / Small / Duplex)
825
Report print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
826
Report print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)
901
Copy scan total 1 (Color)
902
Copy scan total 1 (Black-and-white)
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
Local copy scan (Color)
910
Local copy scan (Black-and-white)
No.
Counter Description
911
Remote copy scan (Color)
912
Remote copy scan (Black-and-white)
913
Send scan total 1 (Color)
914
Send scan total 1 (Black-and-white)
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
Universal send scan total (Color)
936
Universal send scan total (Black-and-white)
937
Box scan (Color)
938
Box scan (Black-and-white)
939
Remote scan (Color)
940
Remote scan (Black-and-white)
941
Send scan / FAX (Color)
942
Send scan / FAX (Black-and-white)
943
Send scan / IFAX (Color)
944
Send scan / IFAX (Black-and-white)
945
Send scan / E-mail (Color)
946
Send scan / E-mail (Black-and-white)
947
Send scan / FTP (Color)
948
Send scan / FTP (Black-and-white)
949
Send scan / SMB (Color)
Support
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Chapter 16
No.
Counter Description
950
Send scan / SMB (Black-and-white)
951
Send scan / IPX (Color)
952
Send scan / IPX (Black-and-white)
953
Send scan / Database (Color)
954
Send scan / Database (Black-and-white)
955
Send scan / Local print (Color)
956
Send scan / Local print (Black-and-white)
957
Send scan / Box (Color)
958
Send scan / Box (Black-and-white)
Support
<CST>
T-16-51
COPIER > OPTION > CST
Sub-item
ENV1/2
Description
Level
Registering Envelope cassette ENV1/2

<Setting range>
21: ISO-C5 [Default], 22: COM10, 23: Monarch, 24: DL, 25: ISOB5, 26: Western style No.4
U1-NAMEto
Setting whether or not to display a paper name when a paper size
U4-NAME
group (U1 to U4) has been detected

<Setting range>
0: Display U1, U2, U3, or U4 on the touchpanel.
1: Display the paper name set in service mode (CST-U1/U2/U3/
U4).
16-92
Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > CST

Sub-item
Description
CST-U1/U2/
Specifying paper names for use in paper size groups
U3/U4
If the following special paper sizes are set to U1, U2, U3, and U4,
Level
paper of the sizes can be handled on the universal cassette as special

size paper.
<Setting range>
24: FOOLSCAP (CST-U2: Default)
25: Australian FOOLSCAP
26: OFFICIO
27: Ecuadorian OFFICIO
2
28: Bolivian OFFICIO

29: Argentine LETTER (U4: Default)
30: Argentine LETTER-R
31: Governmental LETTER (U1: Default)
32: Governmental LETTER-R
34: Governmental LEGAL (U3: Default)
35: FOLIO
36: Argentine OFFICIO
37: Mexican OFFICIO
38: EXECUTIVE
<ACC>
T-16-52
COPIER > OPTION > ACC
Sub-item
COIN
Description
Level
Switching the coin vendor

Set whether the coin vendor management mode can be entered or not.
<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
DK-P
Setting a paper size for use on a paper deck (option)

<Setting range>
0: A4 [Default]
1: B5
2: LTR
16-93
Chapter 16
COPIER > OPTION > ACC

Sub-item
Description
OUT-
Setting whether or not to use the third paper ejection tray (mainly
TRAY
when the second and third paper ejection units are mounted)
Level
<Setting range>
1: Use
IN-TRAY
Setting whether or not to use an inner paper ejection tray

<Setting range>

1: Use
CC-SPSW
Setting whether or not to support the control card (CC IV /CCV)

interface
2
<Setting range>
0: Do not support [Default]
1: Support
<INT-FACE>
T-16-53
COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE
Sub-item
IMGCONT
Description
Level
Setting the EFI controller connection

<Setting range>
0: Usual operation [Default]

AP-OPT
Permitting or prohibiting printing from the PrintMe application

installed in the PS print server unit
<Setting range>
0: Permit printing by a specified account

1: Permit printing, irrespective of the account [Default]
2: Prohibit printing (except by specified department ID
AP-
Setting a department ID for a print job from the PrintMe application
ACCNT

2
<Setting range>
0 to 99999999 [Default: 0]
AP-CODE
Setting a CPCA path for a print job from the PrintMe application
2
<Setting range>
0 to 99999999 [Default: 0]
16-94
Chapter 16
<COMBO>
T-16-54
COPIER >OPTION > COMBO
Sub-item
Description
PPR-SLCT
Level
Setting a paper type for weak bias to the transfer tip

<Setting range>
1: Plain paper [Default] 2: Thick paper 3: Envelope 4: tracing
paper 5: OHP transparency 6: Postcard 7: Label paper 8: Bond

paper
MOD-SLCT
Setting a paper mode for weak bias to the transfer tip

<Setting range>
1
1: Simplex [Default]
2: Automatic duplex feed - Second side (Cassette feed)
3: Manual duplex feed - Second side (Manual feed)
ENV-SLCT
Setting the environment for weak bias to the transfer tip

1
<Setting range>
1 to 5 [Default: 3]
TR-SW1/2/3/
4/5
Turning weak bias to the transfer tip ON or OFF

<Setting range>
0: OFF [Default]
1: ON
<LCNS-TR>
Example of display: ST-XXXX 1 ( ) {0 to 0}
[1] [2]
[1] Status display 0: Not installed [Default] 1: Installed
[2] Invalidation
0: Invalidate (Only 0 can be entered.)
Transfer invalidation procedure

1. Select ST-XXXX, enter 0, and press the OK key.
2. A transfer license number (24 digits) is displayed at TR-XXXX.
T-16-55
COPIER >OPTION >LCNS-TR
Sub-item
Description
ST-
Displaying the send function installation status in transfer invalidation
SEND
and executing transfer invalidation
Level
2
16-95
COPIER >OPTION >LCNS-TR

Sub-item
Description
TR-
Acquiring a transfer license key for the send function in transfer
SEND
invalidation
ST-
Displaying the encrypted PDF send function installation status in
ENPDF
transfer invalidation and executing transfer invalidation
TR-
Acquiring a transfer license key for the encrypted PDF send function in
ENPDF
transfer invalidation
ST-SPDF
Displaying the searchable PDF send function installation status in

TR-
Acquiring a transfer license key for the searchable PDF send function in
SPDF
ST-
Displaying the PDF extension kit (compound function of encrypted
EXPDF
PDF and searchable PDF) installation status in transfer invalidation and
Level
2
executing transfer invalidation

TR-
Acquiring a transfer license key for the PDF extension kit (compound
EXPDF
function of encrypted PDF and searchable PDF) installation status in
ST-LIPS
Displaying the LIPS installation status in transfer invalidation and

TR-LIPS
Acquiring a transfer license key for LIPS in transfer invalidation
ST-
Displaying the PDF direct function installation status in transfer
PDFDR
invalidation and executing transfer invalidation
TR-
Acquiring a transfer license key for the PDF direct function in transfer
PDFDR
invalidation
ST-SCR
Displaying the encrypted secure print function installation status in

TR-SCR
Acquiring a transfer license key for the encrypted secure print function
in transfer invalidation
ST-
Displaying the HDD encryption/complete erasure function installation
HDCLR
status in transfer invalidation and executing transfer invalidation
TR-
Acquiring a transfer license key for the HDD encryption/complete
HDCLR
erasure function in transfer invalidation
ST-
Displaying the BarDIMM installation status in transfer invalidation and
BRDIM
TR-
Acquiring a transfer license key for BarDIMM in transfer invalidation
BRDIM
2
2
2
Chapter 16
16.6.2 FEEDER
0007-9937
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

FEEDER>OPTION
T-16-56
FEEDER > OPTION
Sub-item
Description
SIZE-SW
Setting whether or not to detect a mixed document of A/
Level
B size and inch size

1
<Setting value>
0: Do not detect [Default]
1: Detect
16.6.3 SORTER
16.6.3.1 Sorter List
0007-9957
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

SORTER > OPTION>
T-16-57
SORTER > OPTION
Sub-item
Description
BLNK-SW
Setting the margin width (W) on each side of the folding position
Level
when the saddle stitcher is used

<Setting value>
0: Ordinary width (5 mm)

1: Large width (10 mm)
[Value at shipping/Value after RAM clearance: 1]
MDSPRTN
Setting the finisher function limit

<Setting value>
0: Usual
1: Degenerated
16-97
Chapter 16
16.6.4 BOARD
16.6.4.1 Board List
0007-9959
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

BOARD > OPTION
T-16-58
BOARD > OPTION
Sub-item
FONTDL
Description
Level
Setting whether or not to display the font service setting screen

for list display by the PS kanji font downloader
<Setting value>

1: Display
MENU-1 to
Setting whether or not to display Levels 1 to 4 of the printer
MENU-4
setting menu
<Setting value>
0: Do not display
1: Display
16-98
Chapter 16
16.7 TEST Test Print Mode

16.7.1 COPIER
0008-0571
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<PG>
T-16-59
COPIER>TEST>PG
Sub-
Description
item
TYPE
Level
Enter a test print type number and press the Start key for test printing.
(After test printing, be sure to return the number to 0.)
0: Image from CCD (Ordinary print)
1: Checker
2: 17 tones (Error diffusion method [T0BIC])
3: 17 tones (Dither screen method)
4: Totally white 00H
5: Halftone 80H (Error diffusion method [T0BIC])
6: Halftone 80H (Dither screen method)
7: Totally black FFH
8: Horizontal line (space: 27 dots, line width: 40 dots)

15 - 20: For development
TXPH
Reserved
PG-
Selecting an output stage for test printing
PICK
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
5: Side deck
6: Manual feed
7 - 8: Not used
16-99
Chapter 16
COPIER>TEST>PG
Sub-
Description
item
2-SIDE
Setting the output mode for test printing

0: Simplex [Default] 1: Duplex
PG-QTY
Setting the number of pages for test printing

1 to 999 [Default: 1]
Level
<NETWORK>
T-16-60
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK
Sub-
Description
item
PING
Level
Checking the connection from this machine to the network (TCP/IP only)
The network connection is checked when the machine has been installed
and when the connection has become faulty.
1) Press the switch at the operating section long for the shutdown sequence and turn the main power switch OFF.
2) Connect the network cable to this machine and turn the main power switch ON.
3) Notify the system administrator that the machine has been installed to request network setup.
4) Notify the system administrator of the network connection check plan and check the PING remote host address
(IP address of a PC terminal in the user network).
5) Select the service mode (COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING), enter the IP address checked at Step 4 from the
ten-key pad of the operating section, and press the OK key and the Start key.
- Once the network has been connected normally, OK is displayed. (End)
- If NG is displayed, check the connection of the network cable first. If the network cable is connected normally,
do Step 6 and later. If the network cable is not connected normally, repeat Step 5.
6) Select the service mode (COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING), enter the loopback address *(127.0.0.1), and
press the OK key and the Start key.
- If NG is displayed, the TCP/IP setting of the local machine may be wrong. Return to Step 3 and check the setting
again.
- If OK is displayed, the TCP/IP setting of the local machine seems correct but the network controller (main
controller circuit board) may be faulty. Check the controller at Step 7.
*: Since the loopback address signal is returned before the network controller, the TCP/IP setting of the local
machine can be checked.
7) Select the service mode (COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING), enter the local host address (IP address of the
local machine), and press the OK key.
- If NG is displayed, the IP address of the local machine may be wrong or the network controller may be faulty.
Check the IP address with the system administrator or replace the main controller circuit board.
16-100
- If OK is displayed, there seem to be no problems about the network setting of the local machine or the network
controller.
Then the problem may be attributable to the user network environment. Report this to the system administrator
and request action.
IP address input
Result (OK/NG)
F-16-17
Chapter 16
16.8 COUNTER Counter Mode

16.8.1 COPIER
0008-0599
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

<TOTAL>
T-16-61
COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL
Sub-
Description
item
SERVIC
Total service counter 1
E1
This counter is incremented when paper is ejected out of the printer.

Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, the increment is one.
Level
After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.

SERVIC
E2
Total service counter 2

This counter is incremented when paper is ejected out of the printer. The
increment is 2 for the large size and 1 for the small size.

COPY
Total copy counter

This counter is incremented when a copy is created and ejected out of the
printer.

PDL-
PDL print counter
PRT
This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is

ejected out of the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in
PDL printing.
The increment is 0 for blank print and 5 each for a large or small print.
FAX-
FAX receive print counter
PRT

fax reception.
The increment is 0 for blank print and 1each for a large or small print. The
count can be cleared.
16-102
Chapter 16
COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL
Sub-
Description
item
RMT-
Remote print counter
PRT
Level
remote printing.
BOX-
Box print counter
PRT

box printing.
RPT-
Report print counter
PRT

report printing.
2-SIDE
Duplex copy/print counter

This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a duplex
copy/print is ejected out of the machine or loaded again for printing the
other side in remote printing.
The increment is 0 for blank copy/print and 1each for a large or small
copy/print. The count can be cleared.
SCAN
Scan counter
This counter is incremented at the end of a scan.
The increment is 1each for the large or small size. The count can be
cleared.
<PICK-UP>
16-103
Chapter 16
T-16-62
COPIER>COUNTER>PICK-UP
Sub-
Description
item
C1/2/3/4
Level
Cassette 1/2/3/4 paper feed total counter

The number of sheets fed from Cassette 1/2/3/4 is displayed.
Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented
one.
MF
Manual feed total counter

The number of sheets fed from the manual paper feed unit is displayed.
one.
DK
Deck paper feed total counter

The number of sheets fed from the deck paper feed unit is displayed.
one.
2-SIDE
Duplex paper feed total counter

The number of duplex fed sheets is displayed.
one.
<FEEDER>
T-16-63
COPIER>COUNTER>FEEDER
Sub-item
FEED
Description
Level
ADF document feed total counter

The number of documents fed from ADF is displayed.
one.
DFOP-
ADF hinge open-close counter
CNT
The ADF hinge open-close count is displayed.

<JAM>
16-104
Chapter 16
T-16-64
COPIER>COUNTER>JAM
Sub-
Description
item
Level
TOTAL
Copier total jam counter
FEEDER
Feeder total jam counter
Finisher total jam counter
2-SIDE
Duplex unit jam counter
MF
Manual paper feed jam counter
C1/2/3/4
Cassette 1/2/3/4 jam counter
DK
Side paper deck jam counter
SORTE
R
<MISC>
T-16-65
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC
Sub-
Description
item
LSR-
Scanner motor counter
MTR
This counter counts motor rotations. If the time until the motor run become
stable is shorter than the average, however, this counter is not incremented.
Level
Average time
iR2230/2870: About 1.3 seconds iR3570/4570: About 3.3 seconds
<DRBL-1>
T-16-66
Sub-
Description
Level
TR-
Transfer roller counter
ROLL
item
one.
SP-SC-
Separate discharge needle high-voltage ON counter
EL
one.
16-105
Sub-
Description
item
DVG-
Developing cylinder rotation counter
CYL
Level
one.
C1/2/3/
Cassette 1/2/3/4 feed roller counter
4-PU-RL
This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small
size.
C1/2/3/
Cassette 1/2/3/4 separation roller counter
4-SP-RL
size.
C1/2/3/
Cassette 1/2/3/4 transport roller counter
4-FD-RL
size.
M-PU-
Manual paper feed roller counter
RL
size.
M-SP-
Manual separation pad counter
PD
size.
FX-LW-
Lower fixing roller counter
RL
size.
FX-
Fixing film counter
FILM
size.
FX-CL-
Fixing cleaning roller counter
RL
size.
FX-LW-
Pressurizing roller bearing counter
BR
size.
FL-WD
Fixing unit counter by paper size (Wide paper)

This counter is incremented one when paper of 279.4 mm or greater main
scan width has passed.

FL-
Fixing unit counter by paper size (Narrow paper)
NRW
This counter is incremented one when paper of main scan width smaller
than 279.4 mm has passed.
Chapter 16
Sub-
Description
item
OZ-FIL-
Ozone filter (FM1) fan counter
Level
size.
<DRBL-2>
T-16-67
Sub-
Description
item
DF-PU-
ADF paper feed roller counter
RL

one for each read document (not side) both in simplex mode and duplex
Level
mode.
DF-SP-
ADF separator counter
PL
The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other.
DF-SP-
ADF separation pad counter
PD

mode.
DF-FD-
ADF transport roller counter
RL

one for each document in simplex mode and three for each read document
(front, back, and idle transfer) in duplex mode.

LNTTAPE
ADF dust collection tape counter

mode.
PD-PU-
Paper deck feed roller counter
RL
size.
PD-SP-
Paper deck separation roller counter
RL
size.
PD-FD-
Paper deck transport roller counter
RL
size.
16-107
Sub-
Description
item
SORT
Sort counter
FIN-
Stacker stapling counter
STPR
SADDL
Saddle paper transport counter
SDL-
Saddle stapling counter
STPL
PUNCH
Punching counter
FN-
Buffer roller counter
BFFRL
Level
1
1
1
Chapter 17Upgrading
Contents
Contents
17.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................ 17-1
17.1.1 Outline of Upgrading the Machine.......................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool........................................................................................................ 17-2
17.2 Making Preparations....................................................................................................................................... 17-7
17.2.1 Registering the System Software ............................................................................................................ 17-7
17.2.2 Making Connections................................................................................................................................ 17-9
17.3 Formatting the HDD..................................................................................................................................... 17-13
17.3.1 Formatting All Partitions....................................................................................................................... 17-13
17.3.2 Formatting Selected Partitions .............................................................................................................. 17-13
17.3.3 Formatting Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 17-14
17.4 Downloading System Software .................................................................................................................... 17-17
17.4.1 Downloading System ............................................................................................................................ 17-17
17.4.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................ 17-17
17.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................. 17-17
17.4.2 Downloading RUI, and Language......................................................................................................... 17-20
17.4.2.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................ 17-20
17.4.3 Downloading SDICT............................................................................................................................. 17-23
17.4.3.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................ 17-23
17.4.4 Downloading MEAPCONT .................................................................................................................. 17-25
17.4.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................ 17-25
17.4.5 Downloading KEY ................................................................................................................................ 17-27
17.4.5.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................ 17-27
17.4.6 Downloading BOOT ............................................................................................................................. 17-30
17.4.6.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................ 17-30
17.4.7 Downloading Dcon and Rcon ............................................................................................................... 17-32
17.4.7.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................ 17-32
17.4.8 Downloading G3 FAX .......................................................................................................................... 17-35
17.4.8.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................ 17-35
17.4.9 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data........................................................................................... 17-38
17.4.9.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................ 17-38
17.4.9.2 Uploading Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 17-39
17.4.9.3 Downloading Procedur................................................................................................................... 17-41
Chapter 17
17.1 Outline
17.1.1 Outline of Upgrading the Machine
0008-7362
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The machine and its accessories may be upgraded by replacing DIMM-ROM or using the Service Support Tool
(hereafter, SST) installed on a personal computer (PC).
The following table shows the various system software used in conjunction with the machine and how they may be
upgraded.
T-17-1
Typ
Type of system software
Method of
Remarks
upgrading
SST
ROMDIMM
replaceme
nt
Machine
System (main controller)
Yes
No
The machine controller is also

used to control the Super G3 Fax
Board-Q1.
Language (language mode)
Yes
No
RUI (remote user interface)
Yes
No
Boot (boot program)
Yes
Yes
MEAP CONT (MEAP library)
Yes
No
SDICT (OCR dictionary)
Yes
No
KEY (encryption
Yes
No
DCON (DC controller)
Yes
No
RCON (reader controller)
Yes
No
communication key)
The reader controller is also used

to control the ADF.
Accessory
17-1
Chapter 17
Typ
Type of system software
Method of
Remarks
upgrading
SST
ROMDIMM
replaceme
nt
Fin-S1 (Finisher-S1)
Yes
No
A special service tool

(downloader PCB: FY9-2034) is
needed.
Fin_QR (Finisher-Q3/Saddle
Yes
No
Finisher-Q4)
A special service tool

(downloader PCB: FY9-2034) is
needed.
17.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool
0008-7307
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The Service Support Tool (hereafter, SST) has the following functions:
iR XXXX
PC for service work
SST
Initializing the HDD
HDD setting information
Downloading
system software
System software
HDD
Flash ROM
Uploading backup data
Backup data
Downloading backup data

Back up RAM
F-17-1
The machine must be in download mode when the SST is used.
The download control program comes in 2 types:
17-2
Chapter 17
-Normal Mode (download mode B)

turn on the main power while holding down 1+7; then, make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD
-Safe Mode(download mode A)
turn on the main power while holding down 2+8
on keypad, 2+8
Safe mode
program
Main power
switch ON
on keypad, 1+7
Boot ROM
Boot program
HDD
SYSTEM program
In service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
normal mode
program
Download mode A
Download mode B
F-17-2
Use safe mode for the following:

-when you have replaced the HDD.
-when the system fails to start up normally.
The following table shows the functions that may be used in download mode with the SST in use:
17-3
Chapter 17
T-17-2
Function
Formatting the HDD
Download mode
Normal mode
Safe mode
(download mode B)
(download mode A)
Entire HDD
BOOTDEV
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
PDL_DEV
FSTCDEV
Downloading the system
-System
-System
software
-Language
-Language
-RUI
-RUI
-Boot
-Boot
-G3FAX
-Dcon
-Dcon
-Rcon
-Rcon
-SDICT
-SDICT
-MEAPCONT
-MEAPCONT
-KEY
-KEY
Uploading/downloading
-SramImg
backup data
-Meapback
Installing the System Software

The system software that has been downloaded by the SST (version 3.01 or later) is saved in the temporary storage
area of the HDD. You must then turn off and then on the main power switch so that the system software will be
written to the system area, boot ROM, and flash ROM when the machine starts up. When you turn off and then on
the main power switch for a second time, the machine will start up using the new version of the system software.
17-4
Chapter 17
1) The system software is downloaded.

[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
Status of reception (sample)

- - - Do
Download
wnload Mode - - [ iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - xx%
System
Software
- - Do
Download
wnload Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG
-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG
-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG
-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG
.PRG ] - - - - Complete
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
storage area
2) The main power switch is turned off and then on.

3) Writing takes place.
<<<<< do
download
wnload shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg
Upgrading
ading complete
+++ Switch OFF the po
power
er then ON. +++
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
storage area
System area
Boot
ROM
FLASH
ROM
4) The main motor switch

is turned off and then on.
5) The machine starts up using

the new version.
F-17-3
If a previous version of the SST is used for downloading, the system software will be written directly to the HDD,
boot ROM, and flash ROM.
17-5
HDD
Boot
ROM
System
Software
Flash
ROM
F-17-4
Chapter 17
17.2 Making Preparations

17.2.1 Registering the System Software
0008-7310
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

You must first register the system software found on the System CD to the SST.
[Preparatory Work]
Items to Prepare
-PC to which the SST (version 3.01 or later) has been installed
-System CD for the iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series
[Registering the System Software]

1) Start up the PC.
2) Set the system CD in the PC.
3) Start up the SST.
4) Click [Register System Software]
F-17-5
5) Select the drive in which you have set the System CD, and click [SEARCH].
17-7
Chapter 17
F-17-6
6) The list of system software found on the System CD appears. Remove the check from the folders and software
you will not need; then, click [REGISTER].
F-17-7
7) When the result of registration is indicated, click [OK].
17-8
Chapter 17
F-17-8
17.2.2 Making Connections
0008-7373
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

You are now ready to connect the PC to the machine.
[Preparatory Work]
Items to Prepare
- PC to which the SST (version 3.01 or later) and the system software for the iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 has been
registered
- Twisted pair cross cable
10Base-T: Category 3 or 5
100Base-TX: Category 5
[Procedure]
1) Start up the PC.
2) Check the network settings of the PC.
- At the command prompt, type 'IPCONFIG', and press the Return key.
- Check to see that the network settings are as follows:
IP address: 172.16.1.160
subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
default gateway: any
Do not use the following IP address:
- 172.16.1.0
17-9
Chapter 17
- 172.16.1.100
- 172.16.1.255
If the settings are not as indicated below, make the appropriate changes:
C:\
Command Prompt
M i c r o s o f t W i n d o w s 2 0 0 0 [ Ve r s i o n 5 . 0 0 . 2 1 9 5 ]
( C ) C o py r i g h t 1 9 8 5 - 1 9 9 9 M i n c r o s o f t C o r p.
C:\
ipconfig
Windows 2000 IP Configuration

Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific
IP Address. . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . .
Default Gateway . .
DNS Suffix
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
:
: 172.16.1.160
: 255.255.255.0
:
C:\
F-17-9
3) Check to see that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off, and turn off the main power switch
(iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
3-1) Hold down the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more.
3-2) Follow the instructions indicated on the control panel so that the main power switch may be turned off.
3-3) Turn off the main power switch.
4) Connect the PC to the machine using a cross cable (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
IP sddress: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
IP address: 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Cross cable
10Base-T: category 3 or 5
100Base-TX: category 5
F-17-10
17-10
Chapter 17
5) Start up the machine to suit the download mode you will be using (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
- Normal Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down 1+7.
When the machine has started up, make the following selections: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
DOWNLOAD.
- Safe Mode
Turn on the main power switch while holding down 2+8.
6) Start up the Service Support Tool.
7) Select the model of the machine to connect (iR2270/3570).
F-17-11
8) Click [START].
17-11
F-17-12
Chapter 17
17.3 Formatting the HDD

17.3.1 Formatting All Partitions
0008-7381
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

When you format all partitions of the HDD, all individual partitions will be initialized and made ready for use by the
main controller.
The information needed for partition settings is stored under HDFormat of the iRXXXX.
HDD
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
[2]
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
BOOTDEV
[1]
[3]
F-17-13
[1] HDD (service part; without partition setup)
[2] Formatting of all partitions (in safe mode only)
[3] HDD after formatting
[4] Partition setup information
17.3.2 Formatting Selected Partitions
0008-7382
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
17-13
Chapter 17
You can also format (initialize) only those partitions that you select.
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
HDD
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
[1]
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
BOOTDEV
[2]
F-17-14
[1] Formatting possible in normal mode
[2] Formatting possible in safe mode (requires downloading of System and RUI after formatting)
1. Unless you have selected 'ALL', you may execute formatting without registering HDFormat.
2. An attempt to format after selecting TMP_FAX in the absence of a fax board will cause an error.
3. An attempt to format after selecting FSTCDEV for expansion will cause an
17.3.3 Formatting Procedure

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
1) Click [Format HDD].
17-14
0008-7387
Chapter 17
F-17-15
2) Select the partitions you want to format. Or, select 'ALL'.
F-17-16
3) Click [Start].
4) When the Confirmation screen has appeared, click [Execute Formatting].
17-15
Chapter 17
F-17-17
5) When the session has ended, click [OK].
F-17-18
6) Start a download session. Or, turn off and then on the machine to end the work.
- If you have formatted all partitions or formatted BOOTDEV, be sure to download System newly. (Otherwise, 'E602'
will occur when you turn on the main power.)
17-16
Chapter 17
17.4 Downloading System Software

17.4.1 Downloading System
17.4.1.1 Outline
0009-0501
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The system software comes in 2 types (one for use inside Japan and the other, outside Japan).
Unlike previous iR controllers, however, there is only one type of system software. (Previously, one type supported
NetWare while the other did not. There is now only one type for the machine supporting NetWare.)
17.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure
0008-7395
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

You can run a downloading session either in normal or safe mode.
1) Select the version of the system you want to download.
F-17-19
2) Click [Start].
17-17
Chapter 17
F-17-20
F-17-21
4) If you want to start another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done with downloading, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
6) See the upgrade status indicated on the control panel (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message appears
asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570,2870/2270
Series).
17-18
Chapter 17
Be sure never to turn off the power while the machine is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded
software. The ongoing session will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
F-17-22
<<<<< download shell >>>>>

[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Writing to HDD XX%
F-17-23
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat and then download such software as System,
Language, and RUI.
17-19
Chapter 17
17.4.2 Downloading RUI, and Language

17.4.2.1 Outline
0008-7410
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
iR -----
Network
LCD
RUI(en)
Version check
System
RUI(it)
System Language
Language-XXen
RUI-XXen
Language-XXit
RUI-XXit
Language-XXja
RUI-XXja
Language
RUI(ja)
RUI
Network PC
F-17-24
T-17-3
Control Panel LCD Display Language
Check the version of System and Language.
1. If correct, You can switch languages by making the following selections in user
mode: common settings>display language change.
2. If not correct, 'E744' will be indicated, and System Language will be used when
the main power is turned off and then on.
17-20
Chapter 17
T-17-4
RUI Display
Language
Select using the RUI.
You can select a different language for a different PC.
<Language Code>
<Language>
de
German
en
English
fr
French
it
Italian
ja
Japanese
Service PC
iR -----
SST
Main Controller Unit
iR ----Language
XXen
XXja
HDD
Download
BOOTDEV
Language-XXen
Language-XXja
RUI
XXen
XXja
RUI-XXen
RUI-XXja
F-17-25
0008-7411
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

You can run a download session in either normal or safe mode.
[In the Case of Language]
1) Select the version of Language to download.
17-21
Chapter 17
F-17-26
2) Click [Start].
F-17-27
3) When the result of the downloading session has appeared, click [OK].
17-22
Chapter 17
F-17-28
4) If you want another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
5) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When a message
appears asking you to turn off and then on the machine, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/
2270 Series).
Be sure never to turn off the power while the machine is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded
software. Otherwise, the ongoing session will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and download such software as System,
Language, and RUI.
17.4.3 Downloading SDICT

17.4.3.1 Outline
0009-0391
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

SDICT is a dictionary used when converting image data read by the reader unit into character code (OCR
processing). This function is used in conjunction with the PDF Generation Expansion Kit-B1.
17-23
Chapter 17
0008-7842
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

You can run a downloading session in either normal or safe mode.
1) Select the version of SDICT to download.
F-17-29
2) Click [Start].
F-17-30
17-24
Chapter 17
F-17-31
4) If you want to run another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/
2270 Series).
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software.
Otherwise, the ongoing session will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
Language, and RUI.
17.4.4 Downloading MEAPCONT

17.4.4.1 Outline
0009-0413
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

MEAPCONT is a standard library used in conjunction with a MEAP application.
17-25
Chapter 17
0008-7844
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

You can execute a downloading session in either normal or safe mode.
1) Select the version of MEAPCONT you want to download.
F-17-32
2) Click [Start].
F-17-33
17-26
Chapter 17
3) When the downloading session has ended, click [OK].
F-17-34
4) If you want to run another downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/
2270 Series).
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software.
Otherwise, the ongoing session will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
Language, and RUI.
17.4.5 Downloading KEY

17.4.5.1 Outline
0009-0010
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

KEY serves as a certificate used for encrypted communications over a network.
17-27
Chapter 17
KEY may be either of 2 types: XXxc and XXxp. Be sure to download both types.
0008-9881
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

You can execute a download session in either normal or safe mode.
1) Select the version of KEY you want to download.
F-17-35
2) Click [Start].
17-28
Chapter 17
F-17-36
F-17-37
4) If you want to execute a different downloading session, see the appropriate instructions.
6) See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series). When
a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/
3570, 2870/2270 Series).
17-29
Chapter 17
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system
software. Otherwise, the ongoing write operation will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up.
Language, and RUI.
17.4.6 Downloading BOOT

17.4.6.1 Outline
0008-7421
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Boot registered in the SST may be used in common for various types of boot ROMs. You cannot change the type of
a boot ROM by means of downloading.
Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Service PC
iR4570/3570,
2870/2270 Series
To change the type of Boot ROM,

replace the DIMM.
SST
C Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
iR4570/3570,
2870/2270 Series
Download
P Boot ROM
Boot
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Main controller unit
F-17-38
If a downloading session fails, you will have to replace the boot ROM.

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
You can execute a downloading session in either normal or safe mode.
17-30
0008-7422
Chapter 17
1) Select the version of BOOT to download.
F-17-39
2) Click [Start].
F-17-40
17-31
Chapter 17
F-17-41
3570, 2870/2270 Series).
Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a download session or writing downloaded system
software. Otherwise, the ongoing write operation will be suspended and the machine may not start up.
Language, and RUI.
If the machine fails to start up, be sure to replace the boot ROM.
17.4.7 Downloading Dcon and Rcon

17.4.7.1 Outline
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
17-32
0008-7605
Chapter 17
Dcon/Rcon is downloaded by way of the main controller unit.
- The DC controller PCB/reader controller PCB is equipped with a boot ROM, and downloading may be attempted
multiple times in the event of failure.
- The system software used in the DC controller differs between the iR3570/3570 and the iR2870/2270. The system
software designed for the iR4570/3570 is stored as iR3570, while the system software designed for the iR2870/
2270 is stored as iR2270. The machine has a mechanism to read the appropriate system software. It is a good idea
to download both types of system software.
iR XXXX
Service PC
SST
iR XXXX
Reader unit
Printer unit
Signal cable
Download
Main controller
unit
Dcon
CPU
Flash ROM
Rcon
Power cable
DIMM
CPU
Boot ROM
Power supply
control signal
Power supply
unit
DC controller PCB
F-17-42
You will not be able to download Rcon unless the DC controller has started up normally (as, otherwise, the power
supply control signal will not be valid and, as a result, the reader unit remains without power).
0008-7824
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

You can execute a downloading session in either normal or safe mode. In the case of safe mode, however, you will
not be able to find out the version of Dcon/Rcon, causing all downloading to occur (overwriting of the same version
and downgrading).
17-33
Chapter 17
[Downloading Rcon]
1) Select the version of Rcon to download.
F-17-43
2) Click [Start].
F-17-44
17-34
Chapter 17
F-17-45
5) When the downloading session has ended, turn off and then on the machine (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the machine, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/
3570, 2870/2270 Series).
software. Otherwise, the machine may not be able to start up.
Language, and RUI.
If an error code is indicated, be sure to download appropriate firmware.
17.4.8 Downloading G3 FAX

17.4.8.1 Outline
0009-0281
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The Multi Fax Board-D1 (2-line) comes with a control CPU and its system software, which is downloaded by way
of the main controller unit.
17-35
Chapter 17
Service PC
iR XXXX
G3Fax
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Upgrading is also possible

by replacing the DIMM.
SST
Download
G3Fax
iR XXXX
CPU
(Flash ROM DIMM)
G3Fax
Main controller
unit
Multi Fax Board-D1 (2-line)
Downloading is possible only in normal mode.
F-17-46
If a downloading session fails, you will have to replace the flash ROM DIMM.
0009-0280
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

You will have to use normal mode for downloading.
1) Select the version of G3FAX you want to download.
F-17-47
17-36
Chapter 17
2) Click [Start].
F-17-48
F-17-49
4) When you are done, turn off and then on the main power of the machine (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the machine, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/
570, 2870/2270 Series).
17-37
Chapter 17
You will not be able to download G3Fax twice in succession. (Once downloading is executed, the board will be reset,
causing download mode to end.)
software. Otherwise, the write operation (to the flash ROM DIMM of the G3 fax board) may fail, preventing board
functions. In the event the board fails to function, be sure to replace the flash ROM DIMM found on the G3 fax board.
17.4.9 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data

17.4.9.1 Outline
0008-7845
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

SramImg is data that is stored in the SRAM of the main controller PCB, while MeapBack is a MEAP application and
its data stored on the HDD.
T-17-5
Backup data
Files to select for downloading/uploading
Main controller PCB backup RAM
SramImg.bin
MEAP application
MeapBack.bin
for R&D
Sublog.txt
- If you are replacing the main controller PCB, you can transfer such data as parts counter readings by uploading the
data before replacement and downloading it after replacement.
- If you are replacing the HDD or executing 'ALL' or 'APL_MEP', you can temporarily set aside MEAP applications
by uploading MeapBack before execution and downloading it after execution.
- Only the machine uploaded can download SramImg and MeapBack.
17-38
Chapter 17
Service PC
SST
iR XXXX
System
SramImg
Meapback
Printer unit
Uploading/Downloading
Downloading is possible only
in safe mode.
Main controller PCB
SRAM
SramImg.bin
HDD
Meapback.bin
Main controller unit
F-17-50
17.4.9.2 Uploading Procedure
0008-7854
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Use safe mode for uploading.
1) Select [Upload Data].
F-17-51
17-39
Chapter 17
2) Select the data you want to back up.
F-17-52
3) Click [Start].
F-17-53
4) Click [Save].
17-40
Chapter 17
F-17-54
5) Click [OK].
F-17-55
17.4.9.3 Downloading Procedur
0008-7856
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

Use safe mode for downloading.
1) Select [Download Data].
17-41
Chapter 17
F-17-56
2) Select the data to download.
F-17-57
3) Click [Start].
17-42
Chapter 17
F-17-58
4) Click [OK].
F-17-59
5) When you are done with downloading, turn off and then on the main power (iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series).
3570, 2870/2270 Series).
17-43
Chapter 17
Be sure not to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system
software. The write operation will be suspended, and the machine may fail to start up.
If the machine fails to start up, format BOOTDEV using HDFormat, and download System, Language, and RUI.
17-44
Chapter 18Service Tools
Contents
Contents
18.1 Special Tools .................................................................................................................................................. 18-1
18.2 Oils and Solvents............................................................................................................................................ 18-2
Chapter 18
18.1 Special Tools
0007-6516
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

In addition to the standard tools set, you will need the following special tools for servicing of the machine:
T-18-1
Tool name
Digital
Tool No.
Ran
FY9-2002
Shape
multimeter
Uses
For making
electrical checks.
Cover switch
TKN-0093
Tester extension
FY9-3038
pin
As an addition
when making an
electrical check.
Tester extension
FY9-3039
pin (L-shipped)
As an addition
when making an
electrical check.
NA-3 Test Chart
FY9-9196
For checking and

adjusting images.
Key to Notation (rank)

A: each service engineer is expected to carry one.
B: each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one.
C: each workshop is expected to carry one.
18-1
18.2 Oils and Solvents
0007-6517
iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530
T-18-2
Name
Alcohol
Solvent
Uses
Composition
Remarks
cleaning;
fluoride-family
- Do not bring near fire.
e.g.,
hydrocarbon
- Procure locally.
glass, plastic,
alcohol
- IPA (isopropyl alcohol) may
rubber;
surface activating
be substituted.
external
agent
covers
water
cleaning;
fluorine-family
- Do not bring near fire.
e.g., metal;
hydrocarbon
- Procure locally.
soiling with
chlorine-family
- MEK may be substituted.
oil or toner
hydrocarbon
alcohol
Lubricant
mineral oil (paraffin
- CK-0524 (100 cc)
family)
Lubricant
drive
silicone oil
- CK-0551 (20 g)
special oil
- HY9-0007
mechanism,
sliding
mechanism
Lubricant
gear
(EM-50L)
special solid
lubricating agent
lithium soap
Lubricant
scanner rail
silicone oil
- KF96SS (300CS)
- FY9-6011 (50 cc)
Jan 31 2005

Ir4570 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ir4570 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ir4570 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

iR4570/3570, 2870/2270 Series

COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1.2.3.13 Transmission/Reception Settings..................................................................................................... 1- 54

2.6.1Points to Note ............................................................................................................................................ 2- 27

Chapter 3Basic Operation

Chapter 4Main Controller

4.6.8Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission Function ........................................................................... 4- 28

Chapter 5Original Exposure System

5.3.6 Image Processing ...................................................................................................................................... 5- 22

Chapter 6Laser Exposure

6.1.1Specifications, Control Mechanism, and Functions .................................................................................... 6- 1

Chapter 7Image Formation

7.12.4.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit ...................................................................................................... 7- 40

7.12.10.12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor....................................................................................... 7- 71

Chapter 8Pickup/Feeding System

8.5.4Paper Retaining Mechanism ...................................................................................................................... 8- 43

8.8.7.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 .................................................................................................... 8- 86

8.8.13.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)....................................................................................... 8- 111

8.8.21.7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate........................................................................................... 8- 137

Chapter 9Fixing System

9.3.2.2 Controlling the Feeding in Response to Low Temperature................................................................. 9- 5

9.5.6.3 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor..................................................................................................... 9- 41

Chapter 10External and Controls

10.5.2.4 Removing the Main Power Supply................................................................................................ 10- 23

10.5.11 Option Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................. 10- 45

Chapter 12Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 13Standards and Adjustments

Chapter 14Correcting Faulty Images

Chapter 15Self Diagnosis

15.1 Error Code Table ........................................................................................................................................... 15- 1

Chapter 16Service Mode

16.5 FUNCTION Operation/Inspection Mode.............................................................................................. 16- 46

17.4.6 Downloading BOOT ............................................................................................................................. 17- 30

Chapter 18Service Tools

1.2.3.15 Box Settings...................................................................................................................................... 1-57

1.1 System Construction

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

1.1.2 Overview of System Construction (output accessories)

1.1.3 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 1

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570

[4]Buffer Path Unit-E1

[4a]Instruction Sheet (indicating references)

[5]3 Way Unit-A1

[6]Accessories Power Supply-P2

Finisher-Q3 or Saddle Finisher-Q4

Finisher-Q3 or Saddle Finisher -Q4

1.1.4 Output Accessories System Configuration 1

[4]Accessories Power Supply-P2

[5]Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/R1/S1/T1

- installation of the Accessories

- installation of the Inner Puncher

1.1.5 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 2